Read english.pdf text version

ENGLISH / WRITING

COMPLETE PROGRAMS These materials offer complete coverage of both writing and grammar. BOB JONES WRITING & GRAMMAR (2-12) Beginning in grade 2, Bob Jones offers a complete English program at all levels to train students to communicate effectively. Both oral and written skills are developed, with increasing emphasis on composition at the upper levels. Everything that you would expect in an English program is here from mechanics, to word types, grammar (including parts of speech and diagramming), and all types and forms of writing - including analysis and composition. As with all Bob Jones materials, the course integrates Christian themes and references. Teacher's Editions contain daily lesson plans and answers to the student worktext exercises. Student worktexts are consumable and are centered on different themes at each grade level. Testpacks are made up of ready-to-use tests for each chapter, and answers to these are found in the Testpack Key. Brief overviews of skills by grade level are below. Required materials are listed first, followed by asterisked (*) items that are considered optional. Supplemental materials used at multiple grade levels are listed after the grade-level listings. Home School Kits contain Teacher's Edition, Worktext and test material at a lower price. Grade 4 (2nd Ed.) Reviews parts of speech and teaches recognitions of noun and adjective functions in sentences. Provides practice with sentence formation, including expanding and combining sentences. Attention is given to proper paragraph construction, including supporting a topic sentence and writing supporting details. Students write personal narratives, letters, research reports, acrostic poems, and more. Toolkit CD and worktext answers are included with Teacher's Ed. 207993 Home School Kit . . . . . 99.00 192047 Teacher Edition . . . . . . 57.78 260752 Student Worktext 2ED 23.33 192005 Testpack . . . . . . . . . . . 14.44 192013 Testpack Key 2ED . . . . 8.89 192021 *Worktext Key 2ED . . . 46.00 Grade 5 (2nd Ed.) This edition is much expanded and more colorful. Aimed at "fostering an appreciation of language as a gift from God," this course now teaches more English skills than before. The things covered include sentences, compare-contrast essays, nouns, persuasive business letters, verbs, diamantes and sense poems, study and reference skills, personal narratives, pronouns, book reviews, more verbs, research reports, adjectives and adverbs, writing imaginative instructions, more detail about sentences, and writing a play. This Grade 5 Teacher Edition also contains a Teacher's Toolkit CD-ROM, which has reproducible pages to supplement the lessons, and extra practice pages, Keeping Up activities and writing rubrics. The Home School kit contains all four of the items listed below. 221648 Home School Kit . . . . . 99.00 195685 Teacher's Edition . . . . . 57.78 273722 Student Worktext . . . . 23.33 195719 Testpack . . . . . . . . . . . 14.44 195727 Testpack Key . . . . . . . . 8.89 Grade 7 (3rd Ed.) Focuses on mastery of several parts of speech and five basic sentence patterns. A variety of writing assignments help hone composition skills. Also includes lessons on language origins and development. 221705 Home School Kit . . . . . 105.50 218370 Teacher's Edition . . . . . 60.00 278440 Student Worktext . . . . 25.56 218396 Tests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.56 218412 Tests Answer Key . . . . 10.00 Grade 8 (3rd Ed.) Reviews all skills presented in grade 7, then completes instruction of parts of speech, giving special attention to verbs, adverbs, qualifiers, and conjunctions. Emphasis is on essay writing, beginning with lessons on proper paragraph construction. 221721 Home School Kit . . . . . 105.50 218305 Teacher's Edition . . . . . 60.00 278432 Student Worktext . . . . 25.56 218321 Tests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.56 218347 Test Answer Key . . . . . 10.00 Grade 9 (3rd Ed.) Each chapter in this 3rd edition program combines review, practice, and writing starting with a review of sentence patterns in Chapter 1 and one part of speech in each chapter, 2 through 8. Chapters 9 through 15 focus on the mechanics of writing, library skills, study skills, and composition skills. Different types of writing are incorporated into each chapter, including comparison/contrast, personal experience, research essay, poetry, a devotional, personal response to literature, writing for the media, recording an oral history and letter writing. Chapters begin with a story excerpt or poem to be used as discussion for the concept being presented. Every chapter concludes with a review. There is plenty of practice in the student worktext. The Teacher's Edition contains a Support Materials CD-ROM which contains PDF's of blackline masters to supplement lessons. 236836 Home School Kit . . . . . 105.50 227157 Teacher's Edition . . . . . 60.00 227140 Student Worktext . . . . 25.56 227108 Testpack . . . . . . . . . . . 15.56 227116 Testpack Answer Key . . 10.00 125351 *Writer's Toolbox . . . . 31.11 Grade 10 (3rd Ed. - Revised in 2009) Provides ample expository and descriptive writing opportunities with assignments including a research essay, a cause-and-effect essay, a personal letter, a response to literature, poetry, an eyewitness report, an editorial, a short story, a persuasive speech, an oral anecdote and webpage design. Mechanics are not neglected, as parts of speech, sentence construction and patterns are reviewed. Paragraph skills are further developed along with exercises in expanding, combining, and reducing sentences. 264994 Home School Kit . . . . . 105.50 233528 Student Text . . . . . . . . 25.56 247809 Teacher Book and CD 60.00 233569 Testpack . . . . . . . . . . . 15.56 233585 Testpack Answer Key . . 10.00 (continued...) English / Writing 259

Grade 6 (2nd Ed.) Begins with a review of sentence types and then reviews the parts of speech intermingled with different types of writing. Nouns, pronouns, verbs, adjectives, adverbs, prepositions and conjunctions are reviewed. A writing chapter follows each grammar chapter to help provide a strong link between the two. The student will write a personal narrative, newspaper editorial, instructions, a research paper, historical fiction, compare and contrast essay, free verse, limerick, and a cover letter. Most chapters include a "Literature Link" which is an excerpt from a story used for writing practice. Every chapter contains a chapter review and a cumuGrade 3 (2nd Ed.) Reviews parts of speech previously learned, lative review. There is a "Writing Handbook" adding pronouns. Studies and reviews ant- and "Grammar Handbook" at the back of the onyms, synonyms, homonyms, and correct use student book. These reference tools are handy to of verbs. Introduces paragraph composition and have around while working on an assignment. development. Toolkit CD and Worktext Answer The Teacher Toolkit CD-ROM is included with the Teacher edition. This CD-ROM contains Key are included in Teacher's Ed. 236448 Home School Kit . . . . . 99.00 reproducible pages to supplement the lessons. 191981 Teacher Edition . . . . . . 57.78 Adobe Acrobat Reader is required to access the 260067 Student Worktext 2ED 23.33 information on the Toolkit CD-ROM. 99.00 189746 Testpack . . . . . . . . . . . 14.44 236711 Home School Kit . . . . . 57.78 189761 Testpack Key . . . . . . . . 8.89 200535 Teacher's Edition . . . . . 23.33 191965 *Worktext Key. . . . . . . 50.50 200527 Student Worktext . . . . 200519 Testpack . . . . . . . . . . . 14.44 058537 *Mice of the Herring . . 8.89 Bone. . . . . . . . . . . . 10.00 6.50 200501 Testpack Answer Key . . See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

Grade 2 (2nd Ed.) Teaches basic parts of speech and introduces steps involved in the writing process. Specific writing assignments include giving instructions and description of objects, characters, and settings. Toolkit CD and Worktext Answer Key are included in Teacher's Ed. 236323 Home School Kit . . . . . 99.00 191957 Teacher Edition . . . . . . 57.78 270876 Student Worktext . . . . 23.33 126235 Testpack . . . . . . . . . . . 14.44 126243 Testpack Key . . . . . . . . 8.89 191932 *Worktext Key. . . . . . . 50.50 078014 *Write Book . . . . . . . . 11.00

Grade 11 (3rd Ed.) A strong emphasis on writing the research paper, beginning with writing effective sentences and effective paragraphs according to specific guidelines. Emphasizes clear, direct communication in descriptive figurative language, fictional narrative, and personal experience essays. Parts of speech and sentence patterns are briefly reviewed, and new sentence skills are introduced. Revised in 2011. 278291 Home School Kit . . . . . 105.50 272229 Teacher Book & CD. . . 60.00 272195 Student Text . . . . . . . . 25.56 272237 Testpack . . . . . . . . . . . 15.56 272245 Testpack Key . . . . . . . . 10.00 125351 *Writer's Toolbox . . . . 31.11 113845 *Writing From Research Student Text . . . . . . . 15.56 113837 *Writing From Research Teacher's Edition . . . . 16.67 Grade 12 (2nd Ed.) Briefly reviews grammatical concepts already covered, then moves on to new material. Focus is on principles of effective writing in all forms; description, narration, exposition, and persuasion. Composition assignments include writing resumes, humorous essays, and interviews. 208041 Home School Kit . . . . . 105.50 194803 Teacher's Edition . . . . . 60.00 194837 Student Worktext . . . . 25.56 194829 Testpack . . . . . . . . . . . 15.56 194811 Testpack Key . . . . . . . . 10.00 125351 *Writer's Toolbox . . . . 31.11 113845 *Writing From Research Student Text . . . . . . . 15.56 113837 *Writing From Research Teacher's Edition . . . . 16.67 ~~~~~~~~~~~ GREAT SOURCE LANGUAGE PROGRAMS Write Source (2012 Ed.) (1-12) Write Source ­ its very name emphasizes what has always been true of this program. It's a cohesive and tightly woven spiral of writing instruction. Starting in grade one and continuing through grade twelve, the writing process along with the various forms of writing are presented, modeled, illustrated, taught, utilized and expanded. Thoroughly integrated with the writing instruction is an exhaustive (but not exhausting) examination of grammar usage. The graphical presentation is organized, colorful, energetic, and very pleasing to the eye. Whether you classify this program as "English" or "Language Arts", it's comprehensive and thorough and, if utilizing just some of the literature suggestions, would be beyond "enough" and into the realm of "amazing." It's hard to know how much information to give concerning the scope and sequence of these courses. The writing process (prewriting, writing, revising, editing, and publishing) and how it applies to all forms of writing (descriptive, narrative, expository, persuasive, response 260 English / Writing

to literature, creative, research) is central to all of the courses. Although the individual writing assignments vary from grade to grade, there is a broad representation of the different forms of writing at each level. Integration across the curriculum includes assignments and activities that apply the various writing forms to major content areas (science, social studies, math, and the arts). Multimedia reports, email communications, planning personal websites, and up-todate information on citing electronic sources are integrated with more traditional writing expectations As part of the revising and editing process, there is extensive coverage of the six traits of writing (ideas, organization, voice, word choice, sentence fluency, and conventions) as well as thorough coverage of grammar, usage, and mechanics. Well-developed evaluation rubrics based on these traits keep students on track during writing and help them evaluate their finished pieces. There are lots of writing samples, sometimes used as illustrations and sometimes analyzed for writing content and style. Graphic organizers are also used liberally at every level giving students powerful tools for the organization of their ideas. In addition to the central units on writing process and forms, there are sections on writing as it relates to other areas of learning ­ i.e. taking notes, summarizing and paraphrasing, keeping journals and learning logs, and giving speeches. Each course concludes with two sections that are part resource, part instruction and easily findable by their color-coded pages. A Writer's Resource contains tips and guidelines to help the student complete any writing assignment creatively and effectively. The Proofreader's Guide collects the rules for language and grammar usage interspersed with practice exercises. Course components include a Student Edition, a Teacher's Edition, an Assessment Book, the SkillsBook, the SkillsBook Teacher, and the Daily Language Workout. Past editions were organized around student handbooks such as Writer's INC that were used for several grade levels. These handbooks have morphed into the grade-specific Student Editions with much of the writing assignments and samples previously found only in the teacher's material now included in these student books, making them valuable as a teaching/instruction vehicle rather than "only" a reference book. The Student Editions are very user-friendly (and homeschool-friendly). I really can't emphasize this enough. To give you an idea of the difference in the two books, consider that the cause/ effect essay is covered in three pages in Writer's INC - one page for outlining the step-by-step process for writing it and two pages giving an annotated sample. In the Grade 11 Write Source Student Book, there are almost 40 pages of detailed instruction on this type of essay, which includes specific assignments completing various parts of the whole and a number of annotated samples. Each step of the writing process is carefully laid out with multiple assignments. At the revising stage the student reviews their composition in light of the six writing traits with each trait given a two-page treatment including an across-the-top rubric. The revising and editing steps alone contain 15 subassignments (and four exercises). There is less

reliance on peer review (usually not very helpful and sometimes difficult for homeschoolers) and much more emphasis on self review and evaluation (much more valuable as a skill and in terms of homeschool use). For a junior or senior high student they could be almost self-instructional, though any student will benefit from teacher/ parent interaction particularly in terms of writing practice and instruction. Although the lower levels will require more interaction, there is little teacher prep. That brings us to the wraparound Teacher's Editions. Because the instruction is so complete in the Student Editions, the TEs are not absolutely necessary (in my opinion). However, they are quite valuable, and the answers to the exercises (usually grammatical information) and the comprehension questions (usually thinking skills) are only available there. The TE also includes suggested integration schedules for both the Skillsbook and the Daily Language Workout. Teacher helps surround the edges of the reduced copies of the student book and include learning objectives, topic definitions, and suggestions for fleshing out the student book instruction (i.e. provide newspaper articles or "suggest student select a controversial topic that will potentially affect them" ­ in the persuasive writing section). There are also special instructions for English language learners, struggling learners, and advanced learners. There are specific teaching instructions for each student page (particularly helpful in the lower levels). The answers, of course, are most helpful at the upper levels, but in reality, even there the answers constitute only a small percentage of the overall course. There is helpful information in the introductions ­ yearly timetables, a scope and sequence, and getting started activities. There is also a large section of reproducible helps in the back of each teacher book. These include graphic organizers, grading rubrics (very helpful - ranging from four to six points for each of the writing forms) and benchmark papers (strong and weak examples with rubric checklists and comments). Please note that the 2012 teacher's editions occasionally mention optional "Write Source Online" resources, which do not appear to be accessible to homeschool parents. The Skillsbooks and Daily Language Workouts are largely unchanged from previous editions and provide for both systematic (Skillsbooks grammar, usage, and mechanics practice) and daily (Workouts ­ editing and proofreading) practice. The SkillsBook Teacher's Edition is an answer key. The Assessment book provides a pretest, progress tests, and a post-test (answers included). We currently are selling the 2012 version as Homeschool Bundles only, which includes a hardcover student edition, spiral-bound teacher edition, and paperback assessment book for each grade level. We are not sure if we will be able to offer separate components of this edition at this time; please check our website for current listings. As far as we can tell, this edition has changed very little from the 2006/2009 edition. In fact, in comparing 2012 and 2009 Grade 8 components, they are nearly identical. So if you would prefer to purchase individual components you will not be missing out in purchasing the older edition. You can even use the 2009/2007 edition Skillsbooks with the 2012

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

edition. Most page references in the Teacher's Edition fit the older Skillsbook, while others are only off by a page or two. ~ Janice EACH SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160.00 135.95 051624 Grade 1 051633 Grade 7 051628 Grade 2 051634 Grade 8 051629 Grade 3 051635 Grade 9 051630 Grade 4 051625 Grade 10 051631 Grade 5 051626 Grade 11 051632 Grade 6 051627 Grade 12 Write Source (2009/2007 Ed.) (K-12) New Generation Write Source K - 2007 041904 Student Book. . . . . . 17.67 12.95 041905 Teacher Edition 115.60 84.75 041906 Tchr Resrc CD-ROM 30.27 22.50 Grade 1 037728 037729 037726 037727 037725 Grade 2 035863 035867 035835 035839 035831 Grade 3 035864 035868 035836 035840 035832 Grade 4 035865 035869 035837 035841 035833 Grade 5 035866 035870 035838 035842 035834 Grade 6 030994 030997 030988 030991 030985 Grade 7 030995 030998 030989 030992 030986 Grade 8 030996 030999 030990 030993 030987 Student Book. . . . . . 38.93 28.50 Teacher's Edition . . 153.33 108.95 Skillsbook Student . . 10.73 7.95 Skillsbook Teacher . . 45.33 32.95 Daily Lang Wrkouts 44.53 31.95 Student Book. . . . . . 42.67 30.50 Teacher's Edition . . 153.33 108.95 Skillsbook Student . . 10.73 7.95 Skillsbook Teacher . . 45.33 32.95 Daily Lang Wrkouts 44.53 31.95 Student Book. . . . . . 42.67 30.50 Teacher's Edition . . 153.33 108.95 Skillsbook Student . . 10.73 7.95 Skillsbook Teacher . . 45.33 32.95 Daily Lang Wrkouts 44.53 31.95 Student Book. . . . . . 42.67 30.50 Teacher's Edition . . 153.33 108.95 Skillsbook Student . . 10.73 7.95 Skillsbook Teacher . . 45.33 32.95 Daily Lang Wrkouts 44.53 31.95 Student Book. . . . . . 42.67 30.50 Teacher's Edition . . 153.33 108.95 Skillsbook Student . . 10.73 7.95 Skillsbook Teacher . . 45.33 32.95 Daily Lang Wrkouts 44.53 31.95 Student Book. . . . . . 47.33 33.50 Teacher Edition . . . 153.33 108.95 Skillsbook Student . . 10.73 7.95 Skillsbook Teacher . . 45.33 32.95 Daily Lang Wrkouts 44.53 31.95 Student Book. . . . . . 47.33 33.50 Teacher Edition . . . 153.33 108.95 Skillsbook Student . . 10.73 7.95 Skillsbook Teacher . . 45.33 32.95 Daily Lang Wrkouts 44.53 31.95 Student Book. . . . . . 47.33 33.50 Teacher Edition . . . 153.33 108.95 Skillsbook Student . . 10.73 7.95 Skillsbook Teacher . . 45.33 32.95 Daily Lang Wrkouts 44.53 31.95

Grade 9 035861 035862 035860 035850 035849

Student Book. . . . . . 48.07 33.95 Teacher's Edition . . 153.33 108.95 Skillsbook Student . . 10.73 7.95 Skillsbook Teacher . . 45.33 32.95 Daily Lang Wrkouts 44.53 31.95

Grade 10 035852 Student Book. . . . . . 48.07 33.95 035853 Teacher's Edition . . 153.33 108.95 035851 Skillsbook Student . . 10.73 7.95 035844 Skillsbook Teacher . . 45.33 32.95 035843 Daily Lang Wrkouts 44.53 31.95 Grade 11 035855 Student Book. . . . . . 48.07 33.95 035856 Teacher's Edition . . 153.33 108.95 035854 Skillsbook Student . . 10.73 7.95 035846 Skillsbook Teacher . . 45.33 32.95 035845 Daily Lang Wrkouts 44.53 31.95 Grade 12 035858 Student Book. . . . . . 48.07 33.95 035859 Teacher's Edition . . 153.33 108.95 035857 Skillsbook Student . . 10.73 7.95 035848 Skillsbook Teacher . . 45.33 32.95 035847 Daily Lang Wrkouts 44.53 31.95 Writers INC (9-12) There is great similarity between the 2001 edition and the 2006 edition of Writer's INC Handbook including the cover and inside graphics. The content is more or less the same but organization is slightly different. The Writers INC: School to Work is a specialized handbook that emphasizes writing not only in school but also at work. While containing much of the basic information of the Writers INC books (i.e. writing process, elements of writing, and forms of writing), there is an obvious change of emphasis with applications and samples drawn from the workplace. There are additional specific sections on workplace issues (ethics, goal-setting) and speaking and listening (basic communication skills) as well as reading, thinking, and learning (study skills). A new Teacher's Guide to the 2006 edition of the Handbook is also available, which is similar to earlier editions and provides chapter notes that correspond to the handbook, teaching tips, assessment tools, additional learning strategies, and tips for getting the most out of the handbook. 035875 Writer's INC (2006) 33.93 22.95 035876 School to Work . . . . 37.73 27.50 039029 Teacher's Guide to 2006 Handbook . . . . . . . . 37.87 27.50 038252 Write for College . . . . Handbook (08) sc . . 30.87 22.75 038253 Write for College Handbook (08) Tchr Guide . . . . . . . 37.47 27.50 Write Source Materials 2000-2002 editions Writer's 015605 015608 015611 015613 015609 015612 015614 015610 Express (2000 ed.) (4-5) Handbook . . . . . . . . 34.00 Handbook Tchr Ed. . 42.20 Skillsbook 4. . . . . . . 15.07 Skillsbook 4 Tchr Ed 30.93 Dly Lang Wrkout 4 50.80 Skillsbook 5. . . . . . . 15.07 Skillsbook 5 Tchr Ed 30.93 Dly Lang Workout 5 50.80 23.95 30.75 11.25 22.75 35.50 11.25 22.75 35.50

Write Source 2000 (1999 ed.) (6-8) 015594 Handbook . . . . . . . . 39.33 28.75 015595 Handbook Tchr Ed. . 45.33 32.95 015599 Skillsbook 6. . . . . . . 17.07 12.50 015602 Skillsbook 6 Tchr Ed 33.60 24.50 015591 Dly Lang Wrkout 6 53.27 37.50 015596 Lang Program 6. . . 347.47 219.95 015600 Skillsbook 7. . . . . . . 17.07 12.50 015603 Skillsbook 7 Tchr Ed 33.60 24.50 015592 Dly Lang Workout 7 53.27 37.50 015601 Skillsbook 8. . . . . . . 17.07 12.50 015604 Skillsbook 8 Tchr Ed 33.60 24.50 Writer's 015619 015633 015627 015631 015618 015624 015628 015615 015625 015629 015616 015626 015630 015617 Inc. (2001 ed.) (9-12) Handbook . . . . . . . . 39.00 Handbook Tchr Ed. . 44.00 Skillsbook 9. . . . . . . 14.87 Skillsbook 9 Tchr Ed 30.33 Dly Lang Wrkout 9 49.73 Skillsbook 10. . . . . . 14.87 Skillsbook 10 Tchr Ed30.33 Dly Lang Wrkout 10 49.73 Skillsbook 11. . . . . . 14.87 Skillsbk 11 Tchr Ed 30.33 Dly Lang Wrkout 11 49.73 Skillsbook 12. . . . . . 14.87 Skillsbook 12 Tchr Ed30.33 Dly Lang Wrkout 12 49.73 28.50 31.95 10.95 22.50 34.50 10.95 22.50 34.50 10.95 22.50 34.50 10.95 22.50 34.50

Write Source Materials 1990's editions Write for College (1997 ed.) (11-12) You can tell by the lack of cute and colorful artwork that adorned earlier levels that you are now entering a serious writing course. This one is designed for students who are headed for college in a year or two, and emphasizes the kinds of writing most often used in college courses: the essay, report writing, writing about literature, and persuasive writing. For writing research papers, information is included on paraphrasing, quoting sources, plagiarism, searching for and documenting information found on the Internet, using a computer, and using a college writing center. Also of value are the note-taking, test-taking and vocabularybuilding sections. The student will be doing oral presentations, so a section on speaking effectively is also included. Besides all the necessary writing reference tools you would expect to find here (parts of speech, punctuation, capitalization, word division, commonly misspelled words), other helpful odds and ends include a glossary of college terminology, weights and measures and related conversion factors, parliamentary procedures, the periodic table, world maps, and the U.S. Constitution. Use through college - and beyond! 003229 Handbook . . . . . . . . 36.13 26.50 003230 Instructor's Manual 40.27 29.50

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

English / Writing

261

HMH English Homeschool Packages (1-12) Saxon Homeschool ­ a name you probably associate with math ­ knows that many homeschoolers are looking for secular materials that correspond to what is being used in the public schools. That's why these packages from major textbook publishers are now available to us. Both elementary and secondary language arts packages contain both student books and teacher materials. Harcourt Language, which is included in the Saxon Homeschool Language Arts Packages for 1st through 5th grades, is both a systematic grammar study and a model-based writing program that emphasizes the writing process and exposure to the various forms of writing. Packages include a full-color, hardback Pupil Edition, an over-sized, spiral-bound Teacher's Edition (full-text answer key plus presentation information "around the edges"), and the Language Skills and Writing Assessment TE, which contains unit tests, cumulative assessments, answer keys, model papers with annotations, scoring rubrics, primary-trait checklists, and more. Pupil Editions provide six units of instruction each of which includes chapters on grammar and writing. At the back of each student book is a Handbook, which includes writing models, writing rubrics, study skills and reading strategies, spelling strategies, commonly misspelled words, handwriting models, a thesaurus, a glossary, and Vocabulary Power words in context. Homeschool lesson plans are online at saxonhomeschool.com. Holt Elements of Language, which is included in the Saxon Homeschool Language Arts Packages for 6th through 12th grades, is the "heir apparent" to Warriner's Grammar and Composition. In fact, John Warriner remains on the author list for these books even though he died in 1987. If you've been around the homeschool community for a few years, you've probably heard or read some reference to Warriner's program. It's the elusive gold standard that other programs are measured by. Elusive because books by that name have been out of print for years and are only available on the used market. "Gold standard" because many think that Warriner's mastery approach of "rule, example, and practice" is the way that grammar should be taught. Part One (Warriner's Handbook) of each Holt course contains sixteen or so chapters that thoroughly cover grammar (parts of speech, parts of a sentence, phrases and clauses), usage (agreement issues, pronouns, verbs, modifiers, and common problems), and mechanics (capitalization, punctuation, and spelling). Part Two covers writing with a focus on sentences and paragraphs. Part Three - Communications brings it all together with reading and writing workshops that produce all types of writing: narrative, expository, persuasive, problem and literary analysis, and research. The hardcover texts are full-color with pleasing layout features and interesting sidebars. The sheer size (900+ pages) can be a bit intimidating until you realize that as non-consumables, many of the exercises are written in such a way that the student need only write single words, or letters on their own papers. Also, the last 150, or so, pages are a Quick Reference Handbook. Saxon plans to have homeschool lesson plans available for these courses as well. 262 English / Writing

Holt Elements of Language packages include the student edition and the Teacher One-Stop DVD-ROM. The Teacher One Stop DVDROM is a powerful resource designed to give a classroom teacher all the tools needed to dynamically teach the course. It includes editable worksheets, customizable lesson plans, an assessment package that allows you to form, edit, and print tests, resources for PowerPoint presentations, a calendar planner, and a puzzlemaker that generates word searches and crosswords to provide reinforcement for vocabulary studies. I can almost hear you saying ­ "But I don't need all those things." What's nice about the DVD-ROM is that you can pick and choose what you want to use based on what you do need. It could be as simple as using the pdf version of the full-text answer key for correcting your student's papers. However, navigation through the DVD-ROM is fairly easy so you might find yourself using more than you expect. The DVD-ROM works on both Macs (OS 10.210.4) and PCs (2000, XP, Vista) but requires latest versions of Adobe Reader (free download) and a web browser. NOTE: The tests can only be printed out if you visit the website go.hrw.com and enter the keyword in the box at the bottom left. Other teacher resources may not be available to homeschool teachers due to publisher restrictions. With these packages Saxon has given us strong language arts courses ­ college-prep at the high school level ­ that meet state and national standards. Courses are only available as packages; student books cannot be purchased separately. ~ Janice Harcourt Language (1-5): 047814 Grade 1 Package . . 190.00 179.95 047815 Grade 2 Package . . 280.00 267.95 047816 Grade 3 Package . . 280.00 267.95 047817 Grade 4 Package . . 280.00 267.95 047818 Grade 5 Package . . 280.00 267.95 Holt Elements of Language (6-12): 047822 Grade 6 Package . . 190.00 047823 Grade 7 Package . . 190.00 047824 Grade 8 Package . . 190.00 047825 Grade 9 Package . . 190.00 047819 Grade 10 Package 190.00 047820 Grade 11 Package 190.00 047821 Grade 12 Package 190.00 179.95 179.95 179.95 179.95 179.95 179.95 179.95

VOYAGES IN ENGLISH (1-8) Voyages in English 2011 Ed. (3-8) With a long and notable history (the original 1940s series was designed to bring immigrant children to a complete mastery of English written and oral communication), this latest edition of continues to provide students with the tools

necessary to become articulate communicators of the English language. [Grades 1 & 2 are 2006 edition; Grades 3-8 are 2011 edition] Strong grammar instruction and practice, systematic writing experiences, an eye for technological applications (i.e. email), and user-friendly teacher materials produce excellent English courses in the traditional/classical mode. In grades 1 and 2, the series focuses on basic skills with chapters that combine grammatical concepts with basic writing skills. At this level, the student book is a colorful, consumable worktext. These early language skills are presented in a systematic manner: types of sentences, nouns, verbs, adjectives, pronouns, contractions, and antonym/synonym/homophone study. Each chapter concludes with a writer's workshop introducing a simplified version of the series' writing process ­ prewriting, drafting, editing, revising, proofreading, and publishing ­ and covering some basic writing skills ­ personal narratives, friendly letters, how-to articles, descriptions, and book and research reports. These last two workshops are well-constructed, although some might argue that it's a little early for these particular skills. Starting with grade 3, the student books are hardcover, and the teacher's manuals are extensive with reduced copies of student pages. There is also an assessment book, a practice book, and an answer key for both. This series presents a multi-year framework for an apprenticeship approach to teaching writing. What is an "apprenticeship approach to writing"? Young writers are mentored in their writing by modeling techniques and sharing insights. Individual feedback is offered, which is clearly tied to the real-life reasons we communicate. In other words, students never face a blank sheet of paper having been told to write about what happened over Christmas break. Instead, teachers and students explore writing together. If you approach this program as it is designed, it will require a fair amount of teacher-student interaction, but teacher preparation is almost non-existent because the lessons are well laid out and easy to follow. There are two parts to each course book. The first part contains the grammar instruction sections, while the second part covers the written and oral communication chapters. There are eight sections or chapters in each part, and they are designed to be woven together. Grammar instruction includes parts of speech, sentences, punctuation, capitalization, and diagramming. Writing chapters each study a particular genre of writing which include personal narratives, howto articles, creative writing, descriptions, business or personal letters, expository writing, persuasive writing and research reports. Chapters open with an engaging model of that particular writing genre. Two lessons follow which identify and explore the elements of effective writing such as purpose, audience, voice, tone, mood, and organization. The next four lessons develop skills and habits of good writing such as word analysis, correct sentence structure, effective study skills, and the ability to present and evaluate oral presentations. Each of these six lessons is to be covered over two days. These lessons from the second part of the texts have corresponding studies in the parallel grammar chapters of the first part. Each chapter concludes

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

with a twelve day writer's workshop. A seven stage writing process is followed: prewriting, drafting, content editing, revising, copy editing/ proofreading, and publishing. For each of the eight writing genres covered, the students prepare a portfolio piece, examine real-life applications, and complete a wide variety of exercises designed to sharpen skills or produce a part of the whole. If you've done the math, you know that each of these genre studies is to be completed in 25 days (or one month of school days). The hardcover student text provides all the basic information for the completion of this study. The teacher's manual has reduced student pages with teaching helps "around the edges." These helps include correlating pages from the support materials, teaching options, grammar connections, warm-ups, practice activities, answers, and, my favorite ­ tech tips (i.e. suggestions for correct e-usage). Additionally, the TM also includes introductory information for each genre study - literature links, writer's workshop tips, and a scoring rubric. By the way, there are reproducible masters for the valuable genre-specific scoring rubrics at the end of each chapter. One new feature of the 2011 TMs that's a winner in my opinion is the divider tabs that allow you to navigate easily between the grammar, writing, diagramming, and handbook segments. The Student texts are quite thorough and could be effective if used independently ­ especially if you complete the writing chapters and grammar sections in parallel fashion. However, the teacher's manuals are very helpful and provide the day-by-day plan for weaving the grammar chapters with the writing chapters as well as using the assessment and practice books. Also, the text (grammar) answers are only available in the TM, so you have to consider how much your time is worth if you choose to try to "figure out" the answers. The assessment books provide grammar section tests and summative tests (multiple sections) as well as a writing skills test and a writing prompt for each of the writing genre chapters. Practice books, as you would expect, provide additional practice for each chapter and include a series for "daily maintenance." Please note that there is a separate answer key for the Assessment and Practice books. In summary, this is a strong course with an emphasis on the writing process and grammar instruction. The grammatical side includes a chapter on diagramming in grades 3-8. Its approach is interesting and engaging, making good use of colorful graphics and appealing use of graphic organizers. Lessons are a nice combination of verbal interaction (many of the exercises could/should be done orally), written activities, and assignments. There is an underlying assumption that the books are being used in a classroom, and several of the activities require cooperative interaction between or among multiple students. Although a revision of an older, Catholic textbook series (there is a reprint of that version available from the publisher), this series does not include any religious material. ~ Janice Grade 3 048168 048169 048165 048166 048167 Student . . . . . . . Teacher . . . . . . Assessment . . . . Practice Book . . Pract/Assess Key . . . . . . . . . . . 70.60 109.26 . . 3.62 . 15.93 . 21.27 67.50 99.95 3.50 15.25 20.25

Grade 4 048173 048174 048170 048171 048172 Grade 5 048178 048179 048175 048176 048177 Grade 6 048183 048184 048180 048181 048182 Grade 7 048188 048189 048185 048186 048187 Grade 8 048193 048194 048190 048191 048192

Student . . . . . . . Teacher . . . . . . Assessment . . . . Practice Book . . Pract/Assess Key Student . . . . . . . Teacher . . . . . . Assessment . . . . Practice Book . . Pract/Assess Key Student . . . . . . . Teacher . . . . . . Assessment . . . . Practice Book . . Pract/Assess Key Student . . . . . . . Teacher . . . . . . Assessment . . . . Practice Book . . Pract/Assess Key Student . . . . . . . Teacher . . . . . . Assessment . . . . Practice Book . . Pract/Assess Key

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 70.60 109.26 . . 3.62 . 15.93 . 21.27 . 70.60 109.26 . . 3.62 . 15.93 . 21.27

67.50 99.95 3.50 15.25 20.25 67.50 99.95 3.50 15.25 20.25

Grade 6 036161 036162 036142 036144 036143 Grade 7 036163 036164 036145 036147 036146 Grade 8 036165 036166 036148 036150 036149

Student . . . . . . . Teacher . . . . . . Assessment . . . . Practice Book . . Pract/Assess Key Student . . . . . . . Teacher . . . . . . Assessment . . . . Practice Book . . Pract/Assess Key Student . . . . . . . Teacher . . . . . . Assessment . . . . Practice Book . . Pract/Assess Key

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 63.93 103.93 . . 3.63 . 11.93 . 22.60 . 63.93 103.93 . . 3.63 . 11.93 . 22.60 . 63.93 103.93 . . 3.63 . 11.93 . 22.60

60.95 99.00 3.50 11.50 21.50 60.95 99.00 3.50 11.50 21.50 60.95 99.00 3.50 11.50 21.50

. 73.26 69.95 111.93 101.95 . . 3.73 3.55 . 17.27 16.50 . 25.27 24.00 . 73.26 69.95 111.93 101.95 . . 3.73 3.55 . 17.27 16.50 . 25.27 24.00 . 73.26 69.95 111.93 101.95 . . 3.73 3.55 . 17.27 16.50 . 25.27 24.00

Voyages in English 2006 Ed. (1-8) This older edition has the same features as the newer edition ­ hardcover student texts, extensive teacher's manuals, practice and assessment books ­ and is, likewise, an excellent course. The main difference? The texts start with the writing lessons and the grammar lessons are found in the second part. In general, there is slightly (very slightly) less emphasis on grammar and also fewer exercises to complete. ~ Janice Grade 1 036151 Student . . . . . . . . . . 23.94 22.85 036152 Teacher . . . . . . . . . 34.60 32.95 Grade 2 036153 Student . . . . . . . . . . 23.94 036154 Teacher . . . . . . . . . 34.60 Grade 3 036155 036156 036134 036136 036135 Grade 4 036157 036158 036137 036139 036138 Grade 5 036159 036160 036140 036836 036141 Student . . . . . . . Teacher . . . . . . Assessment . . . . Practice Book . . Pract/Assess Key Student . . . . . . . Teacher . . . . . . Assessment . . . . Practice Book . . Pract/Assess Key Student . . . . . . . Teacher . . . . . . Assessment . . . . Practice Book . . Pract/Assess Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61.27 101.27 ... . 10.60 . 18.60 . 61.27 101.27 ... . 10.60 . 18.60 . 61.27 101.27 ... . 10.60 . 18.60 22.85 32.95 58.40 96.50 3.50 10.25 17.75 58.40 96.50 3.50 10.25 17.75 58.40 96.50 3.50 10.25 17.75

Climbing to Good English (1-8) In Illinois we owe the homeschooling freedoms we enjoy to a 1960's court case that involved the Amish. In using this English program ­ produced by the Amish ­ your family will enjoy systematic and comprehensive coverage of language arts skills ­ grammar, phonics review, reading comprehension, vocabulary, and composition - at minimum expense. Designed to be used in multi-grade classrooms, students are expected to help themselves ­ particularly in grades 5-8 by learning to work independently with minimal teacher help. Students are taught ­ beginning in the earliest levels ­ to use the dictionary for pronunciation and word meanings rather than expecting the teacher to supply such information. Proofreading marks are taught beginning in grade 5. The overall goal of the series is to improve communication skills; to understand what is heard and read, to express oneself clearly in speaking and writing. This goal is accomplished by systematically teaching, practicing, reviewing, and reinforcing the building blocks of grammar, usage, and mechanics. The early grades (1-3) provide one lesson per day that include phonics review, penmanship practice, reading comprehension, beginning punctuation, word usage skills, and the introduction of basic grammar concepts. One interesting and rather unique aspect of this series is the emphasis on dictionary proficiency. This is underscored by the use of the respelling cards introduced in the second grade and reviewed in the third grade. These cards provide practice in mastering dictionary pronunciations (i.e. respelling the word to reflect the pronunciation such as one finds alongside dictionary word entries). The upper grades provide three lessons per week and the emphasis shifts from phonics review to writing (composition) and continued strengthening of all related skills. All aspects of grammar ­ parts of speech, types of sentences, parts of a sentence ­ as well as all aspects of mechanics ­ capitalization, punctuation and effective word usage - are covered thoroughly. Various forms of writing ­ both practical and creative ­ are introduced and practiced. Sentence diagramming is introduced in grade 4 and expanded each year thereafter. Also starting in grade 4, extra practice sheets are available. These are reproducible or sold separately by grade level (about 70 sheets per grade). (continued...) English / Writing 263

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

Student books are consumable paperbacks. Grade 1 has 156 pages gradually increasing to 286 pages in grade 8. Extra pages in the grades 3-8 books include unit tests and an end-of-term test; grades 5-8 also include a student handbook and thesaurus. There is no teacher's edition for Grade 1 ­ all instruction is included in the student text. Grades 2-4 TEs are student books with answers printed in red along with teaching notes. The Teacher's Editions for grades 5-6 and grades 7-8 are combined and include reduced copies of student pages with answers supplied along with teaching suggestions, ideas for extra practice, tips on scoring, and space for the teacher's own notes. These two TEs are hardback. An interesting feature of the grades 5-6 and 7-8 courses is that they are designed to "travel together." Both grades study the same concepts at the same time although the older grade is at a harder level and often includes more work ­ another example of the multi-grade friendliness of this series. As one would expect from an Amish-produced product, the overall appearance of these books is plain and utilitarian but pleasing nonetheless. The black and white illustrations as well as the written content tend towards rural and biblical themes. ~ Janice 030458 Grade 1 Text Workbook 4.00 030490 Grade 2 Text Workbook 4.00 030459 Grade 2 Teacher . . . . . 7.00 030509 Grade 3 Text Workbook 4.00 030508 Grade 3 Teacher . . . . . 7.00 030491 Grade 2-3 Respelling . Flashcards . . . . . . . . . . 5.00 030517 Grade 4 Text Workbook 4.00 030511 Grade 4 Teacher . . . . . 7.00 030510 Grade 4 Practice Sheets 2.45 030549 Grade 5 Text Workbook 5.00 030542 Grade 5 Practice Sheets 3.45 030526 Grade 5-6 Combined . Teacher . . . . . . . . . . . 15.00 030563 Grade 6 Text Workbook 5.00 030556 Grade 6 Practice Sheets 3.45 030573 Grade 7 Text Workbook 6.50 030569 Grade 7 Practice Sheets 4.25 030568 Grade 7-8 Combined . Teacher . . . . . . . . . . . 15.00 030577 Grade 8 Text Workbook 6.50 030575 Grade 8 Practice Sheets 4.25 SHURLEY ENGLISH (1-7) A very unique English program that teaches grammar, language skills and writing using consistent, formulated techniques. If you like oral recitation, you'll love this program! And, at levels 1-6 the program is totally interactive. If you're a little uncertain of your English teaching skills or tend to be disorganized - fear no more. Nothing is left to chance. The teaching is totally scripted and lessons are very systematic. There aren't even any teacher preparation pages. Author Brenda Shurley suggests you stay one lesson ahead of your students and study it thoroughly before presenting. This is a good idea because, occasionally, you will need to plan ahead for materials for some of the activities. Lessons are grouped 5 per chapter to be taught at the rate of one chapter per week. The course will take about 26 weeks to complete if you hold to this schedule. Lessons vary in length and will take from 20-50 minutes each day. There is some variety in lesson format, but each lesson has one 264 English / Writing

or more of the following components: Jingle Time, Grammar Time, Skill Time, Study Time, Writing Time, Activity/Assignment Time, Practice Time, Vocabulary Time, Test Time, Check Time. Jingle Time begins many of the lessons and has students recite all of the previously-taught jingles. All of these are printed in the first section of the student workbook for easy reference. In the Teacher's Manual, they appear only as introduced. You are supposed to lead the recitation, so it would be helpful to put a post-it note on these pages (you are not allowed to xerox any part of the student workbook). The Instructional CD contains an audio version of the jingles which you can also use as an accompaniment. The narrator has a very pleasant voice. Some of the jingles are actually sung, but most are recited. Some rhyme and have a definite beat, others are just recitations. Jingles are used to define the various parts of speech. When committed to memory, they will help your student remember each part of speech, how it functions, and how to identify it. The Preposition Jingle has you memorize 49 prepositions (though I must say it's not as catchy as our homeschool version which has 53 prepositions sung to the tune of "Joy to the World"). Grammar Time is spent analyzing sentence construction, identifying each part of speech in the sentence. New parts of speech are introduced and an Oral Question and Answer Flow orally picks apart sentences, identifying each part of speech. All of the script appears in the Teacher's Manual so you can lead the recitation. Sentences are classified as Introductory Sentences (sentences which will be used in the lesson to introduce new parts of speech) or Practice Sentences (which classify sentences using previously-learned parts of speech). These sentences must be written on the board or on notebook paper for your student. Optionally, you may purchase a Practice Booklet which contains them all. Students who have previously used the method can classify these Practice Sentences independently, then check their answers using the Practice CD. Skill Time teaches a wide assortment of language and word skills like subject-verb agreement, homonyms, personal pronoun-antecedent agreement, regular vs. irregular verbs, similes and metaphors, editing, and so on. Writing Time is sometimes an assignment to make a journal entry, while in other lessons, it is the entire lesson, teaching students to use specific forms in writing. Some of the writing forms introduced in Level 4, for example, are the three-point paragraph, point of view, timeordering, persuasive essay, writing with dialogue, narrative writing, and descriptive writing. These are all done by strict formula with models and sometimes templates included. Activity/Assignment Time gives instruction for an interesting Activity or Assignment that puts some of this learning into practice. It might be a writing assignment, Sentence Hopscotch, planting a Parts of Speech Garden, or a challenge - like going the rest of the day without using a personal pronoun in any of your conversation! In Level 4, students may write poems. Practice Time refers students to an exercise to complete in the Practice Section of their workbook. Answers are in the Teacher's Manual. Two Vocabulary Times are included per chap-

ter. These introduce four words - two antonyms, two synonyms - for students to define in their Vocabulary notebooks (aided by a dictionary or thesaurus) and use each in a written sentence. Lesson 4 of almost every chapter has a Study Time, Test Time and Check Time. Students will study all of their vocabulary words in their Vocabulary Notebooks as well as any skills in the Practice Section they need to review. After taking the Chapter Test, you will go over it with them and discuss it (Check Time). Answers are found in the Teacher's Manual. This program is a very easy English program to teach and will particularly appeal to parents wanting to use a classical approach of instruction. Every step is planned, every lesson scripted, every writing assignment taught and modeled with very specific instruction. There is virtually zero preparation time and all the audio and visual teaching aids are provided. Children will learn parts of speech and many grammar and usage skills thoroughly - largely through oral recitation. They will learn how to use a dictionary and thesaurus and increase their vocabularies. They will continually review and practice material until it is mastered. Homeschool kits contain a voluminous Teacher's Manual, a student workbook and an Instructional CD. The student workbook consists of a Jingle section (with lyrics to all of the Jingles), Reference section (vocabulary words, charts, rules, checklists and any material that would be in a handbook for the course), Practice Section (exercises), and Test Section (Chapter Test forms). You will need one for each student, so they are sold separately, also. Practice sets contain the Practice Booklet and Practice CDs. The Practice CDs contain audio files of the sentences in the Practice booklet. [The Practice Booklet and CD are not necessary in order to complete the course but they do make it easier on the teacher relieving her of daily sentence-writing and allowing the student to work somewhat independently with the CD to classify and then check the sentences. The Practice Booklet can be used without the CD.] Level 7 includes a Student Text instead of a workbook. The text is largely non-consumable, although there are some charts and skill activities to be completed. Most of these can be found in a more consumable form in the Test Workbook, which is available separately. This allows your child to work on the page rather than copying from their textbook. Also available at each level is a booklet of Literature Selections. These expose your child to both contemporary and non-contemporary written selections. Each is followed by discussion questions which help to analyze the piece. Most conclude with a written assignment based on some feature or quality of the work. Several other supplementals are available separately for every level. Jingle CDs feature the jingles and recitations that are taught during Jingle Time at the beginning of many lessons. The CD also includes the question and answer flows for groups of sentences, which are used to introduce new concepts in the lessons during Grammar Time. The Homechool Kits already contain an audio CD featuring the jingles, but if you want one to use independently (or if you need a replacement), these are now available. There is also educational software

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

("Classifying with Quigley") for every level. As the name implies, students are shown sentences and respond by labeling each part of speech. Exercises become progressively more difficult, but there is not a lot of variance or excitement to them. Software runs on a PC (Windows 95 or higher) or a MAC (OS 8.1 or higher). Jingle Time Music Packs contain jingles, chants, and instrumental versions on a CD, plus a booklet with the music and lyrics so you can play and sing them. There's a Jingle Pack for Levels 1-2, and another one for Levels 3-8. Jingle Time Coloring Books are available for Levels K-3. These include lyrics to the Jingles at that level, plus fun coloring pages. Non-reproducible. EACH HOMESCHOOL KIT. . . 70.00 55.95 EACH STUDENT WORKBOOK 12.00 9.50 EACH PRACTICE SET. . . . . . . 30.00 23.95 EACH PRACTICE BOOKLET . . . 8.00 6.50 EACH LIT SELECTION . . . . . . 10.00 7.95 EACH JINGLE CD . . . . . . . . . 15.00 11.95 EACH SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . 50.00 39.95 EACH COLORING BOOK . . . . . 3.00 Level K: 047101 Coloring Book Level 1: 010824 010831 016651 016650 010849 036917 010841 047098 Level 2: 010825 010832 012665 012751 010850 036918 010842 047099 Level 3: 010826 010833 012745 012775 010851 036919 010843 047100 Level 4: 010827 010834 010986 010989 010852 036920 010844 Level 5: 010828 010835 010987 010990 010853 036921 010845 Homeschool Kit Student Workbook Practice Set Practice Booklet Literature Selections Level 1 Jingle CD Educational Software Coloring Book Homeschool Kit Student Workbook Practice Set Practice Booklet Literature Selections Level 2 Jingle CD Educational Software Coloring Book Homeschool Kit Student Workbook Practice Set Practice Booklet Literature Selections Level 3 Jingle CD Educational Software Coloring Book Homeschool Kit Student Workbook Practice Set Practice Booklet Literature Selections Level 4 Jingle CD Educational Software Homeschool Kit Student Workbook Practice Set Practice Booklet Literature Selections Level 5 Jingle CD Educational Software

Level 6: 010829 010836 010988 010991 010854 036922 010846 Level 7: 010830 010838 010839 009560 010855 036923 010847

Homeschool Kit Student Workbook Practice Set Practice Booklet Literature Selections Level 6 Jingle CD Educational Software Homeschool Kit Student Text (p/b) . . 16.00 Test Workbook . . . . 10.00 Practice Booklet Literature Selections Level 7 Jingle CD . . 12.00 Educational Software

12.75 7.95 9.50

Shurley English Jingle Time Music Packs (1-8) EACH PACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.00 23.95 047102 Levels 1-2 047103 Levels 3-8

STARLINE PRESS ENGLISH (3-12) Designed as an independent learning curriculum, the Starline Press English programs cover a variety of language arts skills at grade appropriate levels. Aligned to California state standards (Please see publisher website for CA state standards correlation), each grade level provides self- directed instruction with minimal teacher supervision. Grades 3-8 complete twelve units (booklets) per year, with units averaging 24-60 pgs. each with a suggested 3 week completion timeframe. Grades 9-12 complete 5 booklets per semester/10 per year. Consumable booklets are colorfully illustrated and soft cover. Each grade level includes vocabulary lists, fill in the blank questions, chapter reviews, and unit tests. Literature studies are included in the fifth grade, seventh grade and upper high school levels. You may wish to include additional, grade appropriate literature with the other levels. Available only in complete sets which include score and test keys. ~ Deanne 051450 Grade 3 . . . . . . . . 199.00 184.95 Skills center on the ability to complete different types of sentences and designate the proper usage of nouns, pronouns, and verbs in those sentences. Students also learn about different types of writing, such as fairy tales, folk tales, fables, legends and myths. They will be introduced to the media and differences in facts and opinions as well as differing points of view. Homophones, homographs and compound words are the spelling focus. They will also master beginning research, writing and speaking skills. 051451 Grade 4 . . . . . . . . 199.00 184.95 Alphabetizing and dictionary skills, word meaning and origins, and recognizing root

words. Fourth graders identify antonyms, synonyms, idioms, and heteronyms as well as learn prefixes and suffixes. They also begin to use thesaurus. Students analyze literature, its themes, plots, and characters. They also learn to distinguish between different literature forms: fables, fantasy, legends and myths. Grammar skills such as organization of simple and compound sentences, applying regular and irregular verbs, appositives and participial phrases are practiced. Students also demonstrate writing ability, making paragraphs, writing a dialogue and giving a speech. 051452 Grade 5 . . . . . . . . 199.00 184.95 Dictionary and Thesaurus skills are further developed. Instruction progresses on proper usage of singular, plural and subject noun; verbs including action, compound, helping and state of being, verb phrases and verb endings. Spelling lists with spelling rules are incorporated at this age. Students also study figures of speech, metaphors, imagery and narratives including writing and giving a narrative presentation. To enrich the reading experience students complete several literature compositions, including The Lion, The Witch and The Wardrobe, Alice's Adventures in Wonderland, The Mayflower Conflict, Paul Revere's Ride and Aunt Polly Shedd's Brigade. Fifth grade students also use the encyclopedia to conduct research and obtain information. They learn to write an outline, revise and rewrite, take notes and complete a finished report. 051453 Grade 6 . . . . . . . . 199.00 184.95 Composition of different sentence structures, including simple, compound and complex sentences. Students learn proper use of verb tenses, indefinite pronouns, compound subjects, salutation punctuation, and capitalization. Metaphors, similes, hyperboles, personification and narration are studied. Sixth grade students prepare and present oral and written reports using outlines, themes, narrative and concrete language. They use email, computer documents, keyword searches and bulletin boards. The students will also prepare and finish a multimedia presentation. Also introduced is persuasive writing and speaking to give a problem solving speech. 051454 Grade 7 . . . . . . . . 199.00 184.95 Sentence structure, diagramming subjects and predicates, helping verbs and verb phrases and irregular verbs. Nouns as subjects, direct objects and predicate nominatives are studied. Seventh grade students also study proper, possessive, and predicate adjectives and prepositions, interjections, and conjunctions and how to use them properly in sentence structure. Students learn to use colons, semicolons, apostrophes, quotation marks, parentheses, dashes and hyphens effectively in sentences. They read a chosen novel, write a daily journal as they read the novel and complete a final review of the novel. They complete this process several times throughout the year with different types of literary works: novels, short stories and poetry. Spelling, vocabulary and grammar are strengthened. (continued...) English / Writing 265

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

051455 Grade 8 . . . . . . . . 199.00 184.95 Grammar, spelling and work presentation skills continue to be mastered. Students read and study ballads, lyrics, epics, elegies, odes and sonnets. They learn how to prepare friendly and business letters. Eighth grade students learn the meaning of consumer documents (warranties, contracts, and product information) and problem solving consumer materials. They are introduced to technical directions (operating instructions). They also learn to prepare, practice, and present speeches using visual aids. They learn beginning persuasive writing, arguments and counter arguments, and write a persuasive composition. 051456 Grade 9 . . . . . . . . 170.00 157.95 Study of sentence types, sentence problems, sentence interruptions, sentence divisions, and sentence ends. Students study the newspaper, internet, and persuasion pieces. Imagery, symbolism, irony, ambiguity, conflict and subtlety are also taught. They study using rhetoric, the structure of an argument, writing descriptions, writing about people, places and events, creating a timeline, gathering facts and making it personal. Continued mastery of proper use of nouns, verb tenses, forms of adjectives, problems with pronouns, functions of adverbs and prepositional rules. 051448 Grade 10 . . . . . . . 170.00 157.95 Students study Old English, Middle English, Early Modern English and Late Modern English. They learn suffixes, prefixes, roots, changing connotations, and problems in diction. Students also learn paragraph order, develop paragraphs, and create unity in paragraphs. Various types of speeches are demonstrated: manuscript, memorized, impromptu, and extemporaneous. Students learn to write an introduction, complete the structure of an argument, and apply amplification and conclusion to their speeches. They learn to give interviews, listen actively, and note taking techniques. Also included is the history of radio, television, motion pictures and newspapers. Book reports are completed throughout the year based on novels read in many different genres: science fiction, mystery, humor, adventure, tragedy and drama. 051449 Grade 11 . . . . . . . 170.00 157.95 Students learn to verify and clarify facts presented in expository texts by using a variety of consumer, workplace and public documents. Investigative Research paper elements are studied including finding sources for topic, gathering evidence to support a thesis and use of a rubric to evaluate thesis. Four styles of literature are studied: early American, Puritan, Southern Colonies and Middle Colonies. Practice continues in public speaking and multimedia presentation, as well as a study of narrative and persuasive essays. Students will also learn business communication, writing cover letters and resumes and understanding work place documents. Review of grammar usage and mechanics.

Creative Writing and Speech (12) or as Electives for 9-12th Grade The first semester course (5 units) focuses on creative writing skills. Creative writing is studied through ancient epics, The Bible (short stories, poetry and parables), Renaissance literature (includes Erasmus and Luther), Victorian literature, modern poetry, fantasy and science fiction. Attention is also given to vocabulary exercises and reviews of synonyms, antonyms, prefixes, root words, suffixes and context. Writing strategies are learned and demonstrated as they complete narrative, expository, persuasive or descriptive writing assignments. The second semester course (5 units) provides greater instruction in Speech. Storytelling, practical application, delivery, voice and rhetoric are studied. Strategies for becoming a successful public speaking, achieving speaking goals and how to be a champion public speaker are also covered. Students study Abraham Lincoln's Gettysburg Address, Martin Luther King's I have a Dream speech, John F. Kennedy's Inaugural speech, and George W. Bush's Address to Congress on Terrorist Attack. 051445 Creative Writing Set 89.95 86.95 051475 Speech Set . . . . . . . 89.95 86.95

Saxon Grammar & Writing (5-8) If it looks like Saxon and teaches like Saxon, does that mean it is Saxon? As a matter of fact, it does. But it started out as Hake Grammar and Writing. Stephen Hake, long associated with Saxon math (since 1984), realized that the effective Saxon teaching methodology of incremental development and continual review would also produce strong language arts instruction and found authors to develop the series. The fact that the overseeing author is his wife, Mary (a former teacher and homeschool parent), suggests that there is a "rest of the story" lurking under the surface. Now the program has officially come to rest under the Saxon banner as they've assumed its publication and distribution. Taking a good look at the program, it's not hard to see the Saxon influence. The textbooks have the look of some of the Saxon texts. Turning to the table of contents, the similarity gets even stronger ­ there are lists of lessons rather than units or chapters. The uncluttered black and white appearance of text pages is also familiar. Don't stop here! The organizational structure of the program and its components is very Saxonesque - carefully sequenced and incremental lessons coupled with continual review. The text is written directly to the student. Lessons include a teaching sequence with examples, related practice, and review. Tests are periodic and cumulative. Another similarity is the obvious commitment to a rigorous and thorough scope and sequence. In short, what we have

here is a grammar and writing program which embodies all the strengths of the Saxon methodology; one that is user-friendly, academically rigorous, and doable ­ all at the same time. In general, the scope and sequence starts with the basics ­ parts of speech, types of sentences, basic capitalization and punctuation, sentence and paragraph construction ­ and progresses systematically and structurally through the intricacies of the American language with the goal of elegant and effective writing. Skills are carefully sequenced, building one upon another, then thoroughly (some might be tempted to say exhaustively) reviewed. As we've seen with Saxon math, this type of content structuring produces competence and retention. I think there will be an added advantage applying this approach to language arts. Often the big picture of language arts is totally missed by using a workbook for vocabulary, one for spelling, another for grammar, and a totally different writing program. In Saxon (Hake) Grammar & Writing, it's possible to see how each component works together to produce an accomplished and skilled scholar. An 8th grade "graduate" of this series will have all the skills needed to tackle high school (or even college) writing assignments - which undoubtedly brings up questions about jumping in midstream or using the program with younger or older students. The 5th grade book could be used with a strong 4th grader. Likewise, the 8th grade course could be used effectively by any high school (or adult) student whose coverage of grammar and writing topics has been scattered or light or irregular and who needs a thorough review. The "jumping in" question is a little harder to address. If a student has had a fair amount of grammar/ writing instruction then they could probably start at grade level in this series. There is plenty of review providing an opportunity to "re-teach" some concepts. However, if a student has had very little grammar or writing instruction, he will probably be much more comfortable starting with the 5th grade book. The Student Textbook is a softbound grammar text that includes 100-115 grammar lessons (number varies per grade). Dictation or journal writing is a daily assignment. Students start each week by copying a dictation passage (found in the text's appendix). The expectation is that they will study the passage during the week and be prepared to write it from dictation with correct spelling and punctuation at the end of week. Students write on a journal topic for the three remaining days each week (list of topics are also found in the text appendix). This sequence is designed to take about five minutes each day. Following this process, each of the grammar lessons starts with a vocabulary segment. Lesson 41 of the 6th grade book looks at the prefix mal- along with some example usages. Lesson 84 of the 8th grade book looks at the history of the adjectives procrustean and protean. [Interesting stuff since both words trace their meaning to Greek legends or literature.] After vocabulary, the lesson's teaching sequence is next. For instance, Lesson 60 of the 8th grade book covers the use of the comma in compound sentences and direct quotations. Reviewing the definition of a compound sentence, comma placement is discussed along with mentioning that a list of seven coordinating conjunctions

266

English / Writing

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

should have been memorized. Next comes two sets of examples. The student is to identify the coordinating conjunction in three sentences and then properly insert a comma in the next two. Answers for each are provided immediately following. The teaching sequence for commas in direct quotations includes illustrating samples before the student is asked to rewrite two example sentences inserting commas as needed. Proper solutions are clearly explained. The practice set for this lesson contains 12 sentences. Sometimes the student is only required to identify a word, sometimes to rewrite the sentences. In this set there are four questions concerning the vocabulary words. Some lessons (but not all) contain a More Practice worksheet (found in the Student Workbook). Some of the More Practice worksheets (called Silly Stories in some levels and Hysterical Fiction in others) are a Mad-Libs-type of activity. The last portion of Lesson 60 is the review set ­ 30 questions. These include vocabulary, usage, spelling, sentence combining and rephrasing, rewriting for correct punctuation and usage, sentence type and parts of speech identification, and others. The last two sentences are typically diagramming practice. (Diagramming is a significant portion of the instruction with several lessons in each level providing the necessary instruction.) One of the nice features of this review set is the micro-size subtexts attached to each review question. These refer back to the lesson where the concept being reviewed was introduced. This text is non-consumable, as there are no spaces purposely left for rewriting or diagramming. However, white space in general is generous and some might choose to allow students to write in the book. The softcover Student Workbook contains the writing lessons as well as the More Practice worksheets. Lessons follow a familiar pattern - a teaching sequence coupled with analysis questions (various sample passages are analyzed), some examples to work with solutions, and practice and review exercises. These exercises include writing assignments, analysis exercises, and sentence rewriting. Although starting with sentence and paragraph construction, the lessons sequence into essays, the various forms of writing, and the writing process. Both creative and academic writing are covered in all levels with an increasing emphasis on research writing as the grades progress. Self-evaluation forms are included for each writing assignment. The student is encouraged to prepare and keep a binder with journal entries and writing assignments. The Teacher Packet includes a short message to the teacher (how-tos), a complete set of answer keys (for the textbook practice and review sets, writing lessons, tests, and more practice worksheets), and test masters. The suggested class schedule for each course is a test after five grammar lessons (starting with the tenth lesson). Students also complete a writing lesson on test days. Sometimes writing lessons are grouped to allow a specific skill set to be brought to completion (i.e. writing a persuasive essay). When this happens the schedule flexes to accommodate several days of writing lessons before continuing on with the grammar portion. There is a detailed schedule for setting up these lessons as well as a very helpful topical listing of the textbook contents which would serve as a

type of scope and sequence. If you love Saxon math and regretted there was nothing quite like it for language arts (I've talked to moms with this lament), then you will be a happy camper. If you've never heard of Saxon but just want a carefully sequenced, thorough, and comprehensive approach to language arts, you'll also be a happy camper. Camping anyone? ~ Janice EACH HOME SCHOOL KIT . . 75.00 44.65 EACH TEXTBOOK . . . . . . . . . 39.95 23.95 EACH WORKBOOK. . . . . . . . 14.50 8.75 EACH TEACHER PACKET . . . . 27.50 16.45 021990 042468 021991 042469 021995 042470 022008 042471 022011 042472 022024 042473 022041 042474 022052 042475 5th 5th 5th 5th 6th 6th 6th 6th 7th 7th 7th 7th 8th 8th 8th 8th Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Home School Kit Student Textbook Student Workbook Teacher Packet Home School Kit Student Textbook Student Workbook Teacher Packet Home School Kit Student Textbook Student Workbook Teacher Packet

Grade Home School Kit Grade Student Textbook Grade Student Workbook Grade Teacher Packet ~~~~~~~~~~~

Prentice-Hall Writing & Grammar Homeschool Bundles (6-12) It's gratifying to see a major textbook supplier provide quality materials ­ and in user-friendly combinations ­ to the homeschool market. Prentice Hall has given us a solid writing and grammar program ­ one that walks the student through each step of the writing process; one that gives guided writing instruction; one that doesn't overlook grammar, usage, and mechanics mastery; and even one that has an eye for skills that are useful in the real-world. Perhaps most unexpected, it's one that includes "Critical Viewing" elements that ask questions like "Use the noun clause what I wouldn't like in a sentence about this picture." - Shades of Charlotte Mason! Each course starts by looking at the general qualities of good writing, then a chapter on the writing process as well as a chapter on sentence, paragraph, and essay writing. These, of course, are grade specific and feature both a review and an increasing depth of instruction. Then follow chapters on specific forms of writing (these vary with the grade level). Grade 6 covers autobiographical and short story (both narration); description; a persuasive essay; comparison/contrast, cause/effect, and how-to essays (all exposition); a research report; response to literature; and writing for assessment. Grade 11 covers all of these plus advertisement (persuasion), problem/solution essay (exposition), documented essay (research), research paper; and workplace writing. Each of these chapters follows a specific assignment through the writing process. Assignments are broken down into bite-size pieces with targeted instruction in specific skills. For instance, in a

6th grade section on Drafting (in Description), the student is encouraged to provide elaboration by combining details from different senses and shown a technique called "depth-charging" to help her do so. Chapters feature classic artwork (for student response prompts), student writing examples, and sections that focus on specific grammar usage. Part 2 provides the grammar chapters which start with a diagnostic test followed by specific review and instruction (key concepts), and then exercises. Sections on "Grammar in Literature" require the student to analyze grammar usage in particular passages. Section Reviews are interspersed within each chapter and are in addition to practice exercises. There is significant grade level specificity in these chapters with lower levels focusing on basic parts of speech, usage, and mechanics while upper levels focus on effective usage, phrases/clauses, and agreement. The chapters in Part 3 focus on application ­ things like speaking and listening, reading skills, study and test-taking skills, and in the upper levels, workplace skills. A collection of resources is included at the back of each Student Text. These are grade level related but include a sentence diagramming workshop, a test preparation handbook, lists of commonly overused and misspelled words, and proofreading symbols. There appears to be online material available as well. The text provides a code and indicates the availability of online videos, quizzes, tests, etc., but I wasn't able to thoroughly research these possibilities and found only some of the "other material" ­ extra grammar exercises and references. The Teacher's Edition is wraparound and goes well beyond an answer key (but all answers to exercises from the Student Text are provided). Detailed specific lesson plans are available in two forms ­ a standard five-day weekly format and an accelerated two-day schedule. I found the two-day option particularly appealing as I imagine this option will streamline a mom's teaching responsibilities. All sorts of teacher-y stuff is also here ­ ongoing assessments, differentiated instruction (for students with different abilities), talking points (helpful at upper levels), step-by-step teaching guide, timed-writing prompts, and a chart showing the correlation of various chapters to the Six Traits writing model. The Homeschool Bundles include a hardcopy Handbook Edition Student Text (more about this later but all information cited above is from this edition) and a hardcopy wraparound Teacher's Edition. By the way, both of these have a sturdy, no-nonsense, yet still attractive appearance with four-color photos/illustrations, accent colors, iconic sidebar information, and color-coded organization. The Student Text is a "Handbook Edition as opposed to the "Full Student Edition." However, the Teacher's Edition features the "Full Student Edition" (reduced pages) as the basis for their wraparound. This means that all the content of the "Full" edition is available to the teacher but I suspect will never be missed by the student. Between the two student editions, most of the pages are identical but the "Full" text has added-in pages; pages that include a section called "Spotlight on the Humanities" (mostly art), a section on "Media and Technology Skills" and a "Standardized Test Preparation Workshop." It's (continued...) English / Writing 267

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

not that these aren't valuable, it's that they are just as usable from the TE as they would be in the Student - and there's no good reason for duplication. You might have noticed that there has been no test book nor tests mentioned so far. Well, you're not going to find any. First of all, assessments/tests are not really needed for writing and there are rubrics available to help you through the grading process there. Secondly, I'm guessing the TestBank feature available to public school teachers is a bit pricey for the homeschool and it's not really necessary. In the grammar section there are numerous section and cumulative reviews as well as beginning diagnostic tests. When you're working oneon-one with a student, these should be more than satisfactory for both your own personal satisfaction of your student's mastery as well as any documentation that might be needed. Throughout both books you will see references to other components in the program. While it might be nice to have access to these, frankly I appreciate that Prentice Hall has been willing to sift through all the products available to the school systems and pinpoint "the necessary" in order to provide a quality program at a commendable price ­ and thus keeping me from the temptation of purchasing products not needed in the home or tutoring situation. So, in summary: It's solid ­ in terms of academics and approach. It's thorough ­ in terms of coverage and instruction. It's attractive ­ in terms of layout and design. And, it's user-friendly. In short, it's a winner! ~ Janice EACH BUNDLE . . . . . . . . . . . 99.99 89.95 052344 Grade 6 054347 Grade 10 052345 Grade 7 054348 Grade 11 052346 Grade 8 054349 Grade 12 054350 Grade 9 English in Blue & White (6-9) This English program was written by two educators who wanted a resource they could use to ensure their 8th grade students understood everything they needed to know before moving on to high school. Although written for that purpose, this program can also be used successfully with surrounding grade levels. It is a very concise guide that offers instruction and practice in grammar, usage, and mechanics as well as some information on composition and literature. How concise is it? Each concept covered (over 25 total in the areas of parts of speech, sentences, phrases, clauses, usage, and mechanics) includes a page or two of explanation and examples and then a page or two of practice exercises. It is all laid out clearly in a straightforward and easy to read manner. At the end of the book there are shorter sections on composition and literature. These include concise breakdowns of writing paragraphs and compositions, guidelines for writing, style reminders, various elements of literature, and a glossary of poetic terms. Aside from use as a "normal" English course, this could be useful as an assessment tool or summer program. 97 pgs, spiral bound. An answer key is available separately (please note that despite the price, the key contains only the answers; there aren't any teacher helps or other "bonuses"). ­ Melissa 045011 Student Book. . . . . . 19.95 18.75 045010 Answer Key. . . . . . . 14.95 13.95 268 English / Writing

043542 043543 045599 047657 043544 043545 043862

Chapter 5 Activities Chapter 5 Text Chapters 1-5 Texts on CD-ROM Chapt. 1-5 Activities on CD-ROM Full Course Kit . . . . 95.95 87.95 Teacher's Resource Kit18.95 18.00 Teacher's Resource Kit CD ONLY . . . . . . . . 12.70 12.25

English Programs from Paradigm Accelerated (8-12) "Designed to be self-teaching." These are magic words for many homeschoolers ­ particularly at the high school level. And while this curriculum has many positive characteristics, its self-teaching aspect is sure to rank high. But don't overlook the other positives ­ broad coverage of grammar, usage, and mechanics, vocabulary, literary elements, and composition as well as encouraging and character-building anecdotes and principles. Although utilizing a black and white format, the graphics are well designed and interesting. The Texts (pgs vary from 50 to 70 pgs) follow a pattern ­ vocabulary, vignette illustrating a life principle, and teaching segments accompanied by quiz prompts. All straight-forward and easy to complete. The Activities books are consumable with reading comprehension questions from the vignette, a vocabulary exercise, and several exercises reinforcing the Text's teaching segments. Students are expected to check their own work in the Activities and if they score 85% or better on the quizzes are not required before taking the tests that are provided. The Teacher's Resource Kit comes as a CD or black line masters. English I can be purchased either as both items together or as CD only. English II, III, or IV are only available in the CD version and Texts for these courses are pdf documents (can read on computer or print out) on a separate CD-ROM. Teacher Resource CD content is identical to the black line masters and includes the tables of contents for the textbooks, the Activity answer keys, section quizzes and answer keys, Chapter tests and answer keys as well as some helpful administrative resources. The Full Course Kit (only English I) includes the Texts and Activities books for all five chapters as well as the Teacher's Resource Kit (masters and CD). ~ Janice EACH ACTIVITIES BOOK. . . . . 6.45 6.30 EACH TEXT BOOK . . . . . . . . . 8.95 8.50 EACH TEXT CD (exc noted) . . 35.80 34.15 EACH ACTIVITY CD (exc noted)25.80 24.75

English II: Composition Skills Builds on English I skills ­ strengthening writing skills with word usage, grammar, vocabulary skills, essay construction, and forms of writing. 045835 Chapter 1 Activities 045836 Chapter 2 Activities 045837 Chapter 3 Activities 045838 Chapter 4 Activities 045839 Chapter 5 Activities 045600 Chapters 1-5 Texts on CD-ROM 047658 Chapt. 1-5 Activities on CD-ROM 054602 Full Course Kit . . . 95.95 87.95 045601 Teacher's Resource Kit CD ONLY . . . . . . . . 12.70 12.25 English III: Writing Skills Experience with forms of writing (vignettes, legends, historical fiction, technical, business letters, reports), critical thinking skills in writing (recognizing facts/opinions, cause-effect relationships, literary techniques, and more), focus and organization, word usage, research paper skills, and standardized test prep. 045840 Chapter 1 Activities 045841 Chapter 2 Activities 045842 Chapter 3 Activities 045843 Chapter 4 Activities 045844 Chapter 5 Activities 045602 Chapters 1-5 Texts on CD-ROM 047659 Chapt. 1-5 Activities on CD-ROM 054603 Full Course Kit . . . 95.95 87.95 045603 Teacher's Resource Kit CD ONLY . . . . . . . . 12.70 12.25

English IV: Legacy of Freedom & Virtue in Literature & Philosophy Important literary works in American history, poetry, songs, mottos, slogans, historical documents, forms of fiction, point of view, literary techniques & criticism, biographies, historical overview of literature and its impact. 045845 Chapter 1 Activities 045846 Chapter 2 Activities 045847 Chapter 3 Activities 045848 Chapter 4 Activities 045604 Chapters 1-4 Texts on CD-ROM . . . . . . . . 28.64 27.45 047660 Chapt. 1-4 Activities . . CD-ROM . . . . . . . . 20.64 19.75 054604 Full Course Kit . . . 80.55 75.95 English I: Language Skills Reviews parts of speech and their application 045605 Teacher's Resource Kit CD ONLY . . . . . . . . 12.70 12.25 (including diagramming), reading and evaluating literature, sentence and paragraph construction, effective wordsmithing and experience in informing, entertaining, persuading, and challenging compositions. 043534 Chapter 1 Activities 043535 Chapter 1 Text 043536 Chapter 2 Activities 043537 Chapter 2 Text 043538 Chapter 3 Activities 043539 Chapter 3 Text 043540 Chapter 4 Activities 043541 Chapter 4 Text

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

Charlotte Mason Style English Programs Queen Homeschool Language Lessons (PK-12) Pick-up-and-go language arts ­ Charlotte Mason style. Copywork, dictation, and narration from interesting, vintage works including poetry, speeches, and stories. Full-color art reproductions typically depicting a long ago, slower, more rural lifestyle. A full spectrum of language arts skills starting with phonics and handwriting and progressing through creative writing. A gentle but thorough introduction to grammar and mechanics with periodic review. An emphasis on creative expression and poetry appreciation. What's not to like? This is a far cry from repetitive, dry grammar books and their accompanying boredom. There are 180 teacher-student interactive lessons in each book. Lesson times are very short (5-10 minutes) in the early books and progress to about 30-45 minutes in the upper level books. The beginning books are scripted while later books progress into a warm, instructive, conversational narrative. These perfect-bound books are designed to become a consumable student portfolio. Often ­ particularly in the early grades ­ students are asked to draw pictures on left-side facing pages all of which are left purposely blank. Except for the high school book, copywork/dictation space is provided. Grammar exercises requiring editing or some sort of marking (i.e. circle subject; underline predicate) always have adequate space for completion. There is no prep for the teacher although interaction and discussion with the student and oversight of their work is necessary. Answer keys provide time-saving answers for the objective portions but may not be needed for the younger levels. Grammar coverage is comprehensive and thorough although practice is minimal. Continual review is provided for all grammar concepts once introduced and skills are carefully sequenced through the years to encourage concept understanding. Descriptive, narrative and creative writing are all covered in varying and increasing (through the levels) degrees. However, paragraph construction skills are minimal and essay construction is found only in High School Volume 2. ~ Janice 043889 Little Ones (PK-K) . . . . 22.95 Teaches letter recognition, introduces narration, poetry appreciation, and creative expression. Oral interaction plus drawing; copywork is letters. 63 pgs 043890 Little Ones Vol. 2 (K-1) 22.95 Phonics: consonant and short vowel sounds, CVC words, long vowels, and CVCe words. Handwriting/copywork, narration, poetry, sentences. 64 pgs 043891 Little Ones Vol. 3 (1-2) 22.95 Phonics: double vowels, double consonants, ed endings, silent consonants, digraphs, trigraphs, syllables. End-marks, comma, titles. 68 pgs 043897 Very Young Vol. 1 (2-3) 22.95

000200 Very Young Vol. 1 Ans. Key 4.95 Singular/plural, articles, nouns/verbs, punctuation/capitalization, parts of a sentence and sentence construction. 70 pgs 043898 Very Young Vol. 2 (3-4) 22.95 000247 Very Young Vol. 2 Ans. Key 4.95 Picture study and poetry appreciation. Continued practice of beginning grammar concepts, punctuation, and capitalization. 043892 Elementary Child Vol. 1 (3-6) 22.95 000198 Elementary Child Vol. 1 Answer Key. . . . . . . . . 4.95 More comprehensive coverage of all basic grammar concepts, sentence construction skills, plural rules, parts of letter/envelope, alphabetization, homophones, synonyms, and antonyms. 89 pgs 043893 Elementary Child Vol. 2 (3-6) 22.95 005872 Elementary Child Vol. 2 Answer Key. . . . . . . . . 4.95 Comprehensive review of all basic grammar concepts, abbreviations of states, plurals vs. possessives, use of thesaurus. 90 pgs 043895 Secondary Child Vol. 1 (4-9) 22.95 005926 Secondary Child Vol. 1 Answer Key. . . . . . . . . 4.95 Parts of speech, prepositions, state of being verbs, pronouns, hyphens, sentence combining. 85 pgs. 043896 Secondary Child Vol. 2 (7-10) ................. 22.95 005885 Secondary Child Vol, 2 Answer Key. . . . . . . . . 4.95 Emphasis on famous historical speeches for copywork and dictation, semicolons. Complete grammar review. 90 pgs. 043894 High School Vol. 1 (9-12) 22.95 005899 High School Vol. 1 Key 4.95 Creative writing course, editing, grammar review. 78 pgs 016662 High School Vol. 2 . . . 22.95 016688 High School Vol. 2 Key 4.95 Essay writing course (descriptive, narrative, expository, persuasive, compare/contrast), editing and grammar review, writing process and free writing. 027369 High School Vol. 3 . . . 22.95 027370 High School, Vol. 3 Key 4.95 Research paper from start to finish, dictation, picture study compare/contrast, editing, and free writing. First Language Lessons for the Well-Trained Mind (1-4) The first book of this series authored by Jessie Wise, co-author of The Well Trained Mind, is based on Lessons in the Use of English by Mary Hyde (which, when edited by Cyndy Shearer of Greenleaf Press, became English for the Thoughtful Child). Jessie Wise believes that children as young as first or second grade are capable of learning the correct use of language; it's just a matter of if and how the material is presented to them. After all, she says, if you believe in exposing your children to quality literature before they have begun to read proficiently [which most of us do], why shouldn't we expose them to the sounds and sights of correct language and grammar usage? Although at this age learning these rules will require a lot more patience on both the part of the student and the teacher, learning it the right way early on is a huge step towards learning proper English and

grammar rules later in life. Although it sounds like a big job, her books are very straightforward and easy-to-use. The author's goals for this series include: 1) training student's ears to be attuned to the sound of properly spoken language, 2) training their speech to the correct use of grammar, 3) having their attention sharpened by asking them to narrate parts of a story back to you after hearing it aloud, and 4) using correct language in writing. Starting in second grade they should be able to copy short sentences properly using grammar and punctuation and be able to write short sentences both from dictation and on their own, again using proper punctuation, capitalization, and spelling. Sounds like a lot of work to get to that point, right? True, it will take patience and a lot of practice, but the author has included four important tools in your toolkit to help you through this process. Her "Four Strand" approach relies on using memory work, copying and dictation, narration, and grammar to help both you and your student reach these goals. Memory work begins with the child memorizing and reciting short definitions and rules to reinforce the sounds of correctly spoken sentences as well as short poems to discover the enjoyable rhythm of language and continues through the elementary grades with rhymes and rules and longer poems. First graders will be copying short sentences, but copying sentences from dictation is withheld until second grade when children's motor skills and their "feel for" language are stronger. Narration exercises alluded to earlier include story narration where a short story is read to the child and he or she is asked to recite in complete sentences the story in their own words back to you or to answer comprehension questions about the story in complete sentences. Picture narration exercises are also used, where the student will observe a picture and describe it using complete sentences. Grammar, the last tool in your kit, is taught early on by giving the child definitions of the parts of grammar - reciting the rules and using them in speech and in writing as much as possible. These four strands are continued through the levels with increasing complexity and length. Although previously levels 1 and 2 were combined, the publisher replaced the combined version with two separate levels in 2010. FLL Level 1 and FLL Level 2 cover first and second grade, one level per year. They are designed to accompany separate phonics, spelling, and penmanship lessons. There are 100 lessons in each book ­ the 200 lessons in the combined volume have been neatly cut in half. The lessons tend to be very short, with the topic printed at the top of the page and other items to review underneath. The structure of each lesson is easy to follow with different fonts denoting notes for the teacher, what the teacher might say to teach the concept, and something similar to what your child may say in reply to a question. Though it is not necessary to follow the script exactly, it gives an example of how you may wish to teach the lesson. Each lesson takes up only a page or so, and most of them contain oral lessons to complete together, such as answering questions or focusing on narration of a story, picture, or a poem to memorize. Memorization exercises are reviewed for days after the initial exposure, and the child is encouraged to (continued...) English / Writing 269

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

recite poems to themselves and to an inanimate object before working up the courage to present it to his family. Following the lesson enrichment activities are often given, although it is up to your discretion and the ability of your child to determine if you will have them complete these or not. Often these ask for the child to illustrate the prose studied or to copy part of a lesson out in writing. These are more advanced than the exercises in the lessons and were included for the more precocious children to complete if they so desire. A sampling of topics covered for first grade includes nouns (common, proper), days of the week, pronouns, capitalization, seasons, days, months, holidays, verbs, addresses, dates, and an introduction to sentence types. In second grade, verbs, contractions, adjectives, commas, letter writing, prepositions, and interjections are covered, along with extensive review of the topics covered in first grade. Although this may sound heavy for first and second-graders to handle, don't worry, everything is broken up into manageable morsels easier for them to digest and remember. The key is in repetition and practice, and the author reminds us that if it is our intention to take a lengthy break from school, such as summer break, then we should still keep up with the lessons, ideally covering one or two a week so that everything you've worked so hard on up to this point isn't half-forgotten and recovered with a struggle the next year. The Audio Companion CD (which combines levels 1 and 2) provides theater-quality presentations of the fun poems, entertaining stories, and memorable rhymes found in the books. There are also some original songs to aid memorization of the parts of speech. Level 3 and higher of this program continues the basic components, but in addition to the teacher manual, a consumable workbook is provided for the student's work. The four teaching goals remain the same, and the authors (Sara Buffington is co-author) continue to weave the lessons with the four strands: memory work, copying/dictation, narration, and grammar. There is also a continuation of the scripted teaching approach using the same type formatting as the first book. There are 89 lessons in Level 3 plus three short (7 lessons each) optional teaching sections: writing letters, dictionary skills, and oral usage. A sampling of the topics include: eight parts of speech, forming plurals, linking & state of being verbs, four types of sentences, parts of a sentence, comma usage, quotations, and contractions. Diagramming is introduced at this level. As in the 1-2 book, grammar concepts are introduced and reinforced through the use of rhymes and rhythmic chants. [Just a note on these, you might want to practice these a bit ahead ­ I experimented with the one on state of being verbs and found it to be a bit tricky in terms of rhythm. I wouldn't have wanted to be trying it out for the first time with my student. I'm thinking there would be more entertainment than learning in that "lesson."] The course can be completed in one year in about 30 minutes per day and 3 days per week. Workbooks provide some lesson examples, copies of the memory work pieces, and space for diagramming as well as for the copywork and dictation exercises. The pages are perforated and 3-hole punched so they could be filed in a binder. Level 4 provides a continu270 English / Writing

ation in both format and content and covers a full range of grammar topics including parts of speech, punctuation, sentence diagrams, and skills in beginning writing and storytelling. Optional end units provide practice in dictionary use and letter writing. There are so many things to like about this program that one hardly knows where to begin. It's easy to follow and use, the instruction is comprehensive and thorough yet gentle, teacher prep is at an absolute minimum, all learning styles are addressed, and last but not least, underlying the entire program is a love for the beauty and structure of our language. - J.L / J.P 013644 Level 1 . . . . . . . . . . 14.95 9.95 048349 Level 2 . . . . . . . . . . 14.95 9.95 034320 Level 1-2 Audio CD . . . 10.95 040704 Level 3 Student . . . . 18.95 12.25 040705 Level 3 Teacher. . . . 29.95 19.75 042777 Level 4 Student . . . . 19.95 12.75 042778 Level 4 Teacher. . . . 29.95 19.75

COMPLETE WRITER (1-5) Susan Wise Bauer has an opinion about how writing should be taught to children. Not surprising! With over 15 years of experience teaching writing, she knows that The Complete Writer is the one who has mastered the three stages of writing ­ Writing with Ease (combining the two distinct mental steps of putting ideas into words and putting words onto paper; grades 1-4), Writing with Skill (learning to organize sentences into short compositions; grades 5-8), and Writing with Style (the persuasive expression of ideas; grades 9-12). The Writing With Ease series ­ in four levels ­ is now complete and the Writing With Skill series is being introduced with expectations of a full twelve years of instruction when all three series are completed. These series make it possible for any parent to become a writing teacher ­ no experience needed! The beginning levels are scripted with later levels focusing on the student becoming an independent writer. Although designed as a grade level program; older students struggling with writing can start at lower levels and progress through the levels. Diagnostic tests within the Writing With Ease text help the parent determine where the child needs to start and which workbook the child will need. Each level covers one grade; one year's work. Writing With Ease (1-4) Writing With Ease provides easy-to-use materials for introducing this comprehensive writing approach to young students; an approach that understands the need for one-on-one instruction and focuses on copywork (putting words on paper) and narration (putting ideas into words) then ultimately combining the skills (Years 3 & 4). The Text for Levels 1-4 is a program over-

view. The first section ­ Understanding the Program ­ describes the three stages of writing instruction and why most writing programs fail as well as a 4-year scope and sequence concluding with a segment on where/how to begin. Included are some short diagnostic exercises to determine if an older reluctant-writing student will profit by some portions of the program. Next is a short but practical section outlining preschool and kindergarten language instruction. The bulk of the text provides the weekly lessons for each level (year). Each year is divided into segments with a varying number of weeks. Each of these segments starts with a detailed lesson plan for the first week; then "tweaked" plans for the rest of the segment's weeks (i.e. use slightly longer sentences for copywork; look for sentences that contain the proper names of days of the week and months of the year). Each year concludes with a mastery evaluation. Copywork sentences and narration excerpts are provided for each of these "first weeks" but not for the remaining weeks. There are several valuable appendices at the back of the Text ­ what to do after program completion, troubleshooting (wise advice on student's writing problems), frequently asked questions, and resource lists. The Workbooks provide all the needed teacher preparation for each level making the program very user-friendly. The first half of each book is the teacher's portion. This comes close to being scripted with all lessons carefully detailed. Copywork and narration excerpts for each lesson are included with background information provided and comprehension questions (with possible answers) that lead the child comfortably into narration. The last half of the books are student pages. It's suggested that these be removed and given to the student but they are reproducible for family use (schools and co-ops need to make other arrangements with Peace Hill Press). Grade-appropriate writing space is provided along with copywork models. Occasionally, pen-and-ink illustrations brighten the pages. There is a relationship between Writing With Ease and First Language Lessons (from the same author). Both share the same philosophy and while these writing skills are presented in FLL they are extensively developed and practiced in WWE. The WWE Text could be used independently of the WWE Workbooks with the parent/teacher selecting all their own copywork excerpts from other school material. Criteria for selection are provided with each lesson segment. Likewise, it might be possible although perhaps not desirable to use the Workbooks independently of the Text. They are designed to be used together and there is material in the Text that is not repeated in the Workbooks (at the beginning and end of the Text). However, all lesson material is carefully repeated in the Workbooks and often expanded in terms of teacher instruction. The Workbooks also provide the needed copywork models and narration excerpts for all lessons making them very comprehensive. ~ Janice 042781 Text for Levels 1-4. . 29.95 19.25 042779 Level 1 Workbook . . 34.95 22.50 042780 Level 2 Workbook . . 34.95 22.50 019745 Level 3 Workbook . . 36.95 23.50 016506 Level 4 Workbook . . 36.95 23.50

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

Writing With Skill (5-8) Writing With Skill series has a target audience of 5th through 8th graders. There is both an Instructor and a Student book at each level. One of the goals of this series is to transition the student into an independent writer. All instruction is written directly to the student while the instructor is encouraged to become more of a writing mentor. Some activities are to be completed by the student independently with no assistance while others suggest that the student should "check your work with your instructor." The student is expected to keep a Composition Notebook (three-ring binder divided into six sections). The entire course requires virtually no prep for the teacher. The student can pick up the worktext and be on her way. The Writing With Skill Student Book could be considered a worktext (there are occasional places where the student is expected to write in the book). Source material for all assignments except the final composition is provided in the student book. There are 36 weeks of assignments ­ four days per week. Assignments are laid out in steps and expectations for written assignments are often quite specific (i.e. number of words, what should be included, specifics of avoiding plagiarism, etc.). The Instructor Book is designed to be used by a writing mentor. Its relationship to the Student Book is interesting. All of the instructions to the student are included (in smaller type) as well as the source information and any needed answers. However, when the student is asked to do something with the source material, the Instructor Book provides helps for the mentor (i.e. parent/teacher) to use as she is mentoring the student. For instance, in week 19 the student is given a list of the important events in the life of frontiersman Daniel Boone and asked to lightly mark the events they might want to include in a narrative of his life. Correspondingly, the Instructor's list of those same events has some italicized (those of lesser importance which could be left out); information that can be used to help the student make his selections. Appropriately labeled "How to Help the Student," these sections (part of every lesson) provide direction for the would-be mentor. Through these How to Help sections, the mentor is led into a complete understanding of what is expected of the student in terms of completing the assignment thus making evaluation of the students' work much easier. WWS, Level 1 starts with writing narrations, teaches outlining skills, introduces Topoi ­ an element of classical rhetoric (working definition is "forms") and Copia ­ exercises designed to improve the student's writing style (think: multitude of ways to say the same thing). Assignments cover topics across the curriculum and include chronological narratives, biographical sketches, scientific descriptions, and literary essays. Researching and documenting source material is introduced. ~ Janice 050488 Level 1 Instructor . . 32.95 21.25 050489 Level 1 Student Workbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.95 18.50

Creative Writer Level One: Five Finger Exercises (5-8) Can we still consider writing to be a five-finger exercise? It seems more often these days to have ten finger keyboard involvement. That observation aside, Peace Hill's reprint of this 1979 classic provides an excellent counterpoint to its Writing With Skill series. It's a good fit, since Level One of Writing With Skill covers all aspects of non-fiction writing and the two courses share a similar methodology. There are two rather amazing aspects to Creative Writer. One is the step-by-step, very thorough instruction through the creative writing process for fiction and poetry. The other is the guidance that is given to those who want (or need) to become a mentor for a writer. The book is divided into 36 weeks of lessons and exercises ­ 18 for fiction; 18 for poetry. Lessons are detailed and focused. For instance, week 10 (fiction) guides the student through creating dialogue. Taking characters from a previous week's instruction, the student thinks through the situation and setting (their back story, in other words), looks at examples of dialogue from classic literature as well as some written by the author complete with his behind-the-scenes thinking process, and then gives the student the opportunity to find out what his characters want to say. But what if you're the parent trying to teach this material? First of all, the book practically teaches itself ­ all instruction is written directly to the student. However, there is an obvious need for an encourager ­ a mentor, if you will. The author "has your back" here as well. At the end of each section (i.e. fiction and poetry) pages directed to the mentor will give you the help you need to encourage and subtly direct your student. For instance, for our week 10 dialogue-writing sessions, the mentor is given suggestions for role-play, prompts to "unstick" the student, and questions to help flesh out the "back story". You'll quickly relax and recognize that any intelligent reader can help an aspiring writer (with a little help from her friends). Peace Hill's classical scope and sequence suggests using both books (Creative Writer and Writing With Skill) in one year. I think this would be very demanding but if you're looking for an intense focus on writing, I can't think of a more comprehensive approach. Target audience for both is grades 5th ­ 8th; any where in that time frame is doable. Creative Writer could be used as a stand alone fiction writing course but keep in mind that it assumes the student is thoroughly competent in sentence and paragraph construction (as you would expect of a student completing the Writing With Ease series that is a prequel to Writing With Skill.) 211 pgs, pb ~ Janice 050490 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.95 10.95

English for the Thoughtful Child (2-3) A Simply Grammar-like course for a younger child, again following the Charlotte Mason approach. It contains everything you need for language arts - wholesome classic literature excerpts, narration, dictation, memorization, and composition. Lessons are self-contained and the book is very easy to use with short, manageable exercises and assignments. Like Simply Grammar, this volume is also a revision of an older book, complete with quaint, but stimulating, period illustrations. 007532 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.95 15.45 English for the Thoughtful Child 2 (3-4) This sequel contains all the distinctive features of the original. It contains nature lessons, oral composition, picture lessons, memory work, and a gentle introduction to grammar, all centered around the development of writing skills. 019187 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.95 15.45 Primary Language Lessons (2-4) Intermediate Language Lessons (4-7) An option for those who want to employ the methods of Charlotte Mason in their English program. Reprints of texts used in the early 1900s, these contain black/white period illustrations (incorporated into the lessons), memorization, classic literature excerpts, narration, dictation, copy work and composition. Instruction is selfcontained. These are very simple to use - just open up and go. Lessons are presented in small, manageable pieces with many exercises done orally, making these an attractive choice for the student as well. Teacher's Guides provide instructional information for the teacher (i.e. these words are prepositions, words that show position, direction ...) and answers as well as extended activity suggestions and directions (i.e. create a preposition mobile by...). Teacher aids include reproducible grading rubrics, writing and dictation worksheets, calendar (primary), envelope, story map (intermediate) and Venn diagram masters. Primary is 164 lessons; Intermediate is 301 lessons. 008297 Primary Lessons. . . . 14.95 10.75 043843 Primary Teacher . . . 13.95 9.95 008296 Intermediate Lessons 22.95 16.25 043842 Intermediate Teacher 17.95 12.75 Lingua Mater Series (in color) (2-6) Have you ever used a book and just kept thinking about the changes you would make? Perhaps that was the experience of Margot Davidson. Taking the classics Primary Language Lessons and Intermediate Language Lessons by Emma Serl, she tweaked them "just a bit." The result is all the warmth of the originals with just a little more practicality, beauty, and applicability. The same wonderful balance between oral and written work has been preserved along with all the basic elements ­ copywork/dictation, picture study, memorization selections, grammar sequences, and composition. Some of the pictures are now in full color, and some are changed to appeal more to young readers. Also, some changes were made to bring the language in line with today's English. The typesetting is modern with much more "white space," and an added coil-binding makes it much easier to use for copywork or for "teacherwork." Scripture quotes are taken from (continued...) English / Writing 271

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

the Catholic Edition of the Revised Standard Version of the Bible. Primary Language Lessons (138 pgs) is flexible and can be used as either a full third grade course or spread over second and third grade. Some of the exercises toward the end of its 164 lessons have been broadened, making them more appropriate for students at the end of third grade. Intermediate Language Lessons (252 pgs) has 300 lessons divided into three parts originally intended for use in 4th, 5th, and 6th grades. A student can be started at any level that seems appropriate. Part I covers sentences, paragraphs, nouns, letter writing, descriptive writing, dialogue, punctuation, and creative writing. Part II includes quotations, homonyms, descriptive writing, abbreviations, describing words, persuasive writing, and letter writing. Part III has expanded writing coverage and includes parts of speech and sentences, journalism, comparison writing, and descriptive writing. ~ Janice 045024 Primary (2-3). . . . . . . . 18.95 046890 Intermediate (4-6) . . . . 38.95 Primary Language Lessons (2-3) 053226 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.00

Classical Style English Programs CLASSICAL COMPOSITION (3-12) Brand new, from Memoria Press. Fable Stage: Book I (3-6) 052953 Student Book. . . . . . 19.95 052954 Teacher Book . . . . . 29.95 Narrative Stage: Book II (4-12) 051676 Student Book. . . . . . 19.95 051677 Teacher Guide. . . . . 29.95 17.75 26.50 17.75 26.50

Sheldon's New Primary Language Lessons (3-6) Don't be confused by the title. This collection of language lessons is different from and seemingly unrelated to the well-known Primary Language Lessons by Emma Serl although the general idea and flavor of the book is the same. Charlotte Mason moms will be pleased to have another choice that provides picture study, memory work (poetry), basics of grammar, spelling and punctuation, copywork, dictation, and oral composition. Sheldon's Primary Language Lessons was originally published in 1894-1895 and most lessons are the same as originally published. A few lessons were omitted, replaced or modified to make the worktext more childfriendly (i.e. more Charlotte Mason friendly ­ e.g. copywork instead of fill-in-the-blank and the written narrations as optional). This series of language lessons covers the eight parts of speech thoroughly (in a gentle fashion). The book can be used as a consumable worktext but much of the work can be completed orally as part of the teacher-student interaction that marks the program. Lessons are arranged by concept and can vary in amount of days required to complete so plans for pacing should be flexible. 210 pgs, spiral-bound. ~ Janice 049741 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.95 272 English / Writing

CLASSICAL WRITING (3-12) We have lots of writing programs ­ most of them excellent; each worthy in its own way. Why add another? Because there are so many positive aspects of teaching the classical language arts rolled up into this one wellorganized, user-friendly and academically challenging program. If you are following a classical methodology, or even if you're not and you just want an excellent and comprehensive approach to writing, then this program may be the one for you. The classical education tradition is one where words represent real concepts, ideas are important, virtue is essential, and truth matters. This is a writing program that is built on these pillars. The Classical Writing series as a whole is designed to teach writing and related grammar and vocabulary skills from beginning skills through high school level skills. The books are sequential but don't correspond to specific grade levels and don't have to be used at the rate of one per year. Students should start at the beginning and progress through the series at their own pace. Younger students may spend more than one year on the beginning volumes. Older students may start at the beginning but only spend a few months in a volume before going on to the next level. Several things are common to all of the books. Instruction is systematic and rigorous and requires teacher-student interaction ­ this is not a self-teaching program. Assignments are comprised of analysis and imitation of great works of writing. All areas of language arts are incorporated into the lessons: grammar, vocabulary, phonics review, and spelling. The writing projects and original compositions are built around the "progymnasmata." (What's that, you ask? It's a series of fourteen exercises in rhetorical writing starting with fables and narratives, progressing through confirmation and invective, and ending with thesis and proposal of law. For reference, there is a list of these fourteen progymnasmata included in the appendices of each core book of the series.) Did I mention that the program is rigorous? The expectation is that 30 minutes a day, 4 days a week will be spent in the analysis and imitation of the writing models. Another 30-40 minutes a day, 4 days a week are suggested for work on the actual writing projects. In the Aesop book, models are drawn from fables, folk tales, myths, and legends. The weekly routine introduces the model on the first day, and covers word skills on the second day, sentence skills on the third, and copywork or dictation on the fourth. Specific grammar and vocabulary skills covered depend on the skill level of the student but follow a scope and sequence typical

of classical methodology. In fact, grammar is an important aspect of the entire program, and masters for grammar flashcards are provided at every level. The student is encouraged/expected to be continually reviewing this information in addition to adding to the depth of the coverage of grammatical constructs. Aesop writing projects include short narrative, short narrative amplified by adding dialogue, and a short narrative amplified with descriptive detail. Each of these projects is approached in a multi-step fashion: read and discuss, first draft, correct first draft, amplify, and final draft. The Core books for each level provide the overall teaching strategy, weekly and daily routines, instructions for different skill levels, detailed steps for completing the writing projects, and suggestions for planning. Student Books and Instructor's Guides are optional but make the program much more user-friendly by providing step-by-step weekly lessons as well as models and workspace. [All "lessons" refer to four days of instruction.] The Instructor's Guides provide lesson plans with daily detail and teacher helps and are completely crossreferenced to the Core books. Also provided are the models and answer keys for diagramming and parsing work as well as room for teacher analysis notes. Appendices include background info on models and authors, a scope and sequence, editing checklists, suggestions for writing across the curriculum, and an "utterance chart" master (an ongoing chart that students keep with suggestions for creative replacements for the prosaic "said" in dialog construction). Student Workbooks provide weekly models and workspace. The A workbooks at each level provide introductory instruction and practice. The B workbooks provide another year of instruction and practice at each level. It's assumed that students on the young side of the designated age range will spend the additional time at each level. Older students can start with the B books and then progress to the next level. Each student will need his or her own workbook. ~ Janice CW Foundations: Aesop (3-6) For beginning writers ­ models taken from fables, folk tales, myths, and legends. Aesop A provides 18 lessons. Aesop B provides another 18 lessons. 001393 Aesop Core Book. . . . . 22.95 001407 Student Workbook A . . 26.95 001400 Instructor's Guide A . . 18.95 001415 Student Workbook B . . 26.95 001405 Instructor's Guide B . . 18.95 CW Foundations: Homer (5-9) Second in the series. Homer A provides 20 lessons. Homer B provides an additional 20 lessons. The combined Aesop and Homer books are for the older beginner who needs to cover all the beginning levels in a short time frame. There are 22 weekly lessons in the A & H book. 001457 Homer Core Book . . . . 37.95 001475 Student Workbook A . . 29.95 001459 Instructor's Guide A . . 18.95 001479 Student Workbook B . . 29.95 001464 Instructor's Guide B . . 18.95 001441 Aesop & Homer Student Workbook. . . . . . . . . . 29.95 001433 Aesop & Homer Instructor's Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.95

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

CW Foundations: Poetry for Beginners (5-12) For all ages ­ covers rhyme, figures, meter, stanza analysis, poetry interpretation, and imitation of great poets. Poetry A provides 12 weekly lessons. Poetry B provides another 12 lessons. Poetry for Older Beginners is designed specifically for the older student and provides 12 lessons. 001587 Core Book . . . . . . . . . 34.95 001599 Student Workbook A . . 21.95 001589 Instructor's Guide A . . 17.95 001556 Student Workbook B . . 21.95 001510 Instructor's Guide B . . 17.95 001577 Poetry for Older Beginners Student Workbook. . . . 21.95 001553 Poetry for Older Beginners Instructor's Guide . . . . 17.95

ered. Because the emphasis of the course is on judicial rhetoric ­ the rhetoric of the courtroom ­ a concurrent study of a beginning level logic text (i.e. Traditional Logic I) is recommended. The non-consumable Herodotus core text (pb) is required and the completion of Diogenes: Chreia is recommended. The Answer Key is a non-consumable paperback with answers to most of the Herodotus' exercises and space for teacher's notes. The Student Guide is consumable, highly recommended and only available as a PDF download (classicalwriting.com). 30 weeks. ~ Janice 006166 Core Book . . . . . . . . . 44.95 006171 Answer Key. . . . . . . . . 11.95

CW Intermediate: Diogenes: Maxim (7-12) This is the third book in the series, covering beginning essay writing with models from great COMPREhEnSIvE SuPPLEMEnTS speeches, letters, and essays as well as maxims These materials cover both writing and from Ben Franklin, Diogenes, Erasmus, and othgrammar, but they are more supplemental ers. Provides 34 weeks/lessons. Student Guide in scope. includes a partial answer key (no additional key needed). 001442 Diogenes Core Book . . 29.95 Spectrum Language Arts (K-6) Hefty worktexts cover mechanics (capitaliza001455 Student Guide . . . . . . . 29.95 tion, punctuation), usage, and grammar in approximately 50 two-page lessons plus periCW Intermediate: Diogenes: Chreia (8+) For the advancing essay writer, Book IV includes odic reviews. A Writer's Handbook section with selections from Sophocles, Aeschylus, Seneca, ten writing lessons is also included, along with early church fathers, Robert Louis Stevenson, complete answer keys. These are very compreand Alexander Schmemann. Emphasis is on hensive but inexpensive texts that can be used expository essay writing with emphasis on alongside Writing Strands or another writing development of both thesis statements and topic program for a complete English course. Revised sentences. Student Guide is consumable. 24 for 2007, the series features a revised sequence of skills and more nonfiction activities. weeks/lessons w/ answer key. ~ Janice The two newest additions to this series are kin044966 Chreia Core Book . . . . 29.95 044967 Chreia Student Guide 29.95 dergarten and first grade and are aligned to state & national standards. Written at a grade appropriate level, the kindergarten workbook covers CW Intermediate: Poetry (8+) To be used in conjunction with the Diogenes parts of speech (nouns, verbs, pronouns), capibooks over two years, Intermediate Poetry builds talization (I, names, first word in a sentence), on and reviews the foundation laid in Poetry punctuation (periods & question marks), while for Beginners with a focus on Romantic and still working on the alphabet, letter sounds, and Victorian poets ­ Shelley, Byron, Wordworth, more. Chapter 5 is a `writer's guide' in which Tennyson, and Stevenson ­ also touching on students will practice using telling words, proofGilbert and Sullivan, Longfellow, Shakespeare, reading, and writing a friendly letter. The first and Tolkien. Beowulf is studied extensively. grade book covers parts of speech (common Covers alliteration, refrain, hyperbole, dactylic & proper nouns, verbs, pronouns, adjectives), and anapestic meters, limericks and ballads with types of sentences (statements, questions, exclaboth lyrical and narrative analysis and imitation. mations, combining sentences), capitalization Student Guide is consumable. 16 weeks/6 units (first word in a sentence, I, names, places, days, months), punctuation (period, question mark, w/ answer key. ~ Janice 045738 Int. Poetry Core Book 22.95 commas in dates/cities & states, apostrophes), 045739 Int. Poetry Student Gd 22.95 subject-verb agreement, contractions, irregular & past tense verbs, plurals, pronouns I and me, synonyms, antonyms and more. The `writer's CW Advanced: Herodotus (9+) Emphasis is on argumentative essay writing guide' for grade one takes students through the and analysis with advanced treatment of intro- steps of writing a paper ­ planning, writing, ductory and concluding paragraphs. Covers revising, proofreading, publishing, and writing selections from Herodotus' Histories, the Greek a friendly letter. The answer key is found at the myths, Athanasius' On the Incarnation of the back of the books. These books are done in a Word of God, Bede's Ecclesiastical History visually appealing format, with wide lines, cute of the English People, and Aeschylus' trilogy graphics, and a good amount of white space The Oresteia among others. It's suggested that so they aren't visually overwhelming for young the student read through many of these classic learners. 6.95 works during the school year. Accordingly, this EACH WORKTEXT . . . . . . . . . . 9.95 008643 Grade 4 course would constitute two semesters of high 026420 Grade K 026388 Grade 1 008645 Grade 5 school literature and writing. 008646 Grade 6 Modern paragraph conventions, how to write 008641 Grade 2 proper citations, and timed essays are also cov- 008642 Grade 3 See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

Standard Deviants English (3-12) You may have seen or heard of the Standard Deviants before on PBS and know how entertaining and educational they are. If not, you might just have to try these DVDs for yourself. Basically, on each DVD a team of young adults tackles a big subject such as grammar, physics, or a foreign language. They break it down, rule by rule and concept by concept, and present both written and spoken examples as well as little skits to reinforce the concept. The result? Well, to me it seemed like something like a Sesame Street for "big kids." One critic followed this same line of thought by calling it "something between Sesame Street and Saturday Night Live." Widely acclaimed both in the classroom and at home, these programs keep the kids riveted and entertained. Don't overlook their educational content, though. Written by a team of academic professionals, it only looks like these concepts are being presented in such an understandable way by clever, intuitive teens. While every minute of the programs build on an educational concept, they work in as much fun as possible too. Often the mini-skits, or background stories are spoofs of a well-known show or movie, such as Indiana Jones in the Algebra 1 DVD. While not providing the student an abundance of practice with a concept, they don't gloss over a subject, with the resulting DVD being between an hour or two in length. And, of course, being a DVD, if they didn't catch something the first time, they can always back up and watch again. Keeping a pencil and paper handy is suggested, as well as the small cards they've included with the basic rules, concepts, and maybe some extra problems. So, if you're having trouble teaching a certain subject, or they're having trouble understanding a subject, sit them down with one of these. Chances are they'll not only learn the concepts, they'll have them permanently ingrained, too! The English series covers grammar, punctuation, and public speaking. English Grammar 1 includes parts of speech, common and proper nouns, pronouns, verbs and verb tenses, prepositions, prepositions, conjunctions, interjections, sentences and sentence structure, and is 93 minutes. Grammar Part 2 covers the rules of grammar including changes in tense, proper agreement, independent clauses, and also covers commonly made grammatical mistakes. 56 minutes. Punctuation Part 1 introduces the complex and often-misunderstood rules of punctuation and proper placement of periods, exclamation points, commas, and question marks, to improve the student's writing. 60 minutes. Punctuation Part 2 covers the lesser-used punctuation marks such as dashes, hyphens, slashes, brackets, ellipses, as well as rules for quotations and more. 57 minutes. The English Composition DVD covers everything you need to know about English composition: stating and supporting a position, free writing, purpose, journals, outlining, getting feedback, the thesis statement, paraphrasing, the conclusion and a whole lot more. You'll feel a real boost in confidence after going through this award winning 2 hour 15 minute program. We also offer packs which combine several DVDs on each topic, in case you want the "whole package." (continued...) English / Writing 273

English Grammar: 035543 DVD 2-Pack . . . . . . 35.99 English Punctuation: 035545 DVD 2-Pack . . . . . . 35.99

28.95 28.95

English Composition: 026055 Writing Basics DVD 19.99 15.95 026019 English DVD 3-Pack 53.99 42.95 Includes Grammar Part 1 (Grammar For All), Punctuation Part 1, and English Composition (Writing Basics). 018874 Public Speaking DVD19.99 15.95 An hour-long program on how to organize your thoughts, share them persuasively, finish with flair, and use your own style. 026020 Enormous English DVD 5-Pack . . . . . . . . . . 84.99 66.50 Includes English Grammar Parts 1 & 2, English Punctuation Parts 1 & 2, and English Composition (Writing Basics) DVDs. ~~~~~~~~~~~

ENGLISH POWER BASICS (6-12) Like the Science and Social Studies Power Basics, this series provides the essentials of a junior or senior high level curriculum contentwise (adhering to NSE standards), but is more user-friendly than traditional textbooks, written a 4th grade reading level, and features explanations that apply skills to daily life, step-bystep lessons with clearly defined examples, and workbook activities that provide frequent practice and review while supporting different learning styles. The program has four components: student book, workbook, teacher's guide, and test packet. The student book serves as the textbook and features lessons that follow a consistent format: a list of vocabulary words to know, instructional text that presents essential information in short, easy-to-understand sections, and a set of questions that lets students apply what they've just learned. Additional features of the student book include reviews (multiple choice and fill-in-the-blank) after each unit, additional application activities, critical thinking exercises, hints to help students remember specific pieces of information, explanations about how the material connects to real life, and a few illustrations and charts. The workbook provides of variety of practice and extension activities for each lesson in the student book. These are particularly geared towards different learning styles and answers are provided in a separate key. Types of exercises include fill-in-the-blank, short answer, rewriting sentences, reading comprehension, multiple choice, and more. 274 English / Writing

The Teacher Guide gives an overview of each unit in the student book, with suggestions for additional extension activities as well as a complete answer key to all the practice activities & unit reviews. Also provided is a chart showing how to correlate the textbook material with the workbook activities. The Test Packet includes a pre-test, post-test and a unit test for each unit in the student text. This packet also includes suggestions for testing students who do not test well, along with testtaking strategies for both the Power Basics series and standardized testing. Single Packs include the Student Book, the Workbook & Key, the Teacher's Guide, and the Test Pack. Though not as strong or challenging as most curriculums, this series (from a secular publisher) is perfect for students who get overwhelmed with the length and complexity of traditional E-Z English (7-12) textbooks, but still need an established course This workbook, formerly titled English the to learn the basic English skills they need in life. Easy Way is full of examples and review exercises to teach or refresh memory in different Basic English Power Basics areas of English. Although the book was written Covers parts of speech, parts of a sentence, specifically for adult students who want an allusage, and mechanics. inclusive self-help program in English, the easy033174 Student . . . . . . . . . . 26.00 19.95 to-read text and step-by-step explanations and 033173 Wkbk w/ Answer Key16.00 12.50 examples make it accessible to much younger 033176 Teacher Guide. . . . . . 7.00 5.95 students. The book builds upon itself, starting 033177 Test Pack w/ Ans Key21.00 16.25 with complete sentences and moving on to dif041170 Single . . . . . . . . . . . 61.00 43.95 ferent tenses, parts of speech, descriptive words and phrases, linking verbs, word agreement, Intro to Composition Power Basics pronouns, balanced sentences, punctuation, Covers sentences, paragraphs, essays, the writ- the different formats of different styles of writing process, and editing. ing, word usage, and much more. A chapter on 033201 Student . . . . . . . . . . 26.00 19.95 spelling is included with a large list of commonly 033198 Wkbk w/ Ans Key . . 16.00 12.50 misspelled words, as is a chapter on vocabulary 033199 Teacher Guide. . . . . . 7.00 5.95 with tips on how using more exciting or precise 033200 Test Pack w/ Ans Key21.00 16.25 words leads to better writing. Instruction is given 041177 Single . . . . . . . . . . . 61.00 43.95 in a conversational tone, with plenty of examples of correct English. While describing and Everyday English Power Basics giving examples of English concepts in an easy Covers the English needed in everyday life like to understand way, the book provides review how to find information you need, finding a exercises to practice those skills and actually place to live, cooking, keeping track of money, use the rules being taught. Several small (5-10 etc. This program has an optional Practice Pack, questions) practice sections are included in each which features additional application activities chapter where students complete sentences, fill similar to the ones found in the student text. in blanks, identify different elements of writings, 041793 Student Book. . . . . . 26.00 19.95 and more to get a hands-on review of the infor041794 Workbook & Key. . . 16.00 12.50 mation given. After reviewing several topics, the 041795 Teacher's Guide . . . . 7.00 5.95 book provides a cumulative review, with a total 041796 Test Pack . . . . . . . . 21.00 16.25 of four cumulative reviews and one final review 041791 Single Pack (set of 4 above) in the book. These tests include multiple-choice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61.00 43.95 questions and exercises where students must 041792 Practice Pack . . . . . 16.00 12.50 identify English aspects in writings or pick the ~~~~~~~~~~~ correct way to finish a sentence. After each cumulative review is a skills assessment page that shows students which skills they did well in and which ones need more attention. The easy to follow explanations and examples of terms throughout the book will make it easy for students to understand various elements of English. All of the answers to the practice sections and tests are included. This is a great source for independent learning about English, although it is clearly a review or supplement and not a complete curriculum. The book is perfect for an overall review of English concepts and is especially useful to ensure coverage and knowledge of important English topics before standardized or college testing. 292 pgs, pb. ~ Rachel 021554 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.99 12.25 See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

WRITInG PROGRAMS These materials may offer some light grammar instruction, but the focus is primarily on writing of all types. Comprehensive Writing Programs These materials include both instruction and writing assignments. INSTITUTE FOR EXCELLENCE IN WRITING PROGRAMS (IEW) (2-AD) Teaching Writing Structure & Style (TWSS) Video Seminar (2-11) If you want a right-out-of-the-box, hand-it-toyour-child-and-go writing program, look elsewhere in our catalog. This is not the product for you. If, on the other hand, you are looking for an overall approach to writing instruction for years to come, a product that will make you a good writing coach and improve your own writing skills along the way, a general outline that will guide you in teaching composition at all levels but will leave the specifics up to you, then check this out. The main course is a 10-hour, 6 DVD set, with accompanying seminar and practicum workbook (syllabus), for the TEACHER, not the student. Also included is a 3-DVD set of student workshops; more on this later. The seminar DVDs features Andrew Pudewa, homeschooling father of seven, giving the presentation that he normally shares in two-day seminars around the country. He feels that if teachers possess proper skills for writing, they will be able to pass along these skills to their students. The workbook (and even the entire course) is more often referred to as a syllabus, that is, an outline for teaching writing. The writing seminar covers two basic components of composition - structure and style. Structure is the type of writing and the method of organizing the writing. Structure is divided into nine units: Note Taking and Outlines, Summarizing from Notes, Summarizing Narrative Stories, Summarizing a Reference, Writing from Pictures, Library Research Reports, Creative Writing, Essay Writing, and Critiques. These may be used in the order presented, or you may use the unit that most suits your needs at the time. Style, on the other hand, is taught throughout the units, one technique at a time. Style includes such things as varying the sentence opening, using similes and metaphors, or repeating certain words for effect. The author feels that teaching style is more like teaching art or music than math or science. The idea is to help students develop a creative flow of well-conceived thoughts. Like playing the piano, some students will master a lot of the material quickly, while other students will master only a portion of the material, but all will achieve variety and competence in expression. He also stresses a separation of the flow of ideas from mechanics (grammar, spelling and penmanship); both are important, but most people can only do one at a time. The writing instruction methods gleaned from this seminar can be used with students from first grade on up; in subsequent years, you go through the same material and expect continued improvement in the student. The program also

attempts to address common problems among writing teachers: overcorrecting, not giving enough help when needed, unclear assignments, and over-expectation. It is designed to help you bring the best out in your student, and to not overemphasize the negatives. The Student Workshop DVDs are three short, one-hour workshops where three grade-level groupings of students are being taught by the author using this approach. Although the focus of these workshops is on the introductory units, this should give you confidence as well as presentation ideas. This is far and away the most expensive writing program in our catalog. Is it worth the price? Many satisfied (and even enthusiastic!) customers think so. I like the last two sentences in the dedication in the workbook. "The pen indeed is mightier than the sword, for it is in the written word that we do most powerfully preserve that which is noble and expose that which is evil. And so in great part, the very future of society rests with those who can write, and write well." Student Writing Intensive is the student-oriented counterpart to this program. If you are interested in purchasing a level of Student Writing Intensive along with TWSS, we offer combo packages at a reduced price. Please see below (after Student Writing Intensive) for prices. 012487 TWSS w/ ALL 3 Student Workshops on DVD . . . . . . . . . . . 169.00 Includes both items listed below: #32562, #32561, and Tips & Tricks DVD. 032562 TWSS DVD Set w/ All 3 Student Workshops (no SW/Syllabus) 145.00 Includes all TWSS DVDs, but no Student Syllabus/Workbook. 032561 TWSS Student Workbook & Syllabus only (no DVDs) 35.00 042560 Tips & Tricks DVD (3-12) 10.00 After years of gathering information from those using TWSS as well as his own experiences talking to homeschooling parents, Andrew Pudewa has put together a DVD/ lecture that passes along supplementary information for using his writing program. Now included as part of the TWSS program, it's also available separately. ~ Janice 044600 Structure and Style Overview DVD (AD) . . . . . . . . . 10.00 You might think of this 2 hr, 20 min DVD as TWSS Lite. Andrew Pudewa provides a brief introductory overview of the nine units of his Teaching Writing Structure & Style seminar/methodology along with several stylistic techniques. The DVD also provides accompanying seminar handouts. While it's still preferred that those using the themebased writing lessons experience the master TWSS seminar, this condensed version is perfect for parents of students taking classes using the IEW methods. ~ Janice Student Writing Intensive - SWI (4-10+) Materials in this series (SWI) are addressed to the student where the Teaching Writing: Structure and Style (TWSS) program addresses the parent/teacher. This is a 10-hour video class in which students watch the first segment, then complete an assignment on their own. Follow-up assignments should be given until the student becomes comfortable with the model

and checklist. Students then go on to the next segment, and so on. Materials are available in three grade ranges: A for grades 4 to 5; B for grades 6-7; and C for grades 8-10+. If you have students in more than one range, the author recommends "shooting for the middle". Content of courses for younger students is based more on the types of writing the student would do, but concepts presented would apply to students of any age. Each course includes five DVDs (Structure & Style Overview disc was added in 2012) for course presentation and one student notebook per level. Student materials include lesson plans, instructions, handouts, and forms, all in a 3-ring binder. Student materials are also available separately. We also offer a combo package that includes the TWSS seminar for teacher/parents and the SWI seminar for students. Student 016667 016668 016669 Student 001583 001733 001738 Writing Group Group Group Intensive on DVD A (4-5) . . . . . . . B (6-7) . . . . . . . C (8-11) . . . . . . 109.00 109.00 109.00 19.00 19.00 19.00

Materials only Group A (4-5) . . . . . . . Group B (6-7) . . . . . . . Group C (8-11) . . . . . .

Teaching Writing: Structure and Style/Student Writing Intensive Combo Sets on DVD 016670 Set A (4-5) . . . . . . . . . 249.00 016671 Set B (6-7). . . . . . . . . . 249.00 016672 Set C (8-11). . . . . . . . . 249.00 Student Intensive Continuation Course (4-11) This ten-week course picks up right where the Student Writing Intensive course leaves off. Students use the same notebook and charts, and receive review as well as new instruction in models and techniques not previously presented in SWI. Along with the source material for each lesson, student checklists and teacher grading sheets are provided. Each session is 90-110 minutes long, and includes humor, direct instruction, in-class exercises, modeling, and discussion. The challenging assignments take between 3-7 days to complete. An assignment overview list is provided to help make each week's goal as clear as possible. This course is offered at three levels, with the corresponding SWI course as a prerequisite to the courses. Course A focuses on strengthening dress-ups, sentence openers, writing from pictures, and writing reports. Course B expands style into decorations and advanced dress-ups and presents the five paragraph model. Course C is quite rigorous and goes through all the advanced style techniques, as well as the extended essay, super essay, persuasive essay, and the personal essay for college applications. Each level consists of ten classes on nine DVD discs, one printed packet of student materials, and one CD-ROM containing the course materials for all three levels, which can be printed out freely for use with any number of students. [Description paraphrased from IEW material.] EACH COURSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199.00 018270 Course A (4-5) 018271 Course B (6-7) 018272 Course C (8-11) English / Writing 275

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

Elegant Essay (7-12) Suppose your junior or senior high student has been through Level B or C of the Student Writing Intensive (SWI) seminar and has a good understanding of how to write a paragraph using topic and clincher sentences. He may even have a little bit of experience with essay writing but you feel he needs more instruction and practice with essays. This course is for you! Focusing specifically on the structure and content of essay writing, it's an extension and refinement of IEW's Unit VIII (the formal essay). Utilizing a four-step teaching strategy which includes preliminary instruction, modeling, practice with help, and "on your own" work, this ten-week course by Lesha Myers takes the student step-bystep through the essay-writing process. Teaching units include thesis statements, essay organization, transitions, introductions, and conclusions and end with descriptive and persuasive essay practice. Revised for 2011, the Teacher's Manual is now separate from the Student Book and includes additional teacher material specifically useful for co-op classes ­ class schedules and more information on teaching methods. Student Books contain the student pages from the previous edition with additional pages for taking class notes. The two books are designed to be interactive, and both are required to complete the course successfully. 035995 Teacher/Student Set . . . 49.00 004177 Student Only. . . . . . . . 29.00

Student Book for each topic/lesson. A four-step teaching methodology is employed: preliminary instruction, modeling, practice with help, and on your own. Grading rubrics for specific skills are provided as well as general philosophical information on grading papers. A satisfying number of models are provided to help the insecure paper-grading homeschool mom/teacher (Yay!). The Student Book, written directly to the student in Lesha Myers' warm, personal style, is also a worktext and reference manual. Appendices include teaching models from the various chapters. Purchase of the course entitles its owner to a free download of Graphic Organizers and Grading Sheets & Checklists (e-books). Student ­ 268 pgs, Teacher ­ 188 pgs, both spiral-bound. ~ Janice 051642 Teacher/Student. . . . . . 49.00 051641 Student . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.00 High School Essay Intensive (9-12) College-bound high school students are expected to write essays. Of the many, there are two essays that are "once-in-a-lifetime" experiences ­ the SAT essay and the college entrance essay. These are very specific types of writing tasks and are quite different. One is a timed response to a prompt. It must be completed quickly, coherently, and legibly. On the other hand, you can take as much time as you want writing the other. It must be as close to perfect as possible. You can prepare for these writing experiences. Andrew Pudewa, in his own inimitable style, shows you how in this entertaining, six-hour seminar. This video seminar is contained within a four DVD set ­ two discs each covering the SAT essay and the college entrance essay. There is a bonus CD-ROM disc providing all the necessary handouts in PDF format to be printed prior to watching. Also included on the bonus disc is an audio essay preparation seminar by Julie Walker in MP3 format. Discussion of the SAT essay includes an examination of the six-point scoring rubric ­ critical thinking skills, reasoning examples, language and vocabulary, sentence structure, organization and focus, and grammar, usage and mechanics ­ as well as analysis of scored essays and specific preparation strategies. Starting with an overview of what colleges are looking for in essays, the discussion of the college entrance essay progresses to an analysis of samples as well as specific writing strategies including the TRIAC model. As expected, the most important preparation activity for these two types of essays is to write ­ a lot. You can, nevertheless, make the best use of your preparation writing activities by utilizing the strategies presented in this seminar. ~ Janice 035996 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79.00 College Bound Student Package (10-12) This package includes the following items: Advanced Communication Series 3-DVD Set, Elegant Essay Teacher/Student Combo, High School Essay Intensive, and Blue Book of Grammar and Punctuation. See catalog for individual descriptions. CLGBND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211.95 187.25

IEW HISTORY-BASED WRITING LESSONS History-Based Writing Lessons (3-12) Do you love the Institute for Excellence in Writing (IEW) method of teaching writing but find yourself unable (due to time or confidence) to take the next step in preparing and providing writing instruction for your children? These writing lessons have been developed for busy parents and teachers like you. An IEW veteran and aficionado myself, I couldn't conceive of anything more complete than what Lori Verstegen has provided here. Each lesson offers comprehensive (just short of totally scripted) instruction. All necessary source texts are provided and are reproducible for one parent/one homeschool or one teacher/one classroom. Successful brainstorming is ensured by the inclusion of sample class whiteboards. Clear assignments (sometimes differentiated between levels) along with a checklist to aid both the student in preparation and the parent in grading are reproducible and designed to be handed to the student to work on throughout the week. Based on events in various segments of history, the lessons include grammar exercises, vocabulary development, quizzes, and games for review and reinforcement. In all lessons students are encouraged to polish their final draft perhaps even adding illustrations. At the end of each course the student will have a personal portfolio collection of poems, stories, reports, essays and research papers that move through major events in history. Lessons are taught at the beginning of each week allowing the rest of the week for students to complete the assignment which they should be able to do on their own. Teacher preparation is minimal. (Do I hear an emphatic "Yes!"?) The courses are targeting a progressively more competent student with the assumption that students are working through the courses in this order: Ancient, Medieval, US Vol. 1, and US Vol 2. Therefore, there is an increasing complexity to the instructions, expectations, and assignments. Accordingly, teachers are encouraged to be flexible with plans. The beginning writer may need to spend more than the suggested week on difficult lessons or omit some of the grammar. Mature students may move more quickly to allow time for additional research writing and/or more creative essay writing. These courses can be used equally well within a homeschool with several different aged students or in a co-op/support school setting with more grade-specific groupings of students. It's assumed that parents/teachers have completed Teaching Writing Structure & Style (TWSS), IEW's DVD seminar for parents and teachers. Students familiar with IEW's writing method through the Student Writing Intensive (SWI) seminars could probably start with any volume of this series, but it's strongly recommended that students complete US Vol. 1 before US Vol. 2. The Student Resource Packet included with US Vol. 1 is to be assembled into a 1/2" three-ring binder on the first day of class and includes the following: a chart of IEW Stylistic Techniques; IEW Models of Structure; mini-thesaurus of great verbs, adjectives, and adverbs; IEW decorations with practice worksheets; grammar rules with practice worksheets; list of transition words and phrases and other class handouts; and vocabulary cards. US History Vol. 2 assumes the stu-

Writing Research Papers: Essential Tools (9-12) Some might have thought there was a "hole" in the IEW line-up of writing instruction. But no longer! If your students have proven adept at writing essays but not quite made the jump into research-based writing, perhaps it's because you've been "waiting" for this course. Regardless, I'm sure I'm not the only one that is happy to see a detailed instruction manual for research papers coming from IEW. I'm especially thrilled to see such thorough and comprehensive step-by-step instruction through three increasingly difficult levels of research papers ­ beginning (11-12 week course covering essential writing tools), intermediate (9 week course covering essential research tools), and advanced (a stand alone course covering advanced research tools). A teaching time schedule is provided for each of these three parts. The topics you would expect are here ­ notetaking, outlining, thesis development, citations/ quotations, plagiarism, revision. But some topics you don't always see are here as well ­ "prompt" analysis, evaluating online research, and incorporating style, for instance. The Teacher Book is written with the idea that the teacher/parent may not consider writing to be her strength ­ providing detailed lesson plans that interweave with the information in the 276 English / Writing

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

dent has a copy of the Vol. 1 Student Resource Pack, so that will need to be purchased even if you are starting with Vol. 2. One packet is included with each US History Vol. 1 course and is reproducible for one homeschool or one teacher/one classroom. These packets are also available separately for additional students. US History Vol. 2 includes a reproducible Student Book (loose-leaf sheets to be assembled into a binder) that is also available separately for additional students. Each US History student will need a 1/2" three-ring binder with eight divider tabs (for student resource packet), a 1" threering binder with five divider tabs, and access to a thesaurus (author prefers The Synonym Finder, but you can use electronic). By week seven of Vol. 1, students will need the book If You Lived in Colonial Times or another book describing aspects of colonial life. The teacher will need access to a copy machine for student handouts, a large whiteboard and dry erase markers, a Student Resource Packet assembled into a 1/2" binder, and a roll of tickets (available at office supply stores) - optional but very useful for encouragement and motivation. Similar information, reproducible for homeschools and classrooms, is included in the Ancient History and Medieval History manuals but are distributed as needed throughout the lessons. In these two courses, instruction is written to the students, but teachers should read over the lessons with the students and help as necessary, especially with outlining and brainstorming. ~ Janice Ancient History-Based Writing Lessons (3-7) Starts with two poetry lessons and continues using source texts touching on ziggurats, Gilgamesh, pyramids, mummies, the Trojan horse, Olympics, Ancient Rome, persecution of Christians, and more. 21 lessons. 023582 Teacher/Student Set . . . 49.00 023581 Student only 3rd Ed . . . 29.00 Medieval History-Based Writing Lessons 2nd Ed. (4-8) Lessons featuring Medieval History themes including Byzantine Empire, Mohammed, Charlemagne, Battle of Hastings, Knights, King Arthur, Lady Godiva (actually a story about tax relief), Genghis Khan, Marco Polo and Men of the Reinaissance among others incrementally teach all the IEW models of structure and elements of style. Vocabulary cards, quizzes, and games are included. 29 lessons, revised - now made up of a teacher/student set with the student book also available separately. 041246 Teacher/Student Set. . . 49.00 033849 Student only.. . . . . . . . 29.00 US History-Based Writing Lessons Vol 1 (4-9) Explorers to Gold Rush ­ people and events. Designed to be taught in weekly class sessions (about 1.5 hr. each) with students completing assignments over the remainder of the week. Instruction can be broken into smaller segments if desired. Topics include colonial life, war for independence (Bill of Rights, Boston Tea Party), biographies, the Lewis and Clark expedition, the Oregon Trail, the Trail of Tears, and more. 32 lessons. Revised edition. 032557 Writing Lessons & Packet 49.00 032558 Additional Student Packet 29.00

Recommended Resources: 004017 Synonym Finder. . . . 18.99 017728 If You Lived in Colonial Times . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.99

13.25 5.25

US History-Based Writing Lessons Vol 2 (8-12) Civil War Era to Present Day. This is a continuation of the Vol. 1 course with increasing complexity of lessons and assignments requiring sophisticated research and documentation. Writing assignments include topics such as slavery, invention, industrialization, WWI, communism, the Great Depression, WWII, civil rights, and more. You will need a Vol. 1 Student Resource Packet. 35+ lessons. 036000 Teacher and Student Set 49.00 036001 Additional Student Book 29.00 ~~~~~~~~~~~

Fables, Myths, and Fairy Tales (3-5) If you're a fan of Teaching Writing Structure and Style (TWSS) but don't want to spend your time creating lesson plans, it's nice to see more and more prepared writing lessons to choose from. Fables, Myths, and Fairy Tales by Maria Gerber is enjoyable from start to finish. Who doesn't love a good fairy tale or fable? As a parallel to Level A of Student Writing Intensive (SWI), this course covers TWSS units 1-7. Students will learn (in 27 lessons) how to take notes, summarize narrative stories, summarize references, write from pictures and compose their own fables, myths and fairy tales. This program also includes three public speaking opportunities ­ telling stories from key word outlines. This one volume serves as both teacher and student book and student pages can be reproduced for a family or classroom. The purchaser also has the option of one free downloadable copy of The Student Resource Notebook compiled by Lori Verstegen. ~ Janice 042556 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.00 Rockets, Radar & Robotics: Tech-Based Writing Lessons (5-8) Writing and boys often don't go together but technology and boys? That's a different story. These writing lessons will be right up your tech-y kid's alley ­ and girls are not excluded. The 30 lessons cover material like touchscreens, lasers, radar, iPods in the military, and much more. At the same time, they manage to cover all nine IEW units. Instruction, source texts, analysis, assignments, and checklists are all in one book which is designed to be used by students and teachers together. As usual, it's assumed that the teacher/parent will have viewed the TWSS for familiarity with the IEW approach. Purchase of the course entitles its owner to a free download of the optional Student Resource Notebook (e-book). 116 pgs, spiral-bound ~ Janice 051639 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.00 Geography-Based Writing Lessons (3-6) IEW units-based writing lessons using the Holling C. Holling books and Beautiful Feet's Literature Approach to Geography as source texts. An excellent way to extend the cross-curriculum value of this study. Spiral-bound, ~ Janice 051638 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.00 Bible-Based Writing Lessons (3-12) This writing program from the Institute for Excellence in Writing uses the Bible as source text. 30 lessons are included in a spiral-bound book with ready-made lesson plans, Scripture used as a subject for writing, and multi-level checklists. Each lesson provides a specific objective, at least two translations of Scripture, an assignment with checklists, and a space for the final copy to be written or pasted into the book, which creates a portfolio of the year's work. Checklists are provided for three different levels: elementary, intermediate, and senior. Sample compositions are plentiful, as well as vocabulary development and review exercises to strengthen understanding of stylistic techniques. The story of Noah forms the core of the first two units. Unit 3 focuses on sequencing and sources include the miracle at Cana, the parable of the talents, the story of Jonah, the Good Samaritan, and the Prodigal Son. Unit 4 English / Writing 277

IEW TOOLS FOR TEACHING WRITING THEME-BASED WRITING LESSONS Many of the Theme-Based Writing Lessons now have a student resource book available as an e-book from IEW with purchase of the correlating Theme-Based Writing Lessons book. If you order an applicable Theme-Based Writing product, you will find instructions for downloading the e-book portion inside the book. All Things Fun & Fascinating (3-5) What do crows, peacocks, and bird nest soup have in common? They're just a few of the fun and fascinating things that your student will WANT to write about. Another of Lori Verstegen's well organized sets of writing lesson plans based on the IEW methodology, this one is a "starter" level and within its 24 lessons (a year's worth) covers TWSS Units 1-7 (taking notes, summarizing narrative stories, writing from pictures, mini-research report, and creative writing) and several stylististic elements. Teacher prep is non-existent ­ you only need to read through the lessons with your student and be prepared to be "wowed" by their writing (and, of course, do a little evaluating). Lessons are designed to be completed over a week and have a similar structure ­ goal, review, stylistic lesson, and the week's assignments broken into daily chunks. Although your student will want to make a final portfolio copy of their writing assignments, all the preliminary work ­ outlines, brainstorming charts, along with checklists ­ are provided in the consumable, 159page spiral-bound text. Appendices include: banned words & prepositions and substitutes, -ly words. The purchaser may download an optional accompanying teacher e-book from the publisher's website. ~ Janice 044599 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.00

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

lessons have students read and summarize Paul on Charity, Jesus' Miracles, Christ's Last Words, along with stylistic exercises taken from Psalms. Custom pictures have been created for Unit 5 lessons (Esther, Daniel, Nativity, Paul's conversion), and Unit 6 uses the synoptic gospels to teach multiple reference summarizing. With Unit 7, a few creative writing opportunities are suggested, and Unit 8 continues the five paragraph model with essays on Job's suffering, Christ's condemnation by Pilate, and the duties of a Christian. Unit 9 presents an analysis of the books of Ruth and Jonah, as well as the story of David and Goliath. A great supplemental source for any writing curriculum. 022338 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.00 Following Narnia: Writing Lessons (5-8) An opportunity to dig into Narnia ­ not to mention related science and history topics. An opportunity to experience the writing associated with literary analysis. An opportunity to explore, practice, and perfect IEW writing skills. Using the IEW structural models, 31 lessons provide step-by-step analysis and writing instruction intertwined with reading assignments from three of the Narnia books ­ Magician's Nephew (11 lessons), The Lion, the Witch, and the Wardrobe (12 lessons), and The Horse and His Boy (8 lessons). Lessons are taught once a week with the rest of the week used for writing, editing, and rewriting. Covered skills include all nine IEW units plus dress-ups, sentence openers, and decorations as well as an in-depth section on word analysis (i.e. vocabulary). As with other IEW courses, both teacher and student are necessary components with the Student Book containing both instructional information and worktext space. Source texts (other than Narnia books) are provided. The Teacher Book guides the teacher/parent through each lesson, provides explanations, tips, and other notes, samples of student assignments, and includes reproducible masters for checklists and word analysis. There is no prerequisite for the student but it's expected that teacher/parents will have viewed the entire Teaching Writing Structure and Style workshop as well as keeping the syllabus handy. The Teacher Book references the TWSS. Teacher prep is very minimal and includes reading through the lesson instruction beforehand and reviewing the TWSS as necessary. Purchase of the Student or Teacher/Student entitles its owner to a free download of the optional Student Resource Notebook (e-book). Student ­ 136 pgs, Teacher ­ 107 pgs, both spiral-bound. ~ Janice 051637 Teacher/Student. . . . . . 49.00 051636 Student . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.00

Logic for Writers: Logic-Based Writing (5-12) 050364 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.00 Character-Based Writing Lessons (6-12) Would you like to combine writing lessons with quality biographical information that inspires and challenges your students? The twenty-four lessons in this course take you systematically through the various structure-building and stylistic skills associated with TWSS. Each of the nine TWSS units has 2-3 lessons featuring source texts from the lives of Mother Theresa, Abraham Lincoln, and St. Francis of Assisi. Also included are lessons on the key virtues of a strong character and the responsibilities of a Christian. Although written to the student, these lessons assume the oversight of a parent or teacher and a familiarity with the TWSS writing methods. Each lesson includes a checklist of the various elements to be included in the final written product. These checklists, which include three levels of difficulty (A, B, & C), are meant as guides. The lessons build upon previous lessons. Spaces for outlines (required for most writing assignments) are included in the workbook, but most students will find it more convenient to use separate paper. ~ Janice 041244 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.00 Economics-Based Writing Lessons (6-12) The IEW writing lessons are an excellent way to augment learning in one area ­ in this instance economics. There are 23 lessons covering the skills in all nine units at beginner, intermediate and advanced levels. Lesson material includes economic principles and theory, business practices, and entrepreneurialism with both U.S. and International scenarios. Teacher and student material is in one book. Parent/ teacher prerequisite: familiarity with Teaching Writing Structure and Style (TWSS). ~ Janice 046917 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.00 Classical Rhetoric through Structure and Style: Writing Lessons Based on the Progymnasmata (9-12) With the word "progymnasmata" showing up here and there, homeschoolers are becoming familiar with this collection of rhetorical exercises that has endured with success within the Western Tradition. This was the classical Greek method of building up the student's reasoning and articulation skills through a series of interrelated, rhetorical exercises. Learning to write and speak more persuasively is a worthwhile investment of time and energy for the advanced student who already has a firm grasp of grammar. This series of 31 lessons by Adam Muller assumes a familiarity with Teaching Writing Structure and Style and may be difficult to use without it. It's important to note that this is not a workbook intended to teach the student rhetoric. Rather, it is a teacher-oriented collection of lessons that the teacher can use to help teach rhetoric. Copies can be made for students in a family or classroom. A model check sheet is provided to help with grading. ~ Janice 042555 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.00

Life Science-Based Writing Lessons (9-12) Combining writing lessons with science is a very efficient use of time. Writing about something helps you learn it, or it can be more "up a student's alley" because science is a high interest topic. It can also convert a strong high school science course into an "honors" course. For all of these reasons, this course may work for your. The authors, Peter Swett and Danielle Olander (father and daughter), make no attempt to hide that they believe in a Creator God who fashioned a marvelous world out of nothing. In fact, they sought interesting stories and evidence of design and purpose in nature for resource texts. The lessons provide instruction and practice in all nine units of Teaching Writing: Structure and Style. Lessons are designed to be completed one per week. This volume is written to teacher and students (copies can be made for students in a family or classroom). ~ Janice 042557 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.00

INSTITUTE FOR EXCELLENCE IN WRITING SOURCE TEXTS AND RESOURCES Articles & Stories for Units 1 & 2 Just what you need to develop writing lessons following IEW's TWSS seminar for parents/ teachers. There are 39, short, one-page articles (reading level grades 1-4) which are simple to use and helpful for practice in note-taking, summarizing (Units I & II) and using dress-ups in the primary grades. Pages may be photocopied or laminated for home/classroom use. 011879. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.00 Great Natural Disasters CD-ROM (2-5) An interesting set of source texts covering natural disasters from all over the world. Suitable for elementary students, they are in full color and cover the first two units in TWSS. 46 pages. 041245 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.00 12.95 Mini-Book Set (A & B) Ideal for use in teaching IEW's Unit VI, each mini-book (3rd grade and up reading level) consists of five paragraphs showing clear topic/ clincher structure and following the stylistic techniques checklist. These 38 short texts containing factual information about various animals can be used singly or as a set to simulate a research process where multiple references would be fused. Reproducible. 034481 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.00 Pictures for Writing Created to help teach the writing from pictures model (Unit V) from the TWSS syllabus, these eighteen sets of three sequential pictures are printed on card stock for maximum durability, these drawings are reproducible with a simplicity and humor that nurtures creativity. Suggested outlines or sample stories for selected pictures are also provided. 011882 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.00 Student Resource Notebook (IEW) (7-12) 054172 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.00

278

English / Writing

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

Portable Walls (AD) Sometimes a product is so intuitively genius that one is spellbound. That's my reaction to this deceptively simple idea. First of all, it is a succinct summary of the really important stuff that is covered in the Student Writing Intensive seminars ­ unit synopses (models and checklists), dress-ups, sentence openers, decorations, and triple extensions. They've even managed to find a place to list all the "-ly" adverbs, synonyms for "said," strong verbs, etc. This is a great list to keep in mind while writing, and that brings us to the second aspect of genius in this product ­ the fact that you can stand it up right before you. In fact, by standing it becomes a sort of mini wall divider (hence the name ­ portable walls). Additionally, the whole affair can double as a carry-your-papers-to-co-op-class folder because there's an inside slip pocket for papers. There's enough basic and valuable information here that even if your student has never used IEW, their writing would probably improve just by setting up these "walls" and giving them a glance or two. ~ Janice 046432 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.00 A Word Write Now (6-12) Rarely has a book appealed more to me at first glance. Remaining uncluttered, the concept of "playing with words" is evident in the colorful, graphic font manipulations (lines of type that sway), the cute illustrations, and the lists wonderful, whimsical, but never wayward words. This is a book about choosing the right word when you write. I use the word "appealing" quite a bit, so I thought I would look through the lists in this book and find a new one. I quickly discovered that this little diction worktext did not include "appealing" in any of its lists (or at least not that I could find). That means that I could put it in a "my words" section on one of the list. Would it best go on the Cheerful Clown Fish page or the Exuberant Sea Otter page or perhaps under the Ways to Describe Appearance or the Ways of Speaking list? Confused yet? This not-quite-a-vocabulary program, not-quite-a-thesaurus ­ it's all about discovering just the right word to use when writing. It features structured word lists organized around Character Traits, Ways to Describe, and Ways to Move with a few miscellaneous lists thrown in for good measure. Each list contains nouns, adjectives, adverbs, and verbs. Students are encouraged to playfully interact with these lists with the goal of acquiring quality word choices to incorporate into their writing. Using games and family activities to become familiar with the layout and content of the book, students can then use it independently as they endeavor to interject more definitive word selections into their compositions. Interspersed throughout the book are "Quotes to Inspire Your Writing" taken from classic literature as well as biblical quotes designed to underscore whatever topic is the focus of that page's lists. The suggested grade levels for this product indicate it should be used by emerging writers ­ those who need to find exactly the right word ­ as they practice their writing skills. Such a student might scan the Generous Manatee list looking for "ly" words (abundantly, bounteously, copiously), or strong adjectives (exorbitant, magnanimous, plenteous) or verbs (showered,

bestowed) and feel quite empowered by the choices. However, I also think much younger children (upper elementary) could benefit from this book ­ becoming familiar with the lists, playing around with the words, etc. I can also easily imagine using this book myself as I seek alternatives to my overused word choices. At less than 100 pages, one might think this spiral-bound volume by Loranna Schwaeofer published by IEW is a bit pricey. Although it is reproducible for one homeschooling family or classroom, some of the colorful charm will be lost. Also, each student may want to personalize his own well-worn copy. The fact is, I know of nothing else quite like it ­ an opportunity to build one's vocabulary, a tool for strengthening one's ability to write with style, and a delightful immersion into the world of words. ~ Janice 036002 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.00 Fix It! Grammar and Editing Made Easy with Classics (3-12) If you've been wondering what to use for grammar alongside your IEW material, the problem is solved. Fix Its are passages from well-loved books ­ 132 per book to be precise. Working on 1 passage per day, students look for and correct embedded grammar errors and learn a new vocabulary word. As added reinforcement for the IEW methodology, students are also expected to identify Dress-Ups and Sentence Openers (part of the IEW writing style instruction). By using stories, students are exposed to great classic literature and become eager to read the originals. Because there is a continuing story line, the daily grammar edits become fun and entertaining as well as challenging. The 132-passage sets (a year's worth; 33 wks of 4 per week) come from 5 different stories each with a recommended grade level: Tom Sawyer (grades 3-6), Frog Prince, or Just Desserts (grades 4-8), The Little Mermaid (grades 6-9), The King and the Discommodious Pea (grades 7-10), and Sir Gawain and the Green Knight (grades 9-12). Accordingly, this one book provides daily grammar edits for five years or for multi-age students. Each series of passages starts out with an introduction to both the grammatical content and the story as well as providing background information on the story and its author. Each student will need a dictionary. It's also assumed that the student and teacher will be familiar with either the Teaching Writing Structure & Style or the Student Writing Intensive seminars from IEW. However, the Fix It edits can be done as a stand-alone program. The Fix It manual is intended as a teacher resource. The passages to be edited are presented in parallel columns with the corrected version. These can be presented to students on a blackboard/ whiteboard or as an overhead for a classroom situation or worked on paper for individual students. Student worksheets with the uncorrected sentences are available in e-book format on the IEW website (all access information is included in the Fix-It manual). The manual's appendix is extensive and includes IEW writing style techniques (Dress-Ups, Sentence Openers, and Advanced Style), reference guide for Grammar & Mechanics and Abbreviations, Proofreading Symbols, Samples of Student Work and In Class Teacher Corrections, and an Index. ~ Janice 040025 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.00

Two Andrews: On Writing & Teaching Writing DVD (9-12) Hmmm. I think you would call this series of DVD lectures "in-service training". Don't we need a certain number of credits each year? Oh, wait! I'm getting us homeschoolers confused with the other guys. Nevertheless, these are wonderful lectures. From Andrew Pudewa's description of the four arts of language (yes, just four, not the umpteen that we normally think of) ­ listening, speaking, reading, and writing ­ to Andrew Kern's lost tools of writing, these lectures are inspiring; they're insightful; and they're practical. The Christian, classical home educator will find herself recommitted to the development of strong language skills in her children as well as better able to facilitate that development. The three DVD set provides five lectures plus a question and answer period with both Andrews. Lectures: The Four Language Arts, The Five Paths to Great Writing, The Distinctives of Classical Rhetoric, Developing the Essayist, and Assessment. Handouts to the lectures can be downloaded from the IEW website. ~ Janice 049916 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39.00 Blended Structure & Style in Composition (2-10) Having noticed that many students entering university do not know how to write, and seeing how the first grade students at his school were writing better stories than the fourth grade students caused James Webster to take action, resulting in this writing course. Wanting it to be useful for a wide range, the author has divided the course into eight stages. Each new stage builds upon the last, and for that reason he recommends beginning with unit one for all skill levels (primary through university) and working through each of the units in order. Yes, that is a wide range of levels; the author says the grades and units work best in the following way. Units one through three are appropriate for grade one. Grade two students should start with unit one in September and have completed unit five by June. Grade three should do units one through seven and grade four units one through nine in a similar time span. Higher grades complete all of the units, and when teaching this course to high school students, the first five units should be completed in ten weeks. In the higher grades, more time (at least a month per unit for the last half of the book) is recommended. So what about these eight different stages, what does the author begin with and how does he progress through the writing levels? Unit one starts with the basics of note taking and outlines. Unit two teaches summarizing from notes, skills of limiting in note taking, and adapting note taking and style. Unit three discusses summarizing narrative stories. Unit four focuses on summarizing references. In unit five, students learn writing from a series of pictures. Unit six covers library research reports and stressing the process, using a mini-book series. Unit seven looks at creative writing (continued...) English / Writing 279

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

and in unit eight students reach the "pinnacle" of writing skills - essay writing and university essay writing. Unit nine contains critiques of narrative stories and novels and a final chapter about the writing syllabus. Although this is a book written for a classroom setting, it can be adapted to a homeschool fairly easily. For the younger grades, it is better for the teacher to read through the book, explain ideas and new skills, and assign work. Upper grade students can use the book directly, reading the text for themselves, discussing and working on projects as appropriate. A thorough "how to" resource, this volume teaches practical methods rather than just a philosophy. Examples crowd the pages, so students should always be able to pick up on the skill that is being taught. This is a very thorough course on structure and style and the definitive reference for TWSS teachers and those with advanced students. ~ Zach 022339 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.00 ~~~~~~~~~~~ WRITING STRANDS (PK-AD) Author Dave Marks believes that kids become good writers by ... writing! Not by doing endless diagramming or laboring over parts of speech worksheets. He eloquently equates the process of learning to write to learning to ride a bicycle ... you get on and ride, not spend weeks, months, or years labeling the parts of a bicycle on worksheets! Mr. Marks has 27 years of experience teaching in high school and college and also homeschooled his son using this approach (yes, his son did become a writer!). The four strands of writing (argumentative, explanatory, creative and report) are explained, modeled, and practiced throughout the 8 levels. Beginning in level 3, the author speaks directly to the student, a nice touch because Mr. Marks has a tongue-in-cheek humor that makes learning to write enjoyable! We have used this program effectively. Most children begin this program in level 3. Older children may progress more quickly through the lower levels. Dave promises that "A child, at whatever age, having worked through level eight, would be ready for college-level writing." 005181 Writing Strands 1 (PK-1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.00 11.45 This level is mainly for the teacher. It is a fun and amusing collection of oral games and exercises to motivate and interest children in the use of language. Includes CD. 001831 Writing Strands 2. . . 20.00 15.50 003786 Writing Strands 3. . . 20.00 15.50 You'll probably begin here if your student is in grades 3-7 and just starting the program. 005182 Writing Strands 4. . . 20.00 15.50 Use after Writing Strands 3. You might start here if your 6+ grader likes to write. 005183 Writing Strands 5. . . 20.00 15.50 Recommended for grades 5+ if continuing in the Writing Strands program, or grades 9-10 if just beginning. 005184 Writing Strands 6 . . 20.00 15.50 Recommended with grades 6 and up if continuing in the program, or 11th grade if just beginning. 005185 Writing Strands 7 . . 20.00 15.50 Recommended with grades 7 and up if continuing in the program, or 12th grade if just beginning. 280 English / Writing

005186 Creating Fiction . . . . 20.00 15.50 Recommended as college prep after completion of Level 7. ~~~~~~~~~~~ Comprehensive Composition (PK-12) Contains instructions and activities for composing paragraphs, essays, letters, outlines, reports, biographies, news stories, footnoted research papers including bibliographies, short stories. Covers all four strands of writing: narrative; persuasive; descriptive; expository; plus tips on choosing a topic, mechanical skills, and other content and structure skills. 012829 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.00 17.95 WRITESHOP WRITING PROGRAMS (K-12) WriteShop Primary (K-4) Most homeschool moms recognize the importance of our children developing strong writing skills. But perhaps you're like me, a creditable writer myself but without a clue how to go about teaching writing to my children. I would have been thrilled to find a program like WriteShop Primary. With a reputation for building confident writers through an incremental approach, WriteShop has been a favorite for middle school and high school students for years. Now the publishers are developing an introductory program for very young writers that has the same incremental approach and is structured to provide opportunities for the primary student to feel successful in writing largely because the parent is working closely with the student. This is an impressive program that is carefully sequenced, easy on both student and teacher, and a delight for the eyes. The young child's writing skills are developed because plenty of time is spent on writing activities as well as focused instruction that builds confidence. Each of the three levels can be used independently but the incremental nature of the books encourages going through all three sequentially. Three-week, two-week, and one-week lesson plans are provided for the ten lessons in each book. Your choice of lesson plans depends on what ages of children you are teaching and how quickly you want to get through the material. In other words, if you have a kindergartner, you will probably choose the three-week plan and progress through the books at a rate of one per year. If, on the other hand, you have a second grader, you might choose to do Book B or C using the two or three-week plan or complete Books A, B, & C using the one-week plans. The spiralbound Teacher's Guide books each provide information on how to organize the study along with plans for using two different levels with two students at different grade levels. Books provide introduction material, information for setting up and supplying a home writing center, specific information for teaching the writing lessons, and evaluation quidelines. Each lesson is based around a theme but these themes can be altered or adapted to allow for integration of the writing lessons with other theme-based studies. Lesson formats are similar and include guided writing practice, pre-writing activities, brainstorming, a writing project, publishing the project, and ideas for "doing more". Each lesson includes an activity that reinforces some aspect of the lesson. While the lessons are not

totally scripted, they are well laid-out and easy to follow. Teacher prep is minimal requiring reading through the lessons, equipping a writing center that is either "permanent" or "packable", and occasionally cutting out paper shapes, etc. The heart of the program ­ guided writing practice ­ is kept simple (but carefully structured to lay a foundation in writing) and short (5-10 minutes). The Activity Sets that accompany each Book provide worksheet pages that tie together and reinforce skills taught in each lesson. In addition, there are two evaluation charts ­ each for five lessons. The material from the Activity Set may be reproduced for family use although not for co-op or school use. ~ Janice 043282 Book A (K-2) . . . . . . . . 26.95 043284 Book B (1-2) . . . . . . . . 29.95 043286 Book C (2-3) . . . . . . . . 32.95 EACH ACTIVITY SET . . . . . . . . . 4.95 043283 Book A Activity Set 043285 Book B Activity Set 043287 Book C Activity Set WriteShop Junior (3-5) 050511 Level D Activity Pack. . 050512 Level D Teacher's Guide 39.95 39.95

WriteShop: An Incremental Writing Program (5-12) Parents who lack confidence in their own ability to teach their students to write have finally got a resource that takes the guess work out of the process. WriteShop provides detailed daily lesson plans and instructions for teachers plus student workbooks with worksheets and forms that walk you all the way through activities, evaluation and grading. Examples, check lists for both students and teachers, and evaluation forms show students the objectives and teachers what to look for in completed work. Not only do these features make the program easy to use, but the authors have structured lessons to build from the ground up, covering sentence and paragraph structure and style before tackling lengthier assignments. The subtitle, "An Incremental Writing Program," refers to the way the program incorporates and builds upon skills taught in previous lessons. Because of this, you should not skip lessons or change the order. Targeted at students in grades 7-10, WriteShop might actually be used with students in grades 5-10. It works well for parents working with one or more of their own children on their own, but it will also work in a group class situation. It does need to be taught; it is not designed for independent study even though students do much writing on their own. WriteShop is a great starting place for those who have done minimal writing instruction with their children. The Lessons, each of which might take about

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

two weeks to complete, include "skill builder" exercises that focus on a narrow skill, usually related to grammar or vocabulary. The "skill builder" activity feeds directly into the primary lesson. For example, the second lesson is "Describing a Pet." The "skill builder" teaches students to use a thesaurus to come up with more interesting words to replace overused adjectives and weak verbs. This skill is then incorporated into the pet description. Many of the grammar-oriented skill builders help students finally see the use of some of their grammar lessons. Two weeks per lesson sounds like a lot, but the authors have incorporated more than the "skill builder" focus into each lesson. For example, the pet description also works with mind maps, topic sentences, metaphors and similes, and concluding sentences. In addition, students are working through the editing and rewriting process on the original assignment. They also should be completing copying and dictation assignments that build skills of observation and attention while working on various sentence constructions and broader vocabulary. I think the authors have actually resolved a critical problem with copying/dictation by requiring copying first, followed by dictation of the same piece. This way, students have already encountered unusual punctuation or sentence breaks that otherwise might be unpredictable when encountered only through dictation. The program is presented in a single teacher's volume and two student volumes. The teacher's manual offers more than lesson plans. It also has instructions on how to edit, how to make comments, descriptions of typical student errors and probable solutions. Student sample writings are accompanied by sample edited versions and check off lists with teacher comments so you can get a feel for how you might write responses. Other helps in the manual are answer keys; reproducible check off lists, reference sheets, and forms; supplemental activity ideas; story starters; essay topics; and word banks. [The student volumes contain a mix of instructional content and consumable practice pages. Permission is granted for single families to copy consumable pages.] The first volume focuses primarily on description and narration, although it includes lessons on writing short reports, concise (5 sentence) biographies, and news articles. Skills covered are typical of those covered up through junior high. The second volume gets into high school level with advanced narrative and descriptive writing plus heavy emphasis on essay writing. The level of difficulty straddles junior high and high school; none of the writing assignments are very lengthy. High schoolers will still need to practice writing lengthier papers and research reports than required by WriteShop. (Keep in mind, that the program is not intended to cover all types of writing assignments. For example, there are no lessons on poetry or writing business letters.) If you start the program with younger students, move through it more slowly, taking three years rather than two. Older students might be able to complete both volumes in a single year if they are very diligent and have already developed basic writing skills. The program is written by Christians; you will find occasional biblical references, primarily in

the teacher's manual. However, it also appears indirectly in lessons such as writing a description of a person where the authors caution the student to remember to be gracious and focus on a person's positive features. Overall, this is one of the best resources I've seen for parents who need lots of help to teach writing as well as a great tool for group classes. ~ Reprinted from Christian Home Educators Curriculum Manuals with permission of Cathy Duffy, Grove Publishing. 002475 Tchr Man & Wkbk 1 . . 99.95 002472 Workbook 1 . . . . . . . . 45.95 040096 Copying & Dictation Exercises for WriteShop 1 (6-10) 4.95 This small booklet contains one copywork passage for each WriteShop I lesson, which usually relates to that lesson's writing assignment. Later in the week, teachers read the passage out loud. As a teacher dictates, students write out the passage, thus strengthening auditory skills. 002474 Workbook 2 . . . . . . . . 45.95 002366 Tchr Man (for 1 & 2). . 55.95 ~~~~~~~~~~~ Stack the Deck Writing Program (3-12) If you spend any time playing cards, you may already be familiar with the meaning of the term "stack the deck." To "stack the deck" is to arrange the deck of cards in your favor prior to the beginning of play ­ making it much easier to win the game. Translate that into a series of composition textbooks, and you can see the advantage of having someone "stack the deck" of English writing and composition skills in the student's favor. Accomplished through an engaging and encouraging text, which is also structured and well-organized as it flows from the easy to the complex, this series has been called "unpretentious," "organized," "systematic," and "fun" by teachers who have used it. Each level has both a teacher and a student book. Student books are written to the student, who can either work through them independently or with other children or the teacher. The text is conversational and interspersed with plenty of exercises, activities, and assignments. The books have space enough to be considered consumable, or students could use a separate notebook to record answers/writings if more than one student will use the program. Teacher guides give background information on the teaching process and skills focused on in the corresponding student book, as well as practical, research-based strategies for teaching the student text. Some of the labor and time saving tools utilized in the course include: scoring rubrics (which will help students know what is expected of them), think sheets (to help in the brainstorming phase), SOS sheets (a communication device that helps teachers point out weaknesses and offer helpful suggestions), and checklist sheets (so students can make sure they have fulfilled what was expected). This series is truly worth considering as you investigate the writing programs available to the homeschool market. The following gives more detail of specific coverage. ~ Zach EACH STUDENT . . . . . . . . . . 15.95 13.50 EACH TEACHER . . . . . . . . . . 10.00 9.50 EACH FOLDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.70

040996 Check the Deck Student 040997 Check the Deck Teacher Grades 3-4. Eight units look more in depth at descriptive writing, imaginative problem solving, reporting, persuading, narrating, explaining, literature based writing, and researching. Each unit ends with a major writing assignment, and has four components that lead students up to that point: oral language into writing, simple sentence combining, composition rules, and writing with style. The book walks students through the writing assignments using the four-stage writing process of prewriting, writing the first draft, rewriting, publishing. 041005 Flip the Deck Student 041006 Flip the Deck Teacher Grades 4-5. Organized similarly to Check, this book provides practice in sentence fluency and paragraph development. The same four components as in Check walk students through the process of describing a room, writing a character sketch, creating an invention, persuading an audience, writing an article, and writing on the job ­ ending in each section with a specific writing assignment. 041017 Tap the Deck Student 041018 Tap the Deck Teacher Grades 5-6. Unit one starts with some simple warm-up exercises to get students back into having fun with language. Continuing on from that, units have students narrate a memory, describe an animal (exposition), problem solve with persuasion, observe and narrate, explain through exposition, describe creatively, persuade, write about themselves, narrate about a pet peeve, and write a report using the now familiar writing process. Along the way, skills such as expanding and rearranging, simple combining, revising with a SOS sheet, combining and rearranging, combining with ing words, correcting run-on sentences, and what to do with fragments will help students polish and hone their work. 041011 Open the Deck Student 041012 Open the Deck Teacher Grades 6-7. Oral language activities and sentence manipulatory skills are practiced in the lead up to the major writing assignments at the end of each unit. Units help students discover language skills, sentence combinations, action and movement in writing, connecting and persuading, meanings and fragments, creating words and correcting run-ons, flexible words word manipulation, and reporting. 041013 Split the Deck Student 041014 Split the Deck Teacher Grades 7-8. The nine units of this book follow the same similar pattern of mini-lessons and exercises leading up to a major writing assignment. In this book, assignments have students describing a family meal, revising a game, painting a poetic scene, explaining how things work, narrating an experience, persuading school advisors, observing the world of work, and researching their heritage. All the while, the focus is on the six traits of writing: ideas, organization, sentence fluency, word choice, conventions, and voice. English / Writing 281

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

040998 Cut the Deck Student 040999 Cut the Deck Teacher Grades 8-9. Integrating the six traits of writing, students continue to get practice in all the major writing modes: narrative, descriptive, persuasive, and expository. Language awareness, controlling idea, subtracting and expanding, combining, verbs, ing words and infinitives, subordinating ideas, and coordinating ideas are other skills practiced along the way. The writing assignments in this book are fleshed out even further with three literary analysis papers on Thank You M'am, Flowers for Algernon, and A Raisin in the Sun. 041015 Stack the Deck Student 041016 Stack the Deck Teacher Grades 9-12. For use throughout high school, the four major types of writing are taught through a step-by-step process: exploring language awareness, combining and rearranging ideas, subtracting and expanding words and ideas, purpose and audience in writing, verbs, problem solving, ing words, describing chronologically, glue words and wh words, story telling as an observer, business letter, ed words and modifiers, describing spatially, subordinating ideas, persuading, coordinating, comparing/contrasting, and introductory and concluding paragraphs. This book also ends with literary analysis assignments: Of Mice and Men, Julius Caesar, The Most Dangerous Game, Black Boy, and To Kill a Mockingbird. 041003 Fan the Deck Student 041004 Fan the Deck Teacher Grades 10-12. For college-bound high school students who have demonstrated a proficiency in writing skills, more sophisticated sentence skills, writer's awareness, and college-level thinking and organization are developed. The writing assignments and exercises include a definition paper, sentence lengths, an analyses paper, verb strength and consistency, a process paper, parallelism, a comparison-contrast paper, college application letter, subordination, an argumentative paper, and a problemsolution report. The two literary analysis assignments are on The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn and The Glass Menagerie. 041007 How to Take an Essay Exam 2.95 Grades 9-12. Since essays are such a big part of all types of schooling, it would a good idea to become familiar and comfortable with the essay writing process. The specific skills developed in this handbook are vocabulary of the essay exam, determining the requirements of essay questions, writing a tentative controlling idea, developing your ideas - building content, organizing your ideas, writing and revising a controlling idea, concluding the essay, developing time management for essay exams, and writing the essay exam response. A solid stand alone or supplemental handbook. 041019 Primary Writing Folder Grades 1-6. A file folder containing the following: printed on the front cover is list space for the student's written stories; printed on the inside front is list space for future projects; printed on the inside back 282 English / Writing

is a web outline; and printed on the back cover is a checklist of skills that have been learned by the student. 041008 Intermed./Advanced Writing Folder Grades 3-12. A file folder containing the following: printed on the front cover is a list of correction symbols for revising and proofreading; printed on the inside front is list space for the student's different pieces of writing; printed on the inside back is a final portfolio selection outline; and printed on the back cover is a list of writing modes, key traits of successful writing, and a writer's vocabulary checklist. Classic Curriculum Writing Workbooks (1-4) A series of workbooks providing the first four years of writing instruction. Written for use with the McGuffey Readers, Harvey's Elementary Grammar and the Spenserian Penmanship series, each workbook corresponds to one quarter with four workbooks used per year. Days one through four are lessons with new material; day five is review and/or a quiz. There is a final test for each workbook. The series covers handwriting (both manuscript and cursive), grammar and composition, and the series number equates to grade level. EACH WORKBOOK. . . . . . . . 10.49 7.95 Wkbk 1 Wkbk 2 Wkbk 3 Wkbk 4 Series 1 018073 018085 018147 018234 Series 2 018074 018109 018169 018240 Series 3 018075 018132 018228 018241 Series 4 018076 018146 018233 018246 Teaching English Through Art (2-10) Although billed as a supplement to reinforce and extend concepts from a regular English program, there's plenty of "meat" here to use this book as your core English for a year, or to use in place of your regular program once a week or so. It would be a good break from the rut of a traditional program, and you could use it with all of your children at one time. Since the author is an English teacher, the book is educationally sound and quite broad in its scope. If covers all of the essential strands of writing, plus a smattering of mechanics. Sections are as follows: Describing Words ­ Enhancing Vocabulary; Building Good Writing ­ Sentence Structure - Paragraphs; Creating a Story ­ Story Elements; Technical Writing ­ Communicating Ideas; Poetry; Using Reference Materials; Everything Else - Important Miscellaneous; Paragraph Ideas. At a whopping 200+ pages, it is a real bargain, too! Throughout, the emphasis is on incorporating art into English, both as a motivational tool, and because doing so will increase student understanding and retention. I love the section on Creating a Story ­ Story Elements. After working through it, students will have an excellent understanding of all the components of an effective story. Some of the lessons are demonstrative, to illustrate specific types of writing elements, like the lesson on caricature. An art example here is very appropriate, as most of us

are familiar with this type of cartoon-like drawing of a person's face. However, a character in a story can be a caricature as well, exhibiting an extreme of personality or behavior. While people with exaggerated personality traits exist in real life, they are much more prevalent in writing. The finished product, a Writing Portfolio, would be a wonderful long-term treasure. 004196 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.95 21.50 Write with the Best (3-12) "Modeling Writing after Great Works of World Literature Vol. 1." If you're learning to write, why not learn from the best? It's a great concept that's well-implemented in this new writing offering by Jill J. Dixon, B.S. Ed., M.Ed. Focusing on descriptive writing, Jill has chosen some of the best literary passages as models, including excerpts from: · 20,000 Leagues Under the Sea (Describing an Object) · A Christmas Carol (Describing a Place) · Robinson Crusoe (Describing a Character) · Wind in the Willows (Writing a Dialogue) · "Gift of the Magi" (Writing a Short Story) · "Ants and the Grasshopper" and "Shepherd's Boy and the Wolf" (Writing a Fable) · "Paul Revere's Ride (Writing Poetry - Ballad or Narrative) Each of these nine units is broken into ten 15-to-45-minute daily lessons - though Jill cautions not to progress too quickly if a child has not mastered a skill. Objectives for each day are asterisked and should be read by the teacher before beginning each unit. Since lessons are addressed directly to the student, the program will require minimal teacher time in actually completing each lesson. You will need to do some preparatory instruction, dictation (once per unit), and check work completed. Each unit begins with an excerpt from a "classic", includes a good amount of grammar (parts of speech) instruction, some mechanics, has the student find another good example of the genre being studied (and doing some comparative / grammatical analysis), and culminates with student writing and proofreading. Every unit also includes a dictation exercise from the included (or another) classic excerpt. The student is then to check his result against the written copy. Units are systematic, instruction is clear, and the whole course is well-organized and ready to pick up and go. Jill has included several helps and references also, in the back of the volume. The first is a sheet on "The Characteristics that Make the Best Writing The Best". This is used as the basis for discussion of supplied and found excerpts. A proofreading checklist is included to encourage and help with self-editing. For the parent is a helpful sheet on grading criteria. My only dispute with this is the point (out of five) given for having a "topic sentence at the beginning and a concluding sentence at the end of each paragraph". Just skimming the excerpts included confirm much "great" writing is not "formula" writing. I agree that a beginning writer may need to start out this way - but it makes for boring writing if you insist each paragraph be structured so. Additional Literary Passages for Modeling Writing are included and listed by genre so that you can continue or reuse these lessons again and again with different literature, if desired. For the teacher and student is a How

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

to Write Guide that takes you through the steps for each type of writing. And, lastly, a key to the parts of speech exercises in included for you. All in all, there is a fair amount of grammar and mechanics instruction included in this volume in the context of writing and proofreading, though the author suggests supplementing with Easy Grammar, Daily Grams, Editor in Chief or Great Editing Adventures if you feel you need more specific or intensive instruction. Other recommended materials are a dictionary and thesaurus for each student. A writing or grammar handbook would also be helpful - especially if your skills are a little rusty. Permission to reproduce is given for the excerpts and the proofreading checklist. These are the only consumable components, and each student will need his own. All in all, this program looks like a well-organized, easy to use, effective writing program that I'm personally eager to try! 011655 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.95 22.95 Write With the Best Volume 2: Modeling Writing After Great Authors (6-12) This second volume follows the same thorough format as the original but has some enhancements as well. It has a larger answer key and contains proofreading checklists for each genre. Eight separate units cover twelve writing categories, with examples from great writers: ¾ Emily Dickinson (Writing Free Verse Poetry) ¾ Helen Keller (Writing a Business Letter) ¾ Thomas Paine (Persuasive Essay) ¾ Francis Bacon (Expository Essay) ¾ Edgar Allan Poe of Hawthorne's Twice Told Tales (Literary Critique) ¾ William Howells of Twain's Adventures of Tom Sawyer (Book Review) ¾ Ernest Hemingway (Newspaper Article) ¾ Marcus Tullius Cicero (Writing a Speech) ¾ William Shakespeare (Writing a Dramatic Monologue) ¾ Other Examples of Taking Notes, Writing Outlines, and Writing Summaries Daily steps, which are concise, clear, and follow the same general format as the first volume, teach students how to write in these genres and how to become proficient in proofreading and literary analysis. ~ Rachel S. 019034 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.95 27.95

Meaningful Composition (4-12) What do Character Quality Language Arts (CQLA) and Meaningful Composition have in common? Basically, one is a subset of the other. As we've described elsewhere in this catalogue, CQLA is a comprehensive and thoroughly integrated curriculum that covers spelling, grammar, composition, reading comprehension, and vocabulary within the context of a character quality study ­ all assignments interwoven both as to language arts skills and the designated character quality. But suppose you want that type of writing instruction but already have other aspects of language arts covered. Meaningful Composition is the answer. This is a "pull-out program", meaning that the composition assignments have been pulled out of CQLA, grouped according to skill development and grade level and wrapped up tidily in an easy-to-use package. See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

Meaningful Composition utilizes the Directed Writing Approach. This means that the student is carefully and thoughtfully led through a sequenced development of writing skills one manageable step at a time with the ultimate goal of growing an independent, competent communicator. In other words there is no guesswork about what, how many (words, sentences, paragraphs, etc.), or how the student is to write. Instruction is written directly to the student sometimes with questions to answer or exercises to work (the book is a consumable worktext) and sometimes through very specific writing assignments (compiled into a separate notebook). Answer keys when appropriate are provided in an appendix. Each course has two levels ­ basic and extensions ­ providing two different skill levels of writing and revising. Books 4+, 6+, and 8+ are grade level appropriate but would also provide strong remediation courses to use with a student whose writing skills are limited. Designed as semester courses, they can be used either as stand-alone English for a student who has mastered spelling & vocabulary study and has a fundamental knowledge of grammar (he'll get some grammar ­ particularly usage-based in MC) or it can be combined with another grammar program. Books are designated as either first semester (I) or second semester (II), each having 18 weeks of assignments (five per week). Although there is virtually no prep for the teacher, the teacher does need to be an active participant in the learning process. Books 6+ and 8+ require the teacher to meet with the student weekly (one or two 1-hour meetings) to discuss the assignments, introduce outlining techniques, check the student's rough draft, review the Checklist Challenge, and grade final compositions. Students are expected to spend an additional 45-60 minutes a day for 3-4 days a week working by himself. Time and teacher involvement will vary in the other courses but 4+ also requires active teacher involvement. The appendices are helpful ­ editing and revising marks, answer keys, grammar cards, information on KWOs, plagiarism and passages, and fourteen week lesson plans for co-ops and small group usage. All books are coilbound with plastic covers. ~ Janice EACH BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.00 045317 Book 4+ (I) Sentences, Paragraphs, & More Introduction to grammar, sentence construction from simple to complex, paragraph construction, key word outlines, introduction to personal writing, descriptive and informative paragraphs, and more. 300 pgs. 045316 Book 4 (II) Put Paragraphs Together Turning sentences into paragraphs, thesis statements, character, instructional, picture, and interview essays, descriptive paragraph, letter writing, book report, biographical writing, and more. 145 pgs. Suggested prerequisite: MC 4+ (I)

045731 Book 5 (I) Writing for Real Key word outline practice, introduction to Checklist Challenge, multi-paragraph original reports, compare/contrast paragraph, story writing, organizing research, beginning source citation, and more. Suggested prerequisite: MC 4+ (I) 045318 Book 5 (II) Creative & Clever Personal and creative essays, creative writing projects, poetry, word usage, story outline, avoiding redundancy, and more. 187 pgs. Suggested prerequisite: MC 4+ (I) 045319 Book 6+ (I) Long & Strong Checklist Challenge, opening paragraphs, quote inclusion, biographical and informative reports, personal essay, formal outlining, source citation, works cited, friendly letter, and more. 257 pgs. Suggested prerequisite: MC 4+ (I) 048615 Book 7 (I) Reports & Essays Galore Further key word outline skills, source citation, compare/contrast writing, and persuasive writing, quote inclusion. Prerequisite (if needed): MC 6 (I) or MC 5 (I) 048616 Book 7 (II) Completely Creative (7) Personal and historical timeline and timeline report, personal history essay, dialogue, story writing, allegorical story, poetry. Prerequisite (if needed): MC 5 (II) 045321 Book 8+ (I) Bridging the Gap MLA format report, cover page, historical fiction, informative and biographical reports, compare/contrast essay, quote citations, formal outline, research cards, persuasive letter, and more. 253 pgs. 048617 Book 8 (II) Still Bridging the Gap Event story, formal outline, personal essay, writing from multiple sources, works cited, persuasive report. Prerequisite (if needed): MC 8 (I) or MC 7 (I) 045320 Book 9 (I) Research Report Animal, agriculture/produce, authority figure, biographical, and research reports with cards, outlines, cover sheets, sources cited, quote inclusion, and more. 203 pgs. Suggested prerequisite: MC 6+(I), MC 7 (I), MC 8+ (I) 045315 Book 12 (I) Research Paper 14-20 page major research paper from start to finish. 167 pgs. Suggested prerequisite: MC 7 (I) Jump In: A Workbook for Reluctant and Eager Writers (5-8) What do you do when your children are in middle school, looking towards their more intensive high school years, and they already loathe writing? Don't worry ­ it's not too late to turn `em around and prepare them for high school writing. This program from Apologia takes writing and breaks it up into tasty little bites that even writing-haters may begin to enjoy. The student book covers prewriting skills, expressing opinions, persuasive writing, expository writing, descriptive writing, narration, and poetry. Chapters are extremely readable and interactive, interweaving paragraphs of instruction with short workbook activities. The first chapter (on prewriting) takes a little survey of the student, asking what writing assignments are difficult for them, which are the easiest for them, what types of writing they enjoy, and what about writing is hard. (continued...) English / Writing 283

Then, they answer some other fun questions about their writing preferences and attitudes, and learn how to brainstorm. The following chapter on opinions is just as interactive and personal, and takes the student from expressing their personal preferences on songs, games and food to learning how to organize a short essay expressing their opinion on anything. In this method, the student tackles writing in appealing chunks. After "testing the water" in the first two chapters, they're ready to jump into persuasive writing. After thinking of several topics that they feel strongly about, students decide what they want to convince their reader of and then sharpen their skills with several short exercises that are not directly related to their future persuasive paper. When they come back to the paper, they start composing it piece by piece, focusing first on the opening, then on the conclusion, and then on supporting reasons. Other skills and activities related to the assignmanet are also incorporated before they write their full persuasive paper. These include analyzing a student example of persuasive writing, learning the finer points of addressing an audience, and how to strengthen their supported view. Causeand-effect persuasion, expository and narrative writing are covered in the same way. Students learn about the type of writing, hone individual skills necessary to compose a piece of writing, and then write a complete piece at the end of each chapter. Full-color printing, readable chunks of text, fun graphics, and an engaging writing style set this aside as a "manageable ­ not overwhelming" writing course. The teacher's manual provides objectives for the course, a summary of all writing assignments, tips to help and inspire the student writer, tips to helping the writer proofread his/ her work, a substantial section on grading (with examples), the 10-Minute Writing Plunges program, and an answer key to the short exercises in the book. The 10-Minute Writing Plunges program is basically a system of prompts for four days each week from September to May. Every week, you will give the student a prompt on Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, and Thursday. After you give them the prompt, they will write on the topic for ten minutes, and then put it away. At the end of the week, the student chooses their favorite paper, proofreads and edits it, and then turns it in the next Monday. Prompts are engaging and thought-provoking, and the student may even begin to look forward to "Plunge"-time! The 10-Minute Writing Plunges program can be used as a break from Jump In! or as another year's worth of writing instruction and activities. I think that reluctant and hesitant writers (and their parents) will find that the format, approach, and coverage of this program are "just right." ­ Jess 021885 Workbook. . . . . . . . 30.00 24.95 021884 Teacher Manual. . . . 10.00 8.75 JMPSET Workbk & Tchr Set 40.00 28.50 The Write Stuff Adventure (5+) Advice for becoming an effective communicator with the written word might be "Work hard" or it might be "Practice a lot" or it could be "Have fun as you learn new skills and be encouraged as you work at your own pace to put these new skills into practice". Doesn't that last piece of advice make learning how to write 284 English / Writing

sound a lot more attractive than the first two? It can be that way. For some, learning to write just takes longer and requires a little more effort. That is the beauty about writing courses such as this one. The Write Stuff Adventure is extremely flexible; students can begin learning at any time during the school year, and teachers can select any of the units that are best suited for the skill level of the student. Of course, it can work in a more regimented style as well, because it progresses from the simple to the complex over the six sections in the book. This curriculum covers the whole spectrum of writing, beginning with the basics in section one, entitled "Simple Things", and teaching a multitude of writing styles as progress is made through the next five sections. These include: letter writing to relatives, instruction lists, speeches, letters to the editor, essay writing, interviewing, news stories, feature stories, photojournalism, short stories and much, much more. At the beginning, a lot of emphasis is placed on positive encouragement rather than being picky about spelling mistakes and the like. Mastery of spelling and grammar will come; in the early stages, however, writing should be an enjoyable experience, not something to discourage the young writers. The writing assignments do become more difficult as you advance through the six sections, but again, the versatility of this curriculum allows it to be spread over several years. And don't worry about getting discouraged as the teacher, either. The lessons are well laid out, easy to follow and understand, and all have notes for the teacher. Lessons begin with an explanation of the assignment, and often, they include an example to illustrate the assignment. A marvelous course in writing aimed at producing effective communicators in any career field. ~ Zach 016255 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.99 15.95

How is writing in each paragraph style taught? A three-week rotation begins with students constructing an assigned paragraph, progressing to researching and preparing notes for a timedwrite session in the second week of class, and finally, correcting and editing the paragraph from week one. Lessons are clearly laid out, with plenty of examples to illustrate the type of writing being taught. The answer key/test booklet is extremely helpful to have, as it contains answers for all of the daily assignments, as well as quizzes and a final exam. Another bonus to the course is its author, Shari Barrett, with a wealth of experience in the subject area and in the homeschool realm, having taught her own children at home since the 1980s, and other chidren as well. She holds a degree in secondary education, a passion for writing, and a real desire to teach - now that's a great combination! ~ Zach 009145 Book. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54.95 009113 Answer Key & Test . . . 7.50 Put that in Writing Level 2 (9-12) So Level One has been completed and the paragraph has been mastered. Next step? The essay. This course uses the 5-paragraph essay as the standard essay format. After a brief review of the material covered in Level One, students are introduced to the 5-paragraph model. From that point, additional components are learned in subsequent lessons which students will use to produce full classical form essays of the following types: historical figure, comparison, narrative, cause and effect, précis and abstract, deliberative, judicial, ceremonial, and response. As they master each of these different types, students will also learn how to construct various creative introductions and conclusions and ways to enliven their writing with figures of speech. The book includes teaching schedules in the appendix for twenty-four, thirty-six, or forty-eight week courses. The appendices also include evaluation forms and checklists for helping with revision and grading. Clear, with well-defined teaching points and examples, this is a comprehensive curriculum for mastering the essay. ~ Zach 039554 Level 2 w/ Answer Key 74.95 Rhetoric (Speaking & Writing) Programs Classical Rhetoric with Aristotle Text (10-12) This text is by the same author and follows the same standards and format as Traditional Logic. Basically, it is a guided tour through Aristotle's Rhetoric, and you will need a copy of that book to complete the course. It covers the first two books of Aristotle's thoughts on writing and oratory, basically concerning the speaker and the audience. Those familiar with Aristotle will know that he valued content and quality of writing more than technique, and this study reflects that philosophy. It should be noted that this is not an introductory course on writing, but is meant to refine those skills that students should already have, for the specific purpose of persuasion. The book is well laid out and is designed so that students can be taught even by those with little experience with this topic. The course is designed to be consumable and will lead students every step of the way through a study on rhetoric over the course of a

Put That in Writing Level 1 (7+) Subtitled "Mastering the Paragraph," this course teaches students how to write nine different types of paragraphs: descriptive, definition, narrative, process, compare/contrast, cause/ effect, analogy, defending a position, and literary character analysis. As well as learning these different types of writing, students will also learn to evaluate paragraphs critically, the way teachers do. The text is set up to be a 36 week course, which includes cyclical lessons for the different styles of paragraph writing, a few introductory chapters on sentences, formal writing guidelines, the purpose of writing, writing process overviews, and a final test week. The book also lists outlines for a slower, twoyear schedule and an accelerated schedule of 20 weeks. Some portions of the text (listed in the "To the Teacher" section) are reproducible for the teacher's own use. These include useful lists, rubrics, and sample paragraphs for student evaluation.

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

year. Tips on how teachers can grade the work and keep students accountable are included in the book. The first part of the course covers Book One of Aristotle's Rhetoric: "Rhetoric as it Concerns the Speaker." It starts with lessons on the scope and purpose of rhetoric and the definition and division of rhetoric.The rest of the speaker section is then divided into political, ceremonial, and forensic rhetoric, with several lessons per topic. The second part of the book then covers Book Two of Aristotle's Rhetoric: "Rhetoric as it Concerns the Audience". It then gives a basic introduction to Aristotle's views on the subject and gives lessons covering Pathos, Ethos, and Logos. The text includes several ways to test students and helps them to thoroughly review and understand the content. Reading Comprehension Questions are the main part of the course and are designed to help students glean as much from Aristotle's Rhetoric as possible by completing short answer questions. Evaluating Writing Assignments require that the student not only know what Aristotle said, but assess it on the basis of their own assumptions, which may differ from Aristotle's. Weekly Research and Writing Assignments are designed to apply the lessons the student has learned. Reading Lessons are made up of questions based on Mortimer Adler's How to Read a Book, which are designed to help the student fully understand what, how, and why Aristotle says what he does. Logic and Latin Review Questions are review questions related to Traditional Logic. Though that book is not a prerequisite for this course and these questions can be skipped, the author does recommend completing that before beginning this. Finally, there are Case Study Analyses focusing on four speeches, which are classic examples of the three kinds of speeches discussed by Aristotle. Each case study is accompanied by questions relevant to the section of Aristotle just covered. These are designed as models for the students to imitate in their own persuasive discourse. The user-friendly format and multiple-aspects of reviewing make this a very complete review and guide for Aristotle's Rhetoric. A Teacher Key can be purchased separately and provides detailed answers for the lessons and exercises. Classroom DVDs are also available which offer verbal instruction on every aspect of the course along with helpful graphics slides that help to explain lesson content. Downloadable lecture slides to accompany the DVDs are available from Memoria Press. ~ Rachel S. 018491 Student Text . . . . . . 39.95 33.95 018490 Teacher Key . . . . . . . 4.95 4.50 003606 DVDs . . . . . . . . . . . 55.00 47.95 CLSRHT Set of 3 above. . . . . 99.90 83.95 Required Reading for Classical Rhetoric: Rhetoric & Poetics of Aristotle (10-AD) 029595 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.40

Other Writing Programs These materials contain both instruction and writing assignments but are not as broad in scope (types of writing) as the comprehensive programs. Four Square Writing Method (PK-9) This step-by-step method of teaching writing skills will fit into any reading and language arts program. These reproducible workbooks challenge students to organize their thoughts in descriptive, narrative, persuasive, and mostly expository writings by using the four-square method. This method instructs students to write their main thought above a four-square box. Students then proceed to fill in the box, putting primary thoughts in three of the squares and a conclusion in the last. Each book in this series is broken down into five sections. In section one, students become familiar with the foursquare method by looking at examples and filling out some straight-forward squares. Students are primarily taught how to use this method in expository writing, so in section two, the book gives instructions on how to use the method for other styles of writing. In section three, the book provides samples of the method and essays that come from the samples. The essays can be used as models for students, and instructors could also use this section for reference. Section four supplies hints for applying the four-square method to other subject areas, as well as to a longer research or term paper. The last section in each book provides prompts to help students get started after they have learned the entire method. Overall, these books provide useful instruction to students who are visual learners and also to students who just need help organizing and focusing their writing. This unique approach to teaching basic writing skills will help students understand their writing and how to structure it better. The books with CDs are revised and updated versions that include an enhanced CD of printable PDFs of additional material ­ examples, activities, and writing exercises. The book for Early Learners focuses on introducing and explaining the method and simply illustrating its use through drawing and dictation. ~ Rachel 047585 Early Learners . . . . . 10.95 8.75 EACH BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.95 9.95 011120 Grades 1-3 011121 Grades 4-6 011122 Grades 7-9 EACH BOOK with CD . . . . . . 17.95 048045 Grades 1-3 048046 Grades 4-6 048047 Grades 7-9 13.75

parts of the story in sketching boxes provided. Next, using the prompts provided, students create word streams of descriptive words, verbs, and nouns that correspond to the story. After that, a worksheet asks ten or so questions about the story that gets students thinking more deeply and considering different aspects. Then a poetry page (providing a variety of poetic forms throughout the book) guides students through writing a small poem about the topic. Finally, a four-square is given with students to fill out using the details of the story. Encouragement from the "coach" on the next page instructs students to use the square to write their very own story. A lined sheet of paper is provided after each of the thirteen units for students to write their complete stories directly in the book if they want. Topics are usually general ones like "When I was Little," "My Best Friend," and "Holidays." A perfect workbook for students who need to learn about structuring their writing or for those who need a bit more guidance. ~ Rachel EACH BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.95 9.95 031922 Grades 1-3 031924 Grades 7-9 031923 Grades 4-6 ~~~~~~~~~~~ Spectrum Writing (K-8) Both creative and expository writing skills are developed in this series of writing skill worktexts. Each grade-level book has eight units focusing on: main ideas, sequence, comparisons, details, facts and opinions, case and effect, making a point, and point of view. Specific content and exercises vary from grade to grade, but follow a similar process of defining the concept, prewriting exercises, developing the skill through one or more writing activities (often building from word to sentence to paragraphs), revising, proofreading, and a short post-test. Students can generally work through these books independently. The material is well-organized and the exercises look both interesting and educational. As with the Spectrum Reading series, there is such a variety of skill lessons (word skills, sentence skills, composition, mechanics, reading skills, and so on) and writing assignments, it's difficult to generalize for a description. The variety would be motivating to most students. Text is two-toned, most are about 130 pages, and a complete answer key is included. This series was revised in 2006 and underwent some changes in the sequence of skills covered and now also includes more nonfiction activities. At the kindergarten level students will practice their letters using a traditional ball-and-stick style ­ one page of practice per letter; write one word answers to questions about themselves ­ name, pet, favorite toy; learn to write story words like colors, shapes, numbers, naming words practice putting story pictures into proper sequence; practice writing 4 short stories when given a starter sentence; write a friendly letter; practice writing telling and asking sentences; learn the parts of a story; and practice writing rhyming words. A writer's handbook and answer key are found at the back of this 128-page workbook. EACH BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.95 6.95 026468 Grade K 003864 Grade 5 003858 Grade 1 003865 Grade 6 003859 Grade 2 003866 Grade 7 003862 Grade 3 003867 Grade 8 003863 Grade 4 English / Writing 285

Four Square Personal Writing Coach (1-9) These companion workbooks to the Four Square Writing Method provide students with thirteen writing projects, with step-by-step directions for completing each one. While the activities correspond to the method being taught in the original books, they are independent projects and could easily be completed separately. Not as much instruction or examples about the method are given in these workbooks, students are simply using the method and writing prompts to write thirteen essays. Each writing project follows the same basic format. First, the topic of the writing is introduced. Then students draw pictures of

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

Core Skills: Writing (1-8) These workbooks use a step-by-step method to teach students how to write well. At the various grade levels, each book introduces the basics of writing a sentence (using graphic organizers to help them visualize their sentences clearly), writing solid paragraphs, and revising and proofreading. Then the worksheets provide practice writing in different formats - narration, description, persuasion, and information reports. Worksheets are reproducible and very valuable in guiding students through the writing process. Features of these worksheets include identification of the skill to learn, examples that model the skill, information boxes that explain the skill, a writing activity that checks understanding (usually quick, like rewriting or completing sentences), and a Write Away section, which is another quick activity where students can creatively apply the skill learned. Once students master some skills and get to the actual writing exercises, the worksheets offer prewriting questions to help students choose a topic and plan details, graphic organizers to help organize ideas, multiple pages to guide through the entire writing process (like a page to write a draft, one to revise, etc.), questions that guide students to actively review and improve writing, bullets identifying specific proofreading questions, and room to write out a final draft. With the straightforward explanations, examples, and exercises, these workbooks really will help students achieve writing success. Answers are included in the back of the books. Each book is 128 reproducible pgs, pb. ~ Rachel EACH GRADE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.99 7.75 040320 Grade 1 040324 Grade 5 040321 Grade 2 040325 Grade 6 040322 Grade 3 040326 Grade 7 040323 Grade 4 040327 Grade 8 Write About Me/Write About My World (1) These two books are the precursor to the Just Write series. Using pictures and simple questions to introduce young students to writing, these books start with subjects that are familiar to any writer - their own person and the world they live in. Drawing, listing, and mapping exercises, along with other small activities, help students take more notice of the things around them, and these observations are then incorporated into the writing practice. In Write About Me, students focus more on themselves and their own environment, while in Write About My World, the focus moves on to the wider world. The activities broaden out a little too, with journaling and basic mechanics joining drawing, listing, mapping, thematic word banks, and connections to early science and social studies. There is a combined teacher's guide for the two books which has suggestions for introducing and extending topics and activities covered in the books. The teacher's guide is not essential, though it can help you expand on the subjects and activities in the books - especially through the large number of book suggestions made. Workbooks are consumable, and both are 58 pgs. ~ Zach 028504 Write About Me . . . . . .7.05 5.25 028506 Write About My World 7.05 5.25 028505 Teacher Guide. . . . . . . .4.40 3.30

Just Write (1-6) The authors wrote this series because they felt a strong need to introduce children to some of the elements of story writing and writing in general that would increase their success and pride in writing. Too often at this age students are given assignments to write stories or narratives with very little preparation or specific advice on how to accomplish this. This course seems a much more effective vehicle for teaching younger children to write than most I've seen - though there aren't many programs floating around for this grade level. Focusing on the story, this program helps teach many of the elements and strategies of writing to beginners. Just Write Book 1, intended for 2nd graders, begins with planning to write a story and learning about story elements. The first chapter focuses on pre-writing activities: brainstorming, categorizing, and using a web. Chapter 2 studies some of the processes involved in writing the story - selecting a topic, learning about sequencing, planning the basic parts of a storyline (who, what, where, when and why), creating characters, revealing feelings, and choosing a setting. The next chapters hit some of the nuts and bolts of putting words and sentences on paper. Chapter 3 studies capitalization and basic punctuation. Chapter 4 is about using your senses to create more vivid writing. Chapter 5 explores the paragraph - what it is, how to format it, what it's made of. Chapter 6 coaxes children to "tell more" (expand sentences beyond the kernel) and Chapter 7 instructs them to be choosy with their words - to avoid overused words and use creative comparisons (similes). The course closes in Chapter 8 with editing, choosing a title, and publishing. These chapters vary in length and include definitions of concepts, models, and interesting exercises for student practice. Just Write Book 2, for 3rd graders, has a little different format. It begins with some basic sentence, paragraph, and word skills, then with actually composing a story. Chapter 1 concentrates on the sentence and sentence construction. It reviews the basics of capitalization and punctuation then continues into subjects and predicates, parts of speech (adjectives and adverbs), adding detail, and combining sentences. Chapter 2 studies paragraph construction - much like the first level, only in more depth. Chapter 3 is essentially a review of topics covered in Chapter 7 of Just Write Book 1. Storywriting begins in Chapter 4 which covers the same topics as in Level 1 and introduces dialogue and point of view. The last chapter covers editing and publishing. Both levels include some resource pages (story maps, webs, etc) in a Resource Materials chapter at the end. Because all material is reviewed in level 2, it is not necessary to use Level 1 first. Just Write Book 3 takes students through the four writing styles necessary to not only complete the writing done in school, but also the writing done throughout life - narrative, descriptive, expository, and persuasive. With examples

and models to help students understand concepts and planning and revision-oriented exercises forming a methodical approach to writing, some of the topics/skills introduced to students are: single- and multi-paragraph organization, paragraph transitions, sequence and chronological order, word choice, establishing audience and purpose, fact and opinion, and more. This book has some review of the skills taught in books 1 and 2, though almost all of it is new material for the series. Includes a glossary of literary terms. The Teacher's Guide to each book is extremely helpful, providing specific teaching instructions, additional resource suggestions, an answer key, and some blackline masters. Enjoy! 015545 Book 1 Worktext . . . 12.10 9.50 015546 Book 1 Key . . . . . . . . 4.40 3.30 015547 Book 2 Worktext . . . 12.10 9.50 015548 Book 2 Key . . . . . . . . 4.40 3.30 024789 Book 3 (4-6) . . . . . . 12.10 9.50 030676 Book 3 Key . . . . . . . . 4.40 3.30 Write On Target (1-6) Like the Read on Target series (see description in Reading section), this series also utilizes a wealth of graphic organizers to spark interest, build critical thinking skills, and hone skills - this time in the writing area. Five chapters cover narrative writing; descriptive communication through journals, letters, directions and invitations; explanation communication through thank-you notes, summaries, and informational reports; and persuasive communication through letters to the editor. Like the Read on Target series, each lesson is broken up into a series of steps to guide students through reading an example of each writing topic, completing prewriting and writing activities using a graphic organizer, writing their own piece, editing and then reviewing it. The Teacher's Guide contains extensive information on using the program and graphic organizers, how to introduce and teach each topic, and how to use the given prompts and organizers to guide the students to producing a well-rounded and complete piece of writing. Additional resources, consisting of young adult fiction and nonfiction that illustrate each of the writing types is listed in the teacher's manual as well, should you want to flesh out the program into the literature realm as well. Although you would need to supplement grammar instruction to make this a complete English program, all in all it is a very organized and well-rounded writing program for the elementary grades. The heavy graphic organizer usage in this course should especially benefit visual or hands-on learners where writing is organized into a visual format. - Jess EACH TEACHER'S GUIDE . . . 16.95 12.95 EACH STUDENT WORKBK . . 10.95 8.75 Student Teacher 030121 Grades 1 & 2 030120 010014 Grade 3 010013 010045 Grade 4 010022 010067 Grade 5 010048 010069 Grade 6 010068 Experiences with Writing Styles (2-6) Are you looking for a quick and easy writing program to use along with, say, Learning Language Arts Through Literature in between the writing units? We've been there! Or, are

286

English / Writing

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

there times when your time and energies aren't stretching far enough? Me too! Many of us like to have our students practice writing every day, but there are days when our instructional time is limited. Few programs are available that can be used independently by elementaryaged children in this circumstance. Here is one. These books contain 9-10 short writing units which concentrate on a particular type of writing. Both creative and expository forms are included. It's solid, it's fairly self instructional, and it is more than just a book full of writing prompts, containing not just ideas, but "how to's". Each unit provides practice in all five stages of the writing process: pre-writing, drafting, responding and revising, proofreading, and publishing. The writing units are different at each level. My sample for grade 4 contains the following: Personal Narrative, Information Paragraph, Friendly Letter, Howto Paragraph, Descriptive Paragraph, Fable, Persuasive Paragraph, Research Report and Paragraphs of Comparison and Contrast. Each unit is similarly organized. After a short assessment activity two lessons are provided for the thinking, or pre-writing, stage. The first generally requires students to read, then analyze, a provided sample by answering several questions about it. The second activity varies by unit and is intended to increase awareness of some aspect of the focal type of writing. The third lesson provides practice with writing style such as using vivid words, using metaphor and simile, including details, etc. Activities such as using the thesaurus, keeping to the topic, combining sentences, avoiding wordy language, etc. are included in a fourth activity designed to practice the revision stage of writing. The final lesson in each unit has students proofread a paragraph of the type they will be writing. After the lessons in the unit are completed, there are 3-5 writing prompts/worksheets to practice the form of writing just studied. I like this feature, also. You can use these in succession to really master the form before continuing or complete just one or two and use the rest for later writing experiences. An exercise answer key is included. EACH WORKTEXT. . . . . . . . . 11.99 9.50 009732 Grade 2 009736 Grade 5 009734 Grade 3 009739 Grade 6 009735 Grade 4

Likewise, when a student learns to write his own letter, there are several letters as examples, along with extra teaching to help him. When the student has finished the book, the writing tools are reviewed and there are "getting started" exercises with writing tips that aid the child in writing his own masterpiece. Each individual book has the tools, writing instruction and tips included. The Writer's Toolbox is the compilation of all the stories (and instructions/ glossaries) into one book. Because these books are primarily written in story format, it's quite engaging and entertaining for the young student as he begins learning the different genres of writing. ~ Gina EACH BOOK (except noted) . . 8.95 6.95 051044 Art Panels, BAM! Speech Bubbles, POW!: Writing Your Own Graphic Novel 020914 It's All About You: Writing Your Own Journal 020968 Just the Facts: Writing Your Own Research Report 021112 Make Me Giggle: Writing Your Own Silly Story 021140 Once Upon a Time: Writing Your Own Fairy Tale 021152 Share a Scare: Writing Your Own Scary Story 021165 Sincerely Yours: Writing Your Own Letter 021167 Words, Wit, and Wonders: Writing Your Own Poem 021203 Writer's Toolbox . . . 14.95 11.50 Compilation includes all titles except Make Me Giggle and Art Panels, BAM! Speech Bubbles POW! Writing Your Own Graphic Novel. Writing Skills Series (Steck-Vaughn) (3-8) The National Council of Teachers of English (NCTE) stresses that, "all students must have the opportunities and resources to develop the language skills they need to pursue life's goals and to participate fully as informed, productive members of society." This series aims to bring about those opportunities and have the resources available for students to practice language skills of different types. The 3rd, 4th, and 5th grade books each have six units, while the 6th, 7th, and 8th grade books have nine units. While the way things are taught in the books is pretty much the same, there are a few more topics covered in the older three books. Topics in common are personal narrative, descriptive story, how-to paper, alike and different paper (or compare and contrast), a short report, and the answer key. One subject only in the lower grade books is a type of narrative - the fable and the topics specific to the older grade levels are autobiographical sketch, persuasive letter, persuasive movie review, and persuasive essay. There is a lot of helpful info at the beginning of the books such as the Scoring Rubric for writing, a Writing Conference (which is like a helpful evaluation sheet), a section of diagnostic writing prompts, sample narratives, sample how-to papers, sample persuasive papers, proofreading marks, the writing process, and different types of writing. In each of the six/nine units, a different type of writing is covered, and the work is done in seven stages.First, student's read a model paper, next they respond to the model

paper, and then they analyze the model paper. After studying the model paper, they get the writing assignment for that unit, which includes a graphic organizer. They then do their first draft, and once that is complete, they revise the draft and then evaluate their own or another student's writing with the provided writing report card. It is a very straight-forward program for learning about these different writing styles, and the questions in the activities will really help draw the students into their work. Answers are included in these consumable and reproducible workbooks. 64-96 pages, pb, 8½" x 11". ~ Zach 022292 Grade 3 . . . . . . . . . . 8.99 6.95 022293 Grade 4 . . . . . . . . . . 8.99 6.95 022294 Grade 5 . . . . . . . . . . 8.99 6.95 022295 Grade 6 . . . . . . . . . 11.99 9.50 022296 Grade 7 . . . . . . . . . 11.99 9.50 022297 Grade 8 . . . . . . . . . 11.99 9.50 Steps to Good Writing (3-6+) Many students nationwide struggle with writing. These workbooks offer short, engaging lessons that teach students the four steps to good writing. Each lesson practices all four steps. The first step is deciding what to write about. These worksheets help students brainstorm about different familiar topics like food, books, sports, famous people, and careers. In step two, they learn how to write. That is, the worksheets will help them discover a particular type of writing and the way it is structured, such as a description paragraph or thank-you note. In each book, students will learn about over a dozen types of writing. The third step is to make it better. Here, exercises are given to teach students grammar and proofreading concepts. Each lesson covers a different concept, such as run-on sentences, capitals, subject/verb agreement, and choosing expressive words. The last step is the actual writing - this worksheet holds instructions and blank lines for students to write a piece following the previous steps. There are 14 short lessons in each book, which can each be completed in just a half and hour or so, including the actual writing. 64 pgs. - Melissa EACH BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.95 5.95 033530 Book A 033532 Book C 033531 Book B 033533 Book D Write Your Own Autobiography & Master Descriptive Writing (3-8) Turn your student into a published author! Students learn the art of writing descriptively in this series of 32 lessons. Meant to be taught one or two a week, due to the writing involved, students are creating an actual book. You'll get a series of loose papers; some should not be hole-punched since they will be a page in the final product. Others can be punched and kept in a binder. An example of the writing exercises that will build your student's book include these prompts: a timeline, my strengths and weaknesses, recipe of me, the animal in me, five crazy things I plan to do in my life, how I plan to change the world, and friends. Each prompt is explained in detail to get the best product from your child. When it is finished, you may choose to send it to a website for publishing for a fee (around $20.) What a nice keepsake to have at this interesting age. Reproducible for your own family/class. ~ Sara 052586 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.95 English / Writing 287

Writer's Toolbox Series (2-4) By using stories and other examples, this series gives many tools on writing instruction. Each book focuses on different types of writing, such as fairy tales, letters, silly stories, scary stories, journals, poems, and reports. During a story, writing tools are specified to assist the child in becoming a capable writer. For example, Little Red Riding Hood is used to learn how to write fairy tales. Throughout the story are tools that teach setting, dialogue, characters, and plot, as well as plenty of additional instruction.

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

WORDSMITH COURSES (4-12) Wordsmith Apprentice (4-6) This is the junior version of the Wordsmith program. Grades 4-6 are an ideal time to teach your kids the "tools" of writing. Of course, at that age, if it isn't fun, kids don't want to learn. Wordsmith does a great job of introducing vital writing skills in a fun and enthusiastic way. Throughout this workbook, students pretend to be writers for the local newspaper. Fun comics are interspersed throughout the book to "instruct" your child on the concept they are learning. The lessons will cover sentence review, paragraph writing, reporting, creative writing, and expressing opinions. These skills are covered in three different sections of the book. Part one introduces nouns, verbs, and basic sentence structure to your children. Some of the projects in this section have your child write an invitation, a thank you note, haiku poetry, and four-sentence captions - just to name a few. Part two focuses on modifiers and more complex sentences. Here your child will create some advertising, work on editing, and write a book review. Part three moves on to organizing sentences in a logical fashion and reporting skills. Some of the projects your child will do include writing sports stories, giving household hints, composing a news article, and creating a comics column. Detailed instructions are given at the beginning of every project to help them complete it independently. Answers are printed in the back to help you correct their work. This spiral-bound workbook has blackand-white text and illustrations. 85 pgs, pb. 003767 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.00 12.95

and review/practice quizzes. An inexpensive teacher's guide is available for parents who want the extra help in teaching creative writing and includes answers, lesson plans, teaching suggestions, and ideas for expanding the lessons. This guide has also been revised, and includes more explanation of the "philosophy" of writing, further tips on revising, more ideas for additional writing assignments, suggestions for incorporating creative writing into other areas of the curriculum (history, science, etc.) and tips on organizing a writers' club. 015773 Book . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.00 12.95 007384 Teacher's Guide. . . . 7.00 5.75 Wordsmith Craftsman (10-12) If the Wordsmith Apprentice is the junior version of Wordsmith, then the Wordsmith Craftsman is the senior. Written for the young adult, it concentrates on making sure older students have the necessary communication and writing skills for their adult lives, no matter what occupation they enter. In three parts it covers the various aspects of writing they will need "out in the real world." In Part One, "Writing Every Day," taking notes, writing letters, constructing summaries and composing business reports are covered. Part Two, "Language Power" includes paragraphs, writing techniques, and developing a personal writing style. This all builds up to the grand finale, "The Essay," which covers topics, structure, and the step-by-step writing. Different types of essays are practiced: expository, narrative, descriptive, and persuasive. Answers are printed in the back of the book for some of exercises. This workbook has been revised and now includes updated information regarding e-mail communication and Internet research, additional examples, a brief discussion of research papers, and an added section on critical writing (reviews and critical essays). Very complete and informative, this is ideal for rounding out a high school writing program. - Jess 005073 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.00 12.95 100 Writing Lessons (4-8) This book used to be sold as four separate workbooks ­ Expository Writing, Descriptive Writing, Narrative Writing, and Persuasive Writing. Well, those are now combined into a single volume ­ creating a book of ready-touse lessons that will help students strengthen their writing. The book features a step-by-step approach, building skill upon skill. Written to the teacher, the book is laid out in a series of two-page activities: one lesson page to teach from followed by a reproducible, consumable workbook page for students to complete. The four sections of the book focus on developing the skills necessary to enhance that style of writing. ¾ Narrative: students are taught how to write narratives about their own experiences, about other people and about literature. This culminates in learning to write a story. ¾ Descriptive: teaches the different elements of descriptive writing. Concepts/skills students will learn along the way include: exploring sensory imagery, choosing the best word that works (contrasting, metaphor and simile, personification), and organizing descriptive paragraphs.

¾ Expository: this section is broken into four parts ­ main idea, purpose, audience, and presentation. There are plenty of graphic organizers in this section to help with organizing and using ideas. ¾ Persuasive: students will learn the elements of persuasion, analyze the techniques and come to understand the different purposes for persuading. Some types of persuasive writing that are focused on are book reviews, editorials, and persuasive essays (to name just a few). Each of these sections also contains chapters titled "On Your Own" and "Rate Yourself." The first provides activities for students to practice applying their skills in an imaginative way, and the second is a self-assessment for students. The descriptive, narrative, and persuasive sections each have two composition activities to help students strengthen their writing. There are no answers included for the activities, as it is intended that the teacher would have a lot of interaction with each student and their work. ­ Zach 047827 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.99 18.25 Igniting Your Writing (4+) Designed for homeschoolers, these courses each provide 24 activities that challenge students to expand their creativity and vocabulary, practice specific features of good writing, and learn to rewrite and enjoy it. The author believes that a student's grade level often has little to do with their writing ability, so lessons are arranged by writing ability level, not by age or grade. It is possible that beginning writers younger than 4th grade can benefit from Book I and intermediate writers younger than 6th grade can use Book II. Book I contains 24 lessons with three options of difficulty in each: Start-Up, Intermediate, and Advanced. The lessons in Book I are divided to teach the basic writing tools for six different kinds of writing. Students gain skills for writing fiction, non-fiction, book reports, newspaper articles, letters to the editor, notes of sympathy or encouragement and other types of writing are practiced as well. The lessons are not sequential, but the four lessons within each of the six main sections are closely related and can be used to reinforce each other. Book II continues the sequence with 24 lessons and Intermdiate and Advanced options. The six units target focus, progression, clarity, writing to entertain, writing to inform, and writing to persuade. The lessons at both levels are incredibly flexible and can be used in any order or way that fits your schedule. In either book students can experiment with different levels and even switch back and forth between levels as they work through the lessons. All the activities are done on separate paper, so the books can be used by multiple students or one student at different times working at a higher level. Lesson instructions are written to the student in clear, concise language so children can work independently. A Teacher's Guide section gives the parent guidance to help the student through the lesson if necessary and to evaluate the student's work. ~ Rachel/Melissa 016272 Book I . . . . . . . . . . 16.99 12.95 024331 Book II (6+) . . . . . . 19.99 13.95

Wordsmith (7-9) Written by a homeschooling mom, the presentation of topics and skills in this book is outstanding! Instructions are directed to the student and interesting assignments encourage even reluctant writers. Lessons build from focusing on interesting word usage to sentence construction, to scene-setting, characterization, and well-written dialogue, and culminate in the writing of a short story at the end. Students can complete the course in about a year, but you might want to alternate lessons with grammar instruction, other technical skills instruction, or other types of writing and "stretch out" the use of Wordsmith over a longer time period. The book allows ample room to write exercises in, but students can also use regular paper so that you can re-use with several children. This book has also been revised, and the new edition features additional exercises and examples, an expanded section on writing short stories, additional explanation and examples of revision, 288 English / Writing

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

Learn to Write the Novel Way (5-12) In this "novel" approach to writing, children complete an entire year (or semester) of English in the context of writing a novel. This is homeschooling at its finest. First, children establish a purpose, a goal, a motivation - the writing of a novel. Prerequisite skills for doing so are then learned as they are needed to accomplish the goal. This is such a natural, sensible way to incorporate all of your instruction - like a unit study just for English. And, because of the wide grade range, you can teach all of your upper elementary and up children together. The process is broken down into 13 steps from incubation to hatching. Basically, the steps are: coming up with an idea, developing characters, choosing voice, developing plot, organizing, writing, writing (overcoming writer's block), revising for "vivid" (sensory) language, revising for better (more exact) word choices, revising for style (using literary devices), editing, creating a finished product (publishing) and showing it all off (sharing/distributing). Preferably, each step will take as long as it takes. However, the author has supplied a recommended schedule to help you stay on track. Each step corresponds to a process, not a time frame. All in all, students spend about 9 weeks planning, 8 weeks writing, 14 weeks revising and editing and 5 weeks publishing/distributing on a 36-week implementation. The editing takes about 8 weeks alone (this step includes most of the grammar, spelling, and punctuation instruction for the course), while others are allowed 2-4 weeks each. Each step is organized into three components: Learn, Practice, and Apply. Your involvement will be needed the most during the Learn phase to present new concepts and make sure your child understands - but mostly to coach! The worktext is amazingly well-written and easy to use (not to mention engaging!). Everything is clearly outlined for you and your child. Extra guidance for you for each step is contained in the small Teacher's Guide/Answer Key. The Practice part of each step is done independently by your child. This consists of questions, activities and exercises directed to the student. After Practice, students Apply what they've learned and practiced to their work in progress. The worktext is consumable (but not reproducible), so you will need to purchase one for each student using the program. Since the student pages are not included in the Teacher's Guide, you may want to purchase an additional copy for yourself. The Teacher's Guide contains answers, an overview of each step, hints, and group activities. If you really like this approach but consider it too expensive, think about what you would be willing to pay for your child to attend a weekly writing seminar given by the author (Carole Thaxton) for an entire year. That may put it into perspective. 008091 Text . . . . . . . . . . . . 39.95 32.95 008090 Teacher's Guide . . . . 5.95 5.50 Write Your Roots (5-12) By the same author as Learn to Write the Novel Way (see description). While both books follow the same basic format and teach the same steps and standards of composition, they do differ somewhat. First of all, while students work towards writing a novel in the other book, this end goal of this one is a biography, a complete

book of family stories. This means that not only will students be learning the process of writing, they'll also learn research skills as they conduct research (on-line, at a library, and through interviewing family members) to help write stories. Also, although following the same writing steps, there are different practice activities and examples, allowing for further reinforcement of the skills from the previous book. Like Learn to Write the Novel Way, this book covers one full year of English composition, with thirty separate steps (one to be completed a week). You can use it after completing the first book, or even before. In fact, this one may be a bit easier for younger students as they are working with a series of shorter stories rather than a longer work. Because the author recommends students completing two novels within their middle school and high school years, you could also use this book between two completions of ...the Novel Way. However you decide to use it, it's sure to provide eager or reticent writers with an enjoyable year of writing. Just as with the other one, students work directly in this book learning the principles and completing the exercises, so each child will need their own book. 226 pgs. 029266 Student Worktext . . 39.95 32.95 029267 Teacher's Guide . . . . 5.95 5.50 Sharpen Your Writing Skills (6-10) Positive and easy to follow, this series will cheer on your student every step of the way. Small, colorful books keep it simple while taking your child through the writing process to reach their goal product. They are relatable in their vocabulary and approach. Kids can easily take charge of their writing instruction. Checklists keep your child on pace and makes sure all necessary elements have been included. I liked how the skills are separated into different products and not just general writing tips. Kids are told exactly what to do from getting ready to write to their final editing. They are not boring to read, which was nice, and I think kids will appreciate that too. 64pgs, pb. ~ Sara EACH BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.95 7.25 052658 Debate & Speech Writing 052659 Essay Writing 052660 Good Grammar 052661 Report Writing 052662 Story/Narrative Writing Ready-to-Use Writing Activities (6-12) Which of the following is true? There's a confusing array of products designed to teach writing, or there's widespread uncertainty among homeschoolers about how to teach writing? If you guessed both ­ you'd be correct! Maybe we try to make it too complicated. This comprehensive series of writing activities should go a long way towards simplifying things. Each book provides 90 worksheet/activities (reproducible for a classroom/home) that focus on one aspect of the writing process. These are stimulating and creative exercises. For instance, the Unit 5 book includes "Crazy Quotations" ­ incorrectly combined quotes that need to be sorted out (and written correctly); "The Big Concert" ­ several representations of four combined sentences where the student is asked to select each that correctly combines the four ideas; "Why We Use the Comma" ­ matching a group of sentences needing a comma with a list of reasons for

inserting commas. Trust me, your student will be instructed, engaged and challenged ­ and you'll be glad for the complete answer key in the back. Best of all? There's no prep. Each activity is ready to go with just the right amount of instruction and guided practice. Although there is a progression both within the books and through the books, the activities can be done in any order. This series could be used in a variety of ways ­ to supplement another writing program, to provide targeted writing practice within a writing-intensive history or literature curriculum, or as a stand-alone writing program. ~ Janice EACH GUIDE (except noted) 19.95 14.95 047520 Unit 1-Word Activities21.95 16.50 047519 Unit 2-Sentence Activities 047515 Unit 3-Paragraph Writing Activities 047517 Unit 4-Prewriting & Organizational Activities. . . . . . . . . 20.95 15.95 047518 Unit 5-Revision & Proofreading Activities 047516 Unit 6-Portfolio Development Activities. . . . . . . . . 22.95 17.50 Painless Writing (6-12) If you have a student who thinks writing is painful, maybe they would benefit from the tips in this friendly, laid-back book. Rather than starting from the very beginning, this book offers a handful of strategies to improve writing by targeting some common problems. Nine chapters written directly to the student focus on cleaning up preposition clutter, enlivening your writing, silencing the passive voice, reducing nominalizations and activating your writing, smoothing out your writing, harnessing the power of the comma, adding rhythm, spotting gremlins in your writing, and creating a template for term papers. Within each of these chapters, helpful and conversational text helps students spot these potential weaknesses and offers practical advice for correcting each problem. Short exercises called "Brain Ticklers" give students the opportunity to put their newfound knowledge to use cleaning up poorly written sentences. Learning to avoid these pitfalls will go a long way in improving students' term papers, essays, and other writing assignments, and hopefully, it will also give them confidence that the writing process won't be painful. 246 pgs. ­ Melissa 031442 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.99 8.25 Writing for 100 Days (8-12) So many students get burned out on writing before they've hardly begun, bogged down by complex grammar rules, inflexible formats, and uninteresting assignments. It shouldn't be that way. Writing should be an exciting subject, entered into as an adventure, for there are so many types of writing that every assignment can be enjoyable! This is the way that Gabriel Arquilevich, author of Writing for 100 Days, presents it. Predictably, the book contains 100 lessons, divided into four categories; composition, fiction, poetry, and writing in action. The lessons are short, flexible, and structured for use by the student alone, or for a teacher and student(s). The book kicks off with word usage and a review of punctuation. However, this is only brief review, and though exercises are given, supplemental practice would be helpful to keep those skills fresh. After the basics are reviewed, more punctuation, (continued...) English / Writing 289

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

construction, tone, and style are covered in Composition. Fiction covers character creation, setting, plot, dialogue, and point of view. Poetry covers haiku, limericks, sonnet, free and blank verse, lyrics, and more. Writing in Action (the largest section) contains instruction on writing as part of daily life, such as business and personal letters, interviews, advertisements, reviews, columns, diaries, and greeting cards. The lessons, each covering a major facet of the big topic, are divided into two parts, the lesson and the writing. The introduction is clearly written, includes many examples, and is reader-friendly. Then the fun part - putting into action what you have just learned. The short assignments leave room for lots of creativity. We are encouraged, no, told to learn from our mistakes as we write our pieces, and how to recognize familiar pitfalls. Yes, an important step of many of the assignments is to purposely write our piece exhibiting the featured foibles! In a lesson on wordiness, we're told to write a half-page description of an event, adding as much wordiness as possible. In a lesson on fragments and run-on sentences, we have to write a story - a one-page story with one sentence. Or, write a description of an unknown planet, with a catch - use no similes or metaphors. This not only makes errors much more noticeable, but also relays to us the importance of grammatical tools and variety in writing. (Oh, by the way, after you write your piece with the errors, you do go back and fix it.) At the end of each unit, you use all the components you've practiced to write your big composition, fictional story, sestina, and journalistic works. For extra fun, several games are featured at the end of the book. Answers to the review questionaire also included. This is truly a "breath of fresh air" for any student, but especially to one who is having a hard time really enjoying the art of writing. - Jess 000607 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.00 17.25 INSPIRE! Motivating Lessons for Teen Writers (8-12) Imagine a day when your high school student begs to work on a writing project. Is that idea so lofty that you inwardly chuckle at the thought? If this is your experience, then allow Inspire to encourage and equip your student's writing. Written from the perspective that writers bring individuality with their choice of words, these thirty-five lessons (one per week) are designed to enable your student to develop a writing style that flows naturally and fluently; one that is all their own inspired through creativity, critical thinking, and personal application. This selfstudy curriculum contains solid instruction on the following four core areas of writing: description, narration, exposition and persuasion. Student samples, writer's tips and tools, and warm up exercises provide a framework for your student to express their ideas and develop their own unique writing style. Beginning with the five steps to the writing process, parts of an essay, and writing styles, the student is then introduced to each of the four areas of writing. In each of these areas, specific tips are provided along with interesting examples from classic and current works. As your student is set free to express their individual style, they will also be guided in how to develop and clearly communicate their ideas. 290 English / Writing

A final presentation in the form of a cultural project incorporating each of the writing areas is included. This may be an excellent way to showcase your student's achievements with family, friends, or in a co-op setting. Also included is a reference section which includes mechanics and punctuation, spelling helps, homophones, common abbreviations, and frequently misspelled words. Spiral bound with a heavy card stock cover. Non-reproducible.126 pgs. ~ Deanne 047638 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.95 WRITInG PRACTICE These materials focus on providing writing practice and offer little to no instruction. Learn to Write Resource Guide (K-2) Complementing the Learn to Write series of readers, this guide is full of ideas and activities for all 24 readers. Each reader gets a 4-page section that details the corresponding reader, the type of writing featured in the story, related literature that can be used to expand the lesson, suggestions for activities that that will engage the students, and reproducible blackline masters that go along with the activities. Many of the activities have children focusing on, and writing about subjects that should be very accessible ­ themselves! They get to write about their likes, their lives, things around them, things they have done. The activity pages help students visualize what is required of them, which can really help to nudge those reluctant writers at this age level. 025181 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.99 10.75 First Writing Prompts (1-3) The goal is to get young students writing, and sometimes they just don't know where to begin. This book provides 20 prompts per month from September through June to help get them started. The topics chosen may include seasons, friends, feelings, animals, food, sports, or something else that may be familiar. The prompts are great for daily journal writing, seatwork, and filling time in a beneficial way as you work with your other students. Two cutely illustrated templates are found in the back of the book if you want something other than ordinary paper for their writing, and this book is reproducible for classroom or family use. This inexpensive resource can help assure that you won't hear those words again, "I don't know what to write." ~ Donna 024816 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.99 8.50 Prompt, Plan, Write! (1-5) Successfully developing ideas into well-written pieces can be quite a challenge. Some children really benefit from having a graphic organizer to help get their ideas into a useful format. The books in this series are packed with prompts and organizers that cover several different types of writing: personal narrative, story writing, descriptive writing, letters, and simple instructions in grades 1, 2, and 3; descriptive writing, personal narrative, imaginative narrative, persuasive writing, and expository writing in grades 4 and 5. There is no actual writing instruction in the series. Each page is simply laid out in a very easy-to-follow format. There is a prompt to get the student thinking, a "plan" stage (questions to answer, instructions to follow, or boxes to write any ideas created by the prompt), and the actual writing assignment using the recently

completed planning. Each page is themed with an illustration and a notation of the skill being practiced ­ like main idea, planning a character, sensory details and such. The books also include writing checklists to help students make sure they are including all of the necessary literary elements. Pages are perforated, consumable, and reproducible for families or single classrooms. 80 pgs. ­ Zach EACH BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.95 12.95 044374 Grade 1 044092 Grade 4 044375 Grade 2 044093 Grade 5 044091 Grade 3 Just Write! (2-6) 054460 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.00 12.95

Author's Purpose Writing Prompts (2-7) These supplemental full-color 8"x6" cardstock cards provide writing prompts in three areas: persuasive, informative and entertaining writing. One side features a full color picture and the opposite side offers one prompt for each category. An example from the Grades 2+ pack shows a boy making a face at a dinner plate containing fish, broccoli and carrots. Prompt One (Persuasive) states: "Imagine your parents gave you fish and vegetables for dinner. You don't like fish... Write what you would say to convince your parents to let you eat whatever you want." Prompt Two (Informative): "Write a healthy dinner menu." Prompt Three (Entertain): "Entertain and write lyrics to a song about having to eat a food you don't like." Although designed for classroom and learning centers, these would be beneficial for homeschool families seeking to stimulate their children's creative thinking and writing. Each pack contains thirty-two writing prompts in grade specific areas. ~ Deanne EACH ITEM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.99 7.50 031883 Grades 2+ 031884 Grades 4+ 031885 Grades 6+ Writing Styles Photo Prompt Cards (2-8) Sometimes it's hard to come up with creative ideas for writing assignments, especially for all the different kinds of writing. These packs of cards provide visual prompts for different writing styles, including expository, narrative, descriptive, and persuasive writing. Each set includes 32 high-interest prompt cards that measure 8" x 6". One side of each card is a full-color photo of something captivating like wild animals, children playing, or exotic locations. The opposite side of each card gives three writing prompts based on the picture, usually for three different styles of writing. All kinds of expository, narrative, descriptive, and persuasive writing prompts are included - poetry, letters, processes, creative writing, research, cause and effect, dialogue, informative, and more. Find the prompts that suit your needs, use prompts about topics that interest students, or work your way through all the prompt cards so students can explore and practice a large variety of writing styles. An example: one card has a photo of a few lions resting in a tree; the expository prompt is to imagine you are a lion-taming expert and write a how-to-essay explaining the best way to wake a lion; the descriptive prompt is to pretend you are on a safari vacation and you have to write a letter to friends back home telling them about

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

the lions you saw; the narrative prompt instructs you to pretend to be one of the lions and tell a story about what you are going to do when you wake up. With engaging photos and three excellent prompts on each card (that's 96 prompts in each set!), these sets offer age-appropriate writing assignments that meet state and national standards and are lots of fun. ~ Rachel EACH PACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.99 7.50 038860 Beginning (2-4) 038861 Intermediate (4-6) 038859 Advanced (6-8) 1001 Writing Projects for Students (3-12) Daily writing. How many of us have that as a goal for our students? Or at least know that we ought to be doing it more regularly? If you fall under that particular home school guilt umbrella, there's hope - and help! This book will get your student writing ­ and keep them writing. Each project is designed to take about 15 minutes, will give your student something to write a paragraph about, requires only "common knowledge" and not research, and includes a wide variety of projects ­ questions, definitions, descriptions, opinions, letters, instructions, explanations, and poems among many others. If your goal is to develop vocabulary and critical thinking skills, then your student will be off and running ­ er, writing. Although projects are corrected daily, there's no real emphasis on the actual writing process (i.e. draft, edit, rewrite), so you will probably want to expand some of the projects or periodically complete a brainstorm-to-publish project. ~ Janice 045221 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.95

Best Ever Writing Models (4-9) Teachers and students who are tired of the same old "written report" will appreciate the diversity of exercises in this book. It contains 60+ varied writing exercises modeled after examples from renowned and classic children's literature. Each two-page assignment focuses on a different type of writing such as announcement, autobiography, dialogue, fable, limerick, and simile. The first page of each assignment begins with a definition of the writing term and then presents an excerpt from children's literature as an example. Next are observation questions to promote critical thinking, and then a writing exercise that encourages students to practice and develop the specific writing skill. Some examples of the writing exercises are completing a story outline, finishing the ending to proverbs, writing a legend, and keeping a diary for one day. The back of the book contains a title/author index. Reproducible. 112 pgs, spiral. ~ Lisa 047707 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.95 13.25

quoted, write their own proverb using a message selected from the choices given. Finally, Quotes to Stretch Your Brain takes us deeper into reasoning and analysis. The emphasis here is on finding meaning or application for quotes like "Jealousy is the jaundice of the soul" and "Before you speak, ask yourself: is it kind, is it necessary, is it true, does it improve on silence?". So, what are you waiting for? Pick one and use it to spark a lively discussion or a good piece of thoughtful writing. EACH BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.99 8.50 022173 Quotes That Bring History to Life 022174 Quotes to Spark Discussion 022196 Quotes to Start the Day 022199 Quotes to Stretch Your Brain Adventures in Writing (6-12) This easy-to-use book covers a wide range of different writing styles, and little preparation time is required for the teacher. After a brief introduction to the teacher, several pages are dedicated to outlining the included writing projects so the teacher can quickly read about and understand what is required for each one. Six projects are outlined on each page, allowing the teacher to easily skim through and see which genre is being practiced, how long the project will take, what process the student will use, what size group works best (some are individual, but many encourage partners or even a small group in order to share, brainstorm, critique, etc.), and any materials needed (usually nothing, sometimes poster board or index cards or other common supplies). There are fifty-one writing projects in all, covering tons of different styles from song lyrics, biographies, fables, fairy tales, book reports, conversations, descriptions, and science fiction to onomatopoeia, settings, newspapers, conflicts, point of view, characters, and more. For the students, each project is clearly described on a single reproducible page (designed to be copied and handed out to each student) including an overview of the assignment, steps to follow, and some sample writing to get them started. Each of these pages also includes the NCTE standards being met through this project. The length of time needed varies by project, but if you work through the entire book it will easily take you through an entire school year. 60 pgs. ­ Melissa 002201 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.99 7.50 Writing Teacher's Activity-A-Day (6-12) What is the most helpful thing for students trying to master the skills needed for effective writing? Practice ­ clearly defined, skill building practice that relates directly to the areas that students need to focus on. Organized alphabetically, it can be used easily for specific skill training, or students can work from one end to the other for complete writing enhancement. Each lesson begins with a definition of the skill, includes an example of it being put to use, and ends with some activities like answering questions about the example, short writing exercises, or writing paragraphs, passages, or essays of their own. The 181 lessons cover types of writing, writing constructs, and literary terms. A useful tool to round out any English program. 047521 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.95 14.95 English / Writing 291

Writing: Fundamentals for the Middle-School Classroom (5-9) Helping to develop the skills necessary for a wide variety of writing styles, this workbook provides lessons in the five most common types of writing: personal, descriptive, short stories, poetry, and non-fiction/reports. Chapters work through the necessary concepts from the easiest to the most challenging, for a total of 113 lessons. While the title states "for the middleschool classroom," all of these lessons can very easily be used as individual assignments or as supplemental activities in the homeschool setting. There is no specific classroom instruction, Pen Pals (4-8) and an answer key is provided in the back of the This series offers tons of writing prompts to book. An ideal supplement to any curriculum get your student writing. Designed to look like that needs more in the way of writing practice. little notebooks, each book holds 94 creative 047233 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.99 10.50 prompts. Better yet, each title holds prompts for a different type of writing, so you can easily Quotes....Series (5-9) find prompts to suit various writing assignments. If your well of pithy thoughts is running dry, or Spiral-bound, 4" x 5", 94 pgs each. - Melissa you are out of topics for journal writing, here's EACH BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.95 4.95 a quick inspirational answer. Choose material 032692 Descriptive Writing (4-8) from one of the four Quotes books in this series 032693 Expository Writing (4-8) to jumpstart a great discussion, initiate table 032694 Imaginative Writing (4-8) talk, or to start the next "great debate". More 032697 Narrative Writing (4-8) than just books of quotes, each page begins 032698 Persuasive Writing (4-8) with a quote, includes a short biography of the quoted person and asks thoughtful follow Awesome Art Projects that Spark Super up questions to get students thinking about Writing (4-8) it (along with space for recording answers). Even the most creative writers occasionally Quotes that Bring History to Life has 55 workneed inspiration. This book has 25 motivating sheet pages with quotes that span history from art projects with mini-lessons that help students Julius Caesar to Melinda Gates and cover topbuild skills in narrative, expository, persuasive, ics like patriotism, courage, leadership, and and descriptive writing. A sample of a project war. One I enjoyed was Edison's, "I have would be Our Town Gazette. Students invent a not failed. I've found 10,000 ways that won't town with interesting characters. They create a work." In Quotes to Spark Discussion quotes newspaper and publish the town's legends. Kids were selected more specifically to spark discusinclude headlines, art, captions, and a table of sion. They contain several proverbs along with contents. The paper is then presented to the quotes from the likes of Michelangelo, Emily class. Parents get useful teaching tips on the art Dickinson, Aesop, and Charles Schulz. Quotes and the writing like how to be encouraging and to Start the Day are intended as food for thought challenging at the same time. Each lesson has or to inspire your day. Ones like, "The sun clear objectives, a project checklist of things to cannot shine into an inverted bowl." ­ Chinese include in your writing, and a materials list for proverb would certainly have me scratching my the art product. Although designed for middle- head (since I tend to think literally). Follow-up schoolers, you could adapt some of these ideas questions have students define inverted, put the for older students as well. 64pgs, pb. ~ Sara metaphor into their own words, then, after other 053369 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.99 9.25 Chinese proverbs with a similar message are See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

WRITInG SKILLS PRACTICE These materials provide practice for developing individual skills necessary to writing rather than focusing on the work as a whole. Writing Practice (Scholastic) (1-4) These short workbooks run the gamut of writing skills, providing brief exercises in capitalization, punctuation, organizing ideas, identifying sentences, writing different kinds of sentences and paragraphs, proofreading, test-taking skills, and more. Using the table of contents, teachers can pick out the specific worksheet for the skill that students need extra practice in. Or you can just work your way through the book to review all the basic writing skills needed at that grade level. Each page covers a different skill, and exercises include fill-in-the-blank, circling parts of a sentence or identifying different writing aspects, and writing sentences and paragraphs. Depending on the grade level and difficulty of the concept, five to ten questions/activities appear on each page. Worksheets don't take long to complete, are engaging with easy-tofollow directions, and also feature full-color graphics. Answer key included. 48 pgs each (with 42 student worksheets), pb. ~ Rachel EACH BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.99 4.75 040943 Grade 1 040945 Grade 3 040944 Grade 2 040946 Grade 4 Week-by-Week Homework for Building Writing Skills (3-5) Although this book is written to be used in a classroom, giving students week-by-week homework assignments to build writing skills, it can also easily be adapted for home educators or co-ops. Meeting writing standards set by the International Reading Association and the National Council of Teachers of English, it presents clear instructions for helping students succeed in their writing practice. At the beginning of the book are instructions on how to complete a graphic organizer, which focuses on the basic five-paragraph format and contains a topic sentence with a few details about the topic. Moving on to section one are writing tips about how to get started in a writing assignment, followed with plenty of exercises for the student to complete. Section two is all about improving a student's writing. Again, several tips are given with exercises following. Section three teaches how to add zing to your writing, instructing students how to elaborate and add supporting details to their writing. Finally, section four explains figurative language and how to best use it in writing. Sections three and four also include lots of practice so the student can succeed. The reproducible activities and instruction in this book are clear and easy to follow, providing excellent follow-up practice to any writing program. ~ Gina 024832 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.99 12.25 Super Sentences & Perfect Paragraphs (3-6) 024821 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.99 10.50 Daily Trait Warm-Ups (3-6) Educators have been using the six traits of writing for nearly 20 years for teaching/training good writers. Focusing on a specific aspect of writing ­ ideas, organization, voice, word choice, sentence fluency, and conventions ­ 292 English / Writing

drafting, outlining, communication, vocabulary study, creative writing, and comprehension. Modeling in writing is a proven technique to help students become better writers. Each book includes a proposed schedule. The details for each book are listed below. ~ Zach EACH BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.00 015935 Writing Trails in American History Topics of this thirty-one week course include: the Mayflower, Paul Revere, War for Independence, the Declaration of Independence, the Constitution, Lewis and Clark expedition, War of 1812, Star Spangled Banner, Oregon Trail, War Between the States, the Gettysburg Address, famous inventors ­ Edison, famous inventors ­ Carver, Immigration to America, Ellis Island, WWI, and WWII. 025267 Writing Trails with Great Composers A 30 week course with text covering the following composers: Vivaldi, Bach, Handel, Haydn, Mozart, Beethoven, Schubert, Mendelssohn, Chopin, Liszt, Wagner, Tchaikovsky, Dvorak, Joplin, and Copland. 025268 Writing Trails with Men of Science A twenty-six week course covering John Herschel, Leonardo da Vinci, Galileo Galilei, Johann Kepler, Francis Bacon, Robert Boyle, Isaac Newton, Carolus 40 Writing Prompts With Graphic Organizers Linnaeus, Michael Faraday, Samuel Morse, (4-6) Charles Babbage, Louis Pasteur, Robert Students of all ages can sometimes have Koch, and George Washington Carver. difficulty coming up with ideas for writing. Scholastic tries to offer some support in this area with 40 Writing Prompts with Graphic Practice Makes Perfect Series (4-8) These grade specific supplemental workbooks Organizers. Descriptive, narrative, expository, and persuasive prompts are found in these pages focus on the developing and perfecting writing that are intended to spark the imagination and and grammar skills. Designed to be used at improve writing skills. Each prompt is one page your own pace, each book begins with a "how in length and the graphic organizer is the sec- to use" section and contains over one hundred ond page. Within the prompt students will find and fifty activities to provide ample practice in background information for their task and how targeted areas. Answer Key is included in the to brainstorm the different elements. Subjects back of the book. Instruction pages and workrange from creating your own superhero to sheets are uncluttered with black and white text. Exploring Grammar (4-6) contains nine parts. writing about your strangest dream. Steps and elements are laid out in the prompt and in the Brief explanations are given, along with "Tip graphic organizer so students have guidance Sheets" that provide reviews of concepts and rules for each section and then the plentiful throughout the process. The front of the book is of special interest to practice sheets. Part One "Sentences" contains parents and teachers, as it explains not only seventeen worksheets that focus on sentence how to use this book, but how to take a student types, sentence structure, subjects, predicates, from rough draft to final draft. The book is fragments and run-on sentences. Part Two reproducible for classroom and family use and "Nouns" includes ten worksheets focusing on also offers a `story sequence' page, a writing singular nouns, plural nouns, common nouns, checklist, and a page to help students score their proper nouns, irregular plural nouns, and posown writing. Help your students write with sessive nouns. Part Three "Verbs" contains twenty five worksheets covering action verbs, confidence and imagination. ~ Donna 024730 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.99 10.75 verb phrases, linking verbs, direct objects, subject-verb agreement, contractions with verbs, and irregular verbs. Part Four "Pronouns" Writing Trails Series from Logos (4-6) This course aims to help students develop com- contains fifteen worksheets on personal propetency, independence, and creativity in writing nouns, object pronouns, possessive pronouns, through the use of key-word outlines. Students contractions with pronouns, and antecedents. are given a short paragraph which is divided Part Five "Adjectives" contains seven workinto numbered sections. After reading the sec- sheets that review identifying adjectives, proper tion, students must create a new title, define adjectives and comparison of adjectives. Part several vocabulary words, find synonyms for the Six "Adverbs" offers eight worksheets on idenvocabulary words, and then work through each tifying adverbs, comparison of adverbs, and of the numbered sections and choose three or double negatives. Part Seven "Prepositions, four key words from each to form a key-word Conjunctions, and Interjections" contains ten outline. The next step is to use the key-word worksheets that focus on prepositions, preposioutline to rewrite the paragraph. Skills prac- tional phrases, objects of prepositions, conjuncticed in this multi-faceted writing modeling tions and interjections. Part Eight "Punctuation program include: penmanship, thesaurus study, and Capitalization" offers twenty three workhas proven an effective way of giving students tools for evaluating and improving their writing. This collection of trait-based warm-ups will provide activities to sharpen that focus. Each warm-up ­ writing prompts or text for revising ­ provides a specific assignment followed by a "Think About" checklist and, sometimes, student-friendly scoring rubrics. Enough for one-a-day for a year (180), the activities do not need to be done in order and can be used as a supplement to other writing lessons. Student sheets are reproducible for class/family, or use the included CD to print or project pages. 205 pgs, pb ~ Janice 047838 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.99 19.50 See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

sheets that focus on a variety of punctuation and capitalization rules and Part Nine "Usage and Proofreading" contains four worksheets on common words that cause confusion and ten worksheets on proofreading for grammatical errors. Exploring Writing (4-6) is divided into four main parts. Each section begins with an overview of writing instruction. Part One focuses on "Finding and Developing Ideas for Writing" with seven worksheets sections: Personally Speaking, Among Friends, School Days, Near and Far, Leisure Time, Recreation and Weird, Strange and Unbelievable. Instructions focus on identifying and developing ideas for writing. Part Two "Writing the Draft" addresses topics such as using proper sentence structure, combining and varying sentences, constructing paragraphs, using active constructions and strong verbs and choosing a point of view. Part Three "Revision" focuses on revision skills including types of weak composition that can easily slip into writing. Part Four "Proofreading" provides practice in finding errors in both fiction and non-fiction writings. Mastering Grammar (6-8) contains nine parts. Brief explanations are given, along with "Tip Sheets" that provide reviews of concepts and rules for each section and then the plentiful practice sheets. Part One "Sentences" contains fourteen worksheets that focus on sentence types, sentence structure, subjects, predicates, fragments and run-on sentences. Part Two "Nouns" includes fourteen worksheets focusing on common and proper nouns, irregular nouns and possessive nouns. Part Three "Verbs" contains thirty two worksheets covering action verbs, verb phrases, linking verbs, direct and indirect objects, subject-verb agreement, predicate nominatives, predicate adjectives, contractions with verbs and irregular verbs. Part Four "Pronouns" contains nineteen worksheets on subject and object pronouns, antecedents, possessive pronouns, indefinite pronouns, understanding Who and Whom, and pronoun contractions. Part Five "Adjectives" contains ten worksheets that review identifying adjectives, proper adjectives and comparison adjectives. Part Six "Adverbs" offers eleven worksheets on identifying adverbs, comparison of adverbs, and double negatives. Part Seven "Prepositions, Conjunctions, and Interjections" contains fourteen worksheets that focus on prepositions, prepositional phrases, objects of prepositions, adjective phrases, conjunctions and interjections. Part Eight "Punctuation and Capitalization" offers thirty four worksheets that focus on a variety of punctuation and capitalization rules and Part Nine "Usage and Proofreading" contains six worksheets on common words that cause confusion and seven worksheets on proofreading for grammatical errors. Mastering Writing (6-8) is divided into four main parts. Each section begins with an overview of writing instruction. Part One focuses on "Finding and Developing Ideas for Writing" with seven worksheets sections: Personally Speaking, Among Friends, School Days, Near and Far, Leisure Time, Recreation and Weird, Strange and Unbelievable. Instructions focus on identifying and developing ideas for writing. One hundred total worksheets in part one. Part Two "Writing the Draft" addresses topics such

as using proper sentence structure, combining and varying sentences, constructing paragraphs, using active constructions and strong verbs, effective transitions and choosing a point of view. Part two contains fifteen worksheets. Part Three "Revision" focuses on revision skills including types of weak composition that can easily slip into writing. There are twenty five worksheets that focus on identify and revising weaknesses in writing. Part Four "Proofreading" provides practice in finding errors in both fiction and non-fiction writings. The twenty five worksheets in part four are designed to develop the critical skills necessary for proofreading your own work. SC. Non-reproducible. ~ Deanne EACH BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.00 10.95 034899 Exploring Grammar (4-6) 022870 Exploring Writing (4-6) 022930 Mastering Grammar (6-8) 022935 Mastering Writing (6-8) How to Write ___ (5-10+) EACH BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.99 9.50 030292 A Paragraph (5-10) This workbook takes you step-by-step through the construction of a strong, cohesive paragraph, beginning with unity and topic sentences, and continuing with coherence, concluding sentences, types of paragraphs, and using the writing process (which includes prewriting, writing the first draft, editing and revising, and writing the final copy). Some exercise pages are consumable, and pages are reproducible. Answers are not included; the teacher will need to be familiar with the work the student is doing. 009816 A Composition (6-10) This book takes the student from an understanding of the writing form to the actual product providing help in selecting topics and organizing thoughts along the way. Several pages are spent at the beginning of the unit discussing what a composition is and the elements of a good composition. During the course, students will write various types of expository, narrative, and descriptive compositions. The last section of the book is on "Using the Writing Process" and contains a very good presentation of the writing process for reference during the course. 016149 An Essay (7-12) Most of the book is written to the student. There are five main instructional units. The first section describes what an essay is and how to recognize an essay and its different parts. The second section covers prewriting techniques like brainstorming, research, selection of arguments, and outlining. The third section shows the steps to write a first draft. Aspects such as the thesis paragraph, transitions, paragraphs in the body, the concluding paragraph, using quotes in an essay, and footnotes and bibliography are described. The fourth section is the largest and covers editing and revising. They instruct students on how to develop and improve style and make sure the mechanics are correct. Diction, tone, sentence variety, and syntax are just a few of the subjects covered. The final section shows the student how to write the final draft. A sample essay is included, as are charts to show diagram-

ming of certain writing techniques. There are a few reproducible worksheets and activities included in the book but, overall, it is mostly informational text, describing the writing process for the essay. Use a Better Word (4-6) Retire those overused words and replace them with more vivid vocabulary. This workbook is rather like a thesaurus activity book for kids. Some of the overused words include: big, cold, few, happy, loud, play, sad, and small. Sound familiar? Then your student is probably in need of this handy workbook. Each overused word has two activities to go with it to broaden one's vocabulary. Instead of small a child could use: wee, dwarf, teeny, tiny, petite, itsy-bitsy, minuscule, puny, little, meager, or insufficient! Now that's a nice variety, don't you think? Learning new words increases reading comprehension, writing, and speaking skills. Choose one word a week and keep a list of the alternative words on a wall in your classroom. With 30 common words and loads of synonyms, this will go a long way towards improving word skills in a school year. Pages may be reproduced for your classroom use only. 96 pgs, pb. ~Sara 053805 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.99 10.25 Sentence CPR (6-12) Give boring old sentences some CPR with the writing tips in this guide. The first section of this book provides tips and practice problems such as using details, similes, powerful verbs, and vivid metaphors. The second part of the book suggests different way of writing sentences to avoid putting readers to sleep. Imploring students to be more creative with their writing and avoid the sentence blahs while teaching vital writing methods, teachers will enjoy reading more innovative writing once students learn these techniques. Pb, 89 pgs. ~ Alissa 047494 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.95 13.50 Paragraphs for High School (9-12) 054167 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.38 Paragraph Writing Sentences to Paragraphs (2-4) A practice-based, self-instructional workbook series aimed at the mastery of sentence building and coherent paragraphs, these books lay a hands-on foundation for composition writing. The books progress systematically through definitions and examples of sentence types and their different parts, expanding sentences through the use of descriptive parts of speech such as adjectives and adverbs, linking sentences with conjunctions, and turning sentences into paragraphs. Other important sentence and paragraph topics such as predicates, subordinate clauses, punctuation, and so on are discussed and practiced along the way. Each teaching point is clearly explained and illustrated with examples ­ and built on through four or five exercises a piece. Brought to you by SingaporeMath.com, these consumable, twocolor workbooks are sure to be effective in their step-by-step approach. Answers included. -Zach EACH BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.00 040979 Book 1 040981 Book 3 040980 Book 2 045854 Book 4 English / Writing 293 23.75

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

Any Child Can Write (PK-12) Really! It's true. If you've ever read any of the Big Books, you've already seen Mary Pride's rave reviews of this book - a book she begged to be put back into print because she found it to be so practical, engaging, thorough, useful, and, in her own words, "absolutely the best book ever written, and quite possibly the best that ever will be written, on teaching children to write." How do you promote something better than that? Except to advise you to read the entire review for even more praise! Oh, by the way - we have also read this book, used ideas from it and think it's great! It's a non-consumable resource book you'll reach for and read over and over as Writing Paragraphs (3-4) This well-written reproducible book goes step- you help your child develop into an expressive by-step from learning about paragraphs to the writer. 365 pgs. essentials of paragraph construction. Its three 002267 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.95 18.75 main sections are: Learning About Paragraphs, Evaluating Paragraphs and Building Paragraphs. In Learning About Paragraphs, each lesson concentrates on a particular characteristic of the paragraph with an explanation (Think About It) and exercises to reinforce (Try It Yourself). Nine different attributes are covered. After learning about what constitutes a good paragraph, students evaluate paragraphs in light of this knowledge. These lessons have supplied paragraphs along with a series of questions to help the student determine any flaws. The section on Building Paragraphs then addresses constructing a paragraph from planning and honing a topic to writing specific types of paragraphs. In each Light Speed Writing DVDs (9-12) of these assignments, a model is supplied for Why get mired in musty books on writing reference. Students also practice writing from techniques when you can watch a fast-paced an interview, writing from notes and summariz- video with teen experts? Each video focuses on a different aspect of producing well-organized ing a story. Helpful references, too. 005305 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.99 8.50 and stylistically interesting papers ­ all with your own personal flavor. Since I'm one who prefers good, solid written content, I need to WRITInG InSTRuCTIOn RESOuRCES be doubly impressed with audio/visual conThese materials are resources for the tent ­ and I was. Topic coverage is thorough teacher or student, offering instruction and and orderly while the presentation style and ideas for teaching children to write but not presenters are energetic, engaging, and varied. providing "in-book" assignments/practice. This series would be excellent for your auditory learner or anyone who needs a fresh, dynamic Games for Writing (PK-3) Teaching writing can be very rewarding, even approach to the development of these necessary if frustrating at times. The key is to find a pro- skills. Each video is about 50 minutes, but this gram that teaches the useful skills of writing in a content would best be used in stages with lots of way that children will open up to and enjoy. If practice in between (the videos do not provide we ask the question, "What do children love?", actual writing assignments). ~ Janice one answer will always be, "Games, without a EACH DVD (except noted). . . 14.98 11.95 294 English / Writing

Paragraph Writing (2-4) This reproducible Evan-Moor workbook is packed with activities that provide students with practice writing narrative, descriptive, how to, and compare and contrast paragraphs. Part One details the different parts of a paragraph and helps students write and identify topic sentences, main ideas, and supporting details. Part Two gives students actual practice with writing the four different kinds of paragraphs. It includes activities like filling in blanks to make complete paragraphs, finishing sentences in paragraphs, and writing paragraphs from scratch, all with useful prompts and topics that students will find fun and personal. Part Three focuses on teaching students to plan out paragraphs by using a web diagram. Part Four teaches how to write a paragraph using an outline. Part Five includes reproducible sentence strips and picture cards to be used in a "Paragraph Writing Center" where students put sentences in the order that makes the most sense, use picture prompts to write paragraphs, and use open-ended topic sentences as paragraph starters. The final section of the book provides forms for students to practice writing paragraphs in science, social studies, and math. With fun topics, lots of practice, and a focus on trait-based writing, this workbook is a great supplement to any writing program. Additional useful contents include teacher and student checklists and eight transparencies for use with a few of the activities. 80 perforated pgs, pb. ~ Rachel 044441 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.99 10.45

doubt, games!" So, why not try and incorporate games into the writing process? Here is a book that resulted from that. The five parts of this book are: first, activities designed to ease kindergarten and 1st graders into writing; second, slightly silly and not very long writing activities (this way it is more something to enjoy than to think of as an assignment); third, nine playful ways to improving spelling and handwriting, and to increase understanding of English grammar; fourth, activities that help children work on more sophisticated stories; and last of all, activities that involve longer writing projects, some of which will require a half hour or so of time. As the teacher, you can select whichever activities and games you feel would be best for your children, made easier because each game is graded and placed into one of the five areas above. 52 games in all. ~ Zach 024577 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.00 11.95

010299 Know a Writer Basics of writing; evaluate, understand, and apply various styles and tones of writing; and how to successfully communicate particular styles and techniques into writing. 010252 Become a Writer Paper organization; forming, articulating, and supporting thoughts; examination of established and alternative styles of rhetoric; and writing examples from past and present. 010376 Your Own Writing Adding stylistic maturity and creativity to your own papers; free writing; and personal and professional writing. 010267 Bundle . . . . . . . . . . 49.98 39.75 Includes Know a Writer, Become a Writer, and Your Own Writing How to Write Clearly (9-12) If you're looking for a formula-driven writing program look elsewhere in our catalog. However, if you want a small treatise that assumes writing is an art and presents a natural way to encourage maturing writers to communicate with clarity, look no further. There are three paths to explore - message, sentences, and words; each directly impacted by the bonus fourth section ­ a short history of how English came to us. Message includes both a planning (nudging an idea "germ" into an outlined topic) and a writing (deftly opening a story thread and proceeding) portion. Sentence construction looks and sounds vaguely like grammar ­ skillfully using words to transport ideas through linking strategies, comma concerns, and usage quirks. Words gets down to the least element and makes sure their selection maximizes meaning and intensity. One of the main tenets of author Ruth Beechick is that English has come to use through a rambling amalgamation of linguistic elements rather than an orderly acquisition of grammatical precepts and thus discovering an inherently English (language not nationality) manner is the secret (and often missing) ingredient of effective writing. 83 pgs, pb. ~ Janice 045578 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.99 5.95 Evaluating Writing (AD) Maybe Dave Marks can't grade all our Writing Strands assignments, but his book will help. Common writing problems and how to fix them are discussed. The bulk of the book is devoted to reviewing assignments actually written by students, with commentary about the writing and what steps the teacher should take. How to correct problems like repeating words, "Dick and Jane" writing, ambiguity, tense errors, sentence fragments and run-ons, and a wide variety of other writing weaknesses are addressed. The book first shows a rough draft a student has written and then includes remarks the parent or teacher has made. Both the draft and the remarks are commented on so parents can see how best to evaluate all different types of writing. The book recommends that comments made on student writing be straightforward and to the point. Evaluation is provided for using Writing Strands 2 - 5 for grades 2 - 8, although this book could be used as a teacher resource regardless of the curriculum used. Now get that red pencil out! 96 pgs, pb. 020436 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.00 15.50

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

Evaluating Writing ­ Practical Tool to Subjective Grading (AD) Being an adequate writer myself, I was surprised to discover how difficult it was to grade my children's writing assignments. This little resource would have made all the difference. Straight forward and to the point, the author walks you through the various components of effective writing ­ setting objectives and establishing criteria that you go over with your students so they know what you are looking for. That's not the best part though - included with the booklet is a 50 pg 3x3 pad of sticky note grading rubrics. Just slap one on a writing assignment, take a few minutes to evaluate the writing in terms of content (25 pts), organization (10 pts.), punctuation & spelling (15 pts), grammar (15 pts), neatness (15 pts), and thoroughness (20 pts), and Voila! you have your grade! Nothing could be easier on the teacher while providing good information for the student. ~ Janice 045236 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.95 7.75 Reference Books - Writing Quick-Word: Handbook for Everyday Writers (3-5) This small format handbook is full of lists of words commonly used in student writing. Each page features a certain letter of the alphabet and includes several dozen words beginning with the featured letter as well as 32 empty blanks for students to write in their own often-used words. Homophones are starred when they appear in a list. There are five pages of homophones including sentences to show students which spelling means what, and there are also small sections of the handbook listing common abbreviations and the abbreviations of states, months, and days. All together, the book contains 1,220 high-use writing words and can be very useful for vocabulary activities or to aid in writing assignments. 32 pgs, pb with a paper cover. ~ Rachel 022671 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.95 2.95 The Elements of Style (3-AD) Too often, English teachers make the English language more complicated than it needs to be. Not so with the late Prof. William Strunk Jr., who originally authored this work to use with his classes at Cornell University in the early 1900's. Although the original 43-page digest has "swelled" to a whopping 85 pages, the essence of the book remains a strong case for cleanliness, accuracy, and brevity. Think of this as a concise rulebook for English. Rules are given, followed by examples of improper and proper usage. If you could only have one book on language usage, this should be it. 017085 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.95 8.50 Elements of Style (Original Edition) (3-AD) First published in 1918, this is the little book that started it all. This vintage edition of William Strunk, Jr.'s Elements of Style provides timeless advice on grammar, sentence structure, and clarity. Like the modern edition, this handbook begins with a list of elementary rules of usage, with each rule followed by examples and explanations. Next are chapters on rules of composition, a few matters of form, and words and expressions commonly misused. Most of

the rules and examples from this original edition appear in the modern edition; however, the modern edition is an expanded version with more rules, examples, and updates to reflect how the English language has changed over many decades. The original edition is a concise, inexpensive alternative to the modern version-- with grammar rules that still hold true today. 52 pgs, pb. ~ Lisa 047298 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.95 3.50 Rod and Staff English Handbook (7-12) Contains grammar and usage rules, as well as guidelines for various types of compositions. In addition to being a necessary part of the Rod & Staff 8th grade English program, this book is a recommended resource for Understanding Writing. 004016 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.00 13.95 Writer's Guide to Powerful Paragraphs (7-12) In this fast-paced world, not everyone has time to read long explanations, and writers must be able to write concise, informative, and easy-toread paragraphs. Recommended by the Institute for Excellence in Writing, this book shares everything you need to know about writing effective paragraphs. In an organized, straightto-the-point way, it first describes paragraphs in general, telling about the history, definition, function, length, development, topic sentence, unity, coherence, and organizing of paragraphs. Then the majority of the book explains and offers examples for 30 distinct types of paragraphs (chronological, descriptive, spatial, analogy, comparison, opinion, narrative, introductory, etc.). For each type of paragraph, a chapter describes the paragraph, tells when it is best used, gives a great example of that style of paragraph, analyzes the example paragraph, and gives a number of helpful tips for writing the featured type of paragraph. This is a great reference for seeing how to write different paragraphs and perfect for showing students that there is more to paragraphs than just a topic sentence and supporting details. 186 pgs, pb. ~ Rachel 039236 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.95 24.50 Writer's Guide to Using 8 Methods of Transition (7-12) Designed as a complementary text to A Writer's Guide to Transitional Words and Expressions, this guide could also be used independently to reference and master eight different methods of transition in writing. Part one of the guide includes 15 explanations and examples of transition that parallel A Writer's Guide to Transitional Words and Expressions. These include time order, sequence, repeat, provide an example, concede, summarize, add a point, compare, contrast, cause and effect, classify, emphasize, connect clauses, and more. The book explains how to write an effective transition using these various methods and then gives a great example of how each is done (usually in the form of a paragraph that uses the featured style of transitioning). Part two of the guide includes seven additional explanations and examples of transition, including pronoun reference, repeating key words, word substitution, repeating key phrases or clauses, beginning-of-paragraph transition, end-of-paragraph transition, and the transitional paragraph.

Again, concise explanations and great examples are included for each transitional method. Each method is presented on one page (at most two) and the methods and examples show how variety and liveliness are keys to good writing. If a student is struggling with writing effective transitions or needs help mixing it up, this guide book is a great reference. 56 pgs, pb. ~ Rachel 040623 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.95 12.75 Writer's Guide to Transitional Words and Expressions (7-12) One of the big things that keeps students from producing fluid and powerful writing is the lack of originality and effectiveness in transitions. This guidebook is designed to help writers connect ideas and create a smooth flow of sentences and paragraphs. It is conveniently divided and thumb-indexed into 15 categories, each containing one page with a helpful list of transitional words to use for that method of transitioning. Categories are: to indicate time order (presently, afterward, etc.); to indicate how or when something occurs in time (suddenly, always, etc.); to indicate sequence (first, next, etc.); to repeat (all in all, in short, etc.); to provide an example (for instance, to clarify, etc.), to concede (granted, albeit, etc.); to conclude (in conclusion, therefore, etc.); to add a point (moreover, plus, etc.); to compare (similarity, in the same way, etc.); to contrast (and yet, however, etc.); to indicate cause and effect (incidentally, therefore, etc.); to divide or classify (first, to split, etc.); to indicate spatial arrangement (in, adjoining, etc.); to emphasize or intensify (above all, to stress, etc.); and to connect clauses (and, as though, etc.). A page full of substitutes for the word "said" is also provided, allowing students to vary the way they express that word as well. These word lists (with dozens of words per category) are a great reference for students who tend to use the same words and expressions in their writing. While this book is simply a reference with lists of transitional words (which is great to use independently), it also works with A Writer's Guide to Using 8 Methods of Transition, a companion guide that teaches how to use all the methods of transition. With 1,000 entries in all and 500 substitutions for "said", this handy guide is a valuable reference. 20 pgs, pb. ~ Rachel 040622 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.95 16.75 Cite it Right (7-AD) As an English major, I often had to deal with avoiding plagiarism and citing sources correctly. Numerous students received failing grades or had to rewrite papers due to poor citation or accidental plagiarism. This handy SourceAid guide (from an industry leader in citation software) includes everything you need to know to avoid plagiarism and cite papers correctly, and I recommended it as both a writing guide and valuable reference for high school and college students. The first part is a very thorough guide to writing papers, taking students through the steps of researching and writing. (continued...) English / Writing 295

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

Excellent tips and guidelines are given for every step of the process, with special attention paid to finding good sources of information, keeping track of information and sources, and citing all sources as you write and revise the paper. This instruction is helpful whether students are writing their first or one hundredth research paper. The second half outlines the rules and formats for different writing styles (MLA, APA, CMS, and CSE) and is basically a user-friendly style book. Explanations and background on the styles are given along with layout guidelines, citation rules, and examples of title pages, bibliographies, in-text citations, and more. Information on how to cite online sources is included. The guide is easy to read and gives straightforward instruction to benefit any high school or college student writing a research paper. A few news stories showing the negative effects of plagiarism are included so students will see why plagiarism is to be avoided. 226 pgs, pb. ~ Rachel 039858 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.95 14.75 CREATIvE WRITInG These materials cover various types of creative writing, including descriptive writing, poetry, journaling, and stories. Creative Writing - Programs These materials include both writing instruction and assignments. If You're Trying to Teach Kids How to Write You've Gotta Have This Book (1-12) We've received many, many requests for this book. Full of ideas to stimulate creative writing, homeschooling mothers have attested that this book singlehandedly converted reluctant writers to prolific prose-ists! The twelve chapters cover The Roots, The Foundation, The Romance, The Process, Tools & Techniques, Response & Revision, Presenting, Writing Portfolios, Assessment, Problems, Just Ideas, and Independence. Within these chapters, tons of helpful topics are addressed, like a list of over 200 alternatives to story writing (ads, parables, slogans, folk tales, etc.), word play, topic ideas, writing tools and skills, implementing portfolios, evaluating writing, reticent writers, appropriate ideas for little kids and gifted kids, creating a permanent writing center in your classroom, and lots more. The chapters are written in a friendly, personable manner, and the solid advice, creative suggestions, and encouraging tips will help you turn your reluctant writers into writing enthusiasts.Reviewer Cathy Duffy calls this book her "personal favorite for creative writing." 255 pgs. 003473 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.99 14.95 Complete Writing Lessons (4-8) If you enjoyed If You're Trying to Teach Kids How to Write You've Gotta Have This Book, then you'll really appreciate authoress' Marjorie Franks taking her approach one step farther. She has joined her creative ideas with writing instruction and laid out actual, easy to teach lesson plans dealing with most every imaginable writing form. There are thirty lessons in this book. A motivating, high-interest activity begins each lesson to get things rolling. Then, the lessons direct the teacher to assist the student throughout the writing process - collecting and 296 English / Writing

Imitation in Writing (3-10) As the title suggests, this course from Logos Press aims to teach writing through the medium of imitation. The author proposes that as it was the method of a bygone era, and since educators still use imitation to teach many different subjects, e.g. handwriting, art, math, music, and reading, it is an effective tool for teaching the art of writing. Written for a classroom setting, the series is easily adapted to a homeschool environment. Each book has step-bystep instructions, beginning with the student's first reading of the original work and ending with a final draft and grading of his own version. All of the stories, tales, myths or fables to be imitated are included in each book, along with reproducible worksheets which guide the student in taking notes on key aspects of rewriting the original: vocabulary, plot, characters and any additional requirements. Examples are given of completed worksheets and rewritten stories, tales, myths and fables to aid the teacher. A neat series for teaching young people to write creatively. ~ Zach EACH BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.00 001777 Aesop's Fables (8) Magic Pencil (1-9) 001855 Fairy Tales (3-8) I liked the sound of this book before I had 001885 Greek Heroes (5-10) even finished the first page of the introduction, 015913 Greek Myths (5-8) and five pages later I am convinced that this 015915 Medieval Legends (7+) book could be a real winner for many people. To try and sum things up concisely, the aim is Write Your Own...Series (5-7) to help children and parents/teachers experiGet inspired with these helpful books! Each ence and discover creative writing methods book takes you step-by-step through the writtogether, while keeping creative writing as an ing process, from getting started, to setting the important and necessary part of the other side of scene, developing characters, and more. Each writing ­ the more "serious" academic writing. book's layout is visually appealing, with plenty The neat thing is that the book is simply geared of photos, graphics and colorful text boxes contowards adults who have the opportunity to taining excerpts from published works as well as teach children, which makes this perfect for the tips and techniques. Glossaries and indexes are homeschooling scenario. A section in the back included in the back. 64 pgs, pb. ~ Lisa helps teachers use the book in a classroom set- EACH BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.95 5.50 ting, but the idea of the book as a whole is for 046054 Adventure Story the teaching of writing to seem "less like teach- 046055 Article: Newspaper/Magzine/Online ing and more like a mutual adventure between 046056 Autobiography child and adult, a grand adventure in discovery 025014 Fairy Tale about language." This is done in two different 025023 Fantasy Story sections. The first is twenty chapters, or writing 025031 Graphic Novel projects, that are about learning through play- 025032 Historical Fiction Story ing with language. The activities and exercises 025063 Mystery Story in this section are designed to build confidence 025064 Myth in writing through a primary focus on content 025095 Nonfiction rather than any specific writing skills, and they 046057 Poetry include many hands-on or "big picture" activi- 025100 Realistic Fiction Story ties. The second section has twenty-six chapters 025107 Science Fiction Story for honing and developing those specific writing 025138 Tall Tale skills, including revision and editing, through many different forms of writing. While the exer- The Creative Writing Handbook (6-10) cises in this section will require more involveRather than being just another schoolbook, ment from adults than the exercises in the first this handbook has a different feel to it. By this, section, the focus remains the same ­ to main- I mean that instead of the pages seeming like tain a fun and flexible environment for writing assignments, the book is written for students that involves encouragement, building-up, and who want to learn how to write - as though praise for effort and ideas, with gentle coaching they picked up this book themselves because in areas that need improvement. The book also they were interested and are doing it on their includes ideas for working with very young chil- own time because they enjoy creative writing. dren, what to do when children make errors in I find it very fresh and appealing. The authors writing, how to motivate young writers ­ even believe that mastering a narrative first will reluctant ones, a reading list for PK through 9th lead to better short stories and poetry and help grade, and a few words on the supplies that will them to flow more naturally, so the first part of be needed for the activities and exercises. 125 the book focuses on writing a narrative. This pgs, pb, black and white illustrations. ~ Zach is broken up into 3 different chapters, offer008968 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.95 7.50 ing students practice in beginning a narrative, organizing ideas, writing a rough draft, critiquing and revising, practicing writing skills, and sharing the finished product. As the book states, the basic idea behind them is "students learn the writing process best through teacher-directed writing sessions." The book covers questions, reports, paragraphs, explanations, directions, conversations, character studies, various kinds of stories, news articles and headlines, invitations, posters, jokes, advertisements, diary entries, and poetry. Fun, well-written examples accompany the lessons. Cathy Duffy, in her Christian Home Educators Curriculum Manual says, "This is one of the best books for teaching writing because it effectively teaches skills in an enjoyable way and is easy for teachers to use." This book is also reproducible, making it an even better value. 127 pgs. 011119 Middle (4-8) . . . . . 14.99 11.95 MIDSET Set of If You... and Middle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.98 25.95 See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

developing a narrative, and lastly perfecting a narrative. Each of these chapters follows the same basic steps - pre-writing, exploring, and brainstorming; composing and creating a draft; and finally revising, using sensory and vivid words, working with combining sentences, transitions, beginnings and ends, peer editing (you can do this yourself if there aren't any other students to assist), writing the final draft and then proofreading again. The chapters on short stories and poems follow this same format. For the short story, you'll also work on characterization and the structure specific to a short story. In the poetry chapter, you'll practice with imagery, structure, rhythm, figurative language, ideas, poetic springboards, and other relevant elements of poetry. Throughout all of the chapters, examples from professional and student writers are given for students to analyze and understand what it is about them that is so effective and successful. (This includes excerpts from books by John Steinbeck (The Long Valley) and Harper Lee (To Kill a Mockingbird). Students are also given plenty of opportunities throughout the book for their own writing practice. After reading the example, they are encouraged to try their hand at capturing an audience with a great opener, vivid descriptions, smooth transitions, or whatever skill they are working with. They are also encouraged to keep a writing journal for daily use, and ideas for topics are given to help them get started. The very last chapter in this handbook provides ten guidelines for good writing and additional practice with sentence combining. This handbook could be a very beneficial, enjoyable tool for anyone who is interested in creative writing as a craft. - Melissa 022613 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.95 14.25

¾ developing characters into "real" people ¾ the climax, using many sample excerpts to illustrate the concept ¾ developing a "powerful" ending to your story ¾ writing your short story ¾ selecting appropriate names for characters ¾ how to critique, proofread, edit, and revise your writing ¾ suggestions for getting published and copyrighting your work ¾ writing from a Christian perspective Adults who aspire to be published would also do well to work through this course! The author recommends Write Right and Elements of Style as references (see reviews later in this section). Corresponding test features 85 questions from the book, including matching, multiple choice, and true/false questions. An answer key to the test is provided. 003764 Book . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.99 6.95 000291 Tests and Key . . . . . . 2.99 2.50 Art & Craft of Writing Christian Fiction (9-12) 053569 Fiction Book . . . . . . 17.99 14.95 053571 Fiction Workbook . . 15.99 12.95 053570 Book & Workbook. . 33.99 25.95 Creative Writing - Practice These materials focus on creative writing practice and offer little to no instruction.

attach the photo to your own prompts. There are a total of 99 photo/prompt pages plus some informational pages. The forward has "Ten Ways to Use Write What You See", and there is also an appendix section entitled "How Some Teachers Use Photographs to Inspire Writing" to generate even more ideas for using photographs to inspire writing. They say, "A picture is worth a thousand words"... 027768 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.95 18.95 Little Red Writing Books (1-6) These half-sized books offer creative writing prompts for young students. On one page, an enjoyable question or fun, one-line scenario serves as a short story starter. Underneath the starter are three outlines - one big box for drawing a picture for your story, a "Think About It." box that offers helpful questions that your story should answer, and a circle containing suggested words for your story, along with space for you to add your own. On the facing page, blank lines give you space to create your work. Perfect for a journaling assignment, writing warm-up or on that long car ride. ~ Steph EACH BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.99 7.25 004306 Grades 1-2 030662 Grades 5-6 004310 Grades 3-4 Draw Then Write (1-6) These reproducible books each provide 23 fun drawing activities. Students draw animals, people, vehicles, and more, and then they write about what they've drawn. To assist students in drawing, sketches are included which show step-by-step how to draw the simple pictures. In the first book, students mostly answer simple questions about what they've drawn or fill in sentences using a word bank. In the advanced book, students are urged to write paragraphs about what they have drawn, using a topic sentence and plenty of supporting detail. Spark creativity by combining art and creative writing and watch those pencils fly. 96 pgs.~ Rachel 016950 Grades 1-3 . . . . . . . 15.99 10.45 016951 Grades 4-6 . . . . . . . 14.99 9.95 Write Abouts (1-8) These spiral bound, small format books look like little flip calendars. They each contain 365 imaginative prompts, thoughts, and starters to get kids writing. The pages are dated, so you can do them on the appropriate days, or just pick and choose throughout the year. EACH BOOKLET . . . . . . . . . . . 9.75 7.95 Grades 1-3: 019540 Creative Thinking 019542 Silly Starters 019543 Story Starters Grades 4-8: 036213 Creative Thinking 019541 Poetry Starters 036215 Silly Starters 036218 Wacky Headlines 019544 Story Starters 019545 Writing Starters Word Play! Write Your Own Crazy Comics (3-8) EACH BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.99 4.95 054106 Book #1 054107 Book #2 English / Writing 297

The Exciting World of Creative Writing (7-12) A very inspiring and uplifting course in creative writing, authored by a (published!) Write What You See: 99 Photos to Inspire Christian writer, Ruth McDaniel. Other than Writing (K-AD) Photographs can be powerful motivators for reviewing what is required of the student and offering your critique, no teacher involvement writing. We have used this approach in our is necessary. The text is written to the student. own school, utilizing photographs from magaBy the end of the course, your child should be zines and calendars. As a student in junior high proudly producing well-written, interesting short (long ago), my creative writing teacher also used stories, possibly with the intent of publishing this technique, keeping a file of memorable and them! Throughout the lessons, the liberal use inspirational photographs she had culled from of examples to illustrate concepts helps students a variety of sources. So, when I came across to "see" what Ruth means. Skills are gained in this very engaging collection of black-and-white a systematic progression, but exercises are any- photo-prompts for writing, I was immediately thing but dull. The course contains lessons on: intrigued. This volume was compiled by a photographer and former English teacher. He has ¾ writing styles - discussing an author's captured some very salient images and put them voice or personality on pages along with a quotation and "Ideas for ¾ review of grammar and composition skills Writing" to get you started. Some pages also ¾ review of sentence structure and composicontain Possible Key Words (verbal starters); tion Possible Opening Lines (beginnings of possible ¾ identifying and using specific elements of first lines); Research and Write (generally for writing additional background to inspire some exposi¾ poetry tory writing); Questions to Consider (creating ¾ creating "grabber" beginnings and finding more of a framework for specific writing); Some your own "voice" or style that sets your Facts to Consider (additional statistics to accomwriting apart pany the photo). Most of the entries spark narra¾ how to write dialogue (including an exceltive writing; others lend themselves better to an lent summary of and practice in using expository piece. But the book remains openquotation marks) ended about the type of writing you will assign ¾¾writing narrative - describing details vivor the student will choose. You may even idly, using all the senses and imagery decide to use the photographs without the tex¾ finding a topic to write about and decidtual prompts. A CD of all the photographs, with ing on a brief plot summary and without accompanying textual prompts, is sleeved at the back, so you can easily do this or ¾ outlining your story in more detail See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

350 Fabulous Writing Prompts (4-8) This book provides 350 thought-provoking questions specifically tailored to develop critical thinking skills while feeding the imagination. Writing prompts are organized into sixteen major categories, such as If You Could Change, Tough Decisions, The Future, Real World Responsibilities, and Quotations to Think About. Each of these sections includes twenty or so individual prompts that fit under that heading. Prompts are simple and straightforward and sometimes have a double question in them; for example, "Do you think cars will be used 100 years from now? If so, what features will they have? If not, describe your vehicle of the future." The book is simply composed of these prompts, broken up into sections and numbered. There's no space for writing in the book, and while it looks like a workbook, it's not intended to be reproducible. Most of the prompts encourage sharing opinions or self-reflection. A great resource for hundreds of ready-to-use, stimulating prompts. 48 pgs. pb. ~Enh 014744 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.99 8.50 Rip the Page! Adventures in Creative Writing (5-AD) What are the names of your fingers? Where did you find your good luck charm? If you plant your heart, what might grow? What do your wings look like today? Why don't you ever run out of surprises? These questions and more are from a chapter called Questions to Ask Yourself. The last page is one to be ripped out and written on by you, the reader. This may be the most creative of all creative writing books out there. The author encourages you to pick and choose, skip around, and write notes on the pages you like or don't like. Parents and teachers could use this in so many ways, the possibilities are truly unlimited. Author Annie Burrows tells us that if you write, you're a writer. She says that reading will make you a better writer and that spelling mistakes have nothing to do with good writing. Writers have to write. Sometimes though we run out of ideas, everyone does. This book will spark a writer's imagination and ensure that the ideas keep on coming. 245pp, pb. ~ Sara 053329 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.95 11.50 Creative Writing - Resources These materials offer instruction and ideas for teaching children to write but not providing "in-book" assignments/practice. Writer's Notebook (3-7) Many teachers and writers understand the benefits of having a writer's notebook. It can help prevent writer's block, is great for brainstorming, is perfect for storing favorite quotes and passages, and gives students a way to talk about their day or notice things around them. In this book, noted author Ralph Fletcher shares with young students why and how they should keep a writer's notebook. He explains the difference between a diary and a writer's notebook and gives examples of how his notebook has helped him better his writing and come up with ideas. He explains what kinds of things are useful to store in a notebook and gives lots of real-life examples from the notebooks of young students. He also shares thoughts about notebooks from famous writers like Paul Fleischman, 298 English / Writing

Naomi Shihab Nye, Louise Borden, and Lillian Morrison and how entries these writers made in their notebooks led to published books. Full of great ideas and examples, this book will excite students about beginning one and will show them how to get started.138 pgs, pb. ~ Rachel 007214 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.99 4.50 Story Writing - Programs These materials provide both writing instruction and assignments for writing stories. Reach for the Stars: Young Author's Fiction Workbook (3-8) So your child wants to write a fiction story, but he's not sure how to begin or even how to develop his story. If your child is interested in writing fiction stories, but needs some direction and help with organization, this is an excellent resource. Beginning with brainstorming, this workbook instructs students in many areas of writing, such as creating characters, using descriptive words, characters' feelings, sentence variety, plot, dialogue, chapter breaks, and much more. There is a section on conflict, climax, and resolution, as well as how to end a story and make revisions. The author goes into detail about these instructions, using examples and charts, and then allows the student to use his own creativity to begin to formulate his story. Written by a homeschool mother, the lessons are easy to follow and engaging for the student. There are lesson ideas in the back for the parent or teacher wishing to guide his or her student through the writing activities. This resource also works well in classrooms and coops. After using this workbook, your student will be thoroughly equipped to tap into his imagination and write a splendid story he will take pride in. ~ Gina 034900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.95 14.95 How to Write a Story (4-6) This workbook includes everything you need to take your child from inspiration to publication. It is creatively divided into seven parts, and each section provides great instructions and insight for you and fun reproducible worksheets for your children. Part 1 of the workbook walks you through the writing process - prewriting, drafting, responding, revising, editing, rewriting, and publishing. Part 2 teaches your children learn the parts of the story - characters, setting, plot, and conclusion. Part 3 helps your children write a story step-by-step (several story planning forms are provided). Part 4 introduces different genres of writing, such as realistic fiction, historical fiction, mystery, adventure, fantasy, and science fiction. Part 5 provides forms for your children to write and illustrate as they work on the final copy of their stories. Part 6 will help your child publish their first book as they create a cover and include a title page, a dedication page, and a section about the author. The last section gives you ideas and instructions for setting up a writing and publishing center of your own. Answers for the worksheets that have "right" or "wrong" answers are not provided; however, the correct answers are very apparent. Most of the worksheets have questions that prompt creative writing. Set your expectations and grade accordingly. Black-and-white text and illustrations fill the pages of this 96-page, paperback workbook

that will help your budding novelist become a confident storyteller in no time! - elise 007020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.99 10.45 Creative Writing Made Easy (4-7) EACH BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.95 054232 Isabel's Closet 054231 Introducing Isabel 16.50

Story Starters: Help Children Write Like Never Before (4-12) A blank page can be a hard thing to fill. If your children are afflicted with that wide-spread problem, as I myself was during some of my homeschooled years (and which is probably as old as creative writing itself!), their struggles to write simple thank-you notes or lists of their favorite hobbies probably means they don't stand a chance if you ask them to write a story about a sailor shipwrecked in a storm. It is hard to imagine the difference a book like this would have made if my parents could reference it for the times they became too busy to write personalized stories for my reading and writing exercises ­ most likely a lot less doodling, slouching with boredom, and pencil breaking for sure. For both boys and girls, the 67 story starters in this book have huge diversity ­ adventure, humor, domesticity, explorations, and more. The starters vary in length, but each one draws the student in with an engaging style, creating a desired excitement to learn the end of the story ­ even if they have to write it themselves! The starters are accompanied by one or more very detailed black and white illustrations, a great way to enhance the imagination and help the creativity flow. Each starter also includes a prompt on how to continue the story and some "writing help" points for parents to use if their children need some more encouragement. Some also include an additional challenge exercise. However, this book is not simply about giving your students a starter to help them write a story, it is about giving them the help they need to "write as they have never written before." This means a certain amount of help from the teacher, and to this end the notes for the teacher in section one cover the idea behind the book, the flexibility of the book, attitudes, teaching tools, how to use the story starters, four different methods of narration, and motivation and grading. Section two contains the story starters, and section three, again for the teacher, is all about polishing the students' writing through sensory language; uses for verbs, adjectives, and adverbs; kinds of narrators; setting; and characters. The fourth section is for students who have advanced through the story starters in section two and now feel confident to start with a blank page and nothing but a picture to inspire their story. Twenty-four pictures are included in this section. The final section closes the book with some final notes on narration, an index of literary terms and techniques, and some additional writing resources. There is no set time frame for getting through this 458-page softcover book. Parents and students should pick and choose the story starters they want to do and the frequency with which they want to complete them. This resource is non-consumable and should be considered a supplement to your English course. ~ Zach 015647 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.95 24.95

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

Adventures in Fantasy: Lessons and Activities in Narrative and Descriptive Writing (4-12) This is for those of you with children who want to create some serious writing in the realm of fantasy. It references several "classic" fantasy works like Tolkien's Lord of the Rings, Eragon by Christopher Paiolini, and The Chronicles of Narnia by C.S. Lewis, among others. I highly recommend perusing the Table of Contents pages on our website to get an idea of this instructional volume's scope. Whereas author John Gust had to literally fight for time and resort to subversive tactics to use this approach in his classroom (due to all of the mandated, test-driven material he had to cover), you can blissfully submerge yourselves in working through this "epic" material. You can use this approach as a "write of passage" (Mr. Gust's words), working through the entire project and allowing your student to become really involved in the process, or you can use selected lessons and handouts; kind of a fantasy "light." You will still be way ahead with this book; I've seen little on the market with anywhere near the coverage offered here. Mark would have absolutely loved this book. I remember him doing much the same thing on his own time ­ even developing a new language for his created world. Here you will study what constitutes a fantasy, the various types of fantasy, and learn about all of the individual elements that combine to make a fantasy great. There are many details and much imagination required to write a story in an entirely different setting or world than the one we are all familiar with! Details need to be carefully considered and crafted to make the world real for the reader. Many student handouts are included in the volume among with ample teacher instruction and photographs of Mr. Gust's class happily engaged in their inventions. The author's enthusiasm for this project is contagious, also, helping you to get caught up in the adventure that awaits. This might be a good project to jump in on and create a fantasy world of your own....who knows ­ you might be the next Tolkien! 044612 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.95 18.95

Create-A-Sleuth: Writing a Detective Story (5-10) For all those young authors out there who aren't content with creating mere fiction, here's a tempting challenge for you to create your own whodunit. This book leads both teacher and student through mystery-writing in a simple, step-by-step process. The book consists of 22 activities, each featured on a double-page spread which includes teacher instructions and information on the left-hand page, and the example activity sheet for the student on the right. As the student works through the writing activities, they will begin by brainstorming detectives and "building" their own sleuth, dreaming up situations or mysteries to be solved; create a whole cast of characters including the detective's family and friends; identifying their detective's strengths, weaknesses, values, and special tools he or she may use; creating evil villains to pit against their detective's smarts; creating clues (and red herrings!); identifying records they may want to use; and putting it all together to create their mystery story. Several additional activities are included as well, such as putting their story into dramatic or comic format (as well as a host of other options), creating a story as a group, writing a "locked room mystery", or using one of the given story starters to begin. The reproducible activity sheets for the students are included at the end of the book, and are perforated for easy removal. Move over, Sherlock, Hercule Poirot, and Encyclopedia Brown - there's a new gumshoe in town... - Jess 028465 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.95 11.95 How to Write a Story (9-AD) For years, teachers and aspiring writers have asked Lee Roddy (author of "Grizzly Adams," countless short stories, and over 50 novels) to compile a guide from his 20 years of convention seminars. This is that much-anticipated guide. Whether adults use this book to instruct young students or utilize the guidelines to write a best-selling short story or novel of their own, the practical system for writing laid out in this guide will be beneficial. This is not a workbook, and it's not very fancy with just a yellow paper cover with black plastic binding, but it lays out a straightforward approach to writing which has been proven to work for the author and many others. It's filled with tips, outlines, suggestions, and rules for writing techniques that will get students to write proper stories and enjoy it as well. The guide begins with a helpful introduction that tells teachers how to use the book and then contains eight lessons on ideas, story building, objectives, obstacles, outcome, characters, plots, and scenes. Goals and the importance of these eight story aspects, outlines, ideas for writing, examples, and so much more are included in each lesson. The end of each lesson also includes a few short-answer questions and a simple writing assignment that will help them use what they have just learned in their own writing. An encouraging conclusion is also included in the guide, with the author giving final tips for making sure your writing is strong and successful. A handy guide presenting a solid method for writing fictional stories. 88 pgs. 035997 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.00

Guide to Writing Your Novel (9-12) Do you have a writer in your home? Someone who always has a good story floating around in his head and is eager to "get it out?" Lee Roddy, author of more than 50 novels, has a passion for helping young writers move from that "wannabe" stage. Published by IEW, this does not follow the IEW pattern. It's more like participating in a one-on-one training session with the author. Writing directly and conversationally to the student, in each chapter Mr. Roddy first shares his insight and wisdom on the topic, then provides a checklist so the student can be sure of his understanding of the discussion. Then the student is invited to pick up her pen and do a bit of writing, applying the instruction. Chapters include characters, specific novel genres (i.e. suspense, romance, mystery, etc.), plot development, scenes, researching/interviewing, and marketing. Thorough to the end, Mr. Roddy even includes a section on recent changes in the book industry. Highschoolers will be able to work through this course on their own but will, undoubtedly, appreciate encouragement from the parent's corner. It could be used either as the composition portion of any year's English credit or as a special (i.e. senior?) project. 139 pgs, spiral-bound ~ Janice 022394 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.00 Story Writing - Practice These materials focus on writing practice and offer little to no writing instruction. Tell Me A Story Cards (PK-3) Here's a wonderful way to develop language, memory, logical sequencing, vocabulary, and storytelling skills. The pictures on these cards provide interesting and imaginative prompts for stories. The students can use them in a number of ways. Each child can string several cards together to create a story, or multiple players can take turns adding a card and adding to the story. Parents can even use these as prompts for when they are asked to tell a story. Once the story is complete, try retelling the story and see how much all of you can remember! These cards are colorful and nicely laminated. ~ Caryl

CHOKING HAZARD (1). Not <3yrs.

EACH CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 047319 Circus Animals Adventures 047321 Fairytale Mix-Up 047323 Mystery of the Forest

9.95

Short Story Writing (5-12) This little handbook is packed with story writing suggestions. In 48 pages, the editorial staff of Rod and Staff Publishers examines what it is to write a short story; the development of one main theme; using purposeful paragraphs; the main character; conversation; the readers ability to see, hear, and feel; conflict, climax, and conclusion; plot; and the choice of a good title. Using concise suggestions and lots of examples, this booklet endeavors to encourage writers in the art of masterful story telling for the glory of God. 045174 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.50 2.25

Write Me A Story (PK-3) This writing booklet is a perfect companion to the Tell Me A Story Cards. Once the student creates the story using the cards, he or she can write down the story in this booklet. The booklet comes with large pages, and the large writing lines have the dotted middle line for students who still need the additional help to form letters properly. Another great feature is that the booklet comes with stickers that match the story cards, so the student can "illustrate" the page by applying the appropriate story sticker in the designated space at the top of the page. This booklet can also be used without the story cards. 96 stickers, 50 pgs. ~ Caryl EACH CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.95 047320 Circus Animals Adventures 047322 Fairytale Mix-Up 047324 Mystery of the Forest English / Writing 299

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

Create Your Own Animal Stories (K-3) This book appealed to me because it gives a child the opportunity to familiarize him or herself with creative writing at a young age. For those children that like to draw animals, or who need to become more acquainted with writing, this book will provide an excellent source of fun and practice. It consists of five short stories about various animals. The story is already written with blank spaces throughout the narrative. The child will fill the spaces in with adjectives, adverbs, nouns, or verbs. A box at the bottom of the page contains words to choose from if the student prefers. There are also pictures on each page with a little mouse instructing on how to finish the picture. As the child has fun doodling, he will take part in writing and illustrating a short story he can take pride in. 62 non-reproducible pgs. ~ Gina 020830 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.99 5.75 GIANT Write Every Day (1-6) So, you'd like your children to write or journal everyday, but you are a little short on topics. Have no fear! n this one, multi-grade book are 300 Quickwrite topics, 209 story starters & titles and 151 reproducible writing forms! All this, PLUS it's organized by month, so you can use seasonally-correct ideas (I just coined that word). For every month, there's a full-page, seasonal picture (which can be copied and colored by your younger children) along with a writing idea, a calendar-formatted page filled with one Quickwrite topic per day, a page full of story starters and Titles, and 10+ reproducible "write on" pages. These latter pages are especially good, with appropriate graphics, lines to write on, and well-conceived ideas. The authors took a lot of time and effort to come up with these, and it shows. This is an excellent resource you will use again and again. 007011 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.99 15.25

Story Writing - Games Storybook Card Game (PK-3) Have you ever played that traveling game where a story is told with everyone taking turns adding one word or sentence to the story? That's the concept of this game, but with cards added to the mix, play is even more fun and the competitive aspect makes it into a game as well. 54 cards are included with items shown on them like an alien, lollipop, airplane, or just a bunch of random objects. Players take turns drawing cards and using the object drawn as a topic in the piece they add to the story. There are a few different ways to play. One would be to simply draw the cards and see what kind of story develops. Slightly more competitive is having to repeat the story already told, making sure all the words are given in the same order in which they are drawn before you're able to draw a new card and add to the story. Players are out if they fail to remember the story in the correct order and the winner is the last person who can remember the story correctly. An even bigger challenge is using all 54 cards to develop a story and remember the words drawn in the correct order. However you play, it's a lot of creativity and laughter and is great for the whole family. The cards are stored in a cute, collectable mini tin lunch box that measures 5.5"x 4.75"x 2.25". 033443 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.00 6.25 Action Dragon Game (PK-AD) CHOKING HAZARD (1). Not <3yrs. 053614 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.00

Story Speller Game (K-4) Not just a game, children can use these cards and storyboards to tell their own story. Each game includes 4 storyboards and 78 story element cards ­ friends & foes, locations, treasures, objects & obstacles, vehicles & actions. Two to four players work to collect their favorite cards and the first to complete their storyboard gets to choose their favorite hero. Children are honing their storytelling skills along with imagination, creativity, logic, and communication. Have a little fun as you create a make-believe story in StoryWorld (PK-AD) the land of your imagination. Think of any fairy tale. Think of its components. 049509 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.99 12.50 Dreams? Princesses? Labyrinths? How many other stories share these pieces? StoryWorld Create-A-Story: Creative Writing Game (K-AD) So, you're writing stories in English class, is a collection of elements ­ 40 cards containing places and objects, people and things. It's and your reluctant writer is whiny and reticent. designed to help you build a story, utilizing the "Why do we have to write stories? I can't think cards and the things you glimpse in them. How of anything!" If you can't get them out of their will you connect the pieces? How will you writing slump by suggesting "Well, let's brainweave the story of a father, a key, and a talking storm," or "Look around you for ideas," just say bird, for instance, or a river, a wild beast, and a (with a twinkle in your eye) - "Forget it, let's just youngest daughter? Whether you use them as a play a game instead." Of course, five or ten creative writing challenge, as a framework for a minutes later they'll realize they're not getting new and exciting bedtime story, or for the games off the story-writing hook, but they'll probably that the included storytelling book suggests, be enjoying themselves so much they'll forget to you'll find plenty here to give the imagination a pout. The game format is similar to most board boost. Cards are large and laminated, and con- games your family plays, with a large board tain plenty of small details to look for and build featuring a wandering path from beginning to around. Contains some magical references, e.g. end. Besides a die, scoring pad and markers, spindle of loss, charm of healing. ~ Mark the game features eight decks of story element 020911 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.99 9.25 cards and a story outline pad. Basically, as players move along the board, they will collect Storymatic: Six Trillion Stories in One Little specific story element cards, and weave them Box (5-AD) into a story. Card decks are clearly labeled and 054456 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.95 include topic sentence, plot, character, setting, 300 English / Writing

description, dialogue, lesson, and resolution cards. At the beginning of the game, each player receives a topic sentence. This is the only topic sentence card they will receive, and should be used towards the beginning of the story. As they roll the die, they will land on spaces labeled with the names of corresponding story element cards, and will draw the top card from the stack. By the end of the game, they should have at least one of each element card, and at least five description cards. Then, the writing begins! Choosing from their collected cards, the writer decides which cards he wants to incorporate into his or her story, and writes them onto the outline sheet. The outline begins with the topic sentence, and features blanks to fill in for each part of the story. Under "Setting", they must determine the "where", "when" and descriptors. Under character, they must identify the good guys and the bad guys, and describe both. For the plot, they must identify the problem, and decide on the order of events. Under "Resolution" and "Lesson", they will decide how the "Resolution" and "Lesson" cards they chose relate to their story, and how it all wraps up. Now, players each have a good framework for a story; the trick is now fleshing it out into an actual short story, which may be easier at this point, since a lot of the "unknowns" have been identified. A scoring sheet will help Mom decide if the story included all the necessary components, and will inspire kids not to skimp on the "less exciting" stuff. Since inventing characters, conflicts and settings sometimes takes a lot of steam out of even the more enthused young writers, I would imagine that taking that pressure off of them in this way would free up their imaginations to write a much more wellrounded, exciting story. I'll bet that even Mom and Dad will want to play this one! - Jess 006213 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44.95 41.95 Tell Tale (1-AD) There are times when I'm walking somewhere and I see an object that catches my eye and almost seems to jump to life. This is more or less what you will be doing in Tell Tale. Each player picks and chooses (or is randomly dealt) cards and "plays" them to start making a story. Aliens, shooting stars, chickens, and even broken vases soon become tied into a story about fire trucks and ghosts. A Fairy Tale version is also available featuring enchanted creatures and castles but the "happily ever afters" are up to you! It is your choice to turn the ordinary into the amazing, the strange into the typical, and this tin of circular cards into fun. ~ Stephen 050030 Tell Tale . . . . . . . . . 12.99 11.25 053092 Tell Tale Fairy Tale 12.99 11.25 Rory's Story Cubes (3-AD) I'm not sure what's more likeable here ­ the simple concept or the cute packaging! The small, portable game consists of nine picture dice packaged in a sturdy flip-out box about the size of a card deck. The dice are printed with simple black-and-white pictures on each face for a total of 54 different images. A few examples include: a clock, a bee, a shooting star, a key, a flashlight, an apple, fire, a magnifying glass, a question mark, a book, a light bulb, and a tree. Originally designed for storytelling, there are three game ideas included inside the

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

cover, each of which entails rolling the dice and using some or all of the dice to create a story. You can modify the number of dice, play solo or as a group for more variety. Of course, you could also use a roll of the dice to pick a theme for extemporaneous speaking, to inspire young children to write a story (using just one or two cubes), or as writing prompts. I'm sure you can come up with some of your own educational and party ideas as well! - Jess

CHOKING HAZARD (1). Not <3yrs.

049158

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.00

5.95

StoryPlay Cards (3-AD) Is it a game or a writing tool? I think it might be both. These playing cards can be the key to unlock your student's storytelling and story writing skills. This set includes 90 illustrated playing cards ­ 88 regular cards and 2 wild cards (used similarly to jokers). There are 8 cards each in 11 categories ­ people, animals, elements, power, love, journey, skills, creations, nature, food, and symbols. Within each category there is one power card marked with a star which can be used as a wild card. A guidebook comes with the set that explains the meanings of the different cards which I needed because the meaning wasn't always clear. The cards are beautifully illustrated with the title printed at the bottom of each. Some of the cards seem a little dark (emptiness, skeleton, wizard), and you may want to use the set without them ­ it won't affect the possibilities. There are a number of game possibilities with this deck and can be played by children age five or older and with one or more players. Use the cards as conversation starters, or play some of your favorite cards games like Spoons, Sets, or Pit. Play Charades by choosing a card to act out, tell a story by choosing a card from each category, or tell shorter stories by using cards from only some of the categories. A rulebook is included to explain rules, but the possibilities are endless for you to make up your own games. You can even use the cards in conjunction with your writing curriculum. If you give a story writing assignment, let students choose cards from the appropriate categories to get them started - sometimes the only thing needed is a little prompt. Jumpstart the imagination with these cards and set your student on the road to Budding Poets (1-4) creative storytelling. ~ Donna I think that I shall never see a thing so lovely... 028869 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.99 16.50 as a child writing poetry. This workbook is a tool to help kids unlock their poetic, creative Poetry Writing spirit. Each unit teaches a specific skill like These materials include both writing alliteration, hyperbole, metaphors, similes, onoinstruction and writing assignments. matopoeia, and personification. Then there are specific poem types and activities to go along Poetry Writing (1-3) The way you introduce poetry to young stu- with them to apply their new poetry skills. This dents can make a huge difference in the way book is meant for a student to use on their own. they approach poetry for years to come. This A teacher may want to guide younger kids along workbook helps you introduce students to the way especially with the definitions. This poetry as a fun, creative chance to write down book is very easy to follow though the writing their thoughts and feelings in silly or meaningful activities will challenge your students to be poems. The first few pages present the different creative. Poetry is great for vocabulary building kinds of poems covered, so the teacher can gain since kids will need just the right word to fit familiarity with the examples and the unique their poem. Be sure to have a thesaurus handy. qualities of each poem. Then worksheets are An easy to follow format and lots of variety given to introduce students to the different make this workbook a hit. May be reproduced poems, including couplets, free verse, haikus, for your classroom only. Answer key in the limericks, acrostics, sensory poems, personal back. 106 pgs, pb ~Sara 9.95 poems, chants, and much more. The work- 053227 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.95

Poetry Writing for the Early Grades (2-4) Here is a fun and simple way for your elementary students to become familiar with a variety of different poetry forms. Consumable, reproducible activity pages use examples and exercises to guide the students step-by-step through learning about and writing their own poetry in each of these forms: shape, pattern, acrostic, syllable poems, tongue twisters, sense poems, nursery rhymes, string, opposite, and describing poems; haiku, cinquains, and limericks. Assessments, checklists, evaluations and answer Instant Poetry Frames: About Me (1-3) pages to help the teacher keep track of where This book opens up the world of poetry to the students are. ~ Zach young students by combining a high-interest 024239 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.95 6.95 and familiar topic (themselves) with exercises utilizing well-written frameworks for students to Poetry Patterns (3-6) complete simply by filling in the blanks. Each This book walks the student through 41 steppage offers a different framework, with large by-step lessons which first introduce them to a text, inviting blanks, and uncluttered pages. type of poetry, and then guide them through Simple instructions direct the student. Some of the writing process so they can create their the pages have very few blanks for students, own verses. Each lesson fits nicely on a twowhile other pages encourage students to write page spread, where the specific poem type the bulk of the poem. Some examples include a is explained through definition and example, poem called "In the Mirror" where students fill and a reproducible student page on the right in a few blanks (mostly adjectives) to describe where they work through steps to write their what they see when they look in the mirror ­ own. For example, in the lesson on haiku, their eyes, the way their hair looks, what they they learn about haiku poetry, read through are wearing, and one of their most special the given suggestions and tips on how to write features. To finish a "Two-Word Poem About their own, think about possible topics, write Me," students think about some of their favorite several phrases or words related to the topic, activities, unique habits, and personal features and then work at arranging them to fit the 5-7-5 to write a series of two-word phrases that share haiku pattern. The bottom of the page features about them (such as sleeps late, plays baseball, blank lines for writing their finished poetry, with loves hot dogs, etc.). The exercises offer plenty plenty of blank space for illustrations or borders. of variety and lots of creativity - what could be The format and content of these lessons make more fun than writing a poem about your ideal it easy for students to work on their own, and ice cream treat or a letter from your clothes? the lessons are designed to be completed fairly Reproducible, 48 pgs. ­ Melissa quickly. Some poetry types covered in the les045195 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.99 8.50 sons are: couplets, onomatopoeia, cinquain, ballad, metaphor, diamonte, I wish poetry, ABC poetry, limericks, question, recipe, tongue twister, trouble, people, simile, and much more. Suggestions on how to collect and share poetry are included, as well as a bibliography and step-by-step bookbinding techniques - in case you really get into poetry-writing! - Jess 028574 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.99 10.45 sheets provide students with simple ways to get started writing poetry, from making word lists, to answering questions, to completing frameworks. Templates are given for each different kind of poetry covered, and students will enjoy completing them. Pages near the end hold lots of seasonal patterns and stationery for young students to work on. A very light, but complete introduction to creative poetry for young students. Reproducible, 96 pgs. - Melissa 016906 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.99 10.25 Create a Poem (3-10) Have you ever noticed that while it is easy to recognize poetry, describing it can be difficult? That is because poetry can take so many different forms and styles. This book is intended to teach the elements of lighter poetry to students and have them practice using those elements in their own poetry writing, all in a fun and easygoing way. It is divided into seven sections that deal with increasingly difficult forms of poetry and provides worksheets for those forms. Each form of poetry covered includes a description and sample of what the form entails and then instructs students to write their own poem using the style of writing they just observed. The first section includes beginning activities to get students interested in poetry and warm up their skills with easier poem forms. They learn about and write such poems as acrostic poems, "I am" poems, and jingles. The second section of the book discusses the shape of poetry. Students learn about writing poems using stanzas and create shapes with their poems like pyramid poems, diamond poems, (continued...) English / Writing 301

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

and column poems. The third section of the book teaches and provides practice in traditional poetry, free verse, narrative poetry, and lyric poetry. The forth section of the book shares the elements of poetry. Students learn about and write similes, metaphors, under and overstatement, personification, figures of speech, alliteration, and more. The fifth section teaches how to acquire and develop ideas for writing poetry. It includes a list of brainstorming and revision ideas as well as actual topics to write about. Section six in the book includes ideas on how teachers can showcase their students' poetry. Ideas include having a poetry reading, making a poetry notebook, and recording student poems on tape recorders or video cameras. The final section displays small poems from actual third to tenth grade students from around the country. Reproducible. ~ Rachel S. 014452 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.95 12.75 Writing Poetry (3-12) Did you know that everyone has poet potential? We just need to tap into the freedom that comes from writing down our thoughts, memories, and feelings. Of course, there are a few things we can do to give shape and structure to our poems. This book is a self-instructional introduction to poetry for an older child or adult, but it could be used well with younger children with adult supervision. It defines 14 poetic elements in easy-to-understand terms. Building step-by-step, this book begins with metaphors and similes, then moves on to skills such as personification, imagery, alliteration, onomatopoeia, repetition, rhyme, meter, tone, synesthesia, and symbolism. Each term has a chapter dedicated to them. The term is clearly defined and then illustrated by many poems (written by the author's former students) which provide ample examples (a little rhyme there). Then the chapter includes worksheets, exercises, and writing suggestions to get those creative juices flowing as your children practice the skills in their own poetry. The author, Shelley Tucker, has clearly written this book in such a way that beginning poets can easily understand and apply the principles to their writing. The exercises and concepts are also relevant to experienced poets who want to improve their poetry. Poetry - taught in a way that unleashes the poet inside! 144 pages, pb. - Jess 005279 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.95 14.25 Writing Poems (4-8) This is a simple, fun introduction to poems. It begins gently, with students identifying rhyming words and choosing their own sets, and then filling in the blanks of a poem to make it rhyme. After a few worksheets, students begin composing their own original poems. Beginning with the couplet, students write triplets, clerihews, haikus, tankas, cinquains, diamontes, concrete and stair poems, free verse, nonsense, similes, metaphors, and alliteration. Each different poem is worked on for a couple of pages, with various exercises and examples and a chance for students to create their own. Worksheets are reproducible and perforated. - Melissa 019836 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.99 6.95 302 English / Writing

Poetry Primer (Imitation in Writing) (4-6) The Imitation in Writing series is designed to teach aspiring writers the art and discipline of crafting delightful prose. Poetry Primer was created to provide introductory instruction and practice before the student begins The Grammar of Poetry by the same author, Matt Whitling. Starting with a lesson designed to debunk the notion that poetry is only flowery snippets that appeal to girls, the student is challenged to take the time to investigate what poetry really is and to determine to enjoy it. To make this challenge more palatable, a poetic quote from Master Samwise of Lord of the Rings fame is given. Poetry is defined as a language of pictures and music. To illustrate the diversity of poetic language, riddles are scattered throughout the student pages. Remarkably thorough but not overwhelming for an introductory book, the seventeen lessons include such poetic devices as simile, rhyme, metaphor, personification, and inclusion, combined with a more lengthy look at meter particularly iamb and trochee. Lessons are varied, including both analysis and original composition. I would expect the lessons to take about 30 to 45 minutes to complete. It could be used either as a quarter's study (two lessons per week) or over the course of a semester (one lesson per week). A final exam is provided. The Teacher Edition contains exact copies of the student book with answers. Annoyingly, the page numbers between the two books do not correspond. The Student Book also includes an anthology of poetry designed to capture the interest of even the most reluctant poetry student. Although no instructions are given for the use of the selections from this anthology, it wouldn't take much planning or creativity to incorporate its use as part of this study or as continuing exposure to poetry selections. ~ Janice 025261 Poetry Primer . . . . . . . 20.00 032677 Teacher's Edition . . . . . 10.00 Grammar of Poetry (Imitation in Writing) (5-12) This course teaches students to write poetry by studying the forms and styles of great writers such as Shakespeare, Scott, Tennyson, and Longfellow. Students then complete a number of practice activities which reinforce the concepts learned. The student workbook contains 30 lessons. It is recommended that three lessons be covered each week. Each lesson takes approximately 30 minutes to complete. As the teacher you will likely want to read through the new concepts at the top of the page with your student. Concepts covered in this volume include: simile, rhyme, how to use a rhyming dictionary, metaphor, meter, pun, iamb, personification, trochee, synecdoche, anapest, hyperbole, dactyl, onomatopoeia, alliteration, rhetorical question, refrain, oxymoron, spacial poetry, and euphemism. The student will then work through the activity. After every few lessons, review questions are given to insure that the concepts are retained and to provide additional practice of previously-covered information. Upon the completion of this program, the student should have mastered several figures of speech called tropes. A cumulative test is also included. Teacher's edition contains teaching instructions as well as completed student pages. ~ Rachel 001924 Workbook. . . . . . . . . . 20.00 001988 Teacher Edition . . . . . . 10.00

Grammar of Poetry DVD Course (5-12) Your whole family can experience the Grammar of Poetry course, as taught by the author, Matt Whitling. The DVD version of the course contains 30 lessons on 4 DVDs and the quality is excellent. The "live" lessons are sure to bring poetry concepts to life in a whole new way! 054532 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85.00 82.95 Painless Poetry (7-12) Don't let the carefree appearance fool you ­ this is a serious poetry book! Covering both an understanding of poetry and direction in writing poetry, this is a comprehensive resource for poetry students. The book is divided into five chapters addressing the nature of poetry, character, setting, plot, mood, choosing words, imagery, rhyme, poetry devices, poetic forms, and many other topics. Each page is filled with explanations, information, and fine examples to study. Sections called "Brain Ticklers" offer students a chance to dissect poems, answer questions, and practice their comprehension of the material. Written directly to the student, this resource can be used independently or with parent/teacher direction. 358 pgs. ­ Melissa 031428 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.99 8.25 The Roar on the Other Side (7-12) Just as words are a gift from God, so the skillful poet has gifts for readers. This slight paraphrase of what Suzanne Clark says in the introduction to her book is an insight as to how she approaches poetry. She begins with God, the source of all language from the first, and an ideal place to launch ourselves into the world of poetry. The first two chapters of her book look at noticing and naming the sights, sounds and smells around you. Each chapter builds on the last as you progress through metaphors and other figures of speech; sound and rhythm; sonnets, stanzas, white space and planned freefalls; types of poems or genres; voice and diction; and reading, writing and revising. Poets see things with a different eye; they do more than observe details. The exercises throughout the book help to instill that concept in budding poets and encourage it in those poets who already have some experience. They teach how to "hear the roar on the other side of silence." Exercises also contain the more down-to-earth side of poetry: rhyme and rhythm, meter, stresses, diction, experiments with different genres, and, of course, revising. A teacher's section has more exercises and writing projects to promote creative thinking. Examples of poetry and poetic style are taken from writers such as Shakespeare, Dickinson, Dante and Frost, with some writings from the author's own students. The final chapter is a compilation of poems, some of which appeared as examples in the text, and can be used for more practice in analyzing or simply for your own enjoyment. As one chapter title says, with a tongue-in-cheek Star Wars reference, "Metaphors be with you!" ~ Zach 014911 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.00 11.95

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

Poetry References / Tools Merriam-Webster Rhyming Dictionary (2-AD) Find a rhyme for any word you need rhymed. There are no lack of rhyming words here, with 53,000 entries (in which there are no offensive words) packed into 369 pgs! 014080 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.95

Kick in the Head: Everyday Guide to Poetic Forms (3-AD) A lot of books on poetry cover the rules for each poetic form, and offer examples too, although these are often of the author's own devising (and cheesy!). But if you want to learn poetry from the masters, you'd do well to read (and be extremely entertained by) this excellent book! It covers 29 poetic forms, including the couplet, tercet, quatrain, haiku, cinquain, clerihew, limerick, sonnet, villanelle, riddle poem, ode, acrostic, concrete, epitaph, persona poem, found poem, ballad, list poem, pantoum, and more. Each page or spread features a wellknown poem, labeled with the poetic form at the top of the page, and with a brief definition of the poetic form at the bottom of the page. Poems are illustrated by Chris Raschka's energetic, cut-paper collage and paint illustrations. The last several pages of the book offer more full-bodied explanations to each poetic form, which may come in handy after you've pored over the poems themselves. Whether your family enjoys poetry, is studying poetry, or would prefer to learn poetry by example rather than by a workbook, you will eagerly return to this Personal Writing / Journaling book many times! Poems selected by Paul B. Journals to Complete Janeczko; 62 pgs, hc. ­ Jess 011652 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.99 7.20 All About Me ­ Home Workbook (PK-1) This is the ideal journal to introduce kids to writing about themselves. The book has blanks for students to fill in (lines are .75" with a dotted midline) with some of their favorite things. For example, My name is ____. My favorite color is ____. Plenty of space is provided for kids to draw pictures of their favorite things as well. Other activities include coloring pictures based on preference (for example, four pictures of places are given and kids color the place where they most like to be). Sometimes kids are prompted to draw what they like and then color it. 140 mini stickers are included, which students can use to spice up the pages or to Poetry Bookmark (5-AD) mark off on a chart when pages are completed. This is a colorful, 2-sided bookmark. One side A great way to introduce children to the joys defines accent, alliteration, assonance, imagery, of journaling, and strengthen handwriting and meter, rhyme, rhyme scheme, and stanza. The drawing practice. 64 pgs, pb. ~ Rachel other side defines types of poetry: cinquain, 040172 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.49 2.75 concrete, couplet, haiku, quatrain, tanka, and My Journal About Me! (PK-6) acrostic. Melissa and I used to spend hours with our 016832 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.35 "me" journals years and years ago. We would Haiku Magnetic Poetry Kit (7-AD) work on them together or alone and enjoy filling You've heard of closet musicians, but what in every fun page. This colorful journal provides about refrigerator poets? You may find a few young kids with the perfect place to write all of these hiding among your family and friends about themselves, their family and friends, their when you display these word magnets. Over dreams and feelings, their favorites, and other 240 different word magnets stick to your refrig- unique things that make them themselves. The erator (or any other magnetic surface) begging to spiral-bound pages offer plenty of fun questions be arranged into a simple haiku (three lines: five and prompts for kids to journal their thoughts syllables, seven syllables, five syllables). Just and ideas on and plenty of space for them to remember to write down any keepers before the add to these thoughts as they come back to the next aspiring poet comes along! ~ Steph pages over and over again. ~ Steph 036173 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.95 9.95 033697 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.95 12.50

Poetry Stand (K-AD) Is your refrigerator already full of various artwork and papers? Are you using all of your cookie sheets to actually make cookies? Just looking for a better magnetic area to play and create on? This stand was designed by the creators of the Magnetic Poetry Sets for use with their word magnets. The black stand is a 10" x 13" metal board with a sturdy base, which includes an area to store any magnetic tiles you're not using on the board. The useful stand also comes with 240 magnetic word tiles, so you don't even need another Magnetic Poetry Set to get started forming phrases, poems, and notes. An added bonus is a small poetry guide to give you a few ideas on how to use the tiles and stand. 019309 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.95 11.75

Introduction to Journal Writing (1-3) Students need to engage in a variety of writing experiences to become competent communicators. This series helps stimulate young writers by helping them organize their thoughts. It provides opportunities to write about familiar, ageappropriate topics like senses, feelings, food, animals, and more. The books are divided into two parts. The first part has eight units dealing with self, friends, animals, and seasons. Each unit includes eight activity sheets encouraging students to answer questions about their interests, friends, and pastimes. Students will finish sentences, make lists, write about their favorite foods and sports, and fill out diagrams. The second part of the book is a Personal Dictionary that can be used to list words that are special or interesting to them and provides room for students to write whatever they want. A great way to encourage writing at an early age. ~ Rachel S. 014974 Grade 1 . . . . . . . . . 11.99 9.50 014975 Grade 2 . . . . . . . . . 11.99 9.50 014976 Grade 3 . . . . . . . . . 11.99 9.50 My Journals About Me (1-8) These two journals provide prompts and recording space for responses in small (8"x6"), spiralbound format. Binding is at the top, with pages wider than long. Both journals have a place for your child to record his/her name, age, date begun, and date finished. There are about 96 double-sided journal/prompt pages (for 192 days of journaling) inside each. Every page has a place to record the day's date ­ so feel free to skip around. Most are ruled for writing, but many have blank, framed space for more artistic responses (like drawing a picture of your family or a map of a backyard you would design). Most of the prompts reflect on the child's family, experiences, thoughts, activities, etc. The journals are intended as keepsakes, for children to look back at later and remember what it was like "back then". If you like your children to write a small amount each day, these would be dual-purpose books; for recording future memories and having a ready writing assignment. You can use each journal over the course of several years. A suggestion: if your child needs more space than the lines on a page, slap a couple of lined Post-It® s to add another "page" for recording ­ they're just about perfectly-sized for this! 025140 My Days (1-4) . . . . . 10.00 7.25 025161 My Life (3-8). . . . . . 10.00 7.25 Summer Days Journal (3-9) This is an attractive summer journal for young girls. The first few pages have a full calendar for the months of May through September. Following that are packing list pages with items listed that you might need on your camping trip or summer activity along with blank spaces to fill in with other items. You'll find 70 pages for notes and observations to record interesting things seen in nature or something you might have learned while you were on your adventure. A reading log and other pages to record new friends' addresses and birthdays are also included. In the back are perforated blank stationery pages with stickers to seal the envelope. This would be a great addition for a trip to summer camp or another summer activity. ~ Gina 050075 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.99 English / Writing 303

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

Daily Dash Diary (3-10) This diary provides students with a place to write about a wide range of thoughts, emotions, interests, and events. The thin, soft cover book holds 90 pages of writing opportunities for students. Each page begins with a topic sentence and often a follow up question, leaving the rest of the page for the student's own writing. Topics include: The kindest person I know is... (what makes this person so kind?), What I am most interested in doing in all the world is... (why do I want to do this?), The worst pain I ever felt was when..., Something I've never told anyone is... (why didn't I tell anyone?), and I wish someone would help me to... (why do I want help with this?). The pages are illustrated in green and blue. Students can use this every day or every other day for writing practice, or just pick and choose topics as they feel like it for journaling. Either way, it will help improve their writing and encourage them to think about their feelings. - Melissa 019039 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.95 2.50 Doodle Journal (3-AD) Subtitled "My Life in Scribbles," doodlers of all ages will enjoy this fun, relaxed departure from the typical all-about-me journal varieties. Packed with colorful graphics and borders, this book contains a mixture of themed prompts as well as plenty of blank space for open-ended writing and doodling. Some examples of the themes are name doodling, creating your own superhero, describing your favorite music, and drawing faces reflecting your daily moods. (This journal is most likely to appeal to girls, since it has purple and pink graphics, including hearts, flowers, stars, and the like.). Another interesting section is for "groodling," which consists of several pages divided into thirds (like a flipbook) so you and your friends can collaborate and create your own unique creatures. The blank doodling pages contain quotes and whimsical illustrations in the margins for inspiration. The journal even comes with a matching pen so you can get started! 75 pgs, spiral, with a plastic cover. ~ Lisa 047524 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.95 11.75

could choose to live during any time period, would you choose to live in the future, the past, or right now? Explain." "How would you describe yourself to someone who didn't know you?" There are also some "prompt free" pages for kids to use to write about whatever they want, as well as blank pages for them to draw on. A few colorful, full-page illustrations are scattered throughout each journal. The More About Me Journal is very similar to the first, providing many additional creative prompts. The pages are not numbered, but there are well over one hundred pages in each journal (the original is a little thicker than the follow-up). - Melissa EACH BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.95 10.25 003538 All About Me 003543 More About Me My Secret Diary (6-12) 053458 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.99 8.95

prompts the student to write about their personal thoughts or feelings. Topics from animals to stars to family and friends are covered and give the student much to write about each day. Each book also includes one reproducible student writing page and monthly journal covers that can be copied to provide writing paper and personalized covers for their journals. The prompt pages are non-consumable. ~ Rachel S. 014327 Grades 1-3 . . . . . . . 14.95 12.50 014328 Grades 4-6 . . . . . . . 14.95 12.50 Awesome, Adventurous Boy's Daily Journal (1-7) This small booklet is filled with over 150 journal prompts that are Christian and homeschool oriented. Written by Cyndy Regeling (with the help of her three sons), the prompts are meant for boys, but many could be used by girls as well (besides prompts like "If there was an award for "Brother of the Year," what should the qualifications be? Would you qualify? Why or why not?" and "Can you picture yourself as a husband one day? Describe what you would do to be a good husband."). From September through June, there are four prompts for each week. Prompts are fairly simple and should lead to about 15 minutes of writing. Prompts cover school, hobby, family, spiritual, and other fun topics and prompt for different types of writing (poems, description, narrative, etc.). Some are pure fun ("Imagine the fun it would be to drive a dog sled team. Create an adventurous tale with you as the sled driver."), while some require serious thinking (Missionaries courageously tell others about Jesus. How can you be a missionary in your area? What would you tell a friend who asked you to explain why Jesus is so important to you?"). This is a simple booklet of journal prompts that is very well done. ~ Rachel 039993 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.49 Gloriously Groovy Girls' Daily Journal (1-7) Here's one for the girls! Nearly identical in format and content to the Awesome Adventurous Boys' Daily Journal (see description above) by the same author, this little booklet offers prompts more appropriate for girls. Some of the prompts are the same as ones found in the boys' journal, while others are totally different. ­ Melissa 045300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.49 Journal Booklets (1-8) These cute, pencil-shaped pads each contain 200 tear-out (if you want), topic-specific journaling prompts. They'll never run out of things to write about! Despite their slight size and price, they contain very good, thought-provoking ideas sure to spark worthwhile writing. EACH BOOKLET . . . . . . . . . . . 7.95 6.75 013160 Character Education (4-8) 036212 Creative Thinking (1-3) 008574 Creative Thinking (4-8) 008575 Language Arts (1-3) 032700 Reasons for Writing (4-8) 013165 Story Starters (1-3) 013166 Story Starters (4-8) From Heart to Page: Journaling Through the Year for Young Writers (3-8) This small book brimming with journaling ideas for the young Christian writer has been recently

Through My Eyes: A Journal for Teens (7+) By the same author as the All About Me journals (see description above), this journal targets a slightly older age group. It follows the same format, although this one is not interspersed with pictures. Please note that there is some overlap in topics between this one and the others, so it is not all new material. However, students' thoughts and opinions will likely change as they grow older, so they may enjoy the chance to write new "older" responses to some of the same questions if they've already completed the All About Me journals. - Melissa 003559 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.95 10.25

Graphic Organizer Posters (3-8) If you have a reluctant writer, or if your child is intimidated at the sight of a blank sheet of paper, graphic organizers may be just what you're looking for. These posters feature attractive layouts, easy fill-in-the blank style writing prompts, spaces to draw or paste personal photos, and lots of black and white drawings to color or paint. All-About-Me and Extra! Extra! Read All About Me focus on the student's own interests and accomplishments, while the Biography Poster Report guides them to write about a famous person or historical figure. Part writing prompt, part art project, Graphic Organizer Posters offer a fresh approach to report writing that is sure to get the creative juices flowing. ~ Rachel P. EACH POSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.50 029985 All-About-Me 030015 Biography 030146 Extra! Extra! Read All About Me! 021631 My Amazing Life Poster All About Me: A Keepsake Journal for Kids 030256 Read All About Me 021632 See How I Grew Poster (4-6) These journals were designed for students who Journal Prompts want to journal but have trouble thinking about what to write. Each lined page holds a different creative prompt to help get kids started. Here 730 Journal Prompts (1-6) This book provides all your journal writing are a few of the prompts: "Do you have a hobby? What is it?" "Are you an only child, or are you needs in one handy resource. It includes fun the oldest child, the youngest, or somewhere in journal covers that students can color and keep the middle? What is special about being where the month's writing in. It provides two differyou are?" "Write about an interesting place you ent ideas for journal topics for each day of the have visited." "Ask you parents to share some year. These include holiday, seasonal, and memories with you about what they did for fun general prompts. The first idea for each day is when they were your age. What's different now usually drawn from something that happened compared to when they were young?" "If you on the day's date in history while the second 304 English / Writing

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

Making Books That Fly, Fold, Wrap, Hide, Pop, etc. (3-8) If you're as fascinated by bookmaking as I am, you're going to love this! Using step-bystep instructions and diagrams, it shows you how to make eighteen unique books that unfold like a map, unroll like a scroll, contain pop-ups, and much more. Travel journals, time capsules, sketchbooks, and storybooks are just a few of the ideas presented to inspire bookmakers. The projects presented in this book use readily available materials, such as cardboard, construction paper, and thread. Interspersed throughout the book is interesting background material about the history of books and bookmaking. 96 pgs, Unjournaling (6-12) pb. ~ Lisa What would blue taste like if you could chew 044193 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.95 9.25 it? I'm thinking it would be cool and smooth. How about other colors? Unjournaling is actu- Teen's Guide to Getting Published (7-12) ally a book of daily journal ideas that are not This book is packed with practical advice for boring, introspective or personal. This makes it kids or teenagers who want to publish their interesting to share kids' writing with a group. writing (as it should be, since it was written Here are some other sample topics. Write an by two teens, Danielle and Jessica Dunn, who original tongue twister. Rewrite Mary Had a have both had several works published in variLittle Lamb so that Mary has a new animal and ous magazines). They use examples from their takes it somewhere other than school. Write personal experience to explain the best way to a paragraph using only one-syllable words. get work published. The guide does not contain Some kids can write at the drop of a hat about much fluff, just good, solid advice. They suggest anything and everything. Others do better when starting off small when you submit works for given a starting point, like the ideas in this book. publication (with things like puzzles and poems These topics are not diary material per se. It to children's publications). They cover topics takes the anxiety out of journaling especially like how to communicate with an editor, makwhen kids know that a parent or teacher is going ing sure you're submitting material the correct to read it. They may be much more colorful way, how to be professional, how to keep good and uninhibited in expressing themselves. Two records, rights to publications and other legal hundred prompts are suitable for a variety of issues, and more. This is not a grammar guide ages.107 pgs, pb. ~ Sara and doesn't give tips for good writing; it is more 053677 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.95 9.95 of an informative book about media markets and a how-to guide for getting into the business Making / Publishing Books of writing. This book really gives a thorough explanation of how the publishing world works, Show Me a Story: Writing Your Own Picture especially at the beginning level, and does not Book (2-4) gloss over the realities of the business (shares This book provides a great example and guide- how sometimes there's no money, how you will line for kids who may be interested in develop- get lots of rejection letters, waiting time before ing a picture book of their own. Basically, it's publication, etc.). If you have a student interestjust your typical picture book, titled Webster's ed in seeing his or her name published in black Wish, about a goose named Webster who is in white, this is an excellent book to get them tired of flying in a V and desperately wants to familiar with the way things work and point fly in the shape of any other letter in the alpha- them in the right direction. 80 pgs, pb ~ Rachel bet. He tries to convince the rest of his flock, 039861 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.95 11.55 but they are resistant to change until a brilliant compromise is reached. The story and pictures IlluStory (2-AD) themselves are cute, but the unique part of this Create your own long lasting, professional book are the colored "Tool Boxes" on every looking book! The IlluStory kit contains non2-page spread, which identify parts of the story toxic, washable markers, writing pages, instruc(like character, problem, setting, dialogue, plot, tions, hints, a story planner, and a postage paid etc.) and use an example in the book so kids can envelope. Write your story (up to 12 pages, see exactly what is being described. It's really a 20 word limit on each), and then illustrate it. great concept and a perfect, low-pressure way When you're finished, mail it in to Chimeric to introduce kids to various elements within a (at no additional charge) for completion and story. It gives them all of the tools they need production. They'll typeset and bind your book, to craft a book of their own, without actually returning a seven by nine inch hardcover book assigning the task! A few pages in the back of that even has a place for dedication and "About the book include additional writing tips. By the Author" pages. Next step, the Library of Nancy Loewen, 32 pgs, pb. ~ Rachel Congress! - Megan 047221 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.95 6.95 000283 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.95 18.25 revised to include all new topics and additional ideas for writers. The beginning of the book is well worth reading, as the author presents a sound appeal for integrating daily journal writing into our homeschool curriculum. Following are journaling prompts for 150 days, arranged seasonally. Every fifth day (meant to coincide with Fridays) is a "free writing" day, and the author gives some suggestions for these days in her introduction. It appears that a good deal of thought went into constructing these. Unlike similar books I've seen, many of the ideas are from a distinctly Christian perspective, guiding the child to think and write in this context. Sometimes, prompts are in a series, building on a writing idea through a short span of days. If journal writing is part of your homeschool plan, these ideas should help inspire a child to put pen to paper when their "well runs dry." 003891 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.00 6.25 See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

ExPOSITORy WRITInG These materials cover various types of informational writing, including persuasive writing, essays, outlines, and research papers. Expository Writing - Programs These materials include both writing instruction and assignments. Nonfiction Writing (2-6+) Who says that effective writing programs are always expensive? This grade specific series provides teacher-guided instruction (easy to follow, scripted lesson plans, writing models) with reduced copies of student pages (answers filled in) as well as some 80 reproducible (for a classroom) activities (that's one for every other day) all in one reasonably priced book. Coverage varies at grade levels but is focused on different types of expository writing (summaries, biographies, essays, news articles, research report, and response to literature), persuasive writing (letters, essays, editorials, pro-con), and narrative writing (personal, creative). The younger grades (2 & 3) also include some general instruction on sentence and paragraph construction. Within the lessons there are stylistic and mechanics specifics (quotations, avoiding bias, listing references, transitions, etc.). In general ­ over the course of the five years ­ the writing process and the various forms of writing as well as the traits of good writing are covered thoroughly. 160 pgs. pb ~ Janice EACH BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.99 13.95 049252 Grade 2 049255 Grade 5 049253 Grade 3 049256 Grade 6+ 049254 Grade 4 Writing the Five-Paragraph Essay (5-9) Learning to write a five paragraph essay is a fairly simple, straightforward way of learning the basics about writing well-structured, comprehensive, and logical essays of any length. The skills gained in this book will stand any essay writer in good stead for the rest of their writing career. In twelve lessons, students will be introduced to the five-paragraph essay, including its usefulness and format; they will be taught how to write compose a five-paragraph essay; and they will learn how to improve their essay. There are activities at the end of each lesson guiding students through the writing of their own essay, and the answers to certain questions are included in the book. There is also a list of writing prompts for more practice, a revising checklist, a proofreading checklist, and an assessment rubric for the five-paragraph essay. Teachers/parents can decide the time taken to complete this book. ~ Zach 029781 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.95 15.75 Jensen's Format Writing (7-12) If you are looking to develop your expository writing skills, check out this course. Expository writing "exposes" ­ puts forth, explains, reveals, or exhibits in detail about something. This style of writing is perfect to use when you want to inform, clarify, or persuade. Honestly, this style of writing is what your child needs to learn for college! It falls perfectly in line with what my college professors wanted. Luckily, I had learned this style of writing during my high school years, so I was well (continued...) English / Writing 305

Write Better Essays in 20 Minutes a Day (9-12) Become a better writer in a month? It's possible if you spend 20 minutes a day (5x a week) with this book. Students can use this by themselves or you could use it in a class setting. Follow the 19 lessons in order as each new skill builds on the last. Writing is a process after all. At the beginning are tips for success on essays and exams, like avoiding clichés and hyperbole. A pre-test helps determine what you already know. Lessons take you from the planning and organizing stages, how to provide support for your idea, to revising and editing your final document. There is a post-test and some sample essay exam questions and answers. This can probably be used for younger writers if you pread these lessons out, maybe two a week, so they can get more practice at each step and experience writing a good essay. This book is Fairview's Guide to Composition and Essay simple to follow and encourages mastery at Writing (9-12) Given a choice between writing a fictional each phase. ~ Sara story and an essay, I would much rather write 052275 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.00 13.50 a story. But in high school, learning to write essays and compositions is a necessity. The author of Fairview's Guide to Composition and Essay Writing believes that essays and compositions are creative papers, too, and that students should regard them as such, using illustrative and detailed sentences to improve appeal. The book opens with "The Big Picture." Here students are encouraged to start a reading journal and seek out different types and styles of essays from different writers, both modern and classical. Then the book introduces students to the "Golden Rules" of writing, providing them with short samples to revise using these rules. In the following lesson, students focus on style, tone How to Write Successfully in High School and and audience. Then comes an extremely help- College (10-AD) This is a very extensive writing lesson ful lesson where a lot of people choke: introductions and conclusions. The rest of the chapter book providing detailed, thorough instruction works on paragraphs, brainstorming, and draft- in many areas of writing that students need ing. The next section is "Sentence Fluidity." to master for success in college. It's probably Here students first identify and revise awkward not geared toward students who hate writing, 306 English / Writing

prepared. You'll want to prepare your child in the same way. This book falls naturally into seven sections. There is much to cover here and the writing and research process takes time so you could plan to spend more than one year with this course. (Remember, college professors often give students a whole semester to work on one very detailed and in-depth paper.) Section one works on single paragraph formats. Then in section two you'll work on the elements of the five paragraph essay and different formats you can use. Book reports put the five paragraph formats to use in section three. Section four works on business writing, such as: business letters, letters of complaint, cover letters, political letters, and resume writing. In section five, you'll work on the principle of condensation as you learn how to write in various lengths ­ reduce, abridge, abbreviate, shorten, cut, compress, compact, or distill your work! Now you are ready to compose a major paper and all its components (title page, endnotes, appendix, bibliography, etc), as outlined in section six. Section seven contains all the check sheets and forms, tests, answer keys, and sample week-by-week schedules to help you organize deadlines for the longer, more detailed papers. This workbook is very straightforward in its presentation of this writing style, but it is very clear, concise, and helpful. If my recommendation isn't enough, then maybe you'd be interested to know that this is also one of Cathy Duffy's 100 Top Picks. 160 pgs, pb. Making the course even more user-friendly, the DVD, with author, Frode Jensen, as presenter, walks the student through each section. Presentations sometimes include on screen visuals to enhance the learning experience. This DVD does not take the place of the book but expands on the book's explanations. As before, the book can still be used without the DVD. Presentations are 6-10 minutes in length with the entire DVD lasting about an hour and a half. Navigation to a particular presentation is easy. ­ elise/Janice 013488 Book. . . . . . . . . . . . 22.00 19.45 047996 DVD Supplement. . . 22.00 19.45

sentences. Then they are shown the differences between writing and speaking, which helps to eliminate frequently used words or word patterns. Next they are helped to choose better words to be more descriptive and precise. They also learn the importance of quotes and how to use them. The third section is devoted to sentence combining, and the use of clauses and phrases that aid in combining sentences. The final section is "Essay Writing," which by now students are well prepared for. First they write a persuasive essay, taking a stand for something they feel strongly about. It takes them through the usual steps: finding a topic, developing it, gathering information, interviews, statistics, then actually writing the paper. The next assignment is a compare and contrast paper. Then comes a personal essay. Here students are aided by advice and warm-ups. The final essay is "The Mock Essay," which is an imitation essay of another writer. Each essay is further explained by a 3-5 page sample essay. Answers are included. When the time comes to write an essay, there is now no need to panic. - Melissa 003014 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.00 17.25 Easy Writing Skills Step-By-Step (9-12) 053243 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.00 11.95

because although it's easy to read, it provides no extra "fluff" to get students interested ­ it just gets right to the point. It focuses primarily on ways to master writing skills for compositions, term papers, essays, SAT essays, theses, and dissertations. Unlike a lot of writing books, this one doesn't define writing terms, focus on grammar, or review areas of writing before suggesting how to improve your skills. It assumes the student has basic writing skills and does not need to be told what brainstorming or essays are, or what's expected in a research paper. It really just goes through different areas of writing and shows students some faster, better ways of writing a variety of different assignments and getting good grades on them. The book is broken up into five sections. The first covers compositions and gives tips and guidelines for pre-writing; argumentative, descriptive, and explanatory writing; editing; style; and more. The second covers writing about complex subjects and instructs students how to write in the fields of business, science, technology, statistics, and public finance. Not just writing techniques are included here, it also touches on key information you need to know about these areas in order to write about them effectively. The third deals with the term paper and highlights the Internet's best research sources; discusses format and organization; covers preparing tables, graphs, and other illustrations; and more. The final section focuses primarily on college admission essays and how to write the perfect kind of essay that colleges are looking for. While the text instructs, it has a nice, conversational flow to it and uses examples of both good and bad writing. No real exercises are given; the book simply prompts students to apply the tips to papers they are assigned in other classes. This is a perfect book for a competent writer who wants to become more advanced and prepared for college, and it is a great reference tool on organizing and presenting material. Note: This is the 4th edition of the book formerly titled How to Write Themes and Term Papers. 318 pgs, pb. ~ Rachel 013891 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.99 12.25 Writing Exposition (12) Teaches high school seniors expository writing through 13 varied exercises. It focuses on teaching the academic papers that colleges require. Activities include using all the facilities in a library and arranging a mass of information, writing various argument essays, writing a compare/contrast essay, supporting hypothesizes, reaction papers, biased papers, propaganda, term papers, reviews on magazines, and more. The exercise format varies depending on the type of writing but generally takes writers through steps they need to take to develop strong papers. Pitfalls to avoid, organization, where to get information, writing styles, and more are covered. A good portion of the book is composed of examples of finished papers following the same outline the book describes. By comparing their own writing to that in the book, students can see how and where they need to improve. Appendix includes explanations of the expository writing process, a section on the SAT II writing test, essay prompts, and how to avoid writing problems. By Dave Marks, author of Writing Strands. 146 pgs, pb. 019933 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.00 15.95

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

ExPOSITORy WRITInG - PRACTICE These materials focus on writing practice and offer little to no writing instruction. Writing Builders (2-4) EACH BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.95 6.95 054236 Ben and Bailey Build a Book Report 054237 Bridget and Bo Build a Blog 054240 Evan and Erin Build an Essay 054245 Isabella and Ivan Build an Interview 054251 Leah and LeShawn Build a Letter 054263 Seth and Savannah Build a Speech 054273 Complete Set of 6 . . 53.70 39.95 Instant Non-Fiction Writing Frames (2-4) A writing frame guides students and parents in formatting a good essay. This book takes students step-by-step through translating their ideas into written work. Each lesson has a teacher page to help you through the process. Take the example of the Animal Writing Frame. The teacher page tells you where to begin while the kids will have the frame pages. The first paragraph (or frame) is an introduction. You explain to children that an interesting opening will help people want to read the report and it should be something to catch attention. The next frame is about the animal's appearance, and asks the question, "What does the animal look like?" The next frame asks students how the animal acts. Subsequent frames focus on the habitat, diet and more facts. Then you have the closing paragraph/frame where kids are directed to restate their purpose for writing the essay; add an interesting fact and a related general statement. These writing frames will help you meet these essential primary-grade writing standards: prewriting, drafting and revising, editing and publishing, writing for different purposes and gathering and using information for research purposes. You can use this workbook as a simple guide or a more detailed writing template which will help kids as they enter middle and high school. It is easy to follow and the topics are varied and interesting. Reproducible, 64 pgs, pb. ~ Sara 053370 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.99 9.25 Quick Nonfiction Writing Activities That Really Work (4-6) Writing papers has never been on the "top ten" list of things my children want to spend time on. However, I do believe this book may just change that! Written in an engaging manner directly to the student, this book introduces writing with a "Before you write" section. In this section, students are guided in how to pick a topic, find their unique angle on the topic, begin research, check facts, and determine their point of view. The "Writing Begins" section covers how to start strong through incorporating memorable details, enticing readers, making a great first impression through the opening sentence, finding hooks, creating vivid descriptions, adding suspense, and using impacting ending sentences and quotations. The "Wrapping It Up" section teaches the student how to finish strong by putting it all together and choosing last words. In all, there are 64 enjoyable exercises written directly to the student and designed to be completed in just a few minutes each day. Most of the activities are short responses through guided prompts and have no "right" or "wrong" answer. For the few

be it a long-term paper, a short essay, a timed writing exam, or anything in the middle. An "Extras" section in the back of the book gives specific tips for students who are taking a timed writing test for a state mandated test or the Stepping Stones: The Expository Writing SAT. Additional planning sheets and examples Game (4-AD) are given for this purpose. Reproducible for 054090 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.95 22.95 classroom use, the exercises can be completed directly on the pages. 106 pgs, pb, answer key Essay Writing (6-9) included in the back. ~ Rachel This book focuses on the following five basic 040535 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.95 13.95 steps for effective essay writing: understanding essays, preparing to write, making a first Persuasion Points (9-12) draft, revision, and a final check. Instruction Persuasive essays are a tricky business. It's and guidance is provided for each of the basic pretty easy to know why you believe something, steps, and a number of comprehension and but coming up with good reasons that will writing exercises allowing for students to prac- convince someone else ­ and leveraging those tice their essay writing skills are also included. reasons into something effective ­ is difficult. For example, step 1 focuses on understanding This book contains 82 exercises to help get your essays and addresses questions such as what persuasion in gear. From simple things that perexactly is an essay, why do we write essays, tain to writing in general (effective use of metahow an essay is different from other written phors, for example) to persuasion-specific topics texts, and what is the basic essay structure? (writing short persuasive paragraphs on simple Examples of activities related to understanding things), the exercises all give you something essays include distinguishing between fact and physical to write down, whether that's fill-inopinion and categorizing essays by intent (ex: the-blank, matching, or writing. Well organized argue a point of view, discuss both sides of an and well crafted, each chapter begins with an issue, or explain something). The content and explanation of the basic idea, and then a list of tasks are written directly to the student, which exercises in that chapter and what they're suppromotes self-study. Reproducible, answers posed to reinforce. An excellent resource for included. - Enh anyone with persuasive papers in their future. 044205 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.99 11.75 232 pgs, pb. ~ Mark 034746 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.95 15.95 Thinking in Threes (8-12) This practical and unique guide/workbook really does what it says and gives "writing ExPOSITORy WRITInG - SKILLS strategies that are as easy as 1-2-3." It uses These materials provide practice for indithe theme of three to help students remember vidual skills necessary to writing rather than good writing techniques. It starts by pointing focusing on the work as a whole. out the power of three and how it is used in everything from childhood stories to famous Writing Skills (2-12) speeches to learning strategies and shows how These consumable student books teach exposiusing sets of three in your writing will make it tory writing from the ground up ­ from understronger. It also gives guidelines for different standing words to constructing sentences, then aspects of writing, all with just three rules to writing organized paragraphs. Like building remember for each aspect of an essay or paper. blocks, the students work on the foundational A few of the topics covered are three steps for skills that pave the way for writing the fivebrainstorming, three "p's" of a thesis statement, paragraph essay. Some students take to writing three parts of an essay, three ways to connect naturally, but these books are for those who paragraphs and sentences, three ways to support need more instruction and a specific writing topic sentences, three ways to hook the reader method to follow. The activities provided in the in the introduction, three phases of completing workbooks give students lots of writing practice a timed writing assignment, and much more. and cement writing techniques in their minds by Instruction is conversational, with interesting making them use the skills in their own writing. quotes thrown in to keeps things interesting. Activities include writing sentences and decidStudents can either work their way through the ing whether they are singular or plural, writing book, as it somewhat builds upon itself, or sim- sentences or paragraphs using specific writing ply pick out particular sections based on their prompts, expanding paragraphs to include more immediate need. The guidelines and examples details, outlining paragraphs, identifying writare great, especially for students who have a ing elements in text that is provided, and much tough time remembering good writing tech- more. Book A begins with sentences. First, stuniques and would benefit from a more formu- dents practice the parts of speech in a sentence laic writing method. This book doesn't just give - subjects, different kinds of nouns, predicates, guidelines and examples, though; after most verbs, and more. Then they work with differinformative segments are short but effective ent types of sentences, from statements and "Do It Now" sections that give students practice exclamations to supporting sentences, topic with the skill or method just taught. Exercises sentences, and concluding sentences. Students include fill-in-the-blanks, identifying more pow- delve into basic paragraphs, examining parts of erful writing from weaker, and of course writing speech such as adjectives and adverbs as well specific sentences or paragraphs based on the as practicing simple paragraphs and other short guidelines. Overall, this is a great resource for writing forms. By the end of book 1, your child providing easy-to-remember tools and tips to will master writing four kinds of paragraphs: equip students for essay or composition writing, example, process, reason, and (continued...) English / Writing 307

activities that do have a correct response, an answer key is provided in the back of the book. Reproducible, 80 pgs, pb. ~ Deanne 047844 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.99 9.95

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

classification. Book 2 reviews these forms and adds two new types of writing (definition and compare-and-contrast), then explains how to use the same process learned in writing paragraphs to write the five paragraph essay. Book 3 provides practice in even more advanced writing, reviewing basic skills learned in the first books and then focusing more on expository writing. Eight types of exposition are practiced in a step-by-step fashion, along with additional practice with sentence skills. Different types of clauses are also covered and practiced in Book 3. The Teacher's Handbook is a comprehensive guide for use with all of the student books. It is not an answer key, rather it is a tool for the teacher to help guide students through the concepts covered in the student books. It includes clear explanations as well as models, exercises, and teaching strategies for struggling, beginning, and even advanced writers. The ten chapters in the handbook cover the sentence, the paragraph, types of writing, the essay, standards and assessments, proofreading and revising, working with groups, spelling, handwriting, and keyboarding. Helpful reproducibles are included. According to the publisher, these workbooks are not reproducible, but the activities could be completed on separate pieces of paper if you have more than one student. Between 110 and 140 pgs, pb. 024797 Book A (2-4) . . . . . . 15.35 12.25 002919 Book 1 (4-6) . . . . . . 15.35 12.25 002920 Book 2 (7-9) . . . . . . 15.35 12.25 012457 Book 3 (9-12) . . . . . 15.35 12.25 024798 Teacher Handbook 25.40 19.95

Paragraph Book Series (5-8) Book One is geared toward teaching students how to write an instructional paragraph using the FNTF formula: First, Next, Then, Finally. The book first describes the How-to paragraph, gives examples, and has students dissect paragraphs using multiple choice and short answer questions. Once students are familiar with the purpose and style of a How-to paragraph, they make their own using provided prompts. Students then learn how to edit and format paragraphs with instruction given on margins, editing marks, and more. Students then edit sample paragraphs. The book then provides various lessons for using correct capitalization, punctuation, subjects, and verbs. Thought content of the paragraphs is then covered and students gain practice in reviewing if paragraphs make sense, correcting ones that don't, and making more of their own paragraphs. Once students have become familiar with reading, writing, and editing paragraphs, the last chapter of the book instructs students on how to write a whole Howto essay using the same step-by-step process they have learned for paragraphs. Book Two in the series continues to teach the FNTF method for writing paragraphs, only this time looking at: Writing the Paragraph that Tells a Story. It begins with a review of Book One, covering especially all of the editing steps. Then, in lesson one, students are introduced to paragraphs that tell a story, or narrative paragraphs, and the differences between factual and fictional story paragraphs. The next few lessons 308 English / Writing

teach about using transition words to go from one idea to another, subjects (or the person and the point of view of a paragraph), the right verbs to use and when to use them, titles and beginning sentences, adding speech to a paragraph, word mistakes (missing words, double words, words with dropped endings, words in the wrong order, and words that are simply wrong - do not make sense or are not grammatically correct), and adding openers and closers to make a three-part paragraph. The final lesson in the book takes students from writing a single paragraph story to a story that will contain four or more paragraphs. Each lesson ends with a review and a quiz. Book Three teaches about the expository paragraph in three forms: the paragraph that names things, the example paragraph, and the paragraph that tells why. Each is outlined and taught separately, and the focus throughout is on clarity, precision, and relevance. Students learn about the three-part paragraph and the number formula, continue to use lists and graphic organizers, develop the different parts of a paragraph, work some more on transitions, learn the difference between facts and opinions, how to use the topic sentence, using quantity terms in the topic sentence, concluding the paragraph, and expanding both the introduction and the middle of your paragraphs. Finally, students are shown how to expand their expository paragraph into an expository essay. Book Four reviews the expository paragraph taught in Book Three and then focuses on classifying, comparing, cause and effect, and persuasive paragraphs. Students will observe and categorize information from expository paragraphs and then write paragraphs that classify. They will learn to add "backup" sentences to their writing, which provides more detail to paragraphs and also practice writing topic sentences for paragraphs that classify. They will learn how to most effectively group information in paragraphs and how to contrast details. Cause and effect is also explored, and students practice writing sentences and then paragraphs about something causing something else to happen. Students then learn how to write topic sentences that tell their point of view and explore persuasive paragraphs. Students practice writing persuasive paragraphs and then write a severalparagraph persuasive essay. With reviews after each main topic, lots of examples and diagrams along the way, very clear teaching points, and uncluttered pages, the consumable student books in this series provide great help in improving your student's writing. The teacher's guides are a valuable resource. Besides describing how to use the book and giving lesson plans with answer keys to the exercises, each guide provides a quick diagnostic assessment, scoring and correcting procedures, suggested teaching techniques, assignment sheets to duplicate, and quizzes to give students after each lesson in the book. The Paragraph Books are consumable. ~ Rachel S. and Zach EACH BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.05 15.75 EACH TEACHER GUIDE . . . . 17.25 13.75 Book: Teacher Guide: 020808 Book 1 020807 024790 Book 2 024791 024792 Book 3 024793 037689 Book 4 037690

Outlining / note Taking Beginning Outlining (3-4) Learning how to outline can be a confusing challenge for any student, but this workbook provides 24 activities that build upon each other to break down the different steps involved. The book truly takes students step by step through the outlining process, starting small and then growing complex, giving them plenty of practice with each step. Students first learn about the aspects of an outline, such as the title, main topics, sub-topics, and details, and then they put each component to work. Students begin the workbook by learning about titles and making up some title names for different situations. Then they learn about adding topics, sub-topics, and other details. Worksheets include exercises like filling in outlines using word banks and other prompts, making up subtopics and details for an outline, choosing the main topic from a sentence, and much more. By the end of the workbook, students are creating their own outlines and writing a report from an outline. Reproducible, answers provided. ~ Rachel S. 022861 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.99 5.75 Note Taking: Lessons to Improve Research Skills (4-8) Note taking is a valuable skill that will help students retain information, organize research, and improve their test-taking abilities. This book provides exercises that will help children start developing this skill at an early age. Sections of the book guide children through an array of note-taking strategies to use when reading from textbooks or novels, researching and using online sources, and taking notes in class or from another spoken source. Each worksheet holds a short, interesting passage followed by a note-taking activity covering a specific tactic such as recognizing the main idea and details, chronological order, summarizing, tables, Venn diagrams and other graphic organizers, scanning, character, note cards, bibliography, and other helpful methods. Suggestions are also given for teachers which will allow students the opportunity to practice taking notes in class, such as reading an article aloud to students or watching an educational video. If students don't recognize the benefits of this skill now, they definitely will when they are in college! ~ Steph 032082 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.99 6.75 Outlining, Note Taking & Report Writing Skills (4-8) This book is designed to show you how you can write a good report. The lessons are introduced to teach in proper sequence "a series of developmental skills which will prepare students for writing reports which are concise and well organized." The author divides the report writing process into several distinct steps: decide upon a suitable title or subject, select a plan to follow, preview available material by skimming reference books/periodicals, reread all material carefully, take notes on cards or paper, refine temporary outlines and draft a final outline, write the report. Various lessons and activities are provided to help your child develop the skills necessary. Worksheets are reproducible, and answers are included. ~ Enh 022301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.95 5.95

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

Outlining, Note Taking & Report Writing Book 2 (4-8) The second book in the series, this one covers outlining, note-taking, and report writing skills and offers various outlining and identification exercises to give students good practice. This volume covers the same rules and techniques as the first book, but in a much more concise way, with only about half the pages and material. If you're looking for a quicker review (or additional outlining/writing exercises after the first book) this book provides that, but the first book is more comprehensive. Like the first book, worksheets in this book are reproducible and answers are included. 26 pgs, pb. ~ Rachel 035674 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.95 5.95 Outlining Grades 5-8 Subtitled Step-by-Step Outlining Instruction and Practice, this is a complete resource for teaching basic outlining skills. After introducing what an outline is and its purpose, it thoroughly covers the four parts of an outline: title, main topic, subtopics, and details. Incorporated into the instruction is lots of practice on creating outlines from a paragraph, writing paragraphs from an outline, and even using outlines to help plan events. 44 reproducible pgs. - Anh 022872 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.99 5.75 Library / Research Skills Facts Plus (3-12) Used as a reference tool in the Information, Please series and recommended by TRISMS and other curriculums, this almanac of essential information belongs on your shelf, next to your set of encyclopedias. It's a complete desk reference of fascinating facts, illustrations, charts and maps, and an index with over 3800 entries. Facts and topics were chosen judiciously with the goal of supporting a standard curriculum of school subjects. Major sections include: Time and Space; Science and Health; The Earth and Its People; The United States; Maps; Libraries and Books; The English Language; Writing, Music, Art; Math and Numbers; and Handbook. Since facts are fun and fascinating, Facts Plus has come up with a great activity book to help you utilize this desk reference to the fullest. These enjoyable activities can be integrated into your curriculum to enhance instruction in basic school subjects, such as reading, computer education, writing, spelling, and mathematics. There are also activities to help your children learn how to find facts fast using Facts Plus and other reference books. Throughout this book your children will do activities such as a crossword puzzle, creating a tiny trivia book, playing a board game, exploring the world through map games, and creating a timeline. Each activity has a list of materials needed, detailed instructions, answer keys, and reproducible worksheets. This 183 page, paperback, spiralbound activity book really utilizes a variety of information from every section of the Facts Plus book. Facts Plus is a great book on its own; however, this creative activity book greatly compliments the resource, as it will spark your children's interest in using reference books in their learning. - elise 001017 Book. . . . . . . . . . . . 19.95 19.75 007980 Activity Book . . . . . 24.95 24.75

Information, Please! (4-12) I believe it was Albert Einstein who said that he never tried to remember anything that he could look up. Einstein would have appreciated Information, Please!, a program designed to teach research skills to children. Start with Getting Started, which gives us some basic information about the library and when and how to use the reference materials included there. Follow-up questions and activities are provided for each reference source studied. From there, three books help children become increasingly proficient at finding what they need, and not just in the encyclopedia and dictionary. Please note that Getting Started is the only level with instruction on how to use reference materials; the three following levels are completely made up of research questions. Suggested sources include a Bible concordance, globe, world map, telephone directory, newspaper, thesaurus, world almanac, atlas, Timetables of History, and Facts Plus mini encyclopedia. About a dozen alternate sources are also mentioned. Each book contains 40 pages, with 10 questions per page that must be looked up somewhere. It is suggested that no more than two questions per page be looked up in any one source, so that the student gets more exposure to a variety of sources. Plan to make a regular trip to the library unless you have an extensive reference library in your home. An answer key is included , so YOU don't have to follow your child around the library! As your child heads down the information superhighway, research skills will be increasingly important. Start now! 006246 Getting Started . . . 20.00 15.95 003861 Level 1 . . . . . . . . . 16.00 12.95 003930 Level 2 . . . . . . . . . 16.00 12.95 003936 Level 3 . . . . . . . . . 16.00 12.95 Learning How to Learn (4-12) Providing an introduction to a variety of essential research tools, this guide gently walks students through the dictionary, encyclopedia, atlas, concordance and the telephone book. Each lesson offers great flexibility for the homeschooling family, as the lessons are not written in daily format. Each section begins with background information on the studied reference book and includes instructions on how to use it. The following student pages provide a variety of activities specific to the reference studied. Here is an example of one portion of the Encyclopedia lesson: The student reads the instruction on using an encyclopedia. They are asked to look up "Samuel Adams" and read about his life and answer the following questions: What year was he born? Who was his famous cousin? What college did he graduate from in 1740? Internet research tools are discussed, although the author emphasizes the importance of using research books. Strong's Exhaustive Concordance of the Bible is recommended and Noah Webster's 1828 dictionary is suggested (other dictionaries will work). SC. 26 pgs. Non-reproducible. ~ Deanne 052350 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.95 Research Virtuoso (AD) 040293 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.95 11.75

Reports / Research Papers / Term Papers My First Report (1-5) This packet holds even more than the title suggests - besides report writing activities, there is a whole unit study contained inside. The approach here is to give children a list of questions about a subject, and they will find the information in dictionaries, encyclopedias, etc., and write a short report answering those questions. This way they learn what information is appropriate when writing a short report and can start developing the basic report writing skills they will use throughout their life. There are twelve report starters included - one a week for a quarter - and each provides six basic questions to research and answer. Useful vocabularybuilding words are also listed for the student to look up or fiqure out based on the research he will be doing. Also included are three sets of reproducible masters (each set has lines appropriate for a different grade level) for the child to write their reports on, and one page in the set includes a space for a drawing or picture to illustrate the report. The accompanying unit study includes tons of ideas for all subjects: Bible, history/geography/social studies, reading, language, math, science/health, physical education, and art. Also included are ideas for field trips, recommended resources, and any needed worksheets. My sample copy is Plants, and that are incorporated into the unit study are endless! Each individual report set is packaged in a large envelope, and worksheets are loose-leaf and 3-hole punched to place in a binder. The complete set comes in a binder. ~ Stephanie EACH PACKET . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.95 015081 Birds 015082 Bugs and Worms 043796 Eastern United States 042500 Focus on the World 042501 Lewis & Clark Expedition 015084 Marine Life 015085 Me 043797 Middle United States 015087 Music 026860 My State 015091 Pets and Farm Animals 015092 Plants 015093 Reptiles and Amphibians 015095 Solar System 043798 Southern United Sates 015100 Weather 043799 Western United States 015102 Wild Animals:Large Mammals 015103 Wild Animals:Small Mammals 015094 Set of 14 in Binder 69.95 66.95 Set includes Birds, Bugs and Worms, Marine Life, Me, Music, People, Pets and Farm Animals, Plants, Reptiles and Amphibians, Solar System, Transportation, Weather, Wild Animals - Large Mammals and Wild Animals - Small Mammals. English / Writing 309

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

Easy File Folder Reports (3-6) A fun way to introduce report-writing and researching for the early grades, this book combines early research skills, writing and hands-on projects to make the experience enjoyable for everyone. The reports are designed to fit within one file folder, with a the title pasted on the front, and the two reproducible pages of report material pasted inside the folder with the compact 3-D hands-on project. A nice aspect of this book is that a lot of the work has been done for you. There are 27 given reports, nine in each of three topic areas - social studies, science, and holidays/celebrations. Each report lesson contains teacher directions which include stepby-step completion instructions, materials lists, and pictures of the finished product. The student directions follow, and include instructions for using and filling out the reproducible report forms and title page, a step-by-step assignment breakdown with checkboxes by each part of the report, as well as the reproducible sheets that make up the report. The reproducibles contain maps, timelines, charts, graphic organizers, lined areas, and forms for the student to fill in with specific content, which make reportwriting fun and manageable for young students as the report is clearly divided into different, worksheet-like areas and takes the enormity of writing a whole, open-ended report out of the picture. The research involved to complete these reports can be as minimal or extensive as you choose to make them, and there is plenty of room to add more writing, or to include more projects as you see fit. A student proofreading checklist and information on how to write bibliography entries is appended. - Jess 028571 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.99 14.75 Research in Increments (4-12) This great book provides a step-by-step guide to writing research papers from a Christian perspective. The easy to use guide can be used as an aid to help write any kind of paper on any subject. Sixteen basic steps are given.These steps include a research questionnaire, what direction to take with your report, the index card method, creating a bibliography, skimming, info sources, interviewing experts, adding pictures and graphics, adding scripture, creating an outline, hooking your audience, introducing the paper, summing up information, footnotes, writing your paper, and finishing touches. Detailed instruction on each topic is given, along with a worksheet to help writers in the different stages of their report. Notes are included for both parents and students to get the most out of this thorough, easy-to-use guide. ~ Rachel S. 017132 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.95 12.65 How to Write a Great Research Paper (5-8) This book takes an intimidating topic - writing a research paper - and breaks it down into a manageable, even fun, step-by-step process. Each chapter focuses on one area or task in the writing process, and provides plenty of strategies, practice, examples and tips for handling that section smoothly. The chapters walk students through finding a topic, locating resources, researching that topic, writing bibliography cards, taking notes, outlining their paper, writing the first draft, revising and editing the draft into the final copy, writing the bibliog310 English / Writing

raphy and presenting the final paper. The text is filled with clear instructions, visual examples, and helpful hints. Reproducible student activity sheets are also scattered throughout the book, providing the student small-scale practice before they apply the skills to their own research paper. At the end of the book you'll find evaluation rubrics and answers to the activities found throughout the book. Don't let the thought of a research paper overwhelm you any longer - use the steps and techniques in this book to turn them into a breeze. ~ Steph 034546 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.95 9.95 How to Write a Great Research Paper (6-8) Okay, so maybe you've put off actually tackling a "real" research paper. Unlike other writing assignments, this isn't just about how well you can write, it's also about how effective your research and organizational skills are. Also, research papers are often larger assignments than the average paper, both in size and grade. Help is on the way! This step-by-step guide leads you through the entire process. There are twelve chapters in all, each covering a different, crucial step of the research paper. These include choosing a topic and getting organized, selecting the resources and materials, writing the bibliography cards, taking notes, writing the preliminary outline, documenting your sources, writing the first draft, writing the final outline, revising and rewriting the first draft, writing or typing the final paper, completing the finishing touches, and even evaluating the research paper. The book is written in a friendly, knowledgeable tone, packed with instructions, examples, and even reproducible worksheets to help students write a great research paper. 95 pgs. 019934 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.99 11.95 Writing the Research Paper: A Step-By-Step Approach (6-12) 054413 Student Book. . . . . . . . 11.50 054414 Teacher Guide. . . . . . . 9.50 Quick Reference to the Research Paper (7-12) For a very simple, very easy-to-follow process for writing a research paper, turn to this short book by Sharon Sorenson. In 12 quick steps, she moves from beginning with a plan of attack, to the end result of a polished and proofread final copy of a research paper. This book is a much condensed version of a research paper book by the same author. Nothing is left out. All twelve steps are complete and work through the planning, choosing of topics, preliminary work, secondary resources, bibliography cards, primary resources, notes, writing the final outline, writing the draft, revising the draft, preparing the final manuscript, and proofreading. Also included is an actual research paper for analyzing, as well as a list of documentation forms. Keep this one nearby; its easy-to-follow layout makes finding where you are in the research paper writing process simple. Index included. 84 pgs. ~ Zach 008652 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.25 10.95

Writing Research Papers with Confidence Writing a Research Paper (9-12) (8-12) Christian Liberty Press shows high school stuIf you're searching for a serious resource for teaching how to write research papers and dents how to produce a God-honoring research reports, look no further. This program by Sheila paper. This 60-page booklet guides students See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

Moss is probably the most complete and intensive research paper curriculum we carry. It's from a Christian perspective and is also full of SAT grammar and essay preparation sections. With optional 4 or 8 week learning tracks, the book takes the intimidation out of writing research papers and lays out an 8-step process for writing polished, college-worthy papers. It gives the student an overview of resources and how to use a library, teaches how to develop a topic, guides note-taking and appropriate documentation, explains high-quality organizing and outlining, lays out how to write a draft, gives correct forms for footnoting and citing bibliographic references, and shows how to master proofreading to create a finished paper. Instruction has a conversational tone, and there are examples of good writing included. Students write SAT-style essays and evaluate other essays to learn what graders are looking for. They also answer questions covering the same content and format as those on standardized tests. Writing paper is included in the book to mimic the amount of writing space given during the SAT. Students do a variety of research and write a variety of reports, and they also interview family and professionals for some of the lessons. With straightforward, intensive instruction on writing a research paper, reviews that mirror questions from the SAT, writing assignments similar to those on the SAT, and evaluation exercises for a student's own and other essays, this book is a powerful guide for research paper writing, especially if you're concerned with college-prep. It really does take the intimidation out of researching and collecting all the thoughts and facts into a great paper. The non-reproducible student book contains some useful appendices and a glossary of terms. The teacher's edition provides parent educators with support every step of the way. Lesson overviews are given, along with tips for helping students accomplish their week's goals. Guidelines for determining good writing and making sure your student is mastering researched writing are also included, as well as an answer key for the SAT-style questions in the student book. The complete student text is included in the teacher book so parents can see exactly what their students do. This does make it possible to just purchase the Teacher Book and then have students work out of it, though the answer keys and suggestions for the educator should be hidden somehow. Likewise, it is possible to just purchase the Student book, as it is very thorough and contains plenty of tips and guidelines for writing, but then you will not get the valuable teacher helps or the answers to the SAT-style questions. For the most intensive and thorough instruction, both books are extremely helpful and beneficial. This program shows students how to take steps towards good thinking, do solid research, and have strong writing. It is very useful in completing high-school English credits and preparing students for SAT and college writing. Student Book, 248 pgs; Teacher Book, 264 pgs; both pb. ~ Rachel 022376 Student . . . . . . . . . . 21.99 14.50 022422 Teacher . . . . . . . . . 35.99 23.50

sprinkled throughout. Readers will nod as they recognize some common advertising themes in the commercials they see every day, and will be shocked at the lengths to which some companies go to get their product "out there!" Illustrations are plentiful, and this is a fun read, with information packed in that most young people (or older ones) may not be familiar with. Lighthearted, but informative enough that I guarantee you'll never look at Toucan Sam® the same way again! 114 pgs. - Jess Writing Great Research Papers (9-12) Do you need some help with your research 032406 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.95 13.25 paper? If you find yourself staring at a blank sheet of paper, wondering where to begin, or Journalism Basics: Reporting Current Events even if you've started writing but need addi- (6-12) tional guidance, this book is for you. This guide While many believe that print media is a dying covers it all: selecting a topic, developing a the- medium, the skills of collecting data, reporting sis statement, conducting research, taking notes, on events, and writing articles in a straightforoutlining, constructing an organized and well- ward way are still valuable in today's society. If supported paper, and more. This book explains you have students interested in print journalism how to research online, print, and other sources or just want to expose them to this specific form (both at a library and at home), and it cov- of writing, this worktext from the Institute for ers various citation formats (MLA, APA, and Excellence in Writing does a pretty thorough job Chicago). Sample research papers are included of presenting the basics and providing instruction. It focuses specifically on print media, and in the back. 193 pgs, pb. 2nd ed. ~ Lisa 044702 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.00 12.75 while it touches on blogs, magazines, etc., it really is concerned mostly with newspapers. 10 Steps in Writing the Research Paper There's not much need for teacher instruction because the book is written directly to the stu(9-12) Step one: buy this book. Step two: choose dent and leads into assignments during explanaa subject. See, you are already on your way. tions of different aspects. The book gives a very Writing a research paper can be a daunting task. brief history of journalism and then gets right It's important to break it into smaller steps, and into giving tips and practice for writing. Students that is where this book can help you. This is the will build background skills like knowing their 7th edition, so they must be doing something audience, generating and narrowing ideas, right. I particularly liked the advice about read- investigating and interviewing, and more. An ing general articles and developing a temporary Associated Press Style Guide is recommended outline. You are not committing to topic imme- so students can use the proper style and learn diately. Sometimes in our general reading, we how to quote properly and avoid plagiarism. find a different angle to pursue. There is very Once students get an idea of the basic skills specific information on developing a temporary they need, they learn about the different types bibliography and editing it for your final prod- of stories, like news, features, and opinions, and uct. The method is realistic and simple to follow the formats they are written in. Tips on drafting, editing, quoting, etc. are all included so writfor a student guiding themselves. ~ Sara 053459 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.99 10.75 ers learn how to write seamless stories using the format and style that's most acceptable in professional journalism. After each chapter are Journalism / Media Literacy review questions that will make sure students Made You Look: How Advertising Works (5-9) understand the finer points, and of course "Run, don't walk, to the big sale!" "Reach additional writing assignments throughout the for an ice cold one," "Only $12.99 a month!" chapters give students hands-on experience at Although some form of advertising surrounds us writing articles. Unlike my journalism classes from the time we get up until the time we go in college, this book admits that the way a to bed at night, we rarely think much about it, person reports on events depends a lot on their except perhaps when a commercial really catch- worldview. It discusses relativism and theism es our attention. However, as more and more and gives examples of how a story can be difadvertising strains to reach the child consumer, ferent when told using these conflicting views. who will supposedly sway Mom and Dad to buy It shows how to truly keep your worldview out them that new cereal or the hot new electronic when reporting the facts, but how writers can gadget, it becomes important - and interesting apply their worldview in different writings like - to delve into the study of advertising. This opinion pieces. Instruction is also given on how fascinating and energetic book introduces read- to find a market for your work and writing query ers to the world of advertising, including its letters, as well as the physical aspects of a newshistory, seeing yourself as the "target," advertis- paper, like how to do layout and design to pull ing strategies, common ploys of advertising, an entire newspaper together. With good basic hidden messages in ads, recognizing advertising instruction and plenty of examples and prompts in disguise, becoming familiar with favorite for students to write, this program is perfect for advertising language, discovering some of the practicing writing skills and learning what the most outrageous advertising schemes, learning wonderful world of journalism is all about. An about the consumer's role and what they can answer key is included in the back of the book. do about advertising. The text is upbeat and By Megan House and Karin Viet, reproducible, clearly written, with plenty of anecdotes and 148 pgs, spiral-bound, pb. ~ Rachel 29.00 real advertising stories from real companies 022402 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . through the process, from selecting a topic to gathering information to the final draft. The book is written in a clear, straight-forward style, with a variety of ideas and examples to polish your work. As this is primarily a guide to writing a research paper, there are no worksheets or reproducibles, but they have included plenty of writing examples to help students through the process. 005494 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.99 3.95 See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

Journalism (9-12) This program shares everything students need to know to publish materials for their high school. It is not always homeschool friendly, as it mostly gives instruction on how best to report on school news in newspapers and yearbooks. The text is geared to teach whole staffs of student writers to develop specific publications and assumes that students are at schools with computers, software programs, photographers, and many classmates, sporting events, and clubs to report on. That being said, some of the content can be modified and the basics of good journalistic writing are laid out very well. A concise history of journalism is covered and students get instruction on good writing, the laws of journalism, ethics, how to layout pages and format, editing, and pretty much every other aspect of journalism, especially as it relates to newspapers and yearbooks. It discusses the duties of a journalist, styles of writing, parts of a newspaper, design, photography, and a variety of careers in the field. As a college journalism major, I can see the same methods and much of the same information I was taught at college in this program. If you have a student who is interested in journalism, this would be useful curriculum to look at, though it is more schooloriented and a few of the exercises would be more difficult to complete. For instance, several exercises instruct students to look at last year's edition of the yearbook or the last issue of the school paper and analyze certain aspects of journalism and make changes or write a report on what is found. These exercises could be done using newspapers, but it would be more difficult to find examples of what the text is focusing on. Also, students are often asked to analyze their schools editorial, news, and advertising policies. The text itself is very informative, and though it uses examples from school publications, it often focuses on journalism as a whole and teaches terms, jargon, formats, and procedures that are vital for success in the field. The text has seventeen chapters: History of American Journalism, Rights and Responsibilities, Style and Editing, News, Sports, Feature, Editorial, Column, and Headline Writing, Yearbook Copy, Newspaper Design, Yearbook Design, Caption Writing, Advertising, Photography, Broadcast Journalism, and Careers in Journalism. Each chapter is full of instruction, guidelines, tips, examples, and history and is followed by a list of exercises dealing with the topic. The Student Workbook provides worksheets for each chapter, sometimes including a summary of the chapter. These worksheets include fill-in-the-blank questions from the text and prompts for writing news stories. There are editing exercises and even practice in laying out stories for a newspaper or yearbook. Some of the chapters have many pages of worksheets and some have just a few, depending on the complexity of the issue. The Teacher Guide is the same as the Student Workbook, but with answers. Overall, this curriculum does a great job of teaching the basics of journalism and covers almost everything needed to publish a junior high/high school newspaper or yearbook. ~ Rachel S. 033911 Text . . . . . . . . . . . . 65.95 44.95 033909 Student Workbook. . 19.95 14.95 033910 Teacher Guide. . . . . 19.95 14.95 English / Writing 311

WRITInG TOOLS / SuPPLIES Writing Aids Magnetic Sentence Strips (Set of 9) (1-AD) Students can make a statement in a big way with these large magnetic sentence strips. Each sentence strip is white with a dotted midline and can be written on with dry-erase markers. The sentence strips have magnetic backing so they can be displayed on any magnetic surface. This set provides of total of nine strips: six measure 3" x 24", and three measure 3" x 8". Use the strips for handwriting practice, sentence-building exercises, copywork, and more. ~ Lisa 046966 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.99 11.75

Teacher's Friend Booklets (1-6) These small-format, 32-page booklets are perfect for students. Each book has a different colored cover, with room for students to decorate. My Book about Me! asks specific questions about a child's hobbies, interests, friends, measurements, and life events. It leaves room for the child to attach photographs of him or herself. The My Books! are meant for writing stories. The primary book features dotted midlines with the top half of each page blank for illustrations. Great for collecting children's writing and creating lasting keepsakes.~ Rachel S. Writer's Checklist Bookmark (5-12) EACH BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.99 2.50 This glossy paper bookmark measures 2" x 6" 020458 My Book! Primary (1-3) and looks like a notebook with a checklist writ020457 My Book about Me! (1-6) ten on it. One side lists seven things students should make sure is true about their writing in English Poster Papers (PK-8) regards to content and organization (main topic These posters are like other Poster Papers is clear, writing is interesting, etc.). The other (see description) but focus more on personal side lists seven things to check regarding graminformation and prompt students to write about mar, punctuation, and spelling (sentence fragthemselves. Unfolded, the papers are 22" x 17", ments, verb tense, spelling check, etc.). with plenty of room to fill in blanks, write, and 036219 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.35 include drawings/photographs of themselves. EACH POSTER PAPER . . . . . . . . 0.50 Paper / Composition Books 020467 Amazing ME (PK-2) 025657 Four Square Writing Method (1-3) Happy Handwriting Papers (PK-4) 025658 Four Square Writing Method (4-6) These useful and fun pages serve many differ020475 Interview with ME (4-8) ent purposes. They all have black and white 020481 My Book Report (3-8) drawings that children can color themselves, 031927 Poetry Writing (4-6) either in a border around the page or at the top or bottom of a page. The additional decoraWriter's Companion CD (2-AD) tion can be a great aid for promoting writing in Students learn to brainstorm, organize, young writers. Although these are titled "handsequence, edit and publish in version 2.6 of writing" papers, we found some of them to be this easy to use writing tool designed to engage more appropriately placed here. For the pads even those reluctant that do target handwriting practice, refer to our to write. Installation handwriting section. Reproducible. ~ Rachel S. instructions are EACH BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.99 5.95 detailed and clear 017032 Holiday Paper (PK-2) whether you are 31 sheets with seasonal decorative borinstalling the program ders surrounding five 1" lines (with doton one computer or a ted midline). Holidays include Halloween, network. The booklet Thanksgiving, Christmas, St. Patrick's Day, explains shortcuts to Father's Day, 4th of July, and birthdays. use in their writing 004680 Just for Journals (K-6) like Ctrl-X will cut 30 lined sheets each with a different theme: and Ctrl-C will copy. quilt squares, transportation, dogs, winter, Students create a stars, frogs & dragonflies, giraffe, western, password to log in. They start with a brainstormpatriotic, and other fun themes. ing page. Ideas are put into boxes that can be 004838 Scriptures (K-4) moved around the screen. This helps students 62 sheets, spanning two different grade organize their thoughts before moving to the levels. One side of the page is lined with a next step. The organizing stage uses color coddotted midline, and the other side is lined ing to group ideas into clusters that will become for higher grades without the midline. Both paragraphs. There is the option of a timeline and sides feature a verse and illustration. 312 English / Writing

a Venn diagram at this stage also. Sequencing is like putting your thoughts into an outline format. Creating a rough draft is done in the editing stage of the program. Students can spell-check and use a dictionary or thesaurus here. Textto-speech is one of the most useful features in the editing phase of Writer's Companion. There is also a word counter and students can get a "readability score" using the Fry and FleschKincaid scales. Once you are ready to publish your document, add finishing touches to your lay-out or use a template from the template menu. Graphics may be added now from the internet or from your digital camera. Save and re-open files easily with a folder opened just for you when you log in the first time with Writer's Companion. Several printing options are clearly explained in the booklet. Three pages of the booklet are dedicated to "Teaching Ideas" like how to use graphic organizers and motivating students to write. If you have a student that has a hard time getting started with a writing project or one that has a lot to say and needs to learn to better organize, this is a useful addition to your teaching library. Requires Macintosh 9.2.2 or higher or OS 10.2 or higher. Windows 95/98/2000/NT/XP. ~ Sara 049544 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49.95 39.95

017034 Story Starters (1-2) A cute picture and correlating short sentence top each of these 30 pages to serve as writing prompts. The ruling on the paper measures ¾" with dotted midlines. 017035 Story Starters (3-4) Same as Story Starters 1-2, but the ruling measures ½" and does not include midlines. 017036 Theme Paper (PK-2) 31 themed pages are intended to correlate with the publisher's thematic-literature based units, but these can be used independently as well. Pages feature themes like sea life, rabbits, fall, penguins, bugs, space, the alphabet/numbers, western, and dinosaurs. Lines are 1" wide with midlines. 004786 More Fun Theme Paper (K-2) Frogs, bears, pigs, dogs, cats, sunflowers, ice cream, watermelon, hats, alligators, butterflies, and teeth - all of these themes have 2-3 pages each, giving a total of 31 lined pages with a dotted midline. Fun & Fancy Themed Writing Paper (K-6) Help inspire your beginning writer with this fun and fancy midline-ruled theme paper. Each themed pad has 32 different reproducible pages sporting too-cute color-in blackline illustrations, some with borders. Two levels are available - one for grades 1-3, the other for grades 3-6. These are adorable and will provide a wonderful "frame" for your child's best writing! The Border Fun paper features a variety of fancy and fun borders, while the Picture Story paper is blank on top to leave room for illustrations. EACH PACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.99 3.95 018057 Picture Story (K-1) 006775 Animal (1-3) 000553 Fun & Fancy Seasonal (1-3) 010491 High Interest (3-6) 010492 Holiday & Seasonal (3-6) Blank Top Writing Paper (K-6) See description of Writing Paper (with a difference) in our Handwriting section. This is the same type of paper, only with the top half of the paper left blank. Use for stories, journaling, science, or with the Draw·Write·Now books. Comes in pkgs of 100 sheets. EACH PACKAGE . . . . . . . . . . . 4.39 4.00 003500 Primary (blue shaded) 003505 Intermediate (green shaded) RediSpace Transitional Notebook Paper (1-3) This full-size paper is designed to help students transition from wide-lined writing paper to wide-ruled notebook paper with no dotted midline. Pages are 8 ½ by 11 inches with vertical placement and 3/8 inch line spacing. Margins are marked in green at the left and red on the right to remind students that writing begins at the left and stops at the right side of the page. The word `go' is printed in green at the top of the left margin, and `stop' is printed in red at the top of the right margin. Every line is divided into ¼ inch spaces onto which students place one letter per space in order to reinforce proper letter spacing and size. Tips for successful use are printed in the front of each 50-page notebook. Pages are 3-hole punched and can be easily removed from the notebook. Storybook paper is also full-size with a picture space at the top half of the front, space for the child to

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

write their name (divided into spaces like the lines) above the picture area, and a full page of printing space on the reverse. Developed by a mother and pediatric occupational therapist, the goal is to make the transition a little more stressfree by working on common issues encountered by young writers. ~ Donna EACH SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.59 3.95 049397 Notebook Paper - Stage 4 049398 Storybook Paper - Stage 4 Primary Line Composition Book (PK-AD) This versatile composition book can be used for handwriting practice, journaling, and creative writing projects. The 7.5" x 10.25" hardcover, spiral-bound book has a solid white blank cover and 28 sheets (56 pages) inside. Each left-hand page is blank, while each righthand page is lined with ¾" writing guidelines, a red line baseline, and a dashed midline. ~ Lisa 048664 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.49 3.25 Composition Books (K-3) Do your part to keep handwritten letters from becoming a lost art. Chart your children's progress in these journals. Pages are ruled for handwriting practice conforming to D'Nealian and Zaner-Bloser standards. Inside sturdy cardboard covers is an example for students to follow in cursive and print letters. Pages are printed on both sides of the page. Picture Story composition books have lines on the bottom half and are blank at the top. Primary Journal books have lines from top to bottom of each page. 200 pgs, pb. ~ Sara EACH BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.49 2.25 049384 5/8" Ruled" D'Nealian (K), Zaner-Bloser (1) 049385 5/8" Ruled, Picture Story D'Nealian (K), Zaner-Bloser (1) 049382 1/2" Ruled D'Nealian (1-3), Zaner-Bloser (2-3) 049383 1/2" Ruled, Picture Story D'Nealian (1-3), Zaner-Bloser (2-3) Composition Books (1-3) These books are ruled for use with ZanerBloser handwriting, by grade level. All books are spiral-bound, 36 pages, and although the ruling measurements differ by grade, each features dotted midlines and red baselines. 013824 Grade 1 (7/8") . . . . . . 1.10 1.00 013825 Grade 2 (3/4") . . . . . . 1.10 1.00 013826 Grade 3 (1/2") . . . . . . 1.10 1.00 Primary Composition Book (2-3) Spiral bound notebook containing 36 8"x10" sheets of paper with ½" ruling and a 1" margin 013822 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.08 1.00 Hard Cover Composition Books (3-AD) Inexpensive, traditional composition books for older students. 052389 60 Sheet Book. . . . . . 1.73 1.25 052387 100 Sheet Book . . . . . 2.27 1.75 Blank Books Colored Blank Books (PK-6) Get out your pencils and crayons and get ready to write and illustrate your own story! These 7" x 8 1/2" blank books are great for creative writing projects as your child will create a book

Primary Line Blank Book (PK-AD) Young authors will be motivated to write and illustrate their own stories with this inexpensive, hardcover blank book. The 6" x 8" book has a solid white blank cover and 14 sheets (28 pages) inside. Each left-hand page is blank, while each right-hand page is lined with ¾" writing guidelines, a red line baseline, and Bright Books (PK-AD) a dashed midline. You will want to stock up These colorful paperback booklets feature on these for handwriting practice and creative tagstock covers and blank white bond paper writing projects! ~ Lisa pages. They are available in a variety of sizes 048663 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.49 1.75 and are perfect for journaling, writing stories, doodling, drawing, and much more! Assorted Make a Story: Writing Journal (K-3) color Bright Books come in a variety of vibrant Use these versatile journals to help your young color covers, while white Bright Books feature ones write and illustrate their own story. The white covers and white inside pages. journal starts off with a title page and a dedication page. (Maybe they'll dedicate their story to 4.25" x 5.5" Bright Books (24 pages) you!) Then there are 25 pages for your child to 043806 Single . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.75 write their story. Each page has three lines at EACH SET OF 10 BELOW . . . . 6.49 5.65 the bottom (with a dotted mid-line) to help them 035888 Asst Colors (set of 10) write out their story and the remainder of the 035889 White (set of 10) page is blank for them to draw in their illustration. After they are done with their story, they 5.5" x 8.5" Bright Books (32 pages) can write a little biography and create a self021419 Single . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.39 1.00 portrait for the "About the Author" page. When 043808 White - 10 Pack . . . 13.99 11.50 they are finished with everything, they will 043504 Asst Colors - 10 Pack13.99 11.50 enjoy answering the reading-comprehension questions about their story. If they need some 8.5" x 11" Bright Books (24 pages) help getting going on their story, there are some 031817 Set of 6 bks . . . . . . 10.99 8.95 "story starters" printed on the inside of the front 043807 Single . . . . . . . . . . . 1.99 1.85 cover. There are also 100 high-frequency words printed on the inside of the back cover to help Shaped Blank Books (PK+) them along. When they are all done they not Kids will love writing their original stories - only will have a completed story, but they will complete with their very own illustrations, of have learned all the parts of a book! course - on these blank shaped books. With 003412 Set of 10. . . . . . . . . 16.99 12.95 lots of different designs to choose from, they're 003415 Single . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.70 1.50 bound to find the perfect shape for their latest "novel." They can even design the cover them- Story Drawing Book (K-3) selves! There are also three fun shaped books 037989 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.09 3.95 with colored covers; a blue butterfly, orange pumpkin, and red apple. The books are 7" x Blank Books (K-4) 8.5" and hold 16 pages, except for the regular These 16-page blank books come in two blank book, which contains 32 pages. levels, primary and intermediate, with lines to EACH (except noted) . . . . . . . . 1.49 1.25 write on and illustration boxes to draw pictures 026343 Apple in. The Primary book is 8 1/2" x 11" and fea026431 Blue Butterfly tures 11/16" lines with a dotted midline. The 026344 Book. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.29 1.00 Intermediate book is smaller at 7" x 9" and has 026345 Bus 026360 Present 7/16" lines (no midline). Space is provided for 026346 Butterfly 026363 Pumpkin a dedication, title page, and a biography about 026347 Flag 026364 Snowman the author. Use them for stories, journals, port026348 Flower 026762 U.S.A. folios, and memories. - Melissa 026349 Heart 000397 Primary. . . . . . . . . . . 6.95 3.50 000396 Intermediate . . . . . . . 6.95 3.50 from beginning to end. The brightly covers come in four different colors, and the thirty-two blank white pages contain plenty of space for them to express their creativity! ­ elise EACH BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.49 1.25 026430 Blue 026765 Yellow 026432 Green 026435 Purple Bright Ideas Blank Storybooks (K-6) These are inexpensive, blank storybooks that are great for stimulating writing. Each 6" X 9" book has 16 pages and a heavy tagboard cover (white, so kids can design their own cover also). Yes, you could make these yourself if you had a saddle-stapler, posterboard, and paper, but they wouldn't look as nice! Ideal for building a book to display that poetry unit you're working on, for a short story, complete with illustrations, that can be written for others in the family, or a mini-scrapbook of digraphs using cut-outs from magazines. The size makes them right for little hands and makes a real book out of a small writing endeavor. 005753 Single . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.60 1.50 005752 Set of 10. . . . . . . . . 13.97 10.50 English / Writing 313

My Storybook (PK-2) These little books (5.5"x8.5") are great to create wonderful stories. The covers are made of tag stock and come in an assortment of colors (we will select one for you and send different colors if you order more than one) so your student can personalize it for themselves. There are 24 pages in each book and the inside allows for both drawing and writing. There are guide lines on every other page so students keep their handwriting neat. Let your student draw a picture and have them write about it, too. ~ Phyllis 038263 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.79 1.50

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

My Story Book - Primary (1-3) This book has 28 usable pages for budding writers to contain their stories. Tips are included in the front of the book to help them write a successful story. The cover has illustrations (that kids can color in) of bees in front of a journal while the inside features top and bottom guidelines with a dotted middle line, with the top half of each page left blank for illustrations. - Melissa 006826 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.99 1.75 Picture Story Pads (1-4) 053644 30-sheet pad . . . . . . . 1.99 053646 50-sheet pad . . . . . . . 2.99 053647 80-sheet pad . . . . . . . 2.75 My Picture Story Writing Journal (1-4) 054477 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.95 1.25 2.25 2.25 3.50

Post-it Super Sticky Story & Sketch Pad (1-3) If you're out of magnets for the fridge or are tired of poking holes in your walls to hang your child's drawings, consider this handy pad. The bottom of each sheet sports three writing lines with dotted mid-lines for kids to write about their drawing. The top 2/3rds of the page is left black for drawing or coloring. The back of each page is blank, and the top inch has the self-stick glue that post-it products are famous for. Kids can take this pad, draw a wonderful picture and write about it, then simply pull the sheet off the pad and stick it to any surface. 25 full-sized (8.5" x 11") white sheets are included. ~ Rachel 012128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.22 3.50 Create-a-Story Books (PK-AD) For a more permanent finished product, consider these hardcover blank books. Each contains 28 pages (14 sheets) of heavy-duty drawing paper that accepts pencil, crayon, watercolor, marker, or paint. Bound with durable, hardcover casings that open flat so they won't cramp your little illustrator's style. The outsides of these books are also blank, awaiting the young author's grabber cover illustration and title. 8 1/4" x 10 1/4." Compared to the hardcover blank books below, the quality of these is nicer, with a heavier, more durable cover and thicker paper. We bet you'll find lots of ideas for these. 019910 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.95 5.95 Hardcover White Blank Books (PK-AD) Budding authors and illustrators will love filling the pages of these books with their own stories! Each white hardcover book contains 28 blank, unlined pages (14 sheets), with the front and back covers left blank as well. These are economically priced and come in a range of different sizes. Students can use pencils, crayons, markers and other art materials to write and draw in their books. ~ Lisa EACH BOOK (except noted) . . 2.49 2.10 009936 5" x 5" 009960 8" x 6" 044908 8 ½ x 11" . . . . . . . . . 3.99 3.50 314 English / Writing

Grade 1 (5/8" rule): 019920 Pink 033152 Americana 033245 Holstein Print 033319 Pastel Tie-Dye Grade 2-3 (1/2" rule): 019921 Blue 033419 Stars 033470 Tiger Print 033234 Classic Tie-Dye Grade 3-4 (3/8" with baseline): 019922 Purple 033291 Old Glory Journals / Diaries 033503 Zebra Print 033374 Rainbow Tie-Dye My Illustrated Story Journals (PK-12) Grades 4+ (3/8 - no baseline): Inexpensive, paperbound, lined journals with 019923 Green a difference! The top half of every other 8½ x 033445 Stripes (U.S. Flag) 11 page is blank, allowing for illustrations or 033256 Leopard Print sketches. Note: PK-K book is unlined. 24 pg. 033467 Swirling Tie-Dye EACH JOURNAL . . . . . . . . . . 2.99 2.50 019919 No Lines (PK-K) All-Purpose Journal (1-3) 004620 Extra-Wide Lines (K-1) These journals are just waiting for you to give 019917 Wide Lines (K-2) them purpose. Blank top pages and ruled with a 019918 Narrow Ruled (3+) dotted midline, there are some small differences 000555 Narrow Ruled, no baseline (4+) between the grade levels. The younger grade journal has 48 pages and a half page blank-top My First Writing Journal (K) with slightly wider ruled lines, while the older With 1" ruled primary writing lines and a grade level contains 80 pages, slightly narrower blank-top page every second page, this is the ruled lines, and only a 1/3 of a page blank-top. way to start your children on the road of journal- These both have space for lists of words on the ing. The 64 pages should keep them going for a inside cover, but again, the older grade level while, and the journal itself lays quite flat since allows for about twice as many words. - Zach it is 11" x 8.5" (landscape format). This makes it 028510 Grades 1-2 . . . . . . . . 2.35 1.95 easier for younger children. Pb ~ Zach 028511 Grades 2-3 . . . . . . . . 2.60 2.05 028527 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.95 3.75 Writing Journal (1-AD) Smart Start Drawing & Storybook Journals This handy journal can be used for a variety (K-2) of purposes. It includes 64 lined pages, with These are great booklets filled with the popu- lines measuring 1/2". The inside covers include lar Smart Start paper. The Landscape journal a definition of the parts of speech, a list of 100 includes 48 pages of landscape-oriented paper often used words, and a list of 100 commonly with a blank 10" x 3.25" box on the top of each misspelled words. It is paperback, and the cover page for drawing and three 2.5cm writing lines is blue and decorated with colorful letters. with a dotted mid-line on bottom. The Portrait 033691 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.99 1.95 version has 48 pages of portrait-oriented paper with a blank 8" x 5" box on the top of each page Seasonal Journals (1-3) for drawing and five 1.5cm writing lines with a These are simple, cheap, 8.5" x 11" journals dotted mid-line on bottom. The books are per- for each season. The inside front cover lists fect for journaling, letting kids create their own season particular words while the inside back books, or just keeping track of all their stories cover has a list of "other helpful words" which and writings. 8.5" x 11." ~ Rachel remain the same in each journal, though space EACH BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.29 3.50 is provided for students to add more of their 026491 Landscape 026494 Portrait own. The top 1/3 of each page is blank, while the rest is ruled with 1/2" lines. 80 pgs. - Zach My Primary Journal (K-6) EACH JOURNAL . . . . . . . . . . . 2.60 2.05 This small-format (7" x 8½") blank journal has 028538 Fall 028539 Spring 29 blank pages and a cute color-in character 028541 Winter 028540 Summer on the tagstock front, along with room for your child's name. Each page is ruled with a dotted Advanced Journal Writing (1-7) This is a journal made specifically for journal midline and has lines for date and topic atop. 006821 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.99 1.75 writing. The book itself is ready to be written in, with the top 1/3 of every page blank and Writing Journals (1-4+) the bottom 2/3 of the pages lined. The inside Very inexpensive, 8" x 10½" lined journals for front cover has a list of frequently misspelled creative and journal writing. Spiral bound so words and the inside back cover is a place for they lay flat or fold back without the binding students to create their own word list. Although getting in the way. Journals have Zaner-Bloser a teaching guide was available at one time, at rulings for each grade level and are 50 pgs each. this time, only the student journal is available. Previously available in four colors, the publisher The overall idea is to get students journaling as now offers multiple cover style choices - swirly an aid in developing their literacy skills. ~ Zach colored, patriotic, animal print, or tie-dye! 028507 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.45 2.95 EACH JOURNAL . . . . . . . . . . . 3.99 3.25 See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

Blank Comic Book (PK-5) Comic books or graphic novels are becoming more and more mainstream as a teaching tool. Maybe your child wants to try their hand at being a comic book artist? Each page of this 8-page blank comic book features frames for kids to fill in with their imaginative drawings. Some frames are just rectangles while others are more exciting. A simple idea with many applications. The cover is the same white paper as the pages. ~ Sara 052482 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.99 1.50

My Invisible Diary Sets (K-10) This is the perfect gift for kids and teenagers who want to keep their diary secret. The 240page diary locks securely (and comes with two keys), but that's not the only thing keeping the words safe. Two invisible ink pens are included and the only way you can read what they write is by using the included mini UV light, which comes with replaceable batteries. All these items can be stored in a reusable 6.5" x 7" keepsake box. The box and diary come in a variety of themes; all are colorful and will let your child enjoy writing secret notes and messages. EACH BELOW. . . . . . . . . . . . 24.99 19.95 042673 Baby Deer 042674 Castle 042675 Degas Dancer 042676 Dragon EACH BELOW. . . . . . . . . . . . 19.95 16.50 048108 Fairy 048109 Firebird 048110 Princess Pea My Listography (3-6) Sometimes the best way to get those creative juices flowing is to make lists, but if writer's block has you at a standstill for even coming up with list ideas, this "journal" is just the thing you need. It includes 50 list generating topics like jobs you might like to try someday, favorite books, people you would like to meet, times you got in the most trouble, favorite snacks/treats, places you would like to visit, favorite places to eat, and much more. There is one lined page per topic for journal entries. Measures 8" x 7."120 pgs. -Enh 044482 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.95 10.50 Antique Map Travel Journal (3-AD) Wow, this journal is really stunning! The outside cover features an antique world map with a shimmery foil look. The journal pages are light blue with muted maps and drawings framing the edges. Designed to record your travel adventures, there are six pages to record the details of each trip. Use the headings and prompts to record your date of departure, lodging/accommodations, transportation and travel companions, what you saw, who you met, what you did, what you heard, what you ate, your experiences, important findings and more. A handful of inspirational quotes on travel are sprinkled throughout the pages, and a striking black ribbon marker holds your place until your next entry. Pb, 220 pgs, 5 ¾" x 8." ~ Rachel P. 012021 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.99 4.95 COMMunICATIOn SKILLS The Art of Conversation Games (PK-AD) Nothing is more basic to interpersonal relationships than conversing with another person. But in this age of Ipods, cell phones, and other personal entertainment devices, opportunities for conversation are fewer. The ability to converse easily with another person may not come as naturally as it once did. The Art of Conversation has been designed to improve conversational skills. It has been used successfully in a wide variety of settings: family get-togethers, business training meetings, church groups, therapeutic counseling sessions, team building exercises, school classes, even dates for Mom and Dad!

The game consists of 100 cards with 3 questions on each; questions on each card are related to the same topic, but vary in depth so that players of different ages and ability levels can all participate at the same time. If you want to focus more on the kids, The Art of Children's Conversation includes topics more relevant to their life experiences. This one includes two questions on each of the 100 cards, and helps children speak confidently and well, learn to express their thoughts and listen to the ideas of others, and develop compassion and interest in others. So get the family and friends together and enjoy The Art of Conversation. And if you're ever in Kangaroo Flat, Australia (no foolin'), say "Hi" to Louise, the game's designer. ~ Bob EACH GAME. . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.95 12.95 047920 Art of Conversation 047921 Children's Conversation 054454 Christian Conversation

Switched-On Schoolhouse Essentials of Communication (7-AD) This one-semester Switched-On software course from Alpha Omega teaches the same topics found in the LIFEPACs (Communication Foundations, Language Characteristics, Interpersonal Relationships, Understanding Groups, and Presenting & Interpreting Public Messages) but includes additional standard Switched-On Schoolhouse features like videos, animations, games, advanced lesson planning, automatic grading, and record-keeping. System requirements: Windows XP (Service Pack 3), Vista or Windows 7. 001158 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54.95 49.46 Secrets of Great Communicators (9-AD) "Eighty-five percent of audience members cannot remember the main point of a speech immediately after hearing it." This statement made by Jeff Myers in the DVD portion of this program is shocking. How can you be a great communicator if most of your audience doesn't even remember what you said? Jeff Myers shares six steps to help you become a great public speaker and overcome that statistic in this program. The kit includes a student text, a 6-session DVD series, and a CD-ROM teaching guide for a group setting. Beginning with lessons on shaping the student himself, he shares the effect that the ability to speak can have on one's entire life and helps students conquer their fear of public speaking. He then moves on to teach the characteristics that shape a great speech: gaining maximum impact, reaching the heart of the audience, delivering the talk with confidence, and tips for an unforgettable speech. Each step consists of an interesting book lesson and a 15-30 minute DVD segment. Every lesson begins with a story of a great communicator from history including Billy Graham, Abraham Lincoln, and Winston Churchill. You then turn to your TV to learn from Jeff, via DVD, the heart of each lesson. Jeff animatedly shares stories and advice as he talks you through each step. Pages in the book correspond to his lecture so you can follow along and take away the important points. The next section reviews the points Jeff shared in the DVD and goes in-depth with each as it provides specific insight and encouragement to help you apply each lesson to your own life and communication. Students are faced with thoughtful questions to answer in response to each strategy and provided with helpful outlines and worksheets in the personal application section of each lesson. Each chapter ends with a speech project, complete with a helpful outline, to enable you to incorporate the skills just learned into your public speaking. Outlines for additional types of speaking, such as introducing a speaker, making a presentation to one person, giving a eulogy, and other instances are provided in the back. Quotes from Jeff and famous people throughout history adorn each page to offer additional insight and tips. Please note that student texts are also available separately for multiple students. ~ Steph 027113 Set w/ DVDs . . . . . . 64.99 41.95 014433 Student Text only . . 17.99 11.75

Communication! A Conversation Tool to Get the Family Talking (PK-AD) 053049 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.95 Communication and Interpersonal Relationships (7-AD) Oh, that the instruction contained in this book was just "common sense!" Dave Marks, very politely, and often humorously, takes students through a number of tasks and challenges with the goal of revealing to (and gently instructing) them on better ways to communicate. He addresses everything from eye contact to "How to Reduce Aggression." The chapter on "How to Disagree" is my particular favorite. Even if your children have plenty of social contact and you feel they don't need this book, the small investment in time and money will be well worth the social advice here. If they incorporate even a portion of what they learn here into their personal encounters, the rewards will be tremendous. Urging the development of pleasant and productive relationships, the book has informative chapters on eye contact, verbal reinforcement, physical reinforcement, meeting people, understanding other people's point of view, not being boring, and more. Specific exercises students can practice to strengthen these skills are given, and the books bring to the surface common mistakes people make when dealing with others. The tips for better communication, making good first impressions, and having pleasant, purposeful conversations are great for all ages. 66 pgs, pb. 008770 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.00 16.95

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

English / Writing

315

Advanced Communication Series (10+) The three DVDs in this set from the Institute for Excellence in Writing aim to help upper high school and college students improve their communications and information processing skills. Each DVD is 90 to 100 minutes long and is accompanied by a booklet containing models, exercises, and samples. DVD 1 - Persuasive Writing and Speaking Covers planning and writing a persuasive paper. Beginning with selection of a topic, the focus is on moving the reader or listener to your point of view. The first half of the tape deals primarily with a paper, while the second half coaches the student on public speaking techniques. DVD 2 - Advanced Note Taking Speaker Andrew Pudewa demonstrates a flexible "stick and branch" approach to note taking. He believes this is a more effective method of understanding complicated ideas taken from text or lectures. Mastering this technique can make a big difference in school and work performance. DVD 3 - Power Tips for Planning and Writing a College Level Paper A basic model is presented which can be adapted to a variety of needs. The author also provides a method for identifying the preferences of the teacher and modifying the writing style to appeal to the teacher. 016673 3-DVD Set. . . . . . . . . . 69.00 Listening Skills Listen! Hear! (1-6) The ability to listen with understanding is a major key to educational success. The activities in this workbook are designed as teaching tools to build listening skills of students. The activities in each book get progressively harder to improve concentration levels and listening vocabulary. Each book includes 12 exercises, each involving ten different directions. Students receive a picture or chart of some kind and the teacher reads directions on specific things the student should draw on the picture. Graphs are included in each workbook to chart the success a child is making in following the 10 verbal directions for each exercise. A great way to develop listening skills. ~ Rachel S. 013934 Grades 1-2 . . . . . . . . 7.95 6.25 013935 Grades 3-4 . . . . . . . . 7.95 6.25 Listen, Remember, and Do (2-5) If your children aren't hard of hearing, just hard of listening, they may need to practice that ability. Many situations in life require students to be able to follow oral directions. Children who are excessively visual and very non-auditory may need a little encouragement to develop their auditory skills. Listening exercises also can help improve short-term memory, as children must concentrate to recall instructions. In this series, children must pay attention as you give oral directions, then use their retention powers to complete the exercises. Direction script to be read by the teacher is separate from the reproducible student worksheets. Nice variety of formats and responses. 004239 Grades 3-4 . . . . . . . . 7.99 6.50 004241 Grades 4-5 . . . . . . . . 7.99 6.50 316 English / Writing

Public Speaking Tongue Twister Cards (set of 54) (K-AD) 053752 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.50 8.50 Beginning Public Speaking (K-6) Whenever you identify yourself as a Christian, you are a communicator for Christ. Teresa Moon has made it her life message and ministry to equip young people to be effective communicators for Christ. Beginning Public Speaking is the first step. Designed for elementary students, this material provides everything needed for an introduction to public speaking: lesson plans, assignments, tests, discussion materials and activities. If the teacher is not an experienced public communicator herself (or himself) ­ not to worry! The two DVDs provide examples of effective speeches as well as instruction and interactive activities. There are also some humorous examples of what not to do. While I might wish for a more professional production, the enthusiasm of the young instructors is contagious. The Teacher's Edition provides lessons plans for ten class meetings (usually 1.5 ­ 2 hrs. in length). Using the DVDs as a sort of "spine" for these meetings, the lesson plans alternate between watching the DVD, class discussions and activities, watching sample speech presentations, and having the class participants prepare, give, and evaluate their own presentations. Each class meeting concludes with an assignment ­ usually preparing a new type of speech. The Student Workpack, which is not reproducible, includes activity worksheets, critique sheets, and event specifics for the following different types of speeches: impromptu, expository, humorous, and extemporaneous speaking; dramatic and humorous interpretations; and persuasive oratory. In addition to the lesson plans, the Teacher's Edition includes all material from the Student Workpack plus directions and needed materials for the activities. For instance, the Teacher's Edition provides three pages of impromptu speaking topics that the teacher copies and cuts out so students can draw from the pile and then speak on the selected topics. The Complete Package includes the DVDs, Student Workpack, and Teacher's Edition. ~ Janice 045416 2-DVD Package . . . . 99.95 93.95 045417 Student Workpack . . 15.00 12.95 045418 Teacher's Edition . . . 17.00 14.95 BGPBSP Complete Package 131.95 115.95 How to Give a Presentation (4-6) Help your children feel more at ease with class presentations with this workbook! The three types of speeches (informative, demonstrative, and persuasive) are presented and discussed, as well as ways of giving illustrated talks and multimedia presentations. Techniques of debating are also touched on. The book starts out by giving some teaching suggestions to help you present this subject to your children. The reproducible worksheets walks you step-by-step through planning your speech, which includes picking and researching your topic, outlining your speech, writing the introduction, body, and conclusion, and then finally revising and editing. Then you'll practice your speech and deliver it for a grade (make sure your child follows all the helpful tips the book suggests). Assessment

rubrics and student evaluation worksheets are included to help you in your grading. Next this workbook has you work on interviews, debating, storytelling, impromptu presentations, using the computer in your presentation, Power Point Presentations, science fair presentations, poster presentations, and how to do a research presentation. The worksheets have helpful charts, examples, speech starters, and fill-in-the-blank portions that will assist them in learning how to prepare an actual speech that they will actually present! Of course, as time goes on, your child won't need to go through all these steps to write a speech, but this is a great starting point to prepare them for upper-level learning (especially at college) where speeches and presentations occur more frequently! Black-and-white illustrations, 64 pgs, pb. - elise 014730 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.99 9.50 Teaching Public Speaking: A Complete Course (4-8) Of all the subjects you could teach in a homeschool co-op, public speaking may be one of the best. Giving a speech to your family is one thing, but giving a speech to your peers is another thing altogether. Trust me, as a homeschool graduate I struggled and fought for an `A-' in my college speech class, blushing the entire time! All right, maybe I've convinced you but you can't think of a volunteer to teach a speech class and you think "I can't do this!" Sure you can. All you need is this very practical and helpful guide by Ruth Parsons, Ph.D. and S.J. Henderson, which will not only guide you through teaching a speech class, but will show you how to enjoy it as well! The guide includes 15 lessons (called sessions). Each session has a different focus and is designed to be done in one class meeting. The authors suggest that you may fit the course into one year if you meet bi-monthly and take winter and spring breaks. Sessions include everything you need to facilitate a class, including notes for the teacher, a detailed lesson description, reproducible student handouts, reproducible evaluation forms, and even some scripted portions you can use to teach the class. The progress is gradual and very common-sense. The first few sessions focus not on speeches, but on polite social speaking including introducing people to one another, talking on the phone, and making conversation. From there, students get comfortable reading poetry and prose aloud while adding dramatic interpretation. Finally, the first speech (one using a white board) is introduced to students. At this point in the course, a speech will be introduced at the end of one class so students can prepare their speech and notes as homework and come to the next session prepared to give the speech. Speeches performed in this course include a white board speech, demonstration speech, oral report, persuasive speech, and debate. For their final speech (their "graduation" speech), students may choose to do either a persuasive speech or an oral report, and family and friends can be invited . Although not necessary, the guide recommends video taping the speeches each session so students can "see" themselves speaking and discover ways to improve their speaking. The lessons "as is" are intended for students in upper elementary and middle school, but with some adjustment you

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

could include both older and younger students. There are several things I really like about this guide. First of all, the progression from basic social speech to formal speeches is done in "baby steps." I love the way students move from social speaking to speeches while incorporating games like Twenty Questions and Pictionary as well as short "circle times" which get them comfortable speaking in a group situation. Second, it's well-organized from the reproducible student handouts to the teacher's notes and lesson outline. Thirdly, skills such as being a polite audience are also taught. While I would recommend choosing a good text on actual speech writing (to fill in any gaps that won't be covered on a student handout) for the students, I would strongly recommend using this guide to teach a speech class. I think you may enjoy it as much as the students will! ­ Jess 040941 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.99 19.50 Public Speaking for Kids (4-8) Take my word for it; if your children plan to attend college, be sure they have some experience with public speaking before they go. Colleges often require a speech course for the majority of their majors. Although my children seem natural and relaxed when conversing with adults, they can become nervous in front of an audience. One of my daughters has an extremely soft voice that just will not project (it's funny to hear her try to yell!). Bottom line - do something to give your children the experience they will need. This unit covers not only the writing and presentation of a speech, but all the things to consider besides; appearance, facial expressions, eye contact, body language, using your voice correctly, and many more. The student listens to and evaluates other speeches, attending to particular details. A "Putting It Into Practice" section includes information and practice for a variety of other specific speaking forms like choral speaking, oral description, debate, radio shows, campaign presentations, and others. It also contains some cut-out topic cards for extemporaneous speaking. The last section of the book requires the student to develop talks about interesting places in their community (a sort of guided tour around town) as a culminating activity to the unit. Student worksheets are reproducible for your students' use. 006740 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.95 10.50 Public Speaking: A Student Guide (4-8) Take the "eek!" out of public speaking with this friendly, laid-back approach. The better the speaker that you would like to become, the more experience you will likely have to get before you truly feel comfortable presenting to an audience. This slim volume takes a "this is fun" approach to public speaking and is packed with ideas of how to make your speech fun for you and your audience. Although presented from the angle of a student presenting the common "oral report", the techniques and ideas shared are just as easily applicable to any kind of presentation. In nine short chapters, students will learn to effectively organize, write an attention-grabbing opener, a satisfying close, how to effectively make and use visual aids, get your audience involved, and perform your speech effortlessly (well, at least so it appears so!). Tips on types of visual aids as well as appeal-

ing to your audience's other senses is offered, and advice is also shared on how to dress, how to calm yourself down, and using eye contact, gestures, and smiles. The last chapters give information on other types of reports that one may be asked to present, such as science reports or book reports, as well as a sample worksheet to help students organize their thoughts before they begin. This is not a workbook however, but a non-consumable student resource. - Jess 017554 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.95 8.50

How to Prepare and Give a Speech (5-8) Giving a speech can be a scary, stressful ordeal. This consumable, reproducible workbook teaches strategies and techniques that will make public speaking fun and easy. The readings and exercises in the book can be used as class projects or as enrichment activities for individuals. Topics covered include stage fright, choosing a topic, organization, interviewing, and visual aids. Each topic is a chapter, and includes instructions, questions for consideration, and activities such as crossword puzzles or word searches to check understanding. An oral presentation is recommended for many of the chapters. Students will be taught the skills necessary to give a speech, present/accept an award, give a eulogy, discuss, debate, and even Art of Story Telling and Student Study Guides improvise. Answers are provided for the activity (7-12) sheets and consideration questions. ~ Rachel S. I rarely pick up a book and feel convinced that 016200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.99 9.50 it has the power to change lives dramatically, but this book is in that category. Written to help you and your children become storytellSpeech Boot Camp DVD (6-12) Taught by a master! We're all familiar with ers, the book also has the potential to bring the concept of military boot camps ­ orienta- families together, develop writing skills, boost tion, discipline, and training. "Boot Camp" personal self-confidence, and help alleviate seems just the right term to apply to this series of public speaking fears. The author, John Walsh, speech training videos. Conducted by Andrew begins by sharing his struggles with stuttering Pudewa ­ the master communicator behind the and his tremendous fear of talking to anyone, let Institute for Excellence in Writing seminars ­ alone attempting public speaking. He explains these DVDs contain a series of lectures by Mr. how God called him and equipped him, and he Pudewa followed by example speeches given by encourages you to answer God's call as well, the kids attending his personally delivered semi- whatever that might be. The text walks you nars. The Boot Camp experience is four intense through a series of gradual steps designed to sessions that cover the general characteristics of develop your skills as a storyteller. According to good speaking as well as the specifics for orga- the author, today's listeners are "story thinkers", nizing, planning, and delivering various types of those who respond to and remember informaspeeches. Introductory, narrative, descriptive, tion better that is presented in story format. and persuasive speeches are covered. A down- Whether you are a novice or have been public loadable ebook provides reproducible handouts speaking for years, the author makes the process for "trainees" and lesson plans (for either a four- comfortable and easy for you, telling you where day intensive or nine-week course) with evalu- to find your stories, explaining the initial reading and practicing steps, and teaching you a variety ation forms for the parent/facilitator. ~ Janice 047502 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59.00 of techniques to become a master storyteller. After you are guided through the 14 steps you are ready to share your first story with a practice Painless Speaking (6-12) Hmmm... I think I should have given this to audience. Before you jump in, the author recmy husband's best man at some point before ommends that you begin by reading the book that wedding toast - talk about a speech experi- front to back to gain a foundation of understandence that was as "painful" for the audience as it ing in storytelling. After completing this initial was for the speaker! The goal of this book is to reading, you should then read through the mateget you to a "painless" level of speaking. This is rial again, completing each chapter's suggested one of the most complete, well-rounded speech activities to give you the practical experience books I've seen. Five chapters cover voice, with each step that is taught. Please note that communication, reading aloud, composing a this book will be far more effective if done in a speech, and practicing and performing your group setting, as most activities are group based. speech. In the first two chapters, it goes into A great introductory course for public speaking some detail on the human voice and speech or a smart pre-requisite for a story writing course. production, as well as peculiarities of our lan- Just as we begin life by learning to speak before guage, cultural cues, modes of communication, learning to write, this text will develop the ability speaking etiquette, and the art of conversation. for oral expression of stories and help students to Once this groundwork has been laid, we launch internalize a grasp of language, (continued...) English / Writing 317

into the last three chapters, which go into depth on the topics of starting out your speech "career" by learning how to read aloud, how text generates meaning, understanding stresses and pauses, speech genres, and how to prepare to read aloud. Chapters four and five guide the student through writing their own speech by choosing a genre and topic; researching and writing; composing, refining, practicing, delivering, and evaluating their speech; and even "winging it" if necessary. Throughout the chapters, definitions are listed, hints and helpful websites are offered and end-of-chapter questions and activities are listed. The book is designed as a non-consumable resource; questions should be answered on a separate paper. I'm impressed at the level of depth the book goes into, dissecting spoken fragments, etiquette, details of researching and writing a speech, how to watch your audience for feedback, how to deal with interruptions and much, much more! Appendices include a variety of graphic organizers to aid in the student's research and writing, as well as a variety of famous speeches. Educate and prepare yourself thoroughly for those inevitable speeches and avoid the pain! - Jess 028021 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.99 8.25

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

plot, structure, characterization, and many other elements needed for good writing. Although The Art of Storytelling is also excellent as a stand-alone resource, you can use it as the basis for a one-semester course in public speaking/storytelling/communication skills with the addition of the Creative Communication Skills Study Guides. Each guide corresponds with several chapters of The Art of Storytelling, which is used as a textbook. Guides contain reading assignments from the text, activities based on the text, practice assignments, chapter quizzes and tests. Answers to the guide worksheets, quizzes and tests are found in the Score Key but no teacher evaluation is included in the key for the practice activities (which are more hands-on speaking activities). The guides and answer key are all available individually, or in a set that contains all six guides and the answer key. ~ Caryl/Deanne 047623 Art of Storytelling . . 16.99 10.95 EACH GUIDE/KEY . . . . . . . . . . . 2.65 047503 Guide 1 047506 Guide 4 047504 Guide 2 047507 Guide 5 047505 Guide 3 047508 Guide 6 047509 Score Key 047511 Set of 6 Guides & Key18.55 17.95 Great Speeches for Better Speaking (8-AD) Become a better public speaker by studying-- and listening to--six great American speeches from the 20th century with this book and CD set. More an in-depth analysis of particular speeches than a "how to" book, each chapter focuses on a particular speech in the context of a theme. Each chapter presents the speech in "bite sized" pieces, followed by an analysis of the techniques used to persuade and move the audience. Biographical information about each speaker and historical background information are also given to help place the speech in context. You can listen to the speeches as you study them, as two audio CDs are included, featuring all six of the speeches in their entirety. The six speeches studied are Ronald Reagan's Space Shuttle Challenger Address, Edward M. Kennedy's "Faith and Country, Tolerance and Truth in America", Douglas MacArthur's Thayer Award Acceptance Address, John F. Kennedy's Inaugural Address, Barbara Jordan's Statement on the Articles of Impeachment, and Mary Fisher's 1992 Republican National Convention Address. An appendix includes transcripts of the speeches in their entirety, a glossary, and list of references. 209 pgs, pb. ~ Lisa 047609 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.95 13.95 Sound Speech: Public Speaking & Communication Studies (9-12) This one-semester course includes discussions of the communication process, audience analysis, and public speaking guidelines. Speaking projects include introduction, interview, demonstration, declamation, informational, devotional, and persuasive speeches. 318 English / Writing

The course features special chapters on topic choice, research, organization, and communication in the workplace. Teacher's Edition contains reduced student text, lesson plans, and suggested activities, and it is designed for those without training in public speaking. 127498 Student Text . . . . . . . . 33.33 180125 Teacher Edition . . . . . . 42.22 Debate Jeub's Complete Guide to Speech and Debate (PK-12) The accent is on "complete" here, as this book covers all topics of speaking and debate, from a multitude of ways to improve the skill of the participants to ideas for contests and clubs for the organizers. The author, Chris Jeub, assumes that you are a absolute novice. The book provides tips on speech for preschoolers all the way through twelfth grade. It is broken into eight chapters covering different age groups and experience levels. Chapter 1 discusses the importance of communication in the home and gives examples of activities that promote good communication skills at a early age. Chapter 2 focuses on speakers 12-18 years old. It describes such speaking skills and aspects as interpretation, oratory, speaking with limited preparation, debate, persuasive and informative speeches. It also discusses debating skills and ways to implement them with your children. In Chapter 3 Jeub goes into more detail on each type of speech tournament and gives examples of topics as well as the normal form of a speech. As usual, he brings it down to earth so it makes sense. The next chapter explains the basics of debate, how to organize evidence, crossexamination and rebuttal. In Chapter 5 Jeub introduces a new form of debate called value debate; it is not policies that are debated, but values such as freedom, justice, life, family, truth, and safety. It explains how speakers need to have evidence for the values they choose to back up and how to express them properly. This chapter also focuses on the Christian etiquette students should display while debating. He discusses each speech in the round, going over the affirmative and negative teams' responsibilities. Chapter 6 explains how to judge a speech and debate tournament, giving ideas on how to score each speaker and how to decide if the affirmative or negative team won. A small section is given for Christian evaluation in this section. In Chapter 7 Jeub goes through the in's and out's of running a speech and debate tournament, from how to record the rank and points of the contestants to an example schedule of the tournament. He also explains how to match up teams in rounds. The last chapter explains the basics of creating a speech and debate club. Each chapter includes vocabulary words, scripture memorization ideas, and review questions and activites. Discussion questions are also included, which prompt students to discuss things with their parents or peers (but not necessarily give a speech on them). An appendix lists good Christan books on the subject that can be used for interpretation. The information in this book is presented in a very helpful and easy to read manner to appeal to students. 165 pages, non-consumable. ~ Zach Sanderson 017141 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.95 15.95

Debating in the Middle Grades (5-8) Though not as intensive as some of the other books we carry on the subject, this book provides a good introduction if you're looking to dip your toe into debate. The first half of the book is a teacher section that goes over the general format of debate and gives ideas for instruction. Reproducible sheets that explain the various forms of debate, Bloom's Taxonomy, research schemes, a debate flowchart, and more are included. There's also a "simulation" section which kind of walks you through a simple debate and shows how things are run and arguments are presented. A grading rubric is provided in case teachers want to learn how to grade debates appropriately. The following student section includes some of the same basic information, with reproducible sheets that discuss issues like why debating is important, different kinds of debates, characteristics of a good debater, a debate checklist, a research sheet, and various graphic organizers and planning sheets to help walk students through a debate. The back of the book provides a list of about 120 debate topics from various fields of interest, as well as plenty of room to list out topics of your own. This book by Jim McAlpine, Betty Weincek, Sue Jeweler, and Marion Finkbinder is a great, simple introduction to the debate process and how to apply strategies to a variety of debate activities and formats. 80 pgs, pb. ~Rachel 047309 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.95 11.95 Drama Drama School (1-6) Whether your child is a budding actor, a set builder, a makeup artist, a costume designer, a prop maker (or all of the above!), this book provides plenty of ideas for putting on a great play. Each two-page spread is devoted to a particular topic, with colorful illustrations of children creatively putting the ideas to use. Some of the topics covered are: A History of Drama, Warm Up, Puppets, Costumes, Scenery and Props, Makeup, Rehearsals, and Making a Movie. Clear "how to" instructions and diagrams accompany the hands-on projects. You'll learn how to build a puppet theater, break a fall when acting, build props out of household materials, create costumes and masks, record your own radio play (with sound effects), film a silent movie, and much more. A glossary and Drama School Certificate are located in the back. By Mick Manning and Brita Granstrom. 48 pgs, pb. ~ Lisa 047704 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.95 7.50 Readers' Theater (1-6) So you think that you would like to include drama in your classroom, but you don't have the time or money and it's just not practical for you to stage your own productions? This doesn't mean that you have to lose out on the benefits of dramatic readings and scripts. These books don't provide full productions, but they do offer you a way to incorporate drama without the work of making costumes, sets, and memorizing scripts. Instead, a student or group of students receives their copy of the script and highlights all of their lines (much as they would in an actual performance) and practices reading

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

them expressively, including appropriate voices and expressions. Although students could go through the effort of memorizing the lines, these are just as effective (and less stressful!) used as dramatic readings. Each of these books provides age appropriate stories for kids to present through reading. Background information is provided for you to share with the students beforehand, as are suggestions for "staging," additional research and activities that relate to the story, and vocabulary from the story for you to introduce. Next is the actual script, which can be copied and distributed to the students. After the story are a few pages of related activities, such as coloring, writing, matching, and other fun worksheets. Assuming my sample copy is representative of the group, there are around 15 scripts provided in each book. Several different genres are enlisted for a variety of readings, including non-fiction, fiction, myths, folk tales like "The Little Red Hen" and "The Three Little Pigs," classics like Romeo and Juliet, and scripts centering around actual people from history like John Chapman and George Washington Carver. You can use these with a single student, include several different children, or even take a role yourself so the whole family can become better dramatic readers. Scripts and activities are reproducible, and answers to the activity questions are included. - Melissa EACH BOOK BELOW . . . . . . 17.99 12.50 020814 Level 1 020816 Level 3 020815 Level 2 020817 Level 4 EACH BOOK BELOW . . . . . . 16.99 11.50 020818 Level 5 020819 Level 6 Acting & Theatre (6-AD) A great introduction to the world of acting and the theatre. This colorful book is packed full of illustrations, photographs, and information on just about every aspect of theatre. It contains information on acting tips, improvisation, building characters, lines, designing sets, costumes and make-up, props, sound and lighting, musicals, films and television, the history of theatre, playwrights, and much more. Suggestions are even included on how to break into the world of theatre! A good overall look at drama. ~ Megan 033475 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.99 6.95 Drama (7-12) This resource provides a complete guide to drama - both serious and comic, plays and movies, classic and modern. It is divided into four sections, each with a different objective. The first provides an introduction to drama, including the origin of drama and an evaluation of different drama students have been exposed to. Here students learn about the rich history of Western and non-Western drama, the special qualities of live drama, and different styles of drama. The second section focuses on the elements of drama, and students will learn related concepts and vocabulary, use these concepts to analyze contemporary drama, and complete creative activities to explore these same concepts. In the third section, students learn to appreciate plays as literature by developing the skills necessary to enjoy play scripts, exposing

them to essential concepts of drama as literature, and introducing them to the five different genres of drama - tragedy, melodrama, comedy, satire, and farce. The last section covers the elements of play production, from the different people and roles involved to stage a production to having students "try out" different production jobs. Each chapter begins with an information page with teacher notes, and then the rest of the chapter is written directly to the student. Topics are introduced by reading passages and interesting explanations, and activities and exercises help students process the information and test their understanding. 119 pgs. - Melissa 022380 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.00 19.95 TEChnICAL SKILLS Combined Grammar, usage, Mechanics These materials offer a complete and comprehensive coverage of all three elements - grammar (i.e. parts of speech, complete sentences), usage (i.e. homophones, figures of speech, proper word choice to convey meaning), and mechanics (i.e. punctuation, capitalization). Easy Grammar Series (2-12) "I'm understanding grammar for the first time in my life!" This is the testimony of many homeschooling moms when they use Easy Grammar with their students. Students start by learning a list of prepositions. Then, by identifying and crossing out prepositions and prepositional phrases, students can see the core of each sentence. Concepts are presented in small, understandable increments, followed by plenty of practice. Each grade level book (teacher book) is a complete grammar course with ample, effective teaching strategies, workbook pages, and assessments (tests) all between two covers. It's convenient and takes no teacher preparation time. It's easy to understand why everybody wins with this amazing grammar program. Students learn grammar completely and thoroughly through easy-to-understand teaching segments and lots of enjoyable practice and can do much of the work independently. Teachers/moms are not burdened with hefty prep demands. Correcting/grading is easy, requiring a minimum of teacher time. The workbook pages and tests are reproducible for families, although you will probably want to purchase the student workbooks because of the sheer volume of copying involved (200-300+ pages). Tests can be reproduced from the teacher book, or buy the test booklet. Revised in 2007, these effective and userfriendly courses are even better. The program retains all of its strong characteristics providing complete coverage of parts of speech, types of sentences, capitalization, and punctuation. Books are now grade specific (starting in grade 3) with pre- and post-assessments and sentence writing units added to each level. Workbooks include the workbook pages (also included in the teacher's book), the rules pages/teaching segments, and a writing section. The test booklets contain copies of all of the tests including both the pre- and post-assessment tests for the grade level. Grade 3 (revision of former grades 3-4) introduces 28 prepositions and the process of deleting prepositional phrases. Grade 4 (revi-

sion of former grades 4-5) introduces 40 prepositions. The sentence writing units for grades 3 and 4 are similar, covering items in a series and appositives. Grade 5 (a new text), Grade 6 (revision of former grades 5-6), and the revised Easy Grammar Plus (grades 7-12) each introduce 53 prepositions. The writing units in both grades 5 & 6 cover appositives, semicolon use, and compound sentences, and grade 6 continues with subordinate clauses and introductory participial phrases. The Plus course now includes expanded coverage of independent and dependent clauses. The revised version includes all of the original material with the writing and assessment additions. Also included in each teacher book is a Daily Grams "sampler" ­ the first ten days from the same grade Daily Grams. In case you're wondering, it is possible to use an older teacher book with a new student workbook. The student book will include the new writing exercises without answers, but all of the other workbook answers are available from the older teacher books. Since the pre/post assessments are only available in the new teacher book (w/ answers) or the test booklet (w/o answers), an older teacher book will be missing those items. The Easy Grammar: Grade 2 Daily Guided Teaching and Review is a revision of Daily Guided Teaching and Review (Daily Grams) 2/3 and contains some material from the previous book along with new material. It is organized like the Daily Grams with daily worksheets; however, unlike the Daily Grams, which are solely practice worksheets, these worksheets also contain brief, introductory grammatical instruction. As such, they are considered the first of the Easy Grammar series rather than part of the Daily Grams series. There is no test booklet for this level. ~ Janice 037833 2 Teacher Edition . . 24.95 19.45 037832 2 Student Workbook 12.95 10.45 037834 3 Teacher Edition . . 27.95 21.85 037835 3 Test Booklet . . . . . . 4.95 3.85 037836 3 Student Workbook 13.95 10.85 037837 4 Teacher Edition . . 27.95 21.85 037838 4 Test Booklet . . . . . . 4.95 3.85 037839 4 Student Workbook 13.95 10.85 037840 5 Teacher Edition . . 32.95 25.85 037841 5 Test Booklet . . . . . . 4.95 3.85 037842 5 Student Workbook 13.95 10.85 037843 6 Teacher Edition . . 32.95 25.85 037844 6 Test Booklet . . . . . . 4.95 3.85 037845 6 Student Workbook 13.95 10.85 037846 7-12 (Plus) Tchr Ed. 32.95 25.85 037847 7-12 (Plus) Test Bklet 4.95 3.85 037848 7-12 (Plus) St Wkbk 13.95 10.85 Easy Grammar Ultimate Series (8-12) Now there's finally an answer to the question "What do I use after Easy Grammar Plus?" The Ultimate Series looks like Daily Grams but functions as a continuation to the instruction and mastery found in Easy Grammar. Just like Daily Grams, the course is divided into 180 daily 10 minute lessons but these are teaching lessons as well as review lessons. Each of these lessons include the familiar capitalization, punctuation and sentence combining exercises. The remaining two exercises per lesson vary. Content includes parts of speech, phrases/clauses, analogies, sentence fragments/run-ons, prefixes/suffixes/roots, dictionary, spelling, simple/compound/complex sentences. In (continued...) English / Writing 319

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

each daily lesson there is instruction associated with at least one of the exercises. Students are to read and discuss the instruction, complete the exercises, and participate in a discussion of the answers. Consistent with mastery learning, concepts are introduced, expanded and reviewed. The teacher book includes reproducible student pages with answers in the back. The student book is not reproducible and includes only the student pages. ~ Janice EACH TEACHER BOOK . . . . . 24.95 19.45 EACH STUDENT WRKBK . . . . 12.95 10.45 EACH TEST BKLT . . . . . . . . . . 4.95 3.85 Workbook Teacher Tests 003083 Grade 8 003091 002185 Grade 9 002187 054590 003011 Grade 10 014292 054587 003012 Grade 11 003078 054588 003080 Grade 12 003082 054589 Grammar Handbook (6-12) Just grammar, usage, and mechanics, please. That's what this straight-forward course provides. Coverage is thorough and comprehensive; presentation is color-coded and pleasing to the eye; and exercises are designed as quickchecks and reinforcement. Coverage includes parts of speech, basic sentence parts, phrases/ clauses, effective sentences, verb usage, pronoun usage, agreement, using modifiers, problems in usage, capitalization, and punctuation. Instruction (with rules stated clearly) is in small chunks with numerous examples followed by two sets of practice exercises. Suggestions for speaking and writing applications accompany the practice sets. There is no diagramming but color-coded highlighting serves much the same purpose allowing the student to see clearly what "role" each word is playing in a sentence. Cumulative Reviews are periodic. The Grammar Handbook is non-consumable so the student will need to be prepared to write his answers on a separate piece of paper. This is a grammar-only course and would make an excellent add-on to a literature/writing course or as a refresher for standardized (or ACT/SAT) testing. A Writer's Resource section in the back of the book briefly reviews the writing process and forms of writing. Another end-of-the-book resource provides help for ESL learners. Homeschool Bundle includes the hardback Grammar Handbook and the Grammar Handbook Answer Key (answers to all practice exercises and cumulative reviews). This series is similar to the grammar portion of another series from Prentice-Hall ­ Writing and Grammar. In fact, the instructional sequences in the two books are the same. In general, the font size in these books is larger and both the examples and practice exercises seem to be less complex even when attached to identical concept instruction. In a few instances, instruction in the W/G series goes slightly beyond that of this series. An example would be the coverage of verbals and verbal phrases, a section that is more expanded in the 11th grade W/G series and "just mentioned" in the 12th grade GH series. ~ Janice EACH BUNDLE . . . . . . . . . . . 24.99 23.75 052326 Grade 6 052323 Grade 10 052327 Grade 7 052324 Grade 11 052328 Grade 8 052325 Grade 12 052329 Grade 9 320 English / Writing

Exercises in English 2008 Edition (3-8) Designed to integrate and correlate with Voyages in English, this excellent English worktext can also be used as stand alone grade level grammar, usage, and mechanics instruction and practice. Instruction is systematic utilizing examples and definitions followed by strong practice exercises which are based on grade level science, social studies, and language arts content interlaced with character education. Also included are periodic assessments as well as diagramming exercises considered important for in-depth language study. These diagramming exercises replace the research skills section found in previous editions of Exercises but now only available in the complete Voyages program. Writing exercises include writing in context and self-assessment exercises which allow students to both practice what they are learning and to evaluate their own work. Student books are printed with an accent color. Teacher books include a full-text answer key (overprinted answers) as well as a scope and sequence for the series, correlation with grade level Voyages courses. In terms of general correlation between Exercises in English and Voyages, grammar instruction is arranged in the same order with each Voyages grammar section supported with at least one lesson in Exercises. The grammar explanations match between the two courses. ~ Janice EACH STUDENT BOOK. . . . . 19.93 19.00 EACH TEACHER EDITION . . . 25.27 24.00 Student Teacher 008269 Level C (3) 008314 008344 Level D (4) 008411 008418 Level E (5) 008419 008425 Level F (6) 008427 008439 Level G (7) 008445 008478 Level H (8) 008483 Skills for Super Writers (3-5) When a language arts expert like Modern Curriculum Press gives us a user-friendly, comprehensive worktext for the grammar, usage, and mechanics of writing, it's time to sit up and take note. This series covers the skills that students need in order to be accomplished and excellent writers. Each lesson includes a daily language practice (classroom editing project), a short instructional sequence, practice exercises (two per lesson), experience with writing their own sentences, and a concluding editing passage. While the center of each lesson is the focus on a particular skill, the beginning and ending of the lesson shows how those skills relate to writing. The seventy lessons are divided into four units which include Grammar and Usage: Sentences, Nouns, and Verbs (25 lessons), Grammar and Usage: Other Parts of Speech (17 lessons), Mechanics: Capitalization, Abbreviation, Punctuation (14 lessons), and Spelling (14 lessons). There are two reviews and two check-ups (i.e. tests) for each unit. One nice thing about this series ­ there is no gradelevel designations anywhere on the books. They are color-coded, though ­ 3rd ­ red; 4th ­ purple; 5th ­ green. While this makes it tricky for us ­ it also makes it tricky for your student to know at what grade level they're working. The fact that the three levels correspond to grades 3-5 emphasize the importance of grammar and mechanics for this stage of learner and at this

stage of writing instruction. The Student Book is a consumable worktext with accent color. The Teacher's Guide, also with an accent color, includes a full-text answer key plus short (helpful) teaching segments. Not too overpowering ­ in fact, just enough. Can you do it without the Teacher's Guide? Sure, if you're comfortable about not having the answers but you'll be missing out on the expertise of the MCP educators and the daily language practice which is found only in the Teacher's Guide. Student - 192 pgs, pb , Teacher ­ 230 pgs, pb. ~ Janice EACH STUDENT BOOK. . . . . 10.97 10.50 EACH TEACHER GUIDE . . . . 21.47 20.50 Student Teacher Guide 049400 Grade 3 049403 049401 Grade 4 049404 049402 Grade 5 049405 Let's Communicate (2ED) (4-6) 054496 Student Text . . . . . . 21.48 054497 Teacher's Manual . . 9.36 20.95 9.25

Step-by-Step Grammar (4-8) The authors of these books believe that students should not have to deal with parts of speech he/she has not yet learned, so this book is organized in a different way than most grammar books. The first book introduces grammar concepts step-by-step, and the corresponding exercises contain only words which have already been explained. For example, the first page introduces nouns and action verbs right at the beginning, and then students work with two word sentences containing only nouns (subjects) and action verbs. Students label the parts of speech and write their own action verbs or nouns to go with the provided lists of nouns and verbs. More information about nouns is given, and students work through a couple more short exercises. Then they learn how to diagram these sentences (still working with just a subject and verb). The next page introduces linking verbs as well as another noun form (predicates), and then children complete another short exercise, now working with three-word sentences. Then they learn how to diagram these latest sentences before moving on to adjectives. Hence, Step-by-Step Grammar! This method prevents children from being overwhelmed by sentences which they do not understand when they begin learning grammar. Each part of speech is introduced systematically, and different types or functions of different parts of speech are introduced separately so children don't get an overload of rules at one time. Rather, one concept is introduced with a brief explanation followed by a clear example. The exercises between new concepts are long enough to give students some practice yet short enough that they aren't doing unnecessary work. Because students practice sentence diagramming after each new concept has been added, they are never faced with a sentence they don't already know how to diagram. Spiral bound, 119 pages. If you need help studying for your Basic Grammar test, the Study Cards will help your child memorize important grammar facts. This useful set of 63 2 3/4" x 4 1/4" cards contains the study prompts such as, "types of verbs," "definition of an adjective," and "list the eight parts of speech" one one side, with the other side featuring the correct answer and the loca-

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

tion in the text to look them up if you need to review. The second book builds on the concepts covered in the first book, covering slightly more advanced topics such as word usage, dictionary skills, sentence structure, punctuation rules, writing tips, and other concepts. Students should complete this book after the first book or something comparable. The format of this book follows the same basic manner as the first. Spiral bound, 147 pages. Everything about these books is simple and straightforward, and the layout is very neat and clean. Periodic review quizzes help you evaluate your child's progress and determine if they are ready to move on or if they need more practice. The back of each book holds a convenient handbook where children can easily look up definitions and explanations of the concepts. The answer keys depict the exercises as they look in the book with the answers filled in, and they are also spiral bound. - Melissa 031913 Vol I:Basic Grammar 12.00 9.95 031914 Vol I Key . . . . . . . . . 3.00 2.50 037097 Vol 1 Study Cards . . . 2.75 2.50 031911 Vol 2: Basic Usage 12.00 9.95 031912 Vol 2 Key . . . . . . . . . 3.00 2.50

Harvey's Grammar Series (4-8) Originally published in 1869 and used extensively as a companion to the McGuffey Readers, this is a faithful reprint. Minimal updating acknowledges changes in punctuation and grammar rules or technology (i.e. horses and buggies have been changed to automobiles). Many examples are taken from the King James Version of the Bible. Elementary Grammar and Composition has three parts and would be used by the student in upper elementary grades. Part I consists of lessons in technical grammar, sentence-making, and composition. Part II continues this instruction in composition along with an examination of the properties and modifications of the different parts of speech. Part III covers punctuation. Revised English Grammar is a much more detailed examination of all parts of grammar for the older student, requiring the student to complete regular parsing sequences. 018250 Elementary Grammar & Composition (4-6) . . 11.99 7.45 018251 Elementary Grammar & Comp Tchr Key . . . . . 5.99 5.45 018253 Revised English Grammar (7-8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.99 12.50 018273 Revised English Grammar Tchr/Answer Key . . . . 5.99 5.45 Giggly Guide to Grammar (6-12) You can tell by simply looking at the cover Harvey's Elementary Grammar Workbooks (5-8) of this book that it isn't your ordinary grammar For decades Harvey's Grammar was the stan- curriculum. As you look at a stick drawing of a dard in America's schools and the Classical young man with a mouthful of `gum' balls, you Writing program thinks it was a good standard know you're in for a real grammar treat. The ­ though perhaps in need of some twenty-first publisher refers to this book as, "Shel Silverstein century user-friendliness. Their workbooks meets Strunk & White." Cathy Campbell has a real knack for making provide that easy-to-use format. Harvey's Elementary Grammar and Composition is divid- grammar understandable but keeping it humored into 134 sections each representing a lesson ous. There were times I laughed out loud at and organized into three parts. Workbook Part her drawings and use of descriptive words. 1 corresponds to the 48 sections of the first part The book is divided into 3 sections ­ gramof Harvey's. Workbook Part 2 corresponds to mar, usage, and mechanics. This is no light sections 49 ­ 123 or part two of Harvey's. coverage of the topics, yet students will enjoy Part three of Harvey's is eleven sections on reading the definitions and explanations which punctuation which is included in both work- use terminology such as `varmints' and `blahjecbooks. These workbooks are written using the tives' (vague adjectives which offer an unclear

exercises and directions from the 1880 edition of Harvey's Elementary Grammar with very few language alterations but updated punctuation. More modern editions of Harvey's can be used with the workbooks although there will be a few discrepancies since some exercises were altered or skipped in modern editions. For each lesson, the student and teacher are expected to read the Harvey's text together with the student demonstrating his understanding. The workbook can then be used to complete the exercises (lots of writing space provided) which are reproduced from the text. Each workbook lesson includes a list of grammar terms that the student records in a Grammar Notebook (bound composition or spiral-bound notebook) building a reference and review help. Answer Keys are extremely valuable providing parsing sequences, completed sentence diagrams, and answers to all exercises. The Classical Writing courses assign outside grammar work from Harvey's and these workbooks make assignment completion easier (not to mention making teacher grading/checking much easier). Workbook Part 1 includes assignments from Classical Writing's Homer A & B as well as Aesop and Homer; Workbook Part 2 includes assignments from Diogenes: Maxim and Diogenes: Chreia. Please note, however, that the CW assignments do not follow the same order that Harvey's and these workbooks do so students will skip around. Although either Harvey's Elementary Grammar or Harvey's Revised Grammar can be used with the Classical Writing program, these workbooks only correspond to Elementary Grammar. Each 88 pgs (except for Part 1 answer key - 65 pgs) pb ~ Janice 034496 Part 1 Workbook. . . . . 15.95 031967 Part 1 Answer Key. . . . 13.95 034577 Part 2 Workbook. . . . . 15.95 034495 Part 2 Answer Key. . . . 13.95

mental picture). Funny blackline doodles appear throughout the book to add humor, but also to give a visual to accompany concepts ­ a curlyheaded pig, a child with a small dragon atop its head, or a bulgy-eyed something. A CD-ROM is included in the deluxe teacher edition which has printouts of the exercises found in the book, lessons presented in 3 formats ­ PDF, jpeg, and PowerPoint, writing pointer posters which are also found throughout the book, posters of the rules and definitions with those same cute blackline drawings from the book, classroom stationary for use with the different chapters, and the answer key for all exercises. Exercises range from Mad-lib style fillins, to proofreading, underlining, labeling, listing, and more, but you won't find any diagramming in this program. The text and the teacher edition book are the same; the only difference is that the teacher edition includes the CD-ROM, which is a real plus for this program. However, we also offer the text individually, in case you need an extra for an additional student. If you want a grammar and mechanics course that is solid but is written with a non-traditional flavor, take a gander at Giggly Guide to Grammar. s/c ~ Donna 018497 Text only . . . . . . . . 19.95 16.25 018547 Teacher Ed. w/ CD 29.95 24.25 Adventures of Genius Boy and Grammar Girl (6-12) 054130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.95 22.75 Composition Handbook (3ED) (7-9) 054495 Teacher's Manual . . . 9.36 054494 Student Text . . . . . . 18.79 9.25 18.50

Jensen's Grammar (7-12) A very rigorous and complete 1-year course in grammar (parts of speech, word functions, punctuation, sentence structure and patterns). Each lesson has one page of instruction/explanation and one page of exercises. Five incremental reviews assure student retention and mastery of the material. Although designed to be self-instructional, some teacher help may be required. This book would be an excellent follow-up to Easy Grammar or Journey to Grammar Land, as it covers grammar at a college level! Tests and answer keys included. 012157 Book. . . . . . . . . . . . 30.00 26.45 053873 DVD Supplement 30.00 26.45 If you could use more teaching support, consider this set of two DVDs. These teach through each lesson, with charts and examples shown on screen. English 2200-3200 (Thomson Learning)(9-AD) Designed for high school and college students, this program is ideal for parents looking for a complete, upper-level grammar course that students can use independently. This series is a programmed course covering grammar, usage, and mechanics, and if you are unfamiliar with the term "programmed" course, read on to learn about how it works and why it is so beneficial. In a programmed course, the material is carefully broken down and organized into small steps called "frames." Each frame presents a bit of information along with just one simple question to be answered through thinking and writing a short response. As students (continued...) English / Writing 321

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

continue through the frames, they are able to learn the concepts based on the logical progression of the questions they are answering. They learn by working through the concept step-bystep in a concentrated way rather than simply reading a series of rules and trying to apply it to an exercise. Rather than separating the teaching from the exercises, a programmed course unites them together in the series of simple frames. The frames are divided into units (approximately 12 per book) and even further into chapters. The format of the book varies greatly from other grammar courses. Each page is a series of alternating gray and white bands. To work through the units and chapters in order, students simple follow the same band all the way through the book. For example, they begin with the frame that is the top gray band on the right hand page. Once they answer the question, they immediately flip the page to view the gray band at the top of the next right hand page. The correct answer to the previous frame is given along with the next question. In this way students immediately learn whether they answered the questions correctly instead of having to wait to check their comprehension. If they've answered wrongly they can instantly see their error and learn from their mistake before answering the next frame, and if they've answered correctly they will have immediate positive reinforcement. Then they can answer the question in this frame and continue through the pages, answering a short question, checking their answer, and moving forward. When they reach the end of the book, they simply turn back to the beginning, move down to the second band (now a white one), and continue on as before. Since some of the material is likely to be review, students will move quickly through those frames without having to spend a lot of time answering endless questions. This will free up their school time for other more useful pursuits. When they reach an unfamiliar chapter, they can progress at a slower rate to absorb the new information. Each course should easily be completed in one semester, but the immense flexibility allows teachers to decide how much time and how many days each week students will spend working through the book (though the books recommend around a half hour per sitting and at least a couple of times a week). Because each student can set their own pace, this course can easily be used with one student or a whole group of students. The teacher simply needs to be available for questions and administer the tests when the students reach a new unit. There are two tests given for each unit, which gives the teacher a couple of options. You may choose to give one test before the unit and one after it's completed, or you could use one test as a warm-up or a second-try in case the student needs to review the material again. Please note that Level 3200 has two different test books ­ the original and an alternate. The alternate is formatted just like the original with the same number of each type of questions for each test, but the questions themselves are different. If you are using the book with multiple students, you may choose to give different tests between the students. Otherwise you would only need both books if you want to use the book a second time with the same student ­ say maybe in 10th grade and again 322 English / Writing

at 12th ­ and want to give them different tests. Each level is similar in format and approach, but they vary in content. The numbers with each level indicate the approximate number of frames per book. Level 2200 introduces students to the different parts of speech, constructing sentences, and punctuation and capitalization. Level 2600 expands on the earlier level by teaching more about modifiers, subject/verb agreement, punctuation, and how the different parts of speech function. Level 3200 continues by moving beyond the simple sentence to complex and compound sentences as well as more advanced work with various parts of speech and punctuation. All three levels feature a writing application section in the back that correlates to the specific units and helps students apply the information to their own writing by completing a variety of short writing exercises. All books are softcover. The texts are handbook sized and range between 400-500 pages. The test booklets are standard size and 60 pages, and the test answer keys are handbook sized. ­ Melissa 041079 2200 Text . . . . . . . 108.95 89.95 041078 2200 Tests . . . . . . . . 8.95 8.75 041077 2200 Test Key . . . . . 14.95 14.25 041082 2600 Text . . . . . . . 108.95 89.95 041081 2600 Tests . . . . . . . . 8.95 8.75 041086 3200 Text . . . . . . . 120.95 99.95 041085 3200 Tests . . . . . . . . 7.95 7.75 041083 3200 Alternate Tests 10.95 10.50 Grammar, usage, Mechanics - Supplemental These materials are also comprehensive in scope but are more supplemental in nature - not complete programs. Daily Grams (3-12) What's the difference between Easy Grammar and Daily Grams? Covering grammatical concepts with engaging simplicity, these two programs are companions and complementary but serve different purposes. While Easy Grammar provides a systematic presentation of concepts, Daily Grams provides - you guessed it - daily practice. They are each stand-alone programs, and Daily Grams can easily be used with other grammar programs or independently. Using them at the same time would be a bit of overkill; as you would be adding further practice to an already very complete course. However, in periods where the student is doing quite a bit of writing or if you want to follow a year of intensive grammar with a lighter year, Daily Grams are a good way to keep grammar skills sharp without bogging students down with too much English. Each "Teacher Text" contains 180 reviews covering capitalization, punctuation, parts of speech (general review) and sentence combining. [May I just mention that daily sentence combining practice is one of the most compelling reasons to use this program. This practice develops strong compound and complex sentence construction skills, which is one of the most necessary components for effective and elegant written communication.] Each Daily Grams review page only takes about 10 minutes a day, but what a valuable ten minutes ­ keeping grammar skills sharp and developing sentence writing competence. The books are reproducible and contain student pages and answers (in the back) while the student

workbooks contain only the student pages (no answers) and are not reproducible. If you are planning on using a level with more than one student, the workbooks offer you a time-saving option at a reasonable cost. EACH TEACHER TEXT . . . . . . 24.95 19.45 EACH WORKBOOK. . . . . . . . 12.95 10.45 Tchr Text 018278 018280 018282 018284 018286 012224 Grade 3 Grade 4 Grade 5 Grade 6 Grade 7 Jr/Sr. High Workbook 018279 018281 018283 018285 018287

Daily Language Practice (1-4) These reproducible workbooks provide quick daily exercises that can be used as warm-ups, assessment tools, or helpful reviews. Each book covers a large swatch of language arts skills including grammar, punctuation, capitalization, spelling, vocabulary, and more. The daily exercise consists of 4-5 questions on a half sheet of paper. The book is organized into 36 weeks, and every week has its own focus. Throughout the week, the difficulty level of the worksheets increases. After the five daily worksheets, there is also (tougher) weekly review worksheet that usually requires students to write out sentences instead of matching, circling, or filling in blanks like the typical daily activities. A "Find the Mistakes" format is often used so students learn to identify errors. At the end of each fourweek set, there is an expanded review, which reviews skills from the past month and includes a fun word game. The skills get progressively harder throughout each book (but remain grade appropriate) and a scope and sequence chart is included. With 180 daily language arts skill activities, and 9 monthly reviews in each book, this series is a great way to strengthen language and editing skills. Answer key included, 128 pgs, pb. ~ Rachel EACH BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.95 12.75 040047 Grade 1 040049 Grade 3 040048 Grade 2 040050 Grade 4 English Master Skills (1-4) As we all know, practice makes perfect, and this series of workbooks provides plenty of practice with various English skills. A variety of question formats are used, including matching, fill in the blank, identification, multiple choice, adding punctuation or editing marks to passages, rewriting sentences, and more. Pages are in color, which adds some visual excitement, and there are just enough questions to get good review in without boring students (about 5 questions per page in Grade 1 to 10-15 in Grade 6). Affordably priced with about 105 worksheets in

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

each book, this series is a great review supplement that covers all the bases of English in decent depth. Besides a complete answer key, each book also has a glossary for students and additional teacher suggestions that show great ways to expand upon the activities in the book. Pages are perforated and reproducible. Each book is 128 pgs, pb. ~ Rachel EACH BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.95 5.25 038910 Grade 1 Beginning/ending consonants, short/long vowels, word recognition, alphabetical order, compound words, synonyms/antonyms/homophones, nouns/verbs/adjectives, plurals, types of sentences, word order, and punctuation. 038911 Grade 2 Beginning/ending consonants, consonant blends, short/long vowels, other vowel combinations, alphabetical order, compound words, contractions, synonyms/antonyms/ homophones, nouns/verbs/adjectives, plurals/possessives, syllables, subjects/predicates, types of sentences, and punctuation. 038912 Grade 3 Alphabetical order, compound words, contractions, nouns/pronouns, past/present/ future-tense verbs, prepositions, punctuation, conjunctions, abbreviations, subjects/ predicates, types of sentences, parts of a paragraph, alliteration. 038913 Grade 4 Parts of a sentence, nouns/pronouns, subjects/predicates, past/present/future-tense verbs, transitive/intransitive verbs, direct/ indirect objects, adjectives/adverbs, correct word usage, types of sentences, conjunctions, punctuation. Grammar & Punctuation Wipe-Clean Cards (1-4) Students will actually enjoy practicing grammar with these colorful write-and-wipe cards. This set of 50 cards is packed with grammar rules, tips, and exercises to ensure that kids stay sharp on their grammar. Each card focuses on a specific grammar point, with a mini lesson at the top half of the card. The bottom half of the card contains an exercise utilizing the grammar points taught in the lesson. For example, the first card, "Spot the verbs", explains what a verb is, provides examples of verbs, and follows with an exercise requiring students to spot verbs in a list and circle them. Some of the other activities found in the deck include: "Using pronouns" (revise sentences by replacing nouns with pronouns); "Adding adjectives" (complete sentences by selecting the best adjective from a list); and "Verbs: simple present tense" (complete sentences changing the infinitive to the simple present tense). Answer keys and additional tips are listed on the back of each card. A wipeclean pen is included, so you can complete the activities, erase, and practice again. ~ Lisa 049900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.99 7.75

Oral Language for Daily Use (1-5) Need practice on finding grammatical errors in sentences? Lots and lots of practice? For 180 days, the book gives an incorrectly written sentence or two. Students fix punctuation, capitalization, word usage, subject-verb agreement, and various and sundry other grammatical errors. Corrected versions of each sentence are given on the opposing page. A list of skills covered in each sentence is provided so the teacher can pick and choose the most appropriate work. No teaching information is provided, so use this one strictly as follow-up practice. More for the money here than Great Editing Adventure or Editor in Chief. Note: grades 3 and 6 are OOP. EACH BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . 10.99 8.25 004648 Grade 1 004657 Grade 4 004649 Grade 2 004658 Grade 5 Grammar Minutes (1-6) These practice workbooks offer short worksheets for a variety of grammar, usage, and mechanics concepts. No instruction is given for the concepts; the purpose of the series is just to provide students with additional practice. There are 100 pages included in each book, referred to as "minutes" due to the short amount of time they should take to complete. Each page holds just 10 problems, which are generally split into just one or two different types of exercises. You may use the minutes in the order they are given or pick and choose ones that correspond to the concepts you are currently covering in your main curriculum or areas where your students may need extra practice. For an additional challenge the book recommends timing students, but please note that it is up to your discretion to decide how many minutes will be needed for each worksheet (likely it will be just one or two). Answers included. 112 consumable, reproducible pgs. ­ Melissa EACH BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.99 11.50 044343 Grade 1 011649 Grade 4 044344 Grade 2 011699 Grade 5 044345 Grade 3 011713 Grade 6 Language Fundamentals (1-6) Whether you're looking for more student practice with pronouns or punctuation, this substantial series from Evan-Moor has got you covered. Each 240-page book contains a series of worksheets on a grammar topic with periodic reviews and editing too! Nouns, adjectives, pronouns, verbs, adverbs, sentences, capitalization, abbreviations, punctuation, usage, vocabulary and sentence editing are covered at all grades, with age-appropriate exercises to complete. Within each topical section, worksheets progress in difficulty from introducing the grammatical concept to more complex rules. For example, the section on verbs begins with two sheets on identifying verbs and continues with activities on action verbs, linking verbs, verb tenses, irregular verbs, and subject-verb agreement. Each worksheet contains one activity to complete, whether it is circling a part of speech, filling in blanks with the correct form of a word, underlining subjects or rearranging sentences. An outlined box with the corresponding grammar rule and an example is found at the top of each page to provide the student a reminder of the concept. Reviews are provided at least once in every section. These are set up more like a

standardized test where students answer multiple choice questions and fill in answer bubbles. The vocabulary section is a nice tie-in to the rest of the grammar topics and covers prefixes, suffixes, contractions, synonyms/antonyms, homophones, compound words, and determining word meanings from root words or context. One editing exercise is also provided for each grammar topic covered. In Grades 1-3, students edit sentences, while Grades 4-6 have students edit paragraphs. These exercises usually consist of sentences or paragraphs to correct and ask the student to either rewrite the sentences of paragraphs correctly, to proofread using the correct marks, or to locate and list the errors in the examples. If you are using Daily Language Review (or any other daily grammar skill-builder with varied activities), Language Fundamentals is a great companion. Just determine what areas your child is consistently struggling with in the daily review and then assign worksheets on that topic from Language Fundamentals. Reproducible, answers included. - Jess EACH BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.99 19.45 044159 Grade 1 044162 Grade 4 044160 Grade 2 044163 Grade 5 044161 Grade 3 044165 Grade 6 Daily Language Review (1-8) These language review skill books cover an excellent variety of skills with daily drills for 36 weeks. These do not have as many sentencecombining exercises as the Daily Grams series, but contain a larger array of exercises like analogies, identifying root words, fact/opinion, dictionary skills, syllabication and more (58 skills in all). This series has become even better (and more convenient to use) in that the answer key has been consolidated and moved to the back of the book. Previously, the week's answers appeared after Friday's lesson, making it more awkward to use. Reproducible, 128 pgs each. EACH BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.99 14.75 006985 Grade 1 006993 Grade 5 006983 Grade 2 010489 Grade 6 006991 Grade 3 014219 Grade 7 006984 Grade 4 014231 Grade 8 Language Usage and Practice (1-12) Let me describe a scenario I come across on occasion when speaking with homeschoolers. The family has found a great series of workbooks ­ they enjoy the ease of use, the format, and the coverage, and, best of all, they are relatively cheap compared to other items on the market. They have had great success because everything just falls into place with this series. So here they come after completing the 6th grade workbook, intent on picking up the next in the series ­ only to discover that the series ended at 6th grade! As you can see, that is quite a dilemma. What is the best way to solve such a problem? Make sure the series you are starting out in goes all the way - and this series does. With books for each grade level up through eighth as well as one for the high school years, you are pretty much covered for supplemental practice through the clear, logical progression of chapters focused on the skills of vocabulary, sentences, grammar and usage, capitalization and punctuation, and composition. Within each chapter, one skill is worked on at a time, with rules and directions for exercises clearly stated on (continued...) English / Writing 323

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

each workbook page. Special attention is given to ensure coverage of composition skills such as brainstorming, clustering, topic sentences, supporting details, taking notes, revising, and proofreading ­ all very important steps in process writing. While each workbook follows the same basic progression as listed above, some do throw in an extra chapter, either at the beginning or the end, on readiness/study skills ­ with more practice in following directions and using reference materials. Each workbook also begins with an assessment of preexisting knowledge, and tests are given at the end of each chapter to check retention. Designed to be easy for independent use, all of the worksheets are perforated, consumable, and reproducible. A definition of language terms and an answer key are included in each book. ~ Zach EACH BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.99 10.95 040346 Grade 1 040350 Grade 5 040347 Grade 2 040351 Grade 6 040348 Grade 3 040352 Grade 7 040349 Grade 4 040353 Grade 8 040354 High School Instant Grammar Practice Kids Will Love (2-5) In my family, the words "grammar" and "love" tend to go together like oil and water! So, when these supplemental workbooks were presented to me, I was naturally skeptical. To my delight, although not guaranteed to create grammar lovers, the engaging activities in these workbooks may bring a bit of fun into grammar! So often we bore our children to tears through endless drill when all we really want is for them to learn how to speak and write well. The forty-plus activities in this book will reinforce practical grammar skills through puzzles, story writing, picture drawing, poems, riddles, flip books, and more. The variety of activities designed to reinforce grammar will keep children interested and dare I say, loving, grammar! For the Parent/Teacher, there is also much here for you to love as well. Connected to Language Art standards, you will find Teacher Notes at the beginning and Answers in the back, making this supplemental workbook easy to use. The 4th-5th grade workbook also includes a student assessment chart. 48 pgs. SC. Reproducible for classroom use. ~ Deanne EACH BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.99 8.50 049975 Gr. 2-3 049976 Gr. 4-5 The Language Mechanic (3-5) A lighter, more enjoyable approach than your typical grammar lesson. Every lesson begins with a sentence that breaks the rule for that lesson, resulting in a humorous sentence, to show students what happens when you don't follow the language rules. Then, by applying the rule, the same sentence is written correctly. Guided activities follow to give the student practice at applying the rule. Even more practice is given in fun, independent exercises in which the student interprets logic clues to utilize the newly learned rule. Topics covered include capitalization, run-on sentences, agreement, modifiers, pronouns, verbs, unnecessary words, punctuation, spelling, vocabulary and more. Answers are provided, and worksheets are reproducible for your own use. ~ Stephanie 005005 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.99 324 English / Writing

Grammar Daily Skill Builders (3-6) These concise and thorough workbooks from Carson-Dellosa provide lots of practice and review for basic grammar skills. Each book features two short, reproducible activities per page, with enough lessons for an entire school year. Activities are correlated to state standards, and a matrix is provided for selected states. The activities are presented in a variety of different formats, but there are frequent reviews that provide practice in a standardized-test format. Books build upon each other and cover many of the same topics at a level suitable to the different grades. Book 3-4 covers parts of speech, punctuation, context clues, sentences, sentence fragments, homophones, definitions, and more. Book 4-5 covers acronyms, punctuation, parts of speech, critical thinking, contradictions, types of sentences, capitalization, rhyming, and more. Grades 5-6 covers capitalization, punctuation, abbreviation, parts of speech, contractions, acronyms, critical thinking, sentence writing, alliteration, and more. With quick, daily reviews and test-taking practice in every book, this series is great for ensuring that students are covering all the topics needed for their grade and standardized tests. 96 pgs, pb. EACH BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.99 9.50 011745 Grades 3-4 011819 Grades 5-6 011818 Grades 4-5 Grammar Skill Builders (3-8) Based on the standards set by the National Council of Teachers of English, these little practice books provide a variety of fun yet challenging teacher created, grade appropriate exercises designed to teach and reinforce fundamental grammar concepts. Topics covered include parts of speech, verb tense, subject-verb agreement, sentence types, capitalization, sentence diagramming, punctuation, contractions, synonyms, and antonyms. Use these books as a supplement during the current school year or in preparation for the upcoming year. ~ Enh EACH BOOK BELOW . . . . . . . 4.99 3.95 027314 Grade 3 025484 Grade 5 025483 Grade 4 025485 Grade 6

mar errors that the teacher wants to eliminate. In this book, Jane walks you through how the Caught'ya works and exactly how to integrate this approach in your own classroom. She starts by "inviting" you into her classroom to see how she uses the Caught'ya and then breaks down the process into ten easy steps. Ten steps may sound intimidating, but each one is a very small piece and the entire task only takes 5-10 minutes a day. In short, the ten steps consist of composing the daily Caught'ya sentence by deciding on a plot, the skills and a vocabulary word to address that day, writing the sentence down incorrectly on the board and critiquing students as they copy the Caught'ya on their own paper correctly, and concluding by checking the sentence together with the whole class, then having the students mark their mistakes, count up their own errors, and turn in their work. The complete, detailed explanations of each step are found in chapter 2. The third chapter focuses on how to evaluate the Caught'ya, with thorough directions on checking and grading the content as well as the format, using real student's Caught'yas as examples. Chapter 4 goes beyond the basics and describes how to use Caught'yas as a tool to teach other grammar skills such as spelling, diagramming sentences, and writing, among other tips. This chapter also holds sample spelling practices and Caught'ya grammar tests with answer keys. Assuming that many teachers may find the idea of creating their own funny story plot and outline a bit daunting, Jane includes six sample story ideas in chapter 5, two each for elementary, middle, and high school classes, tried and very successful in classrooms. These suggestions serve as a plot for you to flesh out through your daily Caught'ya sentences, each one offering a tidbit of the funny tale to anticipating students. If the task of writing your own sentences based on a given outline still sounds too hard, then you'll appreciate chapters 6-8, which each hold 100 daily Caught'ya sentences for your use until you are comfortable writing them yourself. Each of these chapters holds sentences for one of the sample stories from each grade level and gives you the passage written incorrectly and correctly, with the skills covered and vocabulary word. With her helpful, personal writing style, Jane Keister leaves you encouraged and fully prepared to "catch" your own giggling grammar students. ~ Steph 031116 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.95 11.95 Caught `ya! Grammar with a Giggle for the Early Grades (1-3) If you're interested in the "Caught `ya!" approach and have young children, these new additions may just suit your family's needs. There is a separate book for each of the primary grades, and each one features a complete, silly, grade-appropriate story for you to use with your child (or classroom). Each story has errors already included and is presented in both a correct and complete format for easy read through as well as an incomplete (with errors) format divided into approximately 120 daily lessons for students. The books also contain a complete explanation of how to use the material, answers, and a CD containing all of the worksheets so you can easily print them off for students as well as adapt them for any particular needs. Approx. 70 pgs. ­ Melissa

Caught'ya! Grammar with a Giggle (3-12) You know an approach to grammar is different when students and teachers are giggling. Indeed, Jane Kiester's 10-step approach to teaching grammar is rather amusing, with the bonus of being extremely effective, which certainly sets it apart from many other grammar books! How does Jane keep her classes giggling through grammar? The Caught'ya. In essence, the Caught'ya is one or two sentences of a continuous, humorous story, filled with gram-

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

EACH BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.95 11.95 045537 Eggbert, the Ball, Bounces By Himself (1) 045539 Putrescent Petra Finds Friends (2) 045538 Juan and Marie Join the Class (3) Giggles in the Middle (6-8) Jane Kiester (Caught Ya! Grammer with a Giggle) has now produced a book of Caught'ya stories and sentences specifically geared toward middle school students. Just like the original, students follow a humorous story and correct grammar and usage mistakes throughout. Chapters summarize the system, show how to implement and assess it, answer common questions about the Caught'ya, and list vocabulary and character names. Unlike other volumes, this book contains just one continuous story (The Bizarre Mystery of Horribly Hard Middle School) with enough sentences for each grade to last an entire school year. Errors in sentences include "basic skills" like capitalization and punctuation but also cover vocabulary words, literary devices, and writing conventions that middle school students should be perfecting at this grade level. There are 125 Caught'ya sentences each for grades 6, 7, and 8. There are also optional writing ideas for each grade level after every five Caught'ya sentences, suggestions about how to teach the skills most effectively, and midterm and final tests for each grade level. The story, and thus sentences, are geared toward students in a public school setting, but the program is great for the homeschooler too. A CD-ROM with various PDF files offers easy duplication and includes the complete, uninterrupted story in narrative form, the midterm and final exam tests, and all the Caught'ya sentences. It also includes a Grammar, Usage, and Mechanics Guide that lists and explains grammar rules. For teachers and parents who want to improve student writing and editing skills and have some fun while they're doing it, this is the perfect guide. 406 pgs, pb. ~ Rachel 040624 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.95 15.95

choose to skip this exercise at your discretion as it focuses in on Shakespearean insults. The remaining 3 chapters each focus on one of the three plays and include 120+ Caught'yas each. An exam is included for each of the stories. This book covers a wide range of grammar, usage, and mechanics including (but not exclusive to) the following: abbreviations, active vs. passive voice, adjectives, adverbs, agreement, among vs. between, capitalization, clauses and phrases, comma rules, comparisons, diagramming sentences, helping verbs, independent clauses, introductory words and phrases, irregular verbs, modifiers and misplaced modifiers, parallel construction, the eight parts of speech, plurals vs. possessives, common spelling errors, spelling rules, summarizing, titles, and much more! 225 pgs, pb. -Enh 046137 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.95 14.95

Core Skills: Grammar Review (4-6+) This grammar workbook offers straightforward worksheets for students who need extra practice, reinforcement, or just a refresher course. It begins with a short "Check What You Know" section so you can determine the student's current level of understanding or spotlight specific areas he/she needs extra help with. After this, the worksheets are divided into four units - Vocabulary (synonyms, antonyms, homonyms, prefixes and suffixes, contractions, compound words, and idioms), Sentences (types, parts of, compound and complex, run-on, etc.), Grammar and Usage (parts of speech, active and passive voice, commonly confused words, conjunctions, double negatives, etc.), and Capitalization and Punctuation (capitals, end punctuation, commas, quotation marks, and others). Each worksheet follows the ruleexample-practice format and targets a single skill so students can master it. At the end of the book, a second "Check What You Know" tests students again. A few "cheat sheets" in the back provide students with lists of language terms, personal pronouns, irregular verbs, and commonly misused words. A complete answer Chortling Bard: Caught' ya! Grammar With a key is also included, and all of the pages are perforated for easy removal. 124 pgs. - Melissa Giggle for High School (9-12) Back by popular demand, author Jane Kiester 033652 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.99 10.95 has written a high school-level book incorporating her highly entertaining and effective Language Skill Books (4-8) This series provides worksheets to help stuCaught'ya! method of teaching grammar (please see the description for item #031116 above dents build their language skills. Each workbook for more details). For this book, Kiester has covers the topics listed in its title. It breaks the turned to the famous works of the Bard him- topics into subtopics (for example nouns are self and provides 3 amusing Caught'ya stories. broken down into common and proper nouns, Shakespeare's Much Ado About Nothing, A singular and plural nouns, possessive nouns, Midsummer Night's Dream, and Twelfth Night and count and non-count nouns), and then have been modernized and rewritten in a narra- provides worksheets for them all. Not much instruction is given with the worksheets, but tive, dialogue style for effective teaching. The book's introduction provides information an example is given for each page. The workon the rationale, research, and background of sheets provide exercises that instruct students to Kiester's distinct teaching method. Chapter 1 underline and circle certain parts of sentences, of the book is a condensed version of the first complete sentences, and identify different comthree chapters of the original book, and provides ponents of sentences. Each main topic includes an overview of how to implement the 10 step a review section to test the students' understandmethod as well as guidelines for a 3 step evalu- ing of that topic. Answers included. ~ Rachel S. 3.50 ation process. Chapter 2 is brief in content but Each book. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.95 includes important teaching notes on how to use 014946 Capitalization & Punctuation the particular Caught'yas in the book. Chapter 014994 Nouns, Verbs, and Sentences 3 provides a short warm-up activity to familiarize 015054 Pronouns, Adjectives, Adverbs, and Paragraphs students with the language of Shakespeare before delving into the heart of the program. You may 015070 Vocabulary, Usage, and Spelling See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

Grammar Rulz! (4-8) Looking for a fun, effective way to liven up your grammar review time? Grammar Rulz! may just be what you are looking for. Using a Social Studies theme (Ancient Egypt to the Vikings) for added interest, these daily grammar practice activities are designed to be completed in 3 minutes a day. Each of the exercises is set up similarly and contains twelve errors in one or more areas of spelling, capitalization, punctuation, grammar, or usage for your students to identify using proofreading symbols. There is twenty-four weeks' worth of grammar practice exercises as well as two grammar challenges (short quizzes). The book contains instructions for use, the "character toons", answer keys, and a resource section with grammar notes, tips for success and a bibliography. The accompanying CD-ROM contains printable PDF files with student activity sheets, preformatted SMART® notebook units, Mimio® interactive files, and a variety of resources including Middle School Writing Standards, printable placards with proofreading symbols and punctuation, a personal spelling list template and instructional videos. Although most of the activity suggestions are for classroom use, this could easily be modified for homeschool use. 89 pgs. ~ Deanne 034742 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.95 14.95

Grammar Teacher's Activity-A-Day (5-12) This book can wear many hats (sounds like a homeschooler, doesn't it?) Its 180 lessons/ activities systematically review and practice all aspects of grammar. Lessons are typically one page and include a short teaching segment followed by an activity. It's hard to imagine any of them taking more than 5-10 minutes to complete. Occasionally, the one lesson will be all instruction but the following lesson will be all activity. Activities are typically fill-in-the-blank, label, or choose the correct word. Coverage is thorough and beyond-the-basics. In addition to grammar, there is coverage of confusing usage words, sound-alike words, and punctuation/ capitalization mechanics. Although there are periodic reviews throughout the book, the last ten lessons provide a comprehensive review. A complete answer key is in the back of the book. The book is "pick-up-and-go" and can be reproduced for families/classrooms. Use it alongside a writing-intensive course to keep language skills current. Use it as the grammar component for a high school English credit. Use it as a reference/handbook as you edit/grade writing papers. Use it as a refresher course prior to taking the ACT/SAT. Use it to brush up on your own grammar and make sure you're "saying it correctly". You pick its hat ­ or change its hat from year to year. 218 pgs, pb ~ Janice 022440 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.95 14.95 English / Writing 325

Painless Grammar (6-8) Sometimes it's hard to make grammar fun, but with this book, at least it won't be painful. Its user-friendly format and plenty of examples of both good and bad writing lead students to a better understanding of parts of speech, sentence construction, punctuation, correct subject/verb agreement, and more. Though not a thorough textbook, the book gives great explanations about important grammar rules and serves as a great reference or supplement for students. Grammar rules are printed in bold, and plenty of examples ensure that students understand and can use the rules. The book is broken up into five chapters: Parts of Speech; Building and Punctuating Sentences; Agreement; Words, Words, Words; and Editing. In the first chapter, rules about the different parts of speech are discussed including when to capitalize words, possessive nouns, verb tenses, passive voice, gerunds, and much more. Chapter two covers complete sentences, fragments, clauses, commas, punctuation, abbreviations, and more. Chapter three focuses on agreement ­ verbs agreeing with their subjects, pronouns agreeing with their antecedents, etc. This section includes lots of examples of sentences that do not agree, as well as corrections to make them agree. The fourth chapter could be an especially useful reference for students as it lists words that are usually misused (affect/effect, a lot/alot, farther/further, in/into). Correct ways to use these words are shown. The final chapter focuses on editing and gives tips on how to make sentences less wordy and more interesting. Each chapter in the book includes a few "Brain Tickler" sections, where students find mistakes in sentences and correct them. With instruction given in a conversational tone and useful tables and charts, this book is a great grammar resource for students. 264 pgs, pb. ~ Rachel 018702 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.99 8.25 Ultimate Writing Guide for Students (Grammar Girl) (7-12) A comprehensive guide to all things grammar! Grammar Girl encourages students to write like themselves, not someone else. She is actually a character narrating this book which is a novel approach to a reference book I'd say. She's here to give your kids quick tips including tools, memory tricks, funny phrases and grammar cartoons featuring Aardvark and Squiggle (a snail.) The silliness actually helps make grammar funny, who knew that was possible? Chapters have titles like: Grammar Schmammar, Parts of Speech, Sentenced for Life, Punch Up Your Punctuation, and Your Right to Write. By the time kids get to middle school grades they have had plenty of grammar lessons. Unfortunately, some of them still don't get it. Others get it, but need more information for writing essays and such in high school. The book is well organized and uses loads of examples to demonstrate a grammar point. Author Mignon Fogarty makes fun from the un-fun and manages to do a fine job explaining grammar to kids. While she may be unconventional, she is never rude or disrespectful. 295 pgs, pb. ~ Sara 052927 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.99 9.95

Blue Book of Grammar and Punctuation (7-12) This popular book by Jane Straus is both a reference guide for the rules of grammar and punctuation, but also a workbook that provides exercises to review those rules. The first 54 pages of the book contain the most common rules of grammar and punctuation. Topics include subject and verb agreement, pronouns, modifying parts of speech, problems with prepositions, fragments, commas, semicolons, parentheses, hyphens, dashes, capitalization, writing numbers, and much more-basically all the grammar rules you need to know in high school and college. Rules are also given for commonly confused words like who vs. whom, that vs. which, good vs. well, etc. Along with each rule, there are one or two examples so students can see the rule put into practice. The second part of the book contains numerous practice exercises (2 sets of exercises for each grammar topic or punctuation mark), as well as a grammar pretest, a grammar mastery test, a punctuation and capitalization pretest, and a punctuation and capitalization mastery test. The pretest and mastery tests given are great for before and after evaluation, and the exercises for each topic ensure that students know how to use the rules they are learning. Exercises generally prompt students to find errors in sentences, rewrite sentences, pick the correct word for the sentence, or identify parts of a sentence. These review methods are probably more effective at incorporating the rules into real life than multiple choice or matching exercises found in other books. Answers for all the exercises are included in the book. This is a great quick reference book with effective tests and exercises, and it is also well organized, practical, and easy-to-use. The book is not reproducible, 110 pgs, pb. This is the new, expanded eighth edition. ~ Rachel 040162 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.95 8.95 Writing Rules! (7-AD) This grammar and writing handbook is packed with helpful rules and tips, and it's funny, too! The book solidly covers grammar rules, including apostrophes/contractions, double consonants, compound sentences, sentence fragments, verb tenses, adverbs, avoiding redundancy, and much more. Each topic is explained in a short chapter, with plenty of examples and sample sentences to demonstrate proper usage. Author Charles Gulotta (also of 500 Keywords for the SAT and How to Remember Them!) presents these lessons in a humorous, downto-earth manner, and the text is enhanced with lighthearted cartoon illustrations. This book also includes 90 grammar practice questions (similar to those found on standardized tests, such as the SAT), with answers, explanations, and test-taking tips. Two practice essay assignments are also included, with an analysis of sample responses and tips to improve students' writing. 119 pgs, pb. ~ Lisa 047625 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.95 9.95 My Dog Bites the English Teacher: Practical Grammar Made Quick and Easy (10-AD) So how does one make practical grammar both quick and easy? It sounds impossible! Until you open the book and actually start reading, that is. Amazingly clear and concise, this book uses simple language and logic to quickly lay out the

principles you need to master correct grammar. This is outlined in the first chapter ­ correctly identifying verbs and subjects. The following chapters build on that: 2 ­ phrases, independent clauses, and dependent clauses; 3 ­ fragments, comma splices, and run-ons; 4 ­ commas; 5 ­ other punctuation and mechanics; 6 ­ pronouns and subject-verb agreement; 7 ­ modifiers and voice; 8 ­ homophones; 9 ­ sentence types; and 10 ­ traditional grammar. The depth to which you want to take the instruction is up to you, though the author offers the following suggestion for how to use the chapters in this book: 1 &2 ­ essential, 3 & 4 ­ very important, 5 ­ important, 6 ­ good to know, 7 ­ helpful but not essential, 8 ­ refer to as needed, 9 ­ interesting, and 10 ­ only for grammar lovers. Moving one step at a time from simple grammar concepts through those that are more complex, both your confidence and ability to wield the correct grammatical tool will be enhanced. Chapter 11 contains activities to put all of this new-found grammatical knowledge to use (with included answers just in case). ­ Zach 047497 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.95 13.75 Grammar Workbook for the SAT, ACT, and More (9-12) Do you need to strengthen your grammar skills before taking those all-important college entrance exams? If so, you've come to the right place. Barron's Grammar Workbook for the SAT, ACT, and More combines a detailed grammar review with standardized test questions to help students learn, sharpen, and practice grammar skills that are tested on the SAT and ACT. The book is divided into three sections. The first part of the book is called "Grammar Basics: An Orientation.". It provides a substantive review of grammar terms (ie. noun, adverb, conjunction) with plenty of examples and short exercises. A chapter on sentences (ie. clauses, sentence structure, mechanics) is included as well. Part Two consists of grammar tests. It begins with a chapter on grammar pitfalls, followed by a chapter devoted to SAT grammar questions, an ACT grammar questions chapter, and a chapter covering grammar tests applicable to high school exit exams. These chapters contain plentiful examples of the types of multiplechoice questions found on these standardized tests, with detailed explanations. Part Three is called "Essay Writing on the SAT and ACT.". It provides tips for writing an effective essay in the time allotted and includes sample SAT and Act Writing Test topics. Information on scoring the essays is included as well. Index included. 250 pgs, pb. ~ Lisa 020837 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.99 12.25 E-Z Grammar (11-12) This workbook, formerly titled Grammar the Easy Way, is full of instruction and exercises for a very thorough review of English grammar. It begins simply with sentences, parts of speech, and phrases and clauses but quickly expands to cover all the meticulous details of grammar

326

English / Writing

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

taught in high school. After the first section (which includes many aspects and tenses of the sentence, parts of speech, phrases, clauses, and verbs), there is an "exam" to evaluate if students can identify components like an adjective clause, gerund phrase, infinitive, predicate adjective, etc. within a given story. The next section gets noticeably more difficult with instruction on types of sentences, coordination and subordination, reference of pronouns, subjectverb agreement, parallel structure, misplaced modifiers, sentence variety, and more. Another "exam" is then given, which is cumulative and instructs students to identify if a sentence is correct, lacks parallel structure, has a dangling modifier, is a fragment, lacks agreement, and so on. The final section includes a "Manual of Usage" which assembles together grammar rules that are most often problems in high school and college papers and gives a usage test. The last section focuses on writing; specifically writing paragraphs, writing research papers, developing style, and preparing for writing during the SAT. Tips are included for the proper way to construct and format writing while using good grammar. After the third section, a cumulative exam is given which includes one hundred sentences. Students must select from an answer bank and decide if each sentence is correct or if it has errors such as a misplaced modifier, lack of agreement, fragment, usage mistake, redundancy, etc. With lots of examples of correct grammar and simple but effective exercises, the book guarantees to improve your grammar and writing in only 30 days. ~ Rachel 013890 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.99 10.95 Sharp Grammar (11-AD) Sharpen and practice your grammar skills with this helpful reference and workbook. This book contains fifteen lessons (each around twenty pages), grouped into three main sections. Section I covers grammar and sentence structure (such as parts of speech, verb tenses and modifiers). Section II covers Style and Usage (ie. being concise, commonly confused words), and Section III covers Punctuation and Mechanics. Each of the fifteen chapters is broken down into five steps using the Building Block Method. Step 1 consists of a ten question multiple choice quiz to see what you already know followed by detailed answers and explanations. Step 2 consists of lessons with plenty of examples, while Step 3 contains practice questions. Step 4 reviews key points from each lesson with a summary, and Step 5 contains a twenty-question multiple choice test (with answers and explanations). The back of the book contains a twentyquestion cumulative test. A helpful and useful college prep resource! 325 pgs, pb. ~ Lisa 044617 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.95 7.95 The Grammar Key CD-ROM (4-12) This program was designed to help students unlock the English language. Once students log in, they may begin the lessons. It is recommended that they complete the lessons in order, but if you are using this for extra practice, they can choose which lessons they want to work through. Each lesson begins with a short, narrated introduction and explanation of the target concept. For example, in the adjectives lesson, the text and accompanying narration will define

adjectives, give tips for recognizing them, and offer examples of adjectives in sentences. Afterwards, students will answer a few multiple choice questions to test their comprehension of the new material. Finally, students will complete an exercise in which they identify adjectives and other parts of speech in sample sentences. All of the exercises utilize complete sentences to help kids see how all of the skills relate to each other in context ­ the way students will see them in books and the way they will use them in their own writing. The first CD-ROM ­ Parts of Speech and Sentence Structure ­ has around 30 lessons. Students in the fourth grade are expected to complete the first 15, students in the fifth grade should complete the first twenty, and students in the sixth grade or above should work through them all. After the first twenty lessons, there are reviews and a test to track progress and understanding. There is also a final test for students to take after all of the lessons have been completed. The second CD-ROM ­ Punctuation and Mechanics - follows the same format as the first, with explanations, comprehension questions, and complete sentences to edit appropriately. It also includes around thirty lessons. 4th and 5th grade students should only start this CD-ROM after completing the allotted lessons from the Parts of Speech CD. 6th grade and above students should complete all lessons of both CDs. As students complete lessons on either CD-ROM, their scores are shown next to the lesson numbers on the lesson page, so they can see which lessons they've finished and you can decide which ones need more practice. Also included is a workbook CD-ROM which supplies PDF files containing many challenging sentences and essays for the students to label. It provides additional reinforcement of the material covered in the teaching CD-ROMs. For Windows only. 049179 Complete Program. . . . 39.95 Combined Grammar, usage These materials do not include a coverage of mechanics. Ridgewood Grammar (3-5) This series focuses on grammar for a purpose - clear, effective writing. Book 1 introduces action and linking verbs, verb tenses, irregular verbs, singular and plural, common and proper nouns, subjects, pronouns, possessives, contractions, objects, prepositions, adjectives, adverbs, modifiers, and types of sentences. Book 2 reviews Book 1 material and also introduces sentence fragments, agreement, appositives, comparatives, homophones, articles, good vs. well, compound sentences, phrases, and sentence diagramming. Writing exercises give the student a chance to use his new knowledge. Book 3 includes brief review of the material, but mainly concentrates on using the concepts to write effectively. Review sections cover several units so that many concepts can be reinforced at the same time. A final review will tell you if the student has mastered the material. EACH WORKTEXT . . . . . . . . . 13.95 10.95 EACH TEACHER'S GUIDE . . . . 9.80 7.75 Worktext Teacher 010290 Book 1 (3) 010291 010292 Book 2 (4) 010293 010294 Book 3 (5) 010295

Combined Grammar, Mechanics Grammar and punctuation, but no usage. Grammar & Punctuation (1-6) This series provides sequential development of grammar and punctuation skills. Each book contains 25 punctuation or grammar rule charts that can be made into transparencies or put on display. Three practice pages are included with each rule and get increasingly difficult throughout each book and throughout the series. They provide exercises in following grammar and punctuation rules by having the student complete sentences, identify problems with writing, identify correct grammar and punctuation of sentences, and more. Included with each book is a four-page review to be used when all the rules have been taught. This review evaluates your students' acquisition of the grammar and punctuation skills. An answer key is provided. CD-ROMs are no longer included with the books, but the colorful Rule Charts, an assessment, a student record sheet and a student handbook may be downloaded from the publisher's website using the code printed in the book. ~ Rachel S. EACH BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.99 14.75 015552 Grade 1 015553 Grade 2 015554 Grade 3 015555 Grade 4 015557 Grade 5 015558 Grade 6 Grammar Practice Simplified (2-8+) Expressing oneself in correct, clear, interesting language contributes greatly to success in school, at work, and with personal relationships. This series isolates and presents the parts and pieces of the English language according to each student's emerging abilities. Within each book and throughout the series, grammar concepts gradually build on one another. Each book is divided into different sections that deal with different aspects of grammar. Every topic includes brief explanations and examples that help students methodically integrate skills and build upon their foundations. Each topic also includes numerous, straightforward exercises that hone those skills and provide the practice needed to build speed and accuracy. These exercises include tasks like writing and correcting sentences, identifying certain aspects of grammar in sentences, and answering questions about grammar. Each book includes review sections where students use the skills they have been learning to write a small essay or story. Answer key is included. ~ Rachel S. EACH BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.95 5.95 015526 Book A (2-3) Provides instruction and exercises for nouns, verbs, capital letters, periods, question marks, and more. 015527 Book B (3-4) Covers sentences, verbs, nouns, pronouns, capitalization, subjects, predicates, and more. 015528 Book C (4-5) Provides instruction and exercises in subjects, predicates, nouns, verbs, adjectives, adverbs, punctuation, and more. 015529 Book D (5-6) Covers subjects, predicates, direct objects, conjunctions, prepositions, punctuation, and more. (continued...) English / Writing 327

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

015530 Book E (6-7) Presents such topics as subjects, predicates, contractions, comparisons, quotation marks, direct and indirect objects, and more. 015531 Book F (7-8+) Provides instruction and exercises for teaching parts of speech, phrases, clauses, apostrophes, verb tenses, possessives, and more. Funny Fairy Tale Grammar (3-4) You won't find any boring pages here! This workbook is filled with grammar practice in the form of amusing exercises based around the lives of fairy tale characters. Each skill covered (nouns, verbs, adjectives, prepositions, capitalization, commas, homophones, etc.) offers one brief page of explanation and introduction followed by three worksheets of humorous practice. The variety of formats and activities along with the fictional storylines engage students in learning proper grammar. (If this approach is appealing, you may also want to check out Funny Fairy Tale Proofreading, also in our English section.) Reproducible, consumable, answers included. 64 pgs. ­ Melissa 045194 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.99 9.25

illustrations here are filled with signs, letters, and other written things for Francine to correct. However, children can try their hand at it first before flipping the page and seeing the corrected item. When Comma Came to Town is a tale telling of life without the comma - people had to connect all of their sentences with lots and lots of "ands." When the comma comes, conversation is suddenly so simple! The other six tales cover adverbs, pronouns, verbs, sentence structure, quotation marks, and capitalization. As mentioned above, these books are accompanied by a Teaching Guide, which includes an introduction and teaching tips before delving in to the lessons. Each lesson contains an explanation of the concept for the teacher and some before, during, and after reading suggestions for the tale. Then there is a worksheet to complete based on the story, plus a mini-book of the story including a crossword and word search. These activity pages are reproducible, but if you don't have access to a copier, the teaching guides can be purchased separately. - Melissa 035303 Grammar Tales Set 39.99 27.95 035304 Teaching Guide Only 12.99 9.95 Painless Junior: Grammar (3-5) Here's the junior version containing the same concise, organized, and helpful advice as the original Painless books, just geared toward a younger grade level. It will show kids that grammar doesn't have to be painful or scary, and can even be fun! The theme of the book is a pretend amusement park called Grammar World, where different animals introduce the reader to different aspects of grammar. There are five main chapters covering sentences, nouns, pronouns and adjectives, verbs and adverbs, prepositions, conjunctions, interjections, and mechanics. Information is presented in a clear, organized way that is easy for students to follow. Plenty of "Let's Try It" sections provide quizzes to practice concepts just learned, "Trick to Remember" sections highlight important hints to keep in mind, "Treasure Hunt" areas prompt students to find examples of certain topics, "Careful" sections warn students of possible problems, "Treasure Chest" sections give examples of certain topics, "Wrapping It Up" gives a summary of key ideas, and "Hitting the Target" provides practice with the chapter's ideas. Two-colored illustrations add some fun to the learning. The guide is written directly to students so they can learn and practice the concepts independently. Answers to the practice sections are included in the back of the book. 158 pgs, pb. ~ Rachel 038508 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.99 7.25

Straight Forward English Series (4+) Just the facts, ma'am. That's about what you get with this series. Each book begins with an assessment test so that you can gauge a student's understanding; this allows you to spend time and effort only where necessary. The bulk of the book is devoted to short practice exercises, which are preceded by simple explanations of concepts. A final assessment test shows how much the student has learned. Answer key is included in the back of the book. An excellent choice for remedial or brush-up work as needed. Approx. 35 pgs. EACH BOOK (except noted) . . 5.95 4.95 004553 Adjectives & Adverbs 004557 Capitalization & Punctuation 004549 Nouns & Pronouns 004551 Verbs 004555 Prepositions, Conjunctions, & Interjections 004556 Sentences 026477 All-In-One English . . 14.95 11.95 The "master" book to this series, it covers capitalization, punctuation, and all 8 parts of speech. 142 pgs. Straight Forward Advanced English Series (6+) More advanced topics, more instruction, and more pages per book distinguish the Advanced English Series from the basic series. If your English program does not cover diagramming, consider the Grammar & Diagramming Sentences offered below. Approx. 100 pgs. 004565 Grammar & Diagramming Sentences . . . . . . . . 12.95 9.50 EACH BOOK BELOW . . . . . 10.95 8.50 004566 Clauses & Phrases 004567 Mechanics 007453 Troublesome Grammar Rules of the Game (5-9) The goal of these books is to let students discover grammatical principle through questions and analysis of examples - grammar through discovery. Activities include picking out various points of grammar from a sentence, finding patterns in sentences, writing sentences, choosing effective modifiers, and combining sentences. Lessons build on each other throughout the book. A "Comprehensive Exercises" section provides review exercises and includes errors for students to correct. Separate answer keys. EACH WORKTEXT. . . . . . . . . 12.60 9.85 EACH TEACHER KEY . . . . . . . . 5.95 4.75 003963 Book 1 (5-7) 020918 Book 1 Teacher Key Covers parts of speech, punctuation, capitalization, sentence fragments, run-on sentences, contractions, possessives, and subject-verb agreement. 003964 Book 2 (6-8) 018059 Book 2 Teacher Key Teaches direct and indirect objects, linking verbs, predicate nouns and adjectives, appositives, objects of the preposition, functions of the prepositional phrase, colons & semicolons. 003966 Book 3 (7-9) 020919 Book 3 Teacher Key Works on dependent clauses, complex and compound-complex sentences, gerunds, participles and infinitives.

Grammar Tales (3+) Grammar is often thought of as a boring subject, but maybe that's just because it's associated with an endless stack of boring worksheets (unless your student loves worksheets!) teaching grammar concepts in an abstract way. If your students can't drum up any excitement for worksheets, or if they are having trouble applying what they're learning to actual writing, this unique program may appeal to them - and consequently, to you. It consists of 10 short Grammar Tales books and a teaching guide. A Grammar Tale is, well, just what it sounds like - a short story which emphasizes a particular grammatical concept. In this way, students are introduced to the concepts in context, making it easier for them to connect it to something concrete. The books fall into two main categories - five cover parts of speech, while the other five focus on mechanics and structure. Each book is fully illustrated with colorful, cartoonish illustrations and is 16 pages long. To give you an idea of what the Grammar Tales are like, here are a few examples. The Bug Book covers adjectives, and the pages are filled with bugs illustrating exciting adjectives - there is a heroic bug, a contagious bug, a silly bug, a picky bug, and even a gigantic, friendly green bug. Chicken in the City is a tale full of nouns, in which Lu-Lu the chicken decides that she is going to leave the farm. The illustrations are full of nouns with their names by them, so students can easily recognize them as nouns. In Francine Fribble, English Grammar for the Grammar Stage (3-6) Proofreading Policewoman, Francine drives all 052962 Book I Student . . . . 22.50 19.95 6.25 over town enforcing the laws of grammar. The 052963 Book I Teacher . . . . . 7.00 328 English / Writing

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

Grammar Songs Kit (2-8) Let your students sing their way to grammatical understanding! These lyrics aren't just catchy, they're filled with real learning - teaching parts of speech, plurals, punctuation, capitalization, sentence construction, verb tenses, irregular verbs - even Greek and Latin prefixes and suffixes! This introduction to grammar has been especially recommended to us by parents whose children chafe at more traditional grammar workbook fare. Kit includes a CD with 16 songs (ranging from calm to "pop" beat), 68-pg. illustrated songbook/workbook with progress chart, answers, and teacher's guide. From Audio Memory. 004852 Kit with CD . . . . . . . . 22.95 _____ Made Easy Software (4-9) This software is a great supplement to any English curriculum. It provides extra practice and reinforcement of basic grammar and punctuation concepts, presented by the animated host, Mike McGee. As soon as students load the CD-ROM and log in, they are presented with the menu of topics. After selecting a topic, students complete a few short exercises to help evaluate their strengths and weaknesses. Then, Mike shows them which areas they need practice with and they get started with the lessons. While students can work through all of the sections if desired, this process allows them to skip areas they have already mastered so that they are always learning and being challenged. Mike presents the short tutorials, explaining the concepts and giving examples. The bulk of what Mike says is also shown on the screen so students can follow along and actually see what he is explaining. Other features of the software include tests, progress charts, and a Teacher's Section with detailed student records. System requirements (PC only): Windows 7, XP or Vista; ~ Melissa EACH CD-ROM. . . . . . . . . . . . 9.99 7.95 024932 Grammar Covers nouns, verb forms (infinitive and imperative, verb and object, active and passive), simple verbs and tenses (verbs, present tense, past tense, future tense, agreement), adjectives and adverbs, pronouns and prepositions (pronouns, relative pronouns, prepositions), and sentences (phrases and clauses, simple and complex). 024935 Punctuation Covers apostrophes (contractions, possessives, plural nouns); commas (lists, with periods, apposition); brackets, hyphens, dashes, capital letters, and periods (ending a sentence, abbreviations, beginning sentences, proper nouns); semicolons and colons (separating clauses, semicolons in lists, introducing lists); question marks and exclamation points (question words, direct questions, indirect questions, short expressions); and quotation marks (direct speech, inside punctuation, dialogue).

Grammar These programs focus on grammar only and do not cover usage or mechanics. Introducing Parts of Speech Interactive DVD (1-4) Sometimes it takes kids longer to learn the parts of speech. They just need some extra practice to make it all click. This DVD plays like a computer game but the subject is grammar, not birds in slingshots. Bright colors, circles and stripes, flashing dots to click on add to this product's kid appeal. Verbs, adverbs, pronouns, adjectives, prepositions and conjunctions are all covered. Students set their own pace as they work through a series of definitions and activities. Activities ask you to click on the right word, fill in the blank, and choose yes or no. When you are correct, there is a chime. If you are incorrect, you get more practice questions to do until you master the skill. At the end of each lesson, there are workbook pages you can print out for more practice. Also print your answers for review. I liked the interactive format. Kids' answers determine how much practice they get. If they know the particular part of speech, their practice is minimal. You can apply this CD-ROM to a projector, computer or interactive whiteboard (smart board.) ~ Sara 052592 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.95 15.95 Parts-of-Speech Tales With Teacher Guide (2-5) If not daily, then at least weekly; somebody asks for a fun grammar program. We have lots of excellent grammar programs but here's one that is designed to be fun. There's a story book to introduce each part of speech ­ Noun Hound, Verb Man to the Rescue, Adjective Fairy, Adverb Farm, Princess and the Pronouns, Gary the Conjunction Guy, Preposition Pony Show, and Interjection Section. Those do sound like fun, don't they? Although the illustrations are cartoon-esque, the content of each 16 page book is rock solid. The full color books conclude with a Tip Sheet and an activity page. But there's more! An accompanying 64 page Teacher Guide includes lessons, reproducible activity pages (with answers) and mini-book replicas of the eight storybooks (students can read along or carry with them). In short, everything you need to lightheartedly introduce your students to the rudiments of grammar ­ and they'll never even suspect. ~ Janice 024818 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.99 22.95 Bridge to the Latin Road (3-6) Sometimes a publisher has such a unique approach to a skill set that it's difficult to know where to place their programs in our catalog. Such is the case with Schola Publications. The Latin Road to English Grammar is both a strong Latin course and an equally strong English grammar course (it's in the Foreign Language section). The Phonics Road to Spelling and Reading starts

as phonics/reading instruction and proceeds to strong language arts (it's in the Language Arts section). Now this program ­ appropriately called a "bridge" is both an English grammar and an introduction to Latin (and we've placed it in English and Grammar). Author Barbara Beers says it works this way: start with the four levels of Phonics Road for K-3; then use this Bridge to the Latin Road for 3rd or 4th grade; Latin Road for 5th ­ 7th/8th. The whole scope and sequence can be delayed one to two years or a student could start with either the Bridge or the Latin Road. Regardless of what course is used the student will receive strong comprehensive academics and mom (the teacher) will have the benefit of user-friendly materials. In this Bridge program the student will receive a good working introduction to Latin in the form of common roots, prefixes, and suffixes as well as strengthen the ability to identify the relationships of words in a sentence both by part of speech and sentence structure that provides the student with the foundation for Latin translation work. Those familiar with Phonics Road will recognize the building theme which continues in this Bridge program. In fact, some of the same concepts introduced in the later PR levels are reviewed and expanded ­ Framing Codes (parts of speech and parts of a sentence), Grammar Tunes (definitional information set to familiar tunes) and Designing Codes (Latin prefixes, roots, and suffixes). Scaffolding, a process of sentence diagramming, is introduced. Although this program requires teacher-student interaction, teacher prep is practically nonexistent other than watching the DVD instruction segment for the week's lessons. Daily lesson plans are provided (4 days per week for 36 weeks) with careful references to whatever resource (i.e. framing code, designing code, game) is being used. All material to instruct the student or to have the student complete is provided. There is a section on the DVDs which presents the Grammar Tunes - helpful since some of the words are tricky to fit to the designated tune. The DVD instructor also sings the tunes that are being reviewed each week which is a good reminder (she has a nice voice, too). During the course the student is building a notebook that will serve as an English reference handbook during the Latin Road courses. The pages for this notebook have been carefully constructed and provide the space needed for the student to complete all assignments as well as write dictation sentences and instructive material. The Teacher's Guide is a 3-ring binder containing 6 DVDs, daily lesson plans, Grammar Tunes (words w/ suggested tunes), Framing Codes, Sentences to Analyze, Designing Codes and Cards, and the Verb Memory Game. The Complete Student Package is another 3-ring binder which contains custom pages on which to record framing code information, sentences to analyze, and designing code information. Also included are three pencils ­ one with regular lead and one each of blue and red ­ and a scaffolding ruler which are needed for specific assignment tasks. The Curriculum Set includes both the Teacher's Guide and the Complete Student Package. ~ Janice 029772 Curriculum Set . . . . . . 149.00 006606 Complete Student Package 45.00 English / Writing 329

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

WINSTON GRAMMAR (4-12) So, you want to include grammar in your studies - but all that diagramming and dissecting of sentences doesn't appeal? How about a more hands-on, participative approach? Winston Grammar is a grammar method using very little writing, no diagramming and is a truly kinesthetic program. Colorful "clue" cards containing the parts of speech (with definitions) are used in lieu of diagramming. These cards are laid out in the same pattern as the sentence; the goal is for students to reach an intuitive understanding of the use of the parts of speech and language structure. As students learn more parts of speech and their functions, additional cards are added. On the back side of the clue cards are instructions showing Winston Grammar marking conventions so you may progress to using these to identify parts of speech in a sentence (ie; underline nouns once, verbs twice, etc.). The regular program is sufficient for 3-4 years of grammar instruction. Since the mastery approach of learning is used, you can start at any age or grade level, but the basic course should be completed before progressing to the advanced program. The advanced program contains a review of the material covered in the basic program, then progresses to more complex grammatical structures. Note that Winston Grammar does not cover punctuation or verb usage, but these are commonly found in other English coursework. Several supplemental items are also available. The Basic Program Supplementary Workbook contains 30 additional consumable worksheets that provide more practice for students using basic Winston Grammar. Tests and quizzes are included right in the workbook. You may purchase the additional workbook without an answer key or as a set. Winston Word Works is an extension of the Basic program. It teaches proper usage of words that are commonly misused - like lie and lay, who and whom, I and me, etc. - and is meant to be used between the Basic and Advanced Programs. 001519 Winston Grammar . . 41.00 32.45 Contains 30 student worksheets, pre- and post-tests, teacher's manual, quiz keys, clue cards and noun-function cards. 014663 Basic Student Pack. . 17.50 13.95 For additional students; contains student worksheets & card sets. 001425 Basic Student Worksheets Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.00 8.95 001420 Basic Program Supplementary Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.00 14.45 001418 Basic Program Supplementary Workbook only . . . . 11.00 8.95 048568 Basic Clue Cards only 7.50 6.15 001427 Word Works . . . . . . 27.00 21.45 001428 Word Works Workbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.00 8.95 003361 Advanced Grammar 41.00 32.45 Contains 85 worksheets with pre- and posttests, teacher's manual, quiz keys, and additional cards needed. 004689 Advanced Student Pack 17.50 13.95 Contains student worksheets and cards. 001413 Adv. Worksheets only11.00 8.95 048567 Adv. Clue Cards only 7.50 6.15

Simply Grammar (4-8) A revised and expanded edition of First Grammar Lessons by Charlotte Mason, authored by Karen Andreola. Truly a gentle, friendly, but thorough approach to grammar without all of the tedious workbooking - in the true spirit of Charlotte Mason. Karen has retained the soul of the book while updating it for us, replacing obscure words and giving us larger, crisper type, but using turn-of-the century illustrations and vine-bordered pages. The book embraces an interactive approach to grammar, accomplished, for the most part, orally. It is a natural, uncomplicated method - you simply sit down with your child and this book and teach. Lessons are to be completed at the rate of one per week, in short, 10-15 minute sessions. One rule is taught per lesson. The 46 lessons here, along with the additional exercises in the appendices, should supply a year of pleasurable instruction. 002522 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.95 17.95 Our Mother Tongue: Guide to English Grammar (4-AD) Not too long ago my husband started commenting that I often use pronouns that have indistinct antecedents (i.e. "Put that away!") I was somewhat defensive about this until I realized that he (and many others) commit the same grammatical faux pas and most of us would benefit from increasing our command of English. Studying our language enables us to choose our words wisely, enjoy and appreciate great literature, understand the thoughts of others, give clear and correct expression to our own thoughts, and train our minds to think in an orderly fashion. Designed to give a comprehensive overview of all aspects of our language, I can imagine Our Mother Tongue used to brush up on grammar as you teach your children or for introducing an older student (perhaps a recent escapee from the government schools where English is seldom taught) to the delights of a systematic examination of our language. Starting with the basic facts of grammar - the eight classes of words and the parts and types of sentences, author Nancy Wilson continues her thorough examination of all the major concepts in English grammar by looking at the special properties of nouns, pronouns, verbs, and modifiers. She also spends some time on the "friendliest" of English grammatical constructs verbals. And if you can't quite remember what a verbal is, well . . . . . The various sections of the book follow an identifiable pattern. There are examples, explanations and definitions followed by exercises. Many of the examples and exercise sentences are taken from Scripture and from great English writers. Adding spice to this examination are periodic sidebars detailing the development of the English language. Did you know that many of our grammar rules came into being in the eighteenth century when the Enlightenment inspired man to reduce everything to neat, tidy, governable systems? In case you're wondering, the "D" word - diagramming - is definitely a part of this overview. Actually, in a day and age when graphic organizers are the educational "rage," it's surprising that people are so determined to overlook the advantages of diagramming. Like all graphic

organizers, the use of diagramming trains the student to quickly analyze the subject matter - in this case, sentence structure. Comprehensive in scope, well-organized, and (dare I say it?) enjoyable, this book could be a helpful tool as you strive to teach your children to love our mother tongue and how it works. ~ Janice 006108 Book. . . . . . . . . . . . 20.00 15.95 006106 Answer Key. . . . . . . . 5.00 4.25 A Journey Through Grammar Land (5-7) A totally self-instructional grammar course with a difference! Grammar instruction is given via story format, as students follow the main character, Tank, through Grammar Land (reminiscent of Phantom Tollbooth!). As he learns about language, he is assigned to work on "scrolls." At these junctures, the student becomes Tank and completes the corresponding exercise. No teacher preparation or instruction is required. Answer key included. This interactive approach may appeal to some students more than the typical methods of grammar instruction. Part 1 covers the "Namers" and their "Substituters". Students will recognize them as nouns and pronouns. Part 2 deals with the "Tellers" or verbs. Students will easily pick up on proper syntax of helping verbs in combination and also learn who the "Linkers" are as well as all about the BE family. Part 3 covers adjectives and adverbs with a trip through the Descriptive Mountains on to the Central Intelligence Adverbial Agency. Learn how Tank and his friends outmaneuver King Falsifier and the renegades in this book. Part 4 teaches about prepositions and conjunctions. Tour Prepositional Railway Station and then go to Connecting Junction. Part 5 covers the various types of clauses. Visit Thought Trucking Terminal and Clause Village, home of the complex sentence builders. Parts 1 and 2 have now been combined into one volume, as have Parts 3 and 4. In combined volumes, the story is found in the first part of the book and the exercises in the second part. Tests are included with the books. 021716 Parts 1 & 2 . . . . . . 30.00 26.45 024031 Parts 3 & 4 . . . . . . . 30.00 26.45 010094 Part 5 . . . . . . . . . . . 15.00 13.25 JTGLST Set of all books . . . . 75.00 62.95 This set includes all the Journey Through Grammar Land books: Part 1, Part 2, the combo book for Parts 3 & 4, and Part 5. Grammar-Land (5-10) Allow me to introduce you to Judge Grammar. Judge Grammar is a great, stern old Judge who rules over Kings and Queens. When Judge Grammar took control of Grammar-Land, he gave all of his words to his nine followers: rich and pompous Mr. Noun, his useful friend Mr. Pronoun, little Article, the talkative Adjective, busy Dr. Verb and Adverb, perky Preposition, convenient Conjunction and the odd Mr. Interjection. Our story begins noisily, as there is much quarreling amongst the nine parts of speech, over the ownership of certain words. Unfortunately, they awaken Judge Grammar from his long nap! Judge Grammar determines that he must restore order to the rules and calls upon his counsel, Sergeant Parsing, who has the task of finding out all of the information and Dr. Syntax who determines right and wrong accord-

330

English / Writing

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

ing to the law. In the chapters to follow, each of the nine must defend their case before the judge and his counsel, resulting in a delightful introduction to grammar rules and application. Originally published in 1877, this charming allegory presents clear explanations in a delightful way. SC. 109 pgs. ~ Deanne 025900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.95 8.85

Applications of Grammar (7-12) Several years ago, we reviewed a sample of the original Applications of Grammar series and found it to be a so-so program. Christian Liberty Press has done an excellent job on the revised edition, and we are happy that we can wholeheartedly offer it now. As the title implies, the emphasis is on applying grammar rules to writing. Students learn to identify the eight parts of speech and how to use these properly in phrases, clauses, and sentences. The program stresses correct sentence structure, sentence diagramming, and good paragraph formation. As with all Christian Liberty books, this series is God-honoring as well. All grammar books cover pretty much the same material, so what stands out about this one? First of all, biblical content is evident throughout the book. In addition, a student could learn a great deal of history just by reading the excerpts of various literary works used as examples. Each lesson begins with a clear explanation of a topic and gives examples to drive home the point. Tables are used to demonstrate concepts like person, tense, and voice. Exercises have an adequate but not excessive amount of practice for each skill. Later sections of the book focus on word usage and more advanced literary concepts. Students then use these skills in writing paragraphs, short stories or newspaper articles. Not only is the content good, but so is the price - less than $20 for student book, teacher key and test booklet. Another good value from Christian Liberty Press. 002526 Book 1 Worktext (7) 13.99 10.50 002524 Book 1 Answer Key 7.99 6.25 002527 Book 1 Test Packet 4.99 3.95 002529 Book 2 Worktext (8) 13.99 10.50 002528 Book 2 Answer Key 7.99 6.25 002530 Book 2 Test Packet 4.99 3.95 002533 Book 3 Worktext (9) 13.99 10.50 002531 Book 3 Answer Key 7.99 6.25 002535 Book 3 Test Packet 4.99 3.95 005469 Book 4 Worktext (10) 13.99 10.50 005470 Book 4 Tchr Manual 7.99 6.25 005471 Book 4 Test Packet 4.99 3.95 005472 Book 5 Worktext (11) 10.99 8.50 005473 Book 5 Tchr Manual 7.99 6.25 005474 Book 5 Test Packet 4.99 3.95 005475 Book 6 Worktext (12) 13.99 10.50 005476 Book 6 Tchr Manual 7.99 6.25 005479 Book 6 Test Packet 4.99 3.95

The Big Bad Grammar Slammer: The Diagramming Game (5-12) Yeah, it's so good it's "bad." This course teaches parts of speech and sentence construction, reinforcing the learning with a game that can be played in groups, with 2, or alone. Invented by author Karen Newell to "take the doldrums out of diagramming", this game will not only help students master complex sentence construction, but make them proficient punctuators too. The presentation of information is very clear ­ and helpfully broken down into digestible chunks. The program has seven modules, each with only five or six rules, each presented in a onepage tutorial. I love the simple flowchart Mrs. Newell uses to direct student progress through the rules. Basically, students will study the tutorial then write five sentences applying the rule. If they are correct, they go to the next rule. Otherwise, they write five more, conceptually looping until they "get it." After this, they optionally go on a "detective hunt" to round up these "bad" guys. After all rules in a module are mastered, they get to play the Big Bad Grammar Slammer for the completed module, including all earlier modules in the game. Yup, and if you break the rules (grammar rules), you end up in the (you guessed it) slammer. Rules for playing the game alone, with multiple players, and with teams are provided. The only additional materials you need to supply are one regular die and paper and pencil(s) for each player. Quizzes and tests are a snap to construct, since they utilize the same format as the game. A test for each module should be given after the student has played the game five times using the rules in that module. Quizzes can be given at any time, but would be useful as drill and review after the course is completed. The grammar instruction is easy to read and understand even as the program progresses from simple to more complex sentence structures. Uncluttered text pages use very readable font size. Each construction is introduced and integral concepts are explained and shown with examples. Presentation is very clear. Diagramming of each rule (construct) is modeled then the student is asked to diagram several similarly-constructed sentences. The reinforcing game is also simple, but ingenious, and highly motivating. Can your children learn to play by the rules (of proper sentence construction and diagramming), or will they have to "do time" in the Big, Bad Grammar Slammer? 044639 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.95 16.95

Grammar Practice These materials focus on grammar practice and offer little to no grammar instruction. MAD LIBS (3-AD) Q: What helps you learn your parts of speech while providing good, clean fun? A: MAD LIBS! Mad Libs are books of stories with missing words. The reader asks a player for a part of speech (noun, adverb, etc.) to fill in each blank. The resulting story ranges from unusual to hysterical. Use them at parties, doctors' offices, during travel, or just enjoy them at home. Chances are that your kids won't even know they're learning, they'll be having so much fun! EACH BOOK (except noted) . . 3.99 2.95 051330 Ad Lib 006727 Camp Daze Mad Libs 027260 Christmas Carol Mad Libs 032812 Christmas Fun Mad Libs 032832 Cool Mad Libs 019752 Dance Mania Mad Libs 018838 Family Tree Mad Libs 006723 Goofy Mad Libs 032856 Grab Bag Mad Libs 031874 Graduation Mad Libs 019770 Grand Slam Mad Libs 049028 Happily Ever Mad Libs 019824 Happy Birthday Mad Libs 020554 Holly Jolly Mad Libs 6.99 5.25 051331 Hot Off the Presses 006726 Kid Libs 020557 Mad About Animals Mad Libs 032880 Mad Libs for Presidents 008590 Mad Libs from Outer Space 019651 Mad Libs in Love 008997 Mad Libs on the Road 001471 Mad, Mad, Mad, Mad, Mad Libs 019875 Ninjas Mad Libs 006724 Off the Wall Mad Libs 006720 Original Mad Libs 019853 Peace, Love, and Mad Libs 018869 Pirates Mad Libs 019766 Slam Dunk Mad Libs 019854 Star Wars Mad Libs 032969 Straight A Mad Libs 019876 Totally Pink Mad Libs 007826 Upside-Down Mad Libs 006725 Vacation Fun Mad Libs 008446 We Wish You a Merry Mad Libs 032883 Worst-Case Scenario Hndbk: Travel 032998 You've Got Mad Libs! Letters to Mom & Dad Mad Libs (3-AD) A twist to classic Mad Libs, here are 21 letters to fill out in Mad Lib fashion. Each letter has a unique theme, such as "thank you," "mother's/ father's day," or "just because" and once you fill in the parts of speech, each letter is bound to get some laughs. Stickers are included to seal the letters, which are on colorful stationary. 040732 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.99 3.75 Best of Mad Libs (3-AD) These editions each include 125 of the funniest Mad Libs ever written. That's a ton of Mad Libs to fill out and there's also a history of the game as told by the creator. Also included are several Mad Libs that have been filled out by celebrities. A must-have for Mad Lib lovers. 018778 Best of... . . . . . . . . . . 6.99 5.25 019849 More Best of... . . . . . 6.99 5.25 English / Writing 331

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

Mad Libs Junior (1-4) Now even early readers who don't know their parts of speech can still play Mad Libs! Junior Mad Libs are larger in format and type and feature lists of possible nouns, adjectives, verbs, and adverbs which younger children can select and fill in the blanks to complete the story. The Junior Mad Libs are formatted similarly to the original Mad Libs, but where the original asks for a verb or noun beneath a blank space, Junior Mad Libs feature a symbol beneath each blank. These symbols correspond to symbols printed above a list of parts of speech, allowing the child to select the proper part of speech and fill it in the blank without having to come up with the part of speech on their own. Although we still prefer the original format for fun and learning the parts of speech, these make it easier for younger children to get in on the fun, too. EACH BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.99 3.75 032799 Animals, Animals, Animals! 032935 School Rules 032964 Snack Attack 032966 Sports Star 032972 Super Silly 031876 Under the Sea

Mad Libs Activity Book (PK-2) Bring the fun of Mad Libs to younger kids with this unique activity book. Sixteen fun stories are included in the book, with the traditional MadLib blanks in sentences. The stories are composed of 3-5 short sentences with 5 blanks in every story. The cool thing about this book is that the blanks in the stories have outlines of shapes and then every story is accompanied by 9 shape stickers to put in them (over 140 stickers in all!). The shape stickers have specific words on them, as well as a colorful illustration depicting the word. There are more stickers than blanks for each story, so kids still get to pick specific words they want, but they don't have the pressure of coming up with words out of nowhere. Each of the 16 stories in the book is also accompanied by a coloring page that illustrates the story. Featuring blanks to fill in on fun stories, coloring pages, and lots of stickers, kids will have tons of fun with this activity book. 32 pgs, pb. ~Rachel 006488 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.99 4.50 Word Fun (2-4) Because of the title, you probably won't be surprised to learn that this book provides lots Home School AdLibs (3-AD) Whether you're practicing parts of speech or of fun with words. It's a colorful, glossy-paged just having fun, everyone enjoys filling out Mad book that will definitely grab kids' attention, Libs! Written by a homeschool family, what and it does a good job of giving examples of this booklet lacks in visual appeal it makes up different parts of speech in a fun way. It covers for with its unique content. It features 16 single- nouns, verbs, adjectives, adverbs, pronouns, page stories with blanks to fill in with random conjunctions, interjections, and prepositions. parts of speech (adjectives, adverbs, nouns, For each type of word, plenty of examples are verbs, exclamations, etc.), and then you read given. Each section starts with the statement the completed story aloud with some hilarious "If you were a noun (or verb or adjective, etc.) results. With homeschool-oriented topics like you would be a..." and then starts listing things the difference between public and homeschool- (which are the featured part of speech) in a ing, co-op classes, homeschool conventions, fun, story-like manner. So, if you were a noun, daily schedules, and more, the whole family you would be a star, a cloud, an astronaut, or the moon; if you were a verb you could swim, will enjoy these AdLibs. ~ Rachel 015436 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.95 dance, tiptoe, leap, paddle, travel, cartwheel, or plunge, etc. You get the point. The featured part of speech is always bolded in the text and Grammar All-Stars (2-4) Having trouble getting your students to learn fun, colorful illustrations accompany the story. about the different parts of speech or kinds of Short explanatory paragraphs help explain each words? This fun series will have them learning part of speech as well as various aspects of about the words before they even realize it. them like proper nouns, past/present/future 332 English / Writing

Each book is actually a fun, sports-themed story for the student to read. The stories are about kids playing various sports and feature large text and bright, colorful, full-page illustrations. Within each story, the featured type of word (like all the adjectives, all the verbs, all the contractions, etc) are shown in bold, so students will see how common the type of word is and how it properly fits into language. Sometimes the story itself with incorporate lessons about the type of word. For example, in Slam Dunk Pronouns, two players talk about how the coach has to switch players out, but he has to make sure the substitute can do the same job the starter does, just like you have to pick out a pronoun that does the same job as the noun it replaces. Colorful text boxes are also included throughout the stories that explain rules related to the featured part of speech or kind of words. This series definitely provides a fun way to introduce and explain different types of words to students. Each book is 32 pgs, pb. ~ Rachel EACH BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.95 7.25 046210 Bowling Alley Adjective 046216 Catch-a-Wave Compounds 046218 Karate Contractions 046217 Half-Pipe Homonyms 046211 Hole In One Adverbs 046212 Home Run Verbs 046219 Pit Stop Prefixes 046213 Slam Dunk Pronouns 046220 Slap Shot Synonyms and Antonyms 046221 Soccer Goal Suffixes 046214 Tennis Court Conjunctions 046215 Touchdown Nouns

tense verbs, etc. Most of the book, however, is focused on the colorful pictures and fun story. The pictures really add a lot of fun, and all of the examples will help kids understand which kind of words are which. By Michael Dahl and Nancy Loewen, 192 pgs, pb. ~ Rachel 010914 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.95 11.50 Silly Sticker Stories (2-AD) Think Mad Libs with stickers! These little books each hold a fun tale on the inside cover with crucial adjectives, verbs, and nouns left out. Kids can choose from the variety of words given (42 of each type!), or create their own on the blank stickers provided and stick them in the appropriate spaces to finish the story. The handy format and reusable stickers allow children to create many, many humorous versions wherever they go. ~ Steph EACH BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.50 1.30 034930 Crazy Lunch 006539 Birthday Bash 006542 Circus Surprise 014033 Funny Fairy Tale 014139 Zany Zoo Silly Grammar Practice (1-6) This series of six workbooks provides students with exercises that link traditional grammar rules with in-context examples and exercises so they understand how grammar concepts function in different real-world situations. Similar to the Singapore Math books from the same publisher, these books provide quality, concise practice with little fluff. Not much actual instruction is given in the book, but sometimes the directions for the worksheets give hints for correct usage, highlight exceptions to grammar rules, and provide simple, non-technical definitions to help students understand the exercises. Many different types of exercises are provided, including fill in the blank (often with answers from a word bank), short answer, completing and rewriting sentences, multiple-choice, and more. A few hands-on activities are also included like completing rhymes and short stories, solving riddles and puzzles, and doing word searches. Each workbook is for a specific grade level and provides challenging, interesting, grade-specific exercises for that age. The number of questions in one worksheet varies from grade to grade and also depends on the type of exercise it is, but typically one worksheet will take about ten minutes to complete. These are great supplements to any grammar program and provide a great break from simply learning all the rules. Also, when students apply grammar rules to real-life English, like the exercises in this book have them do, they are much more likely to understand and use those grammar rules. The workbooks are consumable but not reproducible, so you will need one for each student. Each book includes a complete answer key and a few black and white illustrations for visual appeal. Books between 80-120 pgs, pb. ~ Rachel EACH BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.00 040969 Grade 1 040972 Grade 4 040970 Grade 2 040973 Grade 5 040971 Grade 3 040974 Grade 6 Words, Phrases, Clauses (3rd Edition) (8-10) 054501 Teacher's Manual . . . 9.36 9.25 054500 Student Text . . . . . . 18.79 18.50

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

Grammar with a Writing Emphasis These materials focus on grammar but also include some writing instruction. Easy Writing: Teaching Students How to Write Complex Sentence Structures (4-12) We already have lots of writing programs in our catalog, so why add Easy Writing? Because this book focuses not so much on what to say, but how to say it. Most of the writing programs concentrate on sentence content; this product is concerned with sentence structure. And it's not the same as grammar; identifying grammatical constructs in someone else's writing is different than composing good sentences of your own. Those of you who have used Easy Grammar know that those books are light on instruction and heavy on practice; not so here. This book offers a good balance of instruction, examples and practice. Another difference is that the role of the teacher is stressed more here. The program contains eight units: items in a series, semicolons, appositives, present participial phrases, past participial phrases, having + past participles, subordinate clauses, and relative clauses. Each unit is taught at two levels: level 1 (lower and upper elementary level) gives the easier examples; level 2 (for junior high and high school) contains the more complex. For each unit, determine the best starting point for your student. Some concepts, such as items in a series, may already be familiar to a student while others may be brand new. For each lesson, instruction is given first, followed by examples, then practice exercises. Coverage of each topic seems adequate to get the idea across. Answer key is provided in the book. 007561. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.95 22.45 Grammar and Composition (5-8) This workbook provides students with opportunities to practice a wide range of grammar and writing skills. The book is divided into six parts, with each part containing four to six lessons. The first part, Words, begins with nouns, pronouns, verbs, modifiers, preposition, conjunctions, and interjections. Next is Sentences, followed by Clauses, Punctuation, Major Sentence Errors, and Writing Prose. Each activity begins with a one to two page lesson that reviews a particular component of English grammar, with plenty of examples, model sentences, and bold vocabulary words. Each lesson is followed by a worksheet that requires students to apply concepts taught in the lesson. Worksheets formats vary depending on the concept taught, but generally consist of editing sentences, fill-in-the-blank exercises, labeling parts of speech, and writing (or re-writing) sentences. Writing prompts are included so that students develop composition skills as well. Answer Key included. Reproducible. ~ Lisa 030259 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.99 9.50 Writing a Step Above (6-12) Connie Schenkelberg has put together a program, the likes of which we have not seen before. Its basic premise is that grammar instruction, taught in isolation, does little to improve students' writing levels. Therefore, the author has employed a method (taught to her by a college professor) that teaches students gram-

mar through writing. As the author defines her course, it is "grammar instruction that improves students' reading, writing, and listening skills". She has 14 years of teaching experience and has used this method with her public-school students and in her own home school, apparently with great success. The author's personality comes through in the chatty style of this very teacher-friendly manual. Connie tells you how to present each new skill or pattern, supplying you with reproducible worksheets, daily lesson plans, and an answer key. She estimates that daily instruction will take about 15 minutes of your time, and another 15 minutes for the student to work independently on reinforcement exercises. Basically, students should both learn grammar and improve their writing skills by using this course. Starting from the simplest sentence construction (noun, verb), increasingly complex structures are studied and practiced in writing exercises. The instruction received here should expand the student's writing repertoires, resulting in improvement in all types of writing, both expository and creative. Diagramming is integrated into the course and is used as a visual tool in understanding the syntax of sentences as their structures become more complex. While some children (especially ones who read extensively from well-written books) may develop these writing skills on their own, most would benefit from the approach in this course. This is "grammar with a purpose." The goal of grammar instruction should be to improve writing - not just to learn how to dissect sentences. I can readily see how teaching grammar via this method would produce tangible results. 001838 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.00 24.25 Grammar Rules! (7-12) This book provides a straightforward approach to basic English grammar and how to apply that grammar to writing skills. There are 40 lessons, each with four pages featuring practice with four different skills: parts of speech, mechanics, diagramming and proofreading. In the first part of each lesson, students complete exercises such as identifying the parts of speech in sentences, choosing the correct parts of speech, and linking parts of speech with others, (i.e. - circling an adjective and then drawing an arrow to the word it describes, etc.). In the mechanics section of each lesson, students learn a rule or common error associated with the part of speech just learned. Examples of exercises include choosing the correct form of words, identifying incorrect usage of words, correcting punctuation, improving poorly written sentences, and more. The third section of each lesson focuses on diagramming. As students work through the book, they will begin by diagramming two or three word sentences and work their way up to very complicated ones. Sometimes students will have to correct the sentences before they diagram them. The final section on proofreading contains a passage that students must edit, with errors which typically correspond to topics covered in the featured lesson. At the beginning of the book the instructions tell students the number of errors in each sentence, later changing to the number of errors found in the whole passage, and by the end of the book students are expected to find all the errors without any

tips. After every ten lessons in the book, there is a two-page review section. This section follows the same format as the lessons but includes content from the previous ten lessons to make sure students are retaining what they've learned. The end of the book holds a glossary of grammar terms and answer key. While the early exercises in the book are relatively simple and may be appropriate for older elementary students, later exercises are more complex - at more of a high school level. We've changed the recommended grade level to 7-12 due to some irreverent and slightly edgy content that is more appropriate for older students (slang like "barf" and other attention-getting "gross" content, humorous mentions of actresses with revealing dresses, etc.). Not reproducible. ~ Rachel S. 022200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.95 11.95 The Stewart English Program (7-12) Grammar with a purpose is the overriding philosophy of this program as it seeks to demonstrate the connection of grammar instruction to reading and writing. The lessons are interesting, even appealing. After an explanation of the topic, samples are presented from great literature, so the student can see the technique or rule as used by successful authors such as Agatha Christie, J.R.R. Tolkien, Robert Louis Stevenson, Jane Austen, Jack London and many more. Exercises are very interactive and always presented with the goal of improving writing skills, emphasizing the application of the material to a finished product. Charlotte Mason advocates will like the inclusion of copy work as students are asked to find and copy samples of the construct from other literature. Composition is also integrated throughout the program, but not in enough quantity to qualify this as a complete English course. Use it with another writing course, journaling or with a literature program that incorporates a lot of writing (such as the Literature Critical Thinking courses by Jim Stobaugh). Each worktext can be used over a 2-year span. Book 1, Principles Plus, emphasizes the basics and has excellent explanations of the parts of speech and punctuation rules (especially good presentation of quotation marks). It also covers parts of the sentence and subject-verb agreement. Book 2, Grammar Plus, is a complete grammar course. The presentation of grammatical structures is by function rather than form. It covers more complex issues of agreement, usage, pronoun case, and advanced punctuation. While each of the three books incorporate the use of learned elements in writing, Book 3, Writing Plus moves into the building of written compositions, culminating with writing activities that get you started on full-length pieces. It emphasizes writing style and stylistic methods. All instruction for the course is contained in the worktext. Teacher's Guides are simply Answer Keys to the exercises. 006964 Book 1 - Principles Plus (7-8) . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.00 9.15 006959 Book 1 - Answer Key 7.25 5.75 006963 Book 2 - Grammar Plus (9-10) . . . . . . . . . . . 12.65 9.95 006961 Book 2 - Answer Key 9.50 7.45 006966 Book 3 Writing Plus. . . (11-12) . . . . . . . . . . 10.70 8.50 006962 Book 3 - Answer Key 9.50 7.45 English / Writing 333

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

usage These materials focus on usage only including homophones, subject/verb agreement, figurative language etc. - and do not cover grammar or mechanics. Dear Deer: A Book of Homophones (PK-2) "Dear, Deer, I now live at the zoo. Wait until you hear what goes on over here. Love, Aunt Ant.". So begins a lively letter as Ant tells Deer about her animal friends, homophone style! You'll learn about the Moose who loves mousse, the Horse who is hoarse, the Fox who blew blue bubbles, and more. Humorous cartoon illustrations appear on each page, and the homophones and homonyms appear in large caps throughout the story to bring them to the reader's attention. A clever story that's as entertaining as it is educational--just watch out for those bad puns your kids are bound to create! By Gene Barretta. 40 pgs, pb. ~ Lisa 034661 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.99 5.50

Crazy Like a Fox: A Simile Story (PK-3) Kids always remember things easier when they're taught in a fun way. This storybook should definitely help them remember what a simile is, and anyone who likes wordplay should enjoy it. It's a cute story about a fox named Rufus who causes some trouble with a sheep named Babette. He moves as fast as lightning, sneaks like a thief in the night, roars like a lion, etc. in an attempt to get Babette to a certain location. With a nice surprise ending and a simile on pretty much every page, this is a great supplement to your English instruction and just a fun reading book to have around in general. Bold, colorful pages are full of captivating illustrations. By Loreen Leedy, 32 pgs, pb. ~Rachel 047449 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.95 5.50 Dr. Fry's Homophones Workbook (3-6) Dew ewe ever get confused about witch word two ewes? It's important that students learn the difference between homophones, which are responsible for a large percentage of errors in papers, essays, and reports. Homophones are tricky because they are words that sound the same but are spelled differently and mean very different things. Some words have multiple homophones, for example to, too, and two. While some homophones are easier to keep straight, like eye and I, some continue to confuse students as well as adults - like your and you're, or it's and its. This workbook presents 82 different groups of homophones, with an entire worksheet devoted to each set. The pages first define both words, and then students choose the correct word to complete ten sentences. For extra practice, they can write a sentence or a joke using each of the homophones covered on the page. By the time students com334 English / Writing

plete this workbook, you won't have to worry Daily Warm-Ups: Common English Idioms about the fact that the spell checker won't pick What does it mean to badger someone? To be up on these kinds of mistakes. - Melissa born with a silver spoon in one's mouth? To get 023352 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.99 10.95 a dose of one's own medicine? We have all of these sayings in the English language, and we I Laid An Egg on Aunt Ruth's Head: use them everyday, but have you ever thought Conquering English and It's Its Ruthless Ways about what they really mean? These books are (4-12) great for class discussion and are divided into If the fine points of our confusing language different categories of idiom topics like animal, have you ­ well ­ confused, Aunt Ruth has business, body, clothes, color, food, medical, most likely paved the way for your gram- money, and more. Each daily lesson displays matical rescue. In a series of 43 entertaining an idiom, describes what it means, and then vignettes, her nephew (the author) humorously prompts a discussion about the topic or gives resolves the lay vs. lie issue, addresses the mis- an activity to complete like writing about a understanding between affect and effect, and time you saw an idiom in effect (for me I would clarifies the fine distinction between nauseous describe how my brother is like a bull in a china and nauseated, along with explaining other shop because he leaves a path of destruction "troublesome" usage topics. In a series of wherever he goes), matching idioms with their chapters you won't soon forget, John applies meanings, using an idiom in a sentence, com(generally) unrequested correctives to his Aunt's pleting common idioms, and more. The Level errant speech (in addition to laying eggs on her 1 book has more common idioms and slightly head). In doing so he not only provides valu- easier activities to complete while Level 2 is a able instruction to help your student avoid the tad more advanced, but both are practically the most common usage and punctuation errors, but same, giving short, daily exercises or discussion provides the veritable "spoonful of sugar" for the prompts centered around an idiom. These are "medicine" of grammar instruction. Your stu- great to use at the very beginning of class to dents will enjoy using this text to study usage as get students into learning mode, near the end opposed to a dry textbook. After reading each of class to make good educational use of the narrative, they can practice their understand- transitional time, in the middle of class to shift ing using the companion Aunt Ruth Grammar gears between lessons, or whenever else you Drills for Excellence. Available in either print have unused minutes. 190 pgs each. ~ Rachel or CD format, it contains worksheet pages (and EACH BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.00 15.75 additional amusement) for each of the chapter 034322 Level 1 (7-12) topics, cumulative reviews at regular intervals (8 041789 Level 2 (9-12) in all), and a 15-part (and 15-page) comprehensive review to use at the end. The CD-ROM is 100 Words Almost Everyone Confuses & in Adobe Acrobat format and allows you to print Misuses (5-AD) as many copies of pages as needed for your own This dictionary of 100 commonly misused family. Answers to all worksheets and reviews words is a valuable yet inexpensive resource. are included. Words are listed alphabetically and include To use as a reference, a topical index in the phonetic spellings, part of speech, inflections, back will direct you to its corresponding chap- definitions (usually several), and examples of ter. For more information about any usage usage. One cool feature is that many of the topic, a Common Rough Spots in English sec- examples of usage aren't your basic, boring tion lists them in alphabetical order, references sentences; they are excerpts from classic works the chapter it's featured in, provides the applica- of literature. Etymologies (history of a word) ble grammar rule, and includes sentences mod- are also included for each entry. Some entries eling correct usage. The author also includes a include additional usage notes that present table of Past Participles of Irregular Words for important information and guidance on matters your conjugative delight. of grammar, diction, pronunciation, and nuanc049268 Text . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.99 12.95 es. From American Heritage® Dictionaries, this 049266 Print Workshts/Key 20.00 17.95 book gets right to the point and gives you the 049267 CD-ROM Wrksht/Key12.00 10.50 definitions and information you need to know about commonly confused words, from adverse Daily Warm Ups: Commonly Confused Words to zoology. 120 pgs, pb. ~ Rachel (5-AD) 040514 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.95 4.75 A collection of 180 (one for each day of the typical school year) quick activities to teach, Wrong Word Dictionary (6-AD) practice, and/or review commonly confused Compliment or complement? Composed or and misused words. Many homophones such comprised? Allude or elude? Do you know the as aisle/I'll/isle, boar/boor/bore, and their/there/ right word to use? Don't be embarrassed if you they're as well as similar sounding word pairs don't. Many words are used incorrectly as part like elicit/illicit and descent/dissent are cov- of common spoken English. However, the right ered. Additionally, several lessons on proper thing to do is to learn the correct word for the word choice are provided. Simple exercises best use in our writing and speaking. This secwill teach your child when to use (among oth- ond edition has 2,500 of the most commonly ers) fewer as opposed to less, literally instead confused words in the English language. The of figuratively, and among instead of between. alphabetical arrangement is easy to follow and Although the provided exercises simply involve many of the words are not difficult, just often selecting the correct word to complete the sen- confused. For example, take the words believe, tence, each lesson includes an additional writ- feel and think. The book gives a definition and ing exercise suggestion. ~ Enh a sample sentence for each word. When you see 025745 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.00 15.75 them all together, the difference is clear. Other See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

words may not be used every day, but more in an essay or on an exam, like axiom (an established truth) and axion (a hypothetical particle of matter with no charge.) I think every student preparing to take college exams should read this book. Parents may like it too, I sure did. 263 pgs, pb. ~ Sara 052817 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.95 11.50 Bugaboo Review (9-12) 053303 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.00 10.25

Figures of Speech: 60 Ways to Turn a Phrase (9-AD) 054449 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.95 Usage: A Workbook for Students of English (10-12) 054498 Student Workbook. . 21.48 20.95 054499 Teacher's Manual . . . 9.36 9.25 Mechanics These materials focus on mechanics only and do not cover grammar or usage.

Punctuation: The Write Stuff! (3-5) Keeping track of all the different rules of those little dots, dashes, and squiggles can be challenging to a young writer. When do I use double quotation marks? When do I use singles? When do I use a comma before a quotation? Thankfully, this book is here to help. With quirky illustrations, it introduces the various marks as characters, with bullet points for usage and an explanatory paragraph from the mark's perspective. You'll be introduced to the listmaking comma ("I'm the ref who steps in and brings order," he says), the Parentheses twins, and the Possessive Apostrophe ­ and you'll remember them, too. An excellent handbook for kids. 64 pages, softcover. ~ Mark 022746 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.99 5.95 Professor Grammar's Punctuation Packets (3-6) I'm embarrassed to say that I probably need to complete these punctuation packets myself as a grammar refresher. This age of informal writing, quick emails and text messages has reduced my recall of proper grammar rules to merely hazy memories. This resource contains packets of reproducible activities that review common grammar rules. Eight packets are included: Commas I, Commas II, Capital Letters I, Capital Letters II, End Punctuation, Apostrophes, Quotation Marks, and Colons and Semicolons. Each packet consists of six activities (each page introducing a specific punctuation rule) plus one tic-tac-toe review activity. The packets are selfpaced in that the student checks off the worksheets as the packet is completed. There is also a good variety of worksheet activities, many of which are self-checking. For example, you may be asked to find and circle letters that need to be capitalized, and those circled letters should spell out the name of a holiday. 80 pgs. ~ Anh 052390 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.99 9.95

Jumpstarters for Capitalization & Punctuation (4-8) Get your child thinking before the "official" schoolwork begins. Jumpstarters books contain around 40 pages, each with 5 short daily activities. Activities are designed to take just a few minutes and provide a variety of exercises based on an English or language arts skill. Pages are grouped together by skill, so you can work through them in order, or pick and choose to use as review. Activities in this book cover periods, question marks, exclamation points, commas, apostrophes, quotation marks, colons & semicolons, proper nouns, and important words. Reproducible, 46 pgs w/ answer key. 044946 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.99 6.75 Jumpstarters for Abbreviations (4-8+) This abbreviations practice book is meant to be a warm-up for the day, introducing students to different common and not-so-common abbreviations. Each page is split into five sets of problems with four to five questions each, making it easy to use one page for each school week. Each week/page contains different topics including people and places, measurement, science and technology, initializations, writing, and careers. All questions have clues to the answers whether it's choosing a word from a list, matching, unscrambling a word, or multiple choice. Answers are in the back of the book. Reproducible. 46 pgs. ~ Alissa 021301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.99 6.75 Punctuation Puzzlers (5-6) This book provides a fun way for students to see how simple changes in punctuation can change the meaning of sentences and allows them practice with punctuation skills. The workbook is full of passages that students must punctuate based on a picture or other context clues. The passages don't make sense until students add the necessary commas, apostrophes, and ending punctuation. Many of the passages come with hints like "add two commas and a question mark to correct this sentence" or "add quotation marks to identify who is speaking." Typically, the exercises require only editing, with students working on passages that already exist, but the books recommend having students write their own sentences to illustrate each punctuation rule. Sample lessons are provided in the back for students who may need further guidance with the exercises. Answer key included. 44 pgs. ~ Rachel S. 020686 Level B1 (5-6) . . . . . . . 8.99 Punctuation Puzzlers Software (5-8) The Punctuation Puzzlers workbooks are also available on CD-ROM. Students will complete the same exercises as the books, but they do it directly on the computer. Pictures and context clues are given in full-color, and a toolbox is provided for adding the punctuation you need to sentences. Activities can be done in learning or test mode and are self-grading. Scores and student data are printable. System Requirements: Windows: Vista/XP/2000/ME/NT/98, Pentium class processor, 64 MB RAM. Macintosh: OS X (10.3+). -Rachel EACH CD-ROM. . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.99 032223 Level A1 032225 Level C1 032224 Level B1 English / Writing 335

Punctuation Takes a Vacation (1-3) This cute storybook shows just how important punctuation is. When all the punctuation marks in Mr. Wright's class decide to go on vacation, writing and reading becomes impossible for the students. Meanwhile, the punctuation marks send the class postcards. The story teaches punctuation on a few levels - not only do the postcards include punctuation, but all the punctuation marks have unique personalities that match them (the question mark asks a lot of questions, the exclamation mark is emotional, the colon likes keeping track of time, the commas like to make lists, the quotation marks love to talk, etc.). Hopefully, the punctuation marks will come back from vacation so the students can continue learning. Cute, colorful pictures of the students and the punctuation marks (with Practicing Capitalization & Punctuation (5-8) eyes, hair, and clothes!) add some fun to the These simple books offer straightforward pracstory. 32 full-color pgs, pb. ~ Rachel tice worksheets. Each of the 20 lessons consists 039028 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.95 5.95 of two worksheets with basic exercises covering specific rules of capitalization and punctuation (end marks, periods, commas, apostrophes, and quotation marks). Two reviews, a final test, and answers are included in each book. We are not able to offer the teacher's guide for the series which includes teaching information and a scope and sequence, however, since answers are found in the workbooks, this should not be an issue. Please note that this series is also available for standard usage and for grammar; both descriptions can be found in the appropriCapitalization and Punctuation (3-5) ate categories in our English section. 45 pgs. This new series from Educators Publishing ­ Melissa Service combines clear presentation of new EACH BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.20 rules and continual review of previously-learned 044812 Grade 5 044814 Grade 7 material with plenty of application practice. 044813 Grade 6 044815 Grade 8 Rules are presented in grade-appropriate sequence, with sample sentences to get the idea Perfect Pop-Up Punctuation Book (3-7) across. Practice exercises address both the new Make learning punctuation fun with this colrule and old rules, using interesting topics from orful pop-up book. Each page lists a grammar literature, science and social studies. If you use rule regarding punctuation, accompanied by a standardized tests in your school, you will be variety of unique flaps, tabs and pop-ups that happy to know that this program is formatted provide examples of the concepts being taught. similarly to those tests. A fun, interactive way to cement those tricky 003152 Book 1 . . . . . . . . . . 12.60 8.50 punctuation concepts into your mind. Hc. ~ Lisa 003201 Book 1 Answer Key . . 5.30 4.15 028802 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.99 9.95

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

Jensen's Punctuation (7+) This volume combines both former books Major Punctuation and General Punctuation. It is "the complete guide to all your punctuation needs." The first part covers rules for the five basic errors that account for 75-90% of punctuation errors in student writing. The second section deals with all punctuation from the comma to the parenthesis. Both reference manual and practice book, it contains complete explanation of rules along with plenty of practice. We have used these with great success and all four older daughters credited this systematic program with increasing their score on the English portion of the ACT. All exercises are taken from classical or historical texts, adding to the educational value. Instructions and answer key included. 000700. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.00 19.45 Diagramming Sentences Elementary Diagramming Worktext & The First Whole Book of Diagrams (3-8) These materials provide a thorough coverage of sentence diagramming, and they are perfect to supplement any grammar curriculum. The First Whole Book of Diagrams is essentially a diagrammer's reader. It simply holds pages and pages of diagrammed sentences. The pages are divided into sixteen chapters, each progressing in difficulty (new parts of speech are added to the diagrammed sentences). In the first chapter, the majority of the sentences are merely composed of a subject and verb. Subsequent chapters add articles, adjectives, direct objects, adverbs, prepositions, subordinate clauses, and other parts of speech. Students simply read through the pages, acquainting themselves with the diagramming language. A teacher's manual is included, providing thorough explanations of each part of speech, information about how they are diagrammed, and scripted conversations to engage in with the student. Spiralbound, 212 pgs. The Elementary Diagramming Worktext provides actual practice in diagramming sentences. It follows much the same progression as The First Whole Book of Diagrams, beginning with just subjects and verbs. However, this book holds just eight chapters and does not cover the more challenging concepts. In addition to subjects and verbs, it covers articles, adjectives, direct objects, linking verbs, adverbs, and prepositions. The worksheets offer thorough explanations and examples, plus plenty of exercises for children to complete. Children should be able to complete this book with little help from a teacher. 72 pgs, not counting the included answer key. - Melissa 031656 Elementary Diagramming Worktext . . . . . . . . . . 14.95 031657 First Whole Book Diagrams Corrected Version . . 26.00 25.75 ELDGPK Elementary Diagramming + First Whole Book. . . 41.00 37.95 Diagramming Sentences (4+) Learning how to diagram sentences can really help students visualize how the different parts of speech work together to form sentences. However, this skill isn't always included in English books. This workbook provides a wonderful supplement to any curriculum. It covers 336 English / Writing

sentence diagramming from easy to challenging, one step at a time. After reading simple explanations and seeing examples, students practice with similar sentences. The worksheets start with just subjects and predicates and then progress to adjectives, adverbs, direct and indirect objects, appositives, interjections, prepositional phrases, participles, and gerunds. Reviews are scattered throughout, which can be used as quizzes or test if desired. The worksheets are perforated and reproducible. Answers included, 46 pgs. - Melissa 034893 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.99 6.75 Basics of Diagramming (5-12) This pamphlet from Christian Light Education is a great reference for students who are diagramming sentences (and teachers who need a refresher). It instructs in 1-2 sentences and gives an example on how to diagram every type of sentence you can imagine. It starts with sentences that have a simple subject and a simple verb, then progresses throughout the booklet to more complex diagrams, like compound sentences with an adjective clause. The booklet is organized into diagramming of subjects and verbs, modifiers, complements, prepositional phrases, verbals and verbal phrases, clauses, and other elements. 4-5 sentences are diagrammed on each page. A simple but useful resource. 20 pgs, pb. ~ Rachel 041221 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.00 Editing Daily Sentence Editing (Interactive Whiteboard) (1-6) You have to admit it's a neat concept. In this age of touch products ­ pads and pods ­ the idea of a touch-based whiteboard has a lot of appeal. But if your homeschool doesn't have one of these innovative classroom products, don't despair. You can still use your computer to accomplish the same fun editing activities or you could do it the old-fashioned way ­ on paper. Each of these books/CDs has 270 grade-appropriate but error-ridden sentences in 30 units (one unit per week; 9 sentences per week). (Capitalization, punctuation, and grammar/usage errors.) [Books are reproducible for classroom/family. CDs work on both Macs and PCs.] On a computer (or interactive whiteboard) the sentences can be brought up one at a time and the student can make corrections, either making his own editing marks or dragging marks from a toolbar. Your student can revel in using the teacher's traditional RED ­ or any of five other colors. With just a click of a button, both student and teacher can see the correct answers but you can also show just the locations of the errors without revealing the actual answers (a "hint" so to speak). It's also possible to switch to typewriter mode and have your student retype the sentence correctly on the screen. A nice feature of the program is the ability to add custom sentences ­ you type it in correctly and the program rewrites it with errors in need of correcting. Obviously, these sentences could come from any source ­ reading material, the student's own writing, or character-building quotes. A six-page Grammar Rules guide is available in the book (reproducible) and on the CD (printable) as well as an answer key in the

back of the book. 112 pgs, pb. System requirements: Windows Vista/XP/2000; Mac OSX (10.2+); Flash Payer 9; Java 1.4. ~ Janice EACH BOOK & CD . . . . . . . . 24.99 18.50 049480 Grade 1 049483 Grade 4 049481 Grade 2 049484 Grade 5 049482 Grade 3 049485 Grade 6 G.U.M. drops (1-8) ...as in Grammar, Usage, and Mechanics practice presented through short daily doses of editing practice! Editing is a valuable skill for children to learn, both as a stand alone skill and to help them become better writers themselves. Good writers are also frequently those students who actively read good writing. This series combines these two elements by focusing students on editing passages from classic literature, covering grade appropriate concepts in grammar, usage, and mechanics at each level. To ensure that students are not editing above their skill level, the books present worksheets covering each rule or concept before the student is expected to edit for it. For example, the first page may cover complete sentences, and then the next page offers students a passage to edit which contains both complete sentences and sentence fragments. At least three out of every five pages are editing passages, as this remains the focus. Worksheets in the back of the book switch to various language and usage concepts after the rules have been covered. In this way, the workbooks progress through age-appropriate concepts, continually building on previous skills and increasing in difficulty. As mentioned, the focus of the workbooks is on the actual editing passages. Because the original works are often too advanced in vocabulary or do not follow the same rules as modern English, the excerpts included in these workbooks are not from the original books. Rather, the passages in the first three books have been taken from the EDCON Classic Worktext series (see description in our Reading Comprehension section), adaptations of the classics written specifically for younger grade levels, yet retaining the original flavor of the books. The later four books include passages especially rewritten for students, summarizing the entire story into a series of shorter passages to be edited. Students not only get editing practice, they are also familiarized with six classic works per level. The G.U.M.drops series is useful for a light introduction to English and grammar for younger grades, or as a refresher or daily review for any grade to supplement any curriculum. Teacher pages are included in the back of each book. 123 pgs. EACH BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.95 8.95 007575 Grades 1-2 040526 Grade 6 007566 Grade 3 040527 Grade 7 007569 Grade 4 040528 Grade 8 040525 Grade 5

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

Didax Skills Series ­ Editing (2-8) This series offers serious practice with editing skills. Narratives, reports, expositions, and procedures are the main types of writing that students will work with. They will edit and do various other activities for sentence structure, grammar, punctuation, capitalization, and spelling. The aim is to create a high level of proficiency in editing and proofreading skills. A teacher page accompanies each student worksheet and provides the lesson focus, background on the type of text, and answers. Plenty of additional teacher aids are included throughout each book. Student pages are presented in two different ways; both are similar, but one allows students to become more familiar with formats they may encounter on some standardized tests. On the student pages, a specific text type is identified and then a passage or text is given for students to read. The text has all types of errors; sometimes students correct them directly on the passage and sometimes they just list or identify them. Most contain several different aspects to work on. For instance, on one student page a Punctuation section instructs students to insert 5 capital letters, 5 grammatical commas, 1 ending punctuation, and 1 set of parentheses; a Grammar section instructs students to find the incorrect verb tense and then write the correct one; a Spelling section makes you find and correct the 5 misspelled words; and a Writing section makes students draw lines where paragraph breaks should be. Many pages also include short vocabulary sections, but not every student page will cover all the different aspects. Several editing checklists are available to help students master the process of editing, and about 40 student pages are included in each book. With plenty of editing practice in a variety of writing styles and lots of teacher helps, this series will help improve student editing and proofreading skills. Each book is 104 pgs, pb. ~ Rachel EACH BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.95 8.25 040235 Grade 2-3 040237 Grade 5-6 040236 Grade 3-4 040238 Grade 6-8 Daily Paragraph Editing (2-6) This series gives students a manageable paragraph of editing practice each day. Each book consists of 36 weekly lessons, which consist of four paragraphs on related subject material filled with capitalization, punctuation, spelling, and language usage errors. Editing paragraphs are designed to be used Monday through Thursday, and a writing prompt related to that week's topic is given on Friday for the student to write their own paragraph. Each two-page spread contains two of the student's daily editing paragraphs on the right-hand side and the corresponding corrected teacher's editing key on the left. The student's assignment contains a "Watch For" icon in the margin which clues them in to some specific types of errors to watch for. Each error is corrected in red in the key, and a helpful error summary is also included with a total for each type of error found in the paragraph. The error summary allows you to inform your student how many errors of each type there are, if desired, to help them find each one. A short "Language Handbook" is found in the back, and makes referencing capitalization, punctuation and language usage easy and accessible through the use of charts and examples. The student pages are

kinds of other mischievous mistakes. Each story uses characters or settings from the classics: Peter Pan, The Wizard of Oz, Frankenstein, Robin Hood, and The Hare and the Rabbit to name just a few. Stories are one page long, or less, with the corrected story on the following page. 45 stories are followed by capitalization and punctuation guidelines and a detailed explanation and dissection of the structure of a sentence. Reproducible. Funny Fairy Tale Proofreading (3-4) Given the choice between editing an essay or a 044310 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.00 23.75 humorous excerpt by a fairy tale character, most kids would probably choose the funny, fictional EDITOR IN CHIEF (2-12) passage. Thus the premise of this book ­ entice children into proofreading by providing them Editor in Chief Beginning (2-4) with dozens of amusing exercises. The 40+ These workbooks were designed to be an introworksheets in this book utilize a number of dif- duction to the Editor in Chief series. Students ferent types of writing (poetry, letters, advertise- first review the rules of grammar and mechanics ments, emails, invitations, short stories, instruc- by answering multiple-choice questions. They tions, signs, and even New Year's Resolutions) then learn to apply these rules by editing stories to give students a variety of proofreading prac- in a variety of formats. Units cover capitaltice. The worksheets are also divided into ization, punctuation, run-ons and fragments, sections focusing on different types of errors, dialogue, friendly letters, grammar, usage, and including spelling, punctuation and capitaliza- spelling. The last unit combines different types tion, and grammar. The largest section of the of errors into single exercises to review all of book includes exercises with a variety of all the skills simultaneously. The original Editor three types of errors, as this is the most common in Chief Beginning level will be changing to type of proofreading encountered in "real life." Beginning 2, and the publishers have created a If your children aren't excited about editing, the "prequel" for 2nd/3rd grade. ~ Rachel S. 14.99 amusing material in this book could add some 026713 Beginning 1 (2-3). . . . . 14.99 much-needed fun to this all important skill. (If 013319 Beginning 2 (3-4). . . . . this approach sounds appealing, you may also want to check out Funny Fairy Tale Grammar, also in our English section.) Reproducible, consumable, answers included. 64 pgs. ­ Melissa 030393 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.99 9.25 reproducible for your family's use. An easy-touse way to include a little bit of editing into the little bit of time you have each day. ~ Jess EACH BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.99 14.75 026373 Grade 2 026376 Grade 5 026374 Grade 3 026377 Grade 6 026375 Grade 4 Take Five Minutes: A History Fact a Day for Editing (3-5) What more can I say? The title is just about as efficient as a description in this case. Starting with Jan. 1, and going through December 31, this book contains a short history fact for every day, free of any punctuation, for students to correct. Besides correcting punctuation, sentences may contain misspelled words, homophones, and grammatical mistakes. A complete list at the front of the book shows the types of errors that might occur and gives examples for each. Also in the front is a table showing the correct proofreading marks to be used when correcting sentences. Each day's interesting fact occurred on that same day in previous history. Some of the facts are so interesting that the authors have foreseen children's desire to know more, so they have included a list of web sites that go along with each month's facts. A small, blank calendar for each month is also included, as well as answers in the back of the book that make it easy for you or your students to correct their work. Reproducible, 143 pgs. ~ Stephanie 016446 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.99 12.75 Spoofing and Proofing the Classics (3-8) Hone critical reading skills by spotting and correcting errors in these humorous passages. Short stories have been written with purposefully missing punctuation, messed up grammar, wrong words, run-on sentences, phrases in the wrong order and all

Editor in Chief (4-12) Make your student(s) the editor in chief! With these books children edit punctuation, grammar, content, and learn while they're having fun. Your children learn to recognize errors, and to use the rules of grammar and punctuation. Every lesson gives an article or letter with an illustration to find errors in usage and spelling. In this three-book progression, students can sharpen their editing skills as they red-pencil their way thorough the series! Books A2, B2, and C2 provide more practice at each level, with difficulty increasing slightly from the level 1 books. EACH BOOK (except noted) . . . 14.99 020876 Book A1 (4-6) 020878 Book B1 (6-8) 002633 Book A2 (4-6) 002634 Book B2 (6-8) 020879 Book C1 (8+) . . . . . . . . 17.99 002635 Book C2 (8+) . . . . . . . . 17.99 Editor in Chief Software (4-12) Being an editor has never been easier! Each level provides over 30 stories to edit. Although you are told the total number of errors in each story, the rest is up to you. You must find each error and correct it by identifying the specific rule it violates. To help you out, extensive grammar, punctuation, usage, vocabulary, and spelling references are available with the click of a button. System requirements for Beginning, A1 and B1: Windows 7/Vista/XP. Mac OS X 10.3+ (10.4+ for B1). 128 MB of (continued...) English / Writing 337

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

RAM. System requirements for A2, B2, C1 and C2: 32-bit systems only, Windows 7 (32-bit)/ Vista (32-bit)/XP/2000/Millenium/NT/98; 32 MB of RAM. Mac: OS 8/OS 9; 32 MB RAM. ~ Anh 012352 Beginning . . . . . . . . . . 25.99 EACH LEVEL BELOW . . . . . . . . . 25.99 017522 Level A1 017523 Level A2 017525 Level B1 017526 Level B2 EACH LEVEL BELOW . . . . . . . . . 27.99 017527 Level C1 017528 Level C2 Great Editing Adventure (4-6, 7-8 review) Of course, it's more enjoyable to find errors in someone else's writing than your own. Borrowing heavily from the approach used in Caught `Ya: Grammar with a Giggle (Maupin House Publishing), this series uses an engaging adventure story format (rather than the soap opera sagas in Caught `Ya), making it much more palatable to the typical homeschooler. Each volume contains 3 separate adventure stories and 90 lessons. Each short daily lesson is a sentence in the story complete with wellthought-out grammatical, spelling, and usage errors. The teacher writes the flawed sentence on the board. Children discover the errors and correct them, look up definitions of circled words, and supply synonyms (thesaurus needed for this) where required; then they write an edited version. Each volume contains sentences for correction, edited version, and appropriate rules. Using the student books will eliminate the need to write sentences to be edited on the board and will provide a finished booklet of each student's work. Student books contain all sentences to correct along with space for students to write their revisions. 019912 Vol 1 Tchr . . . . . . . . 15.00 12.25 019354 Vol 1 Stdt . . . . . . . . 10.00 8.15 019914 Vol 2 Tchr . . . . . . . . 15.00 12.25 019913 Vol 2 Stdt . . . . . . . . 10.00 8.15

Great Explorations in Editing (7+) The sequel to The Great Editing Adventure, this book is intended to help students improve sentence structure, write more clearly, and practice grammar and punctuation. 007823 Sleuths V 1 Tchr . . . 15.00 12.25 007825 Sleuths V 1 Stdt . . . 10.00 8.15 Sentence a Day (4-12) Subtitled "Short, playful proofreading exercises to help students avoid tripping up when they write." Each sentence should take only minutes to correct. Every page (203 in all) contains a short, often humorous, sentence that needs editing. This is followed by a suggested correction and notes for the teacher. The bottom, outside corner of each page has a list of topics addressed on that page. I like this volume 338 English / Writing

My Little Grammar Dictionaries (2-5) A child's first reference books for English! Each one discusses parts of speech and important grammar terms, giving definitions, explanations, examples and blanks for other words that the child would like to add to the list. My Find the Errors! (6-12) Grammar Dictionary covers phrases, sentences, One of the English activities children find most possessives, quotations, titles, compounds, and appealing is correcting someone else's mistakes. more. My Parts of Speech Dictionary teaches These books provide over thirty fun proof- nouns, verbs, adjectives, adverbs, conjunctions, reading exercises prepositions, and interjections. - Melissa to teach students 006820 Grammar . . . . . . . . . 1.99 1.75 the skills they 006823 Parts of Speech . . . . . 1.99 1.75 need to write and edit. Both levels Scholastic Guide to Grammar (3-6) follow the same 053378 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.99 7.50 basic format, but book two is Painless Grammar (5-8) more advanced This is certainly a friendlier grammar book than and contains a the one I had in junior high. Instruction has a more compreconversational tone. Grammar rules are easy hensive treatment to identify since they're printed in bold, and of grammar and the extensive use of right and wrong sentences style rules. The is helpful. This book covers parts of speech, reproducible exercises utilize underlining, cir- building and punctuating sentences, agreement, cling, rewriting, and adding punctuation to confused and misused words, and editing. One interesting and amusing sentences, paragraphs drawback is the small number of exercise sets. and short stories. Each exercise provides back- There are only 19 in the whole text. ~ Anh ground information, including a detailed expla- 018702 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.99 8.25 nation of the pertinent rules for that skill. Skills learned include proofreading punctuation and American Heritage Student Grammar capitalization errors, and editing to ensure sen- Dictionary (5-9) tences are written in a way which conveys the How does one use a grammar dictionary? It's intended meaning. Each exercise also includes easier than you may think. Grammar points are five commonly misspelled words for students to organized alphabetically first, then thoroughly identify and write correctly in a "spelling box." explained in a way your kids will easily follow. A pre-test is included to determine problem skill 250 terms like adverbial clause, dangling modiareas, and it lists the exact exercises a student fier, helping verb, mood, predicate objective, can complete to work on these skills. A post- subject pronoun and verbal noun are clearly test evaluates improvement. Teacher's aids are defined and examples are given. Even little scattered throughout both books, and answer cartoons help explain the point. I think parents keys are provided. An activity section contains will appreciate the explanations as well. I don't suggestions for teaching the lesson, expansion, think I could answer a student's question about cooperative learning, multicultural activities, dangling modifiers, and if I did it would likely and also suggestions for teaching to different be wrong. Students will learn to be better writers learning styles. With these interesting and with a reference book like this to answer those amusing editing passages, you'll have no trouble tricky grammar questions. 154 pgs, pb. ~ Sara motivating your students to finish their work in 052796 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.95 10.45 these books. ~ Rachel S. 003973 Book 1 (6-9) . . . . . . 24.00 18.50 The Only Grammar Book You'll Ever Need 015144 Book 2 (9-12) . . . . . 24.00 18.50 (7-AD) Though not modest, the title may be true. This Proofreading Marks Chart (1-6) handy little reference guide offers no-nonsense Proofreaders have their own code and sym- tips, rules, and explanations to aid you in a wide bols for the work they do. Now anyone can variety of grammar needs and writing instancunderstand the meanings behind them with this es. Chapter 1 focuses on "Finding the Right chart for proofreading. The front side has a list Words," providing spelling rules and differentiof symbols, their meanings, and examples. For ating between commonly misused words, such example, the proofreading symbol "sp." means as effect and affect. The next few chapters focus See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

better than others I've seen because it contains instruction, shows a sample correction, correlates skills, AND you can get one for each child to use on his/her own! All you need is a piece of paper (preferably construction paper or other opaque paper) folded in half to make a sleeve. Now, you can slip it over the bottom of the page to allow only the incorrect sentence to show over top (You may want to make two of these so there's no inadvertent peeking at the facing page solution, either). This way, your student can make corrections directly in the book. For more structural corrections, you may want to attach a lined Post-It® page to the sleeve to rewrite the sentence. To self-check, just pull the sleeve down. If anything is missed, your child can mark it on the page in another ink color, and, if needed, read the correctional instruction below. 044593 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.95 8.50

"spelling mistake" and appears over the word "clowdy" in the example sentence, "The day was clowdy and cold." The reverse side of the poster has six sentences that need correcting and spaces to rewrite them once corrected. For example, one sentence reads, "allen has to guinea pigs three mouses and won gerbil as pets." Use your proofreading symbols to correct all the errors! 17"x24". ­ John 028747 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.49 2.25 Reference Books

on parts of speech, with complete descriptions of nouns, adverbs, prepositions, interjections, and all other types of words; basic sentence structure, including subjects and predicates, clauses, and subject-verb agreement; verb help such as verb tense, irregular verbs and moods; and all of the tricky pronoun problems. Chapter 6 provides a helpful guide to punctuation so that you can accurately use semicolons in your writing. (And all others, of course, but I find that many people are quite uncomfortable with this mark in particular.) The last four chapters are concerned with writing, and they cover a wide variety of topics to help you write better sentences, avoid common errors, learn the process of writing and revising, and understand the different types of writing and their purposes. Appendices in the back offer 1001 frequently misspelled words, suggestions for wordy phrases, and links to helpful grammar and writing web sites. You'll definitely want to keep this one on your desk or next to your computer. ~ Steph 010215 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.95 6.95

Definitions, rules and examples for 250 language arts terms (antonym, composition, direct object, footnote, idiom, linking verb, Library of Congress, and more). 005519 Punctuation and Capitalization Definitions, rules, and examples on punctuation and capitalization. 024858 Writing Skills 2 Definitions, rules and examples on types of writing, tools, organization, research, prewriting, taking notes, citing sources, and more. Parts of Speech Charts (2-6) These poster-sized charts measure 17" x 21" and describe and give examples of a different part of speech. The top of the chart defines the part of speech, for example "A noun names a person, place, thing, or idea." Then vocabulary words are given that fit within that part of speech, usually in a variety of forms so students really understand the kind of words included in each part of speech. One to three sentences are then shown on the chart, with the featured part of speech highlighted so students can see an example of it used in a sentence. The charts are simple but effective, with colorful borders and an illustration of piles of colorful books at the bottom of each chart. An additional bonus to these charts is that the backs feature four reproducible activities each the size of a worksheet so they can be photocopied off the back and handed out to students. The activities include fill in the blank exercises and word puzzles, as well as a teacher sheet providing extra tips for using the chart and teaching the part of speech. Charts can be purchased individually or in a handy six pack with one of each of the charts. ~ Rachel EACH CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.49 2.25 017380 Adjectives 017432 Adverbs 017438 Conjunctions/Interjections 017446 Nouns and Pronouns 017608 Prepositions 017691 Verbs 017714 6-Chart Pack . . . . . . 14.94 11.50

Parts of Speech Chart & Cards (3-8) Help students learn and remember the parts of speech with this colorful, large (16 ¼" x 23 ¼") wall chart and bulletin board set. This set includes the wall chart (listing the nine parts of speech and their definitions), nine punch-out vignettes, sixteen blank writing line cards, and a resource guide. Each vignette is devoted to a different part of speech, listing its definition and providing examples and a sample sentence with the applicable parts of speech highlighted. (The largest vignette measures 16" x 11 ¾".) The blank writing line cards each measure 4" x 2 ½" Reference Tools and are useful for writing additional examples of the parts of speech. This set can be displayed on Grammar Flippers (2-AD) These handy references have flip-up cards a wall or bulletin board, and you may want to for easy and immediate fingertip access to the laminate them for durability. ~ Lisa 8.95 answers and information you need most when 044951 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.99 writing. Manipulatives / Games EACH FLIPPER . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.95 7.50 005520 Grammar Very Silly Sentences Game (PK-2) Definitions, rules, and examples on gramThis older cousin of the Funny Phonics game mar (Run-on sentences, predicates, direct achieves the same standard of replay-ability and and indirect objects, nouns, adverbs, verbs, motivating fun in practice, only with the goal of adjectives, and clauses, plus more.) learning parts of speech. Up to four sentence 014244 Language Arts Terminology See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

Writer's Guide to Perfect Punctuation (7-AD) This reference provides a simple explanation of rules accompanied by clear examples for a variety of different punctuation marks. Starting with a brief look at the history and purpose of punctuation, the book is then organized into sections alphabetically, covering apostrophes, brackets, colons, commas, ellipses, em dashes, en dashes, exclamation points, parentheses, periods, question marks, semicolons, and slashes. Each section follows the same no-nonsense, black and white format. A rule for that type of punctuation is presented in bold type, followed by a few sentences illustrating that rule with the punctuation in bold. Any special notes for further clarification are included where appropriate. Recommended by the Institute for Excellence in Writing, this guide is helpful to read straight through or to keep on hand as a quick reference. 71 pgs, index included. 042670 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.95 14.75

constructors can play. Durable game board, double-sided player boards and cards offset the somewhat flimsy 12-sided cardstock die (that you may need to reinforce with tape!). Strategy, chance, and changing outcomes keep game play exciting. There are two levels of play. The shorter version, for younger readers, requires them to make only two, six-word sentences using four parts of speech: nouns, adjectives, articles, and verbs. If you are playing with even younger children, you can play with just nouns, adjectives, and verbs (by folding the player boards differently). The longer version requires two complete sentences, each using 2 adjectives, 2 nouns, a verb, article, and preposition. The 136 word and picture cards are color-coded by function and stacked in piles by color on the game board. Players move around the board depending on rolls of the die and/or instructions on the game board, collecting part of speech cards. If they're lucky, they'll roll or land on a space that lets them choose "Any Card", giving them an edge in completing sentences (more quickly and sillier). Word cards must be read (most are simple words and sight words) to be won. Sentences are constructed from collected cards by placing them on the correctly labeled (noun, verb, etc.) squares on player boards. The winner is the first person to make two silly sentences and read them aloud. Depending upon the reading level of your children, you may control the type (word or picture) of card used or its difficulty ­ or even use two separate decks for differing reading abilities among players (You can always expand play, too, by making some of your own cards to use with the game). It's a great little game for practicing sentence construction and parts of speech in an entertaining context. 044070 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.99 9.50

Big Box of Sentence Building (K-4) All right, you lovers of hands-on activities! Here's a good one for you! This game is subtitled "A Creative Way to Build an Endless Number of Sentences Using 250 Puzzle Pieces." Each laminated puzzle piece has a word or punctuation or empty blank. The pieces are color-coded into groups: punctuation, verbs, nouns, articles, adjectives, adverbs, conjunctions, prepositions, and personal pronouns. You can choose from a variety of games designed to build knowledge of parts of speech, sentence construction, vocabulary, and punctuation. In one game, you'll build sentences with a blank space for a noun, and the children will find a noun to put into the sentence. In another game, children take turns building sentences one piece at a time. Of course, if you're working with only one child, you can be the other player. In another game, children have to unscramble the puzzle pieces. In another game, players spin a spinner to accumulate pieces (continued...) English / Writing 339

until they have enough to build a sentence. There are two other games, and you can even make up your own. As a former English teacher/ tutor, I can tell you that with any game like this, you'll encounter words that can appear in more than one part of speech; be on guard against potential confusion. Other than that caveat, I only see two other tiny flaws. The writer of the instructions completely forgot to list the pinkcoded personal pronouns in the list of categories, and the cyan blue of the adverbs looks too close to the blue of the verbs. But those are all minor points. Now, you're ready to have loads of fun building sentences and learning grammar. ~ Caryl 047230 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.99 17.95 Magnetic KidWords (K-5) This 200+ piece word set may be the only tool you need to help young children understand the parts of speech. Words are color-coded (nouns-green, verbsred, adjectives-blue, pronouns-yellow, prepositions-purple, articles/ punctuation/ misc-black) for easy identification and substitution in prepared sentences so children can see how each part of speech functions. Use with a Learning Board (see Early Learning) to keep them corralled.

CHOKING HAZARD (1). Not <3yrs.

tives, nouns, verbs, and conjunctions. Players draw and discard until a player can lay down a five-card sentence, which is worth 5 points. Play continues until someone scores 20 points. Kids will love learning the parts of speech with this wacky game! ~ Rachel 014806 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.99 2.50 Cooking Up Sentences: Parts of Speech Game (2-AD) Create your own sentence "recipe" while learning parts of speech with this fun game. The center of the game board features a whimsical illustration of chefs cooking, while the perimeter contains colored squares labeled with parts of speech (noun, pronoun, adjective, conjunction, etc.). To play, each player picks a recipe card. Each recipe card contains a list of "ingredients" needed to build a sentence. For example, the cheesecake recipe card lists the following ingredients: 1 pronoun, 2 nouns, 2 verbs, 1 adverb, and 1 adjective. Players then spin and move around the board, drawing a Parts of Speech Ingredient Card that corresponds with the space they landed on. The first person to complete their sentence recipe ­ and read it aloud ­ wins! Includes 150 ingredient cards (listing individual words that correspond to the parts of speech), 4 recipe cards, a spinner, 4 chef pawns, and an instruction guide. ~ Lisa 044642 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.99 17.95

tence gets points for their cards (value of cards is based on difficulty of words) with a bonus ten points for using all cards. The first player to 200 points is the winner. Official score sheets included, 3-10 players. Want even more words? Two add-on decks are currently available (with more in the works). Brain-Buster deck includes 400 "SAT-worthy" words from the first half of the alphabet (M-Z deck to come at later date), and NASA Space Terminology deck features 400 space-related words, including names of astronauts. 040630 Game . . . . . . . . . . . 24.95 18.95 EACH ADD-ON DECK. . . . . . . 7.95 6.25 011935 Brain-Buster Word Challenge (A-L) 049360 NASA Space Terminology REfEREnCES / REfEREnCE SKILLS Alphabetizing / Dictionary Skills Dictionary Skills (1-8) A dictionary can be a very useful tool, and these workbooks provide fun exercises and activities that will develop the skills necessary to use one most effectively. Each book requires a dictionary to complete the majority of the exercises. The first book works on alphabetical order, where students simply write the next letter in a series or connect the letters to draw a picture. Then, students use a dictionary to complete such exercises as listing what page number certain words are on, filling in definitions of words, and using the dictionary to see if a word is an adjective, verb, or noun. The second book is a little more intense and includes a pre/post test and an answer key. Students complete exercises such as putting entry words in alphabetical order, writing definitions of words, looking up the difference between homonyms, and dividing words into syllables with accent marks. Each book has an easy-to-use format with fun black and white drawings interspersed. Workbooks are reproducible; answers provided. ~ Rachel S. EACH BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.99 6.50 019800 Grades 1-3 019809 Grades 4-8 Alphabetizing (Remedia) (3-8) The ABC's are one of the first things that everybody learns. So why would you need a whole book on alphabetizing? It seems pretty straightforward. Looking through some of these warmup activities, however, I realized that I still use the alphabet song as a crutch to figure out which letters come immediately before or after one another. After the warm-up activities, this book steps through 1st, 2nd, and 3rd letter alphabetizing and ends with general alphabetizing. Most activities involve alphabetizing lists of people, places, or things. 24 reproducible pgs. ~ Anh 022859 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.99 5.25

004989

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.99

15.50

Parts of Speech Dice ­ Set of 10 (K-AD) Like the Interrogative Dice found elsewhere in the catalog, we're only limited by our imagination with this product! These ten identical dice have the following six sides: 2 noun, 2 verb, 2 adjective. You can make up any kind of grammar game you would like. Roll three dice and construct a sentence. Maybe you roll a noun, adjective, and verb ("Wise students study.") Maybe you roll a noun, noun, verb ("Leaves and branches rot." Conjunctions are free). You could have a noun and verb as free constants also, so that you always have a complete sentence, never a fragment. Older students could roll all ten dice and be required to use all the parts in a single sentence! To avoid having too many verbs, you could have more helping verbs, as well as compound verbs. To avoid having too many nouns, don't forget you can have compound subjects, compound direct objects or indirect objects, compound nouns of direct address, and compound objects of a preposition! (You'll have to allow free prepositions and articles as well) Whew! Even your teens can find these games challenging, and the dice don't take up as much room as a boxed game requires. ~ Caryl

You've Been Sentenced Game (3-AD) Looking for a fun word game that's not too taxing? This game prompts players to use random words to create grammatically correct sentences. 540 pentagon-shaped cards are included . There are five words on each card (usually a variation of one word like full, fill, fills, filled, and filling), which means a total of 2700 words used in the game, including wild cards that can be used for any word. A four-page rulebook is included that describes several game variations. The basic game consists of all players drawing ten cards and trying to form a correct sentence using them. Optimally, players want to use all ten words in a sentence for maximum points, but sentences can be as short as two words. Each player knocks on the table to signal that they are finished, and after all players are ready, they read their sentences out loud. Other players then vote on if each sentence is correct, with CHOKING HAZARD (1). Not <3yrs. 047533 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.00 4.95 the player being judged making arguments as to the validity of the sentence. Much of the fun of this game comes from hearing the stories playNouns, Verbs & More Card Game (1-4) The object of this zany game is to use five ers must make up to prove a sentence like "The cards to make a sentence. 54 cards are color duck keeps giving me flames instead of nuts." coded and divided into four categories: adjec- makes sense. Each player with a correct sen340 English / Writing

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

Merriam-Webster's How to Use Your Dictionary (4-7) With its pages of thoughtful exercises teaching students everything they need to know about using a dictionary and thesaurus, we think this book is one of the best for this topic. First of all, it offers a brief introduction to the dictionary and Noah Webster. Then, interesting worksheets cover over fifteen different dictionary skills, progressing easily from alphabetizing, guide words, and pronunciation to variants, homographs, usage labels, definitions, synonyms, and even word history paragraphs. Each of the twenty-one lessons covers two pages and includes explanations, examples, and exercises. Additional writing exercises are described on some of the pages and can be completed as desired. These offer relevant, creative writing ideas. After the dictionary lessons, there are five lessons devoted to the thesaurus, which follow a similar format. The back of the book holds fifteen vocabulary builder word workout pages, filled with fun vocabulary exercises for kids. The worksheets are reproducible and perforated for easy removal. Answers included, 84 pgs. 001538 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.95 7.95

Vocabulary Development Through the Dictionary (5-8) This two-book series will provide you with practical activities to increase students' vocabulary skills through dictionary use. Each book includes tips for using the dictionary in the most effective manner, activities that children must use a dictionary correctly to finish, and an answer key for all the activities. The interesting and challenging activities include tasks such as correcting misspellings, answering questions that involve looking up a key word, giving the meanings of words, circling correct definitions, and more. The activities and vocabulary words within each book get progressively harder, so children continue to build up their dictionary skills. Grade 5/6 book Includes alphabetical order, using guide words, proofreading for spelling errors, synonyms and antonyms, abbreviations, word origins. Grade 7/8 book Includes alphabetical order, using guide words, proofreading for spelling errors, synonyms and antonyms, abbreviations, word origins, finding definitions, homophones. ~ Rachel S. 013950 Grades 5-6 . . . . . . . . 4.95 4.25 013951 Grades 7-8 . . . . . . . . 4.95 4.25 Dictionaries

each letter starts off with a list of words and is followed by a number of empty columns (3 pages of columns is the most for any one letter) where students can write other words they want to be able to reference in the future. Columns are also included for listing colors, family, friends, classmates, and pets; and some other lists provided are days of the week, months of the year, contractions, numbers, and ordinals. The second volume, More Words I Use When I Write, contains words that are a little more difficult. It is set up in much the same format as the original, though there are a few more pages of columns for each letter (3 is still the maximum). Besides columns to list family, friends, and classmates, there are also lists for the names of the days and months, contractions, the 50 states, numbers, and ordinals. 88 pgs. ~ Zach 026340 Words I Use . . . . . . . 2.99 2.35 026324 More Words I Use. . . 3.55 2.75 Merriam-Webster's Elementary Dictionary (Hardcover) (2-5) Expanded and revised in 2009, this engaging dictionary was intended for elementary-aged students. It features more than 36,000 entries, over 800 illustrations and photographs, crossreferences, example sentences, word histories, Greek and Latin word root paragraphs, and a pronunciation guide at the bottom of each page. The nicest feature (I think) is the addition of 1,300 quotes from children's literature, provided to show word use in context. These are printed in blue after selected entries, along with the author's name and the name of the book. A list of signs/symbols, a writer's guide, geographical names, a U.S. Map, a world map, and a list of all children's works cited is included at the end. 824 pgs, hardcover. - Jess 012621 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.95 12.95

Spelling Dictionary for Beginning Writers (K-2) This 51-page book is a great tool for beginners. Commonly used words are arranged in alphabetical order with examples of usage for some of the words and 12 blanks at the bottom of each page can be used for problem words or words they've just learned and want to remember. A handy little thesaurus in the back contains synonyms for: then, big, small or little, good, great, or nice, went or ran, asked, answered, and said. A word bank of theme words is included for the following categories: The Calendar, Numbers, Colors, Family, Weather, Body Parts, Macmillan Fully Illustrated Dictionary for Using a Dictionary (4-8) Over 90 pages of exercises help teach and Astronomy and Space, Geography, and several Children (3-7) This colorful dicreinforce dictionary skills such as alphabetical additional items. contains 5.50 tionary order, word placement, guide words, meaning, 009163 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.95 35,000 entries and syllables, pronunciation, prefixes and suffixes, over 3000 detailed spelling, parts of speech, synonyms, usage, Spelling Dictionary for Writers Book 2 (1-3) Parents and teachers often counter spelling images arranged in and run-on entries. A section near the back of the book allows students to combine a num- questions with the response, "Look it up!". a visually appealtwo-column ber of learned skills for additional practice. Unlike most dictionaries, which often contain ing, Reproducible pages are perforated for easy more than 50, 000 entries with more than a format. Interesting removal and copying. A complete answer key is hundred on each page, this volume is designed facts and diagrams for maximum efficiency for middle school stu- appear throughout located at the back of the book. ~ Rachel 012375 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.99 8.95 dents. It contains 5,000 words that research the dictionary, and shows middle-schoolers use in over 95% of a reference section their writing. The alphabetized words include includes maps, state and world flags, population Learning to Use Reference Materials (4-8) This useful book contains reproducible exer- different forms the word can take and short statistics, and more. I received this dictionary as cises that provide plenty of practice in using definitions of words that sound the same but are a Christmas gift when I was a child, and I found reference materials. Topics covered include spelled differently. A thesaurus is also included it so fascinating that I couldn't put it down! 832 alphabetical order, dictionary skills, encyclo- in the library. These pages offer multiple alterna- pgs, hc. ~ Lisa pedia skills, using a table of contents, using a tives for overused words and expressions in the 031153 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.99 13.50 book index, using a newspaper index, library average middle-schooler's writing. Word banks skills, atlas and thesaurus skills, using a gaz- for country and state names as well as thematic American Heritage Children's Dictionary (3-8) A profusion of color photographs and speetteer, and more. Some of the activities take lists to help students write about major subjects an "old school" approach by teaching older like sports, school, and holidays will provide cial format makes this a favorite of children. research methods (such as the card catalogue), students with a chance to take responsibility for Patterned after the adult version, it has simiand no internet research guidance is provided. their own writing and will make it easier for the lar features; a sprinkling of word histories, synonyms, and vocabulary builders! Besides However, the activities teach skills that are teacher to promote good writing. 9.95 34,000 entries, it also contains a section on nevertheless important, including topics often 015549 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.00 phonics and spelling, a list of geographical not covered in other reference "how to" guides. locations with definitions, and maps. Nearly Words I Use When I Write (1-2) Answers included. 47 pgs, pb. ~ Lisa It's a spelling dictionary young writers expand 900 pgs, hc. 046883 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.95 5.95 upon as they learn new words. The entry for 004014 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.95 14.25 See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels. English / Writing 341

American Heritage Student Dictionary (6-9) This comprehensive dictionary features 65,000 entries with clear definitions and pronunciations. Many entries also have etymologies, example sentences, and full-color photographs and illustrations. More than just a dictionary, this reference also includes numerous geographic and biographical entries. Find out where the Congo is located or why Florence Nightingale was famous! A helpful capitalization and punctuation guide is located at the front of the dictionary, and several reference charts (including the Periodic Table, taxonomy, and solar system) are included as well. 1068 pgs, hc. ~ Anh Merriam-Webster's Intermediate Dictionary 012238 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.95 14.25 (4-6) A more advanced dictionary than the elemen- Webster's Notebook Dictionary (7-AD) tary dictionary, this is suitable for students Containing 20,000 concise definitions, this who are not quite ready for a high-school level handy dictionary is three-hole punched to fit dictionary. Although the font is the same size conveniently into your notebook or binder. In as you would find in a high school or adult addition, there are special sections on basic dictionary, there are still over 1,000 small black English grammar, abbreviations, and helpful and white illustrations and tables throughout the rules for spelling and forming plurals. 76 pgs, pages. This dictionary includes over 70,000 pb. ~ Lisa entries with authoritative definitions, spellings, 027723 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.95 4.75 and pronunciations to help students write and speak effectively. Appropriate for middle-grade American Heritage Dictionary (4th Ed) (9-AD) students. 1005 pgs, hc. With over 70,000 entries, this paperback will 012589 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.95 13.95 be a ready reference for high school and college students, or adults. American Heritage Webster's 1828 American Dictionary of the Dictionaries are known for the special features English Language (5-AD) that make them useable and "browsable" - like The meanings of words change over time. liberal use of synonym notes, usage notes, Take the word "marriage," for example. Who regional notes, understandable etymologies, knows how a modern secular dictionary will and fascinating word histories. define it tomorrow? Fortunately, we have a 004011 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.99 4.95 standard available that will not change, because the definitions are based on the word's Biblical usage and basis in one of 26 original languages. Combined Dictionaries / Thesauri This reprint of Noah Webster's classic is nearly a textbook in itself, as it gives examples of word Kingfisher Children's Illustrated Dictionary & usage from classical literature and the Bible. Thesaurus (3-5) What better way to understand the writings of 052928 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.99 11.95 America's founding fathers than to define their words as they would have understood them. American Heritage Desk Dictionary and 004051 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69.95 54.45 Thesaurus (7-AD) Two handy resources in one! The unique layout of this dictionary/thesaurus volume is very user-friendly as it makes it easier to examine dictionary entries and research corresponding synonyms at the same time. On each page, the top two-thirds contains the dictionary entries in alphabetical order. The bottom third is shaded and has correlating entries with the dictionary portion, but it instead gives several examples of synonyms or refers you to look up another similar word to get a list of synonyms. The dictionary portion contains 70,000 entries, including extensive coverage of new words and meanings. The thesaurus contains 150,000 alphabetically arranged synonyms. This concise, hardcover, 847 page, 6 1/4" x 9 1/2" resource is not only handy, it's a space saver for your desk! ­ elise Merriam-Webster's School Dictionary (5-12) For higher level students, this dictionary pro- 035790 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.00 14.25 vides over 100,000 entries accompanied by definitions, spelling, and pronunciations. There Webster's New World Dictionary & Thesaurus are over 1000 illustrations and tables to help 2ED (7-AD) This unique two-in-one resource combines a clarify and expand meaning, and special sections contain abbreviations, biographical and dictionary and a thesaurus into one convenient geographical names, signs and symbols, and book. The top half of each page consists of a handbook of style. Appropriate for students. standard dictionary entries, while the bottom of each page contains corresponding thesaurus 1,251 pgs, hc. 012590 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.95 13.45 entries. The dictionary contains 61,000 entries, 342 English / Writing

Scholastic Pocket Dictionary (New) (3-8) Portable and concise, this not-so-little dictionary is made to serve the needs of young learners. Encourage new vocabulary by letting them have their own resources. The cover of this version has a 4-wheeler, an astronaut and a giant dragonfly on a brightly colored background. This version includes thousands of easy to understand definitions, up to date computer and scientific terms as well as cultural vocabulary. The pronunciations are simplified for kids. Though small, it is still 665 pages and paperback. ~ Sara 053383 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.99 7.50

with each word containing concise, up-to-date definitions, pronunciations, and usage information. Widely used scientific and technical terms are also included, and over 14,000 etymologies help students determine the origins of words. The thesaurus has plenty of helpful examples and cross-references for additional information. Reference material such as metric conversions, U.S. states and capitals, world population and currency information is listed in the back of the book. 750 pgs, pb. ~ Lisa 044615 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.99 10.75 Merriam-Webster's Collegiate Dictionary (9-AD) This hardcover dictionary boasts 165,000 entries and over 225,000 definitions. Detailed symbols show the most common pronunciations as well as acceptable variants. It also includes more than 40,000 usage examples, over 700 illustrations, diagrams and informative tables, and a coverage of 7,500 phrases and idioms that clarifies meanings and illustrates common use. Synonym paragraphs explain different shades of meaning between words, and usage paragraphs provides guidelines for words with confused or disputed usage. Twenty-four "miscellaneous pages" in the back include a handbook of style, index, forms of address, and more. As we have had some complaints from customers, please be aware that this volume does contain some inappropriate language. 1,624 pgs; almost 2" thick. 012586 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.95 15.95

Merriam-Webster's Dictionary & Thesaurus (9-AD) This hefty reference from Merriam Webster contains both dictionary definitions and synonym lists. Unlike many other combined reference volumes where definitions are given in one part of the book and synonyms in another, this volume combines the entries alphabetically, so directly below the definition of a word is a list of synonyms. Synonyms are given in shaded boxes below the definitions so it's clear where the definition stops and the synonyms begin. All other standard dictionary/thesaurus features are included, like parts of speech, pronunciation, inflected forms, and abundant usage examples. Based on the best-selling Merriam-Webster's Collegiate Dictionary, this reference contains nearly 60,000 dictionary entries (covering the most frequently used words in the English language) and more than 13,000 thesaurus entries (including synonym lists, related words, and antonyms). With all these entries and 1232 pages, this fully integrated dictionary and thesaurus is a great value. Pb. ~ Rachel 041589 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.99 7.50

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

Thesauri / Synonyms QUICK-SPELL Thesaurus and Word-Finder (K-6) Kids learn new words every day it seems as they learn to read. Help them apply new words to their writing as well with these handy reference handbooks. Beginning Thesaurus helps young writers find just the right word. This guide lists 600 base words and gives you 3 to 6 synonyms for each one. Word Finder helps students check their spelling. Three thousand words are listed alphabetically and includes their suffix forms (totaling more than 10,000 words.) This guide is like a mini-dictionary for young writers. I like how these handbooks get kids used to using reference tools as they write. ~ Sara EACH BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.95 6.75 053124 Beginning Thesaurus (K-2) 053125 Word Finder (3-6) Kingfisher First Thesaurus (1-3) 052929 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.99 7.95

tion choices, less common synonyms, and an example sentence showing how the entry word is commonly used. Some entries also have corresponding antonym lists and color illustrations. With 4,000 main entries and over 36,000 synonyms, your child will be able to find just the "right" word. Hc, 280 pgs. - Anh 013345 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.95 13.45 Merriam-Webster's Intermediate Thesaurus (5-8) 052972 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.95 13.95 The Synonym Finder (5-AD) A massive 1,361-page tome which includes more than 1,500,000 words. At our house, this 3 1/4 pound reference comes in handy all year as the children use it for their schoolwork, but gets a real workout when we're writing descriptions for our catalog. Paperback. 004017 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.99 13.25 American Heritage Student Thesaurus (7-10) Find the right words to say exactly what you mean! More complete than the Children's Thesaurus, this reference contains 6,000 entries and over 70,000 synonyms. Each entry includes a list of related words followed by an example sentence. Many, but not all, entries also have antonym lists. Hc, 378 pgs. ~ Anh 013346 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.95 13.45

to synonyms or other words that do. There are also some sample sentences with selected words. An introduction and explanatory section is found at the beginning of the book. This inexpensive reference is indispensable to writers of all types. Find the right word to convey (impart, spread, transfer, transfuse, transit) the right meaning. Please note that this is a secular reference and does contain several profanities, which you may want to mark over before handing to your younger writers. Pb, 772 pgs. ~ Alissa 035556 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.99 5.45 Webster's Notebook Thesaurus (7-AD) With 50,000 synonyms and antonyms, this thesaurus is three-hole punched to fit into your binder or notebook. The entries are organized alphabetically for easy lookups, and the beginning of the book contains a brief history of the English language. 76 pgs, pb. ~ Lisa 027776 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.95 4.75

American Heritage Essential Student Thesaurus 3rd ed. (3-5) Abraham Lincoln was awesome. He did awesome things for America. His wife was awesome too. Students often use the same words again and again. It may be a lack of creativity or maybe they just need a thesaurus. This abbreviated version will help students find synonyms for overused words like awesome and expand their vocabularies at the same time. An index in the back is helpful too for getting kids a starting point. Older kids should still use the full version since it has many more words they need to learn for essays and exams. This version is a good starter tool for young writers. 90 pgs, pb. ~ Sara 052795 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.95 5.95 McGraw-Hill Children's Thesaurus (3-7) Need to find words that are similar, alike, equivalent, the same, akin? The best place is in a thesaurus. This one is color-coded, topically indexed, and full of color illustrations - young readers and writers should find this very friendly to use. Each word entry is structured the same way, telling what part of speech the word is, giving the definition for the word, using the word in a sentence, and then giving the synonyms for the word (this will repeat for each different definition of the word). Antonyms are given at the end of each applicable entry. An index of topics helps children find words that are related within a more broad subject, such as everyday life, history and culture, the physical world, the economy, and six others. This resource is well worth owning, having, possessing, retaining.... ~ Zach 022466 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.95 13.95 American Heritage Children's Thesaurus (3-7) Specially designed to help kids decide which synonym is the "best" choice for their sentence! Each entry word is followed by close substitu-

Merriam-Webster's School Thesaurus (9-12) This thesaurus is simply arranged in alphabetical order of main entries and secondary entries for locating words quickly. It contains over 157,000 synonyms, antonyms, idiomatic phrases, and related and contrasted words to help students select exactly the right word for their purpose. Concise definitions and usage examples are given for each main entry to aid Rogets II: New Thesaurus, Expanded Ed. (7+) word selection and build vocabulary compreA basic, thorough, and inexpensive thesaurus hension. Hardcover, 704 pgs. for all your word-finding needs. This expanded 012591 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.95 11.95 edition lists 35,000 synonyms with definitions and examples of usage. Alphabetically arranged Merriam-Webster's Collegiate Thesaurus 2ED and cross-referenced, this thesaurus is based (9-AD) on the American Heritage Dictionary of the A wonderful companion to Merriam-Webster's English Language. Concise definitions accom- Collegiate Dictionary. This thesaurus is arranged pany entries. An index is also included, with alphabetically, with finger indents marking categories of words and words with opposite where each letter(s) start so you can easily flip meanings listed. 538 pgs, pb. ~ Rachel to the right spot. Concise definitions accom004004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.99 5.25 pany the entries to help you choose the best words, and verbal illustrations provide examples Roget's International Thesaurus (7-AD) of word usage. This thesaurus contains more With this puppy on your shelf, you'll never than 275,000 word choices, examples, and be at a loss for words. Actually, this is way explanations, plus synonyms, antonyms, near beyond the puppy level - 1,072 categories with antonyms, related words, and idioms to ensure more than 325,000 words and phrases. This is you find the best word choice. Note: contains a big book, so let me describe it a little. There some inappropriate language. 1162 pgs, hc. are two parts to the book - the first half of the 012587 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.95 14.95 book is arranged by category; the second half is an index. The index is used to find a different General References meaning of the word you are looking up, which then refers you to the category where you will National Geographic Kids Alamanc 2013 find a whole paragraph of synonyms and related (3-7) words. The categories are further arranged by 051352 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.99 10.95 parts of speech: e.g. words related to that one word are divided into nouns, verbs, adjectives, World Almanac & Book of Facts (6-AD) and adverbs for easier use. It's a 1,282-page, While trips to the library are needed for paperback book which may require two hands research and reference, some basic reference to take down and put back on the shelf, but sources are worth purchasing since they are when its Roget's, you know it's had more than used so often. This is one such reference. 200 years of polishing and refining. Note: con- Updated yearly, it contains information about tains some inappropriate language. ~ Zach the state of the world that is invaluable in writ029090 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.99 12.95 ing reports, doing research, or just for browsing. Among the wealth of topics presented are ecoMerriam-Webster Thesaurus New Ed. (7-AD) nomics, crime, health, science and technology, More than 150,000 words start with a basic consumer information, government, U.S. facts definition followed by synonyms, related words, and history, U.S. city populations, world history near antonyms, and antonyms. While not all and culture, sports highlights and much more. words contain each of these, they will refer 004467 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.99 9.50 English / Writing 343

See page vi for key to Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act warning labels.

Information

85 pages

Find more like this

Report File (DMCA)

Our content is added by our users. We aim to remove reported files within 1 working day. Please use this link to notify us:

Report this file as copyright or inappropriate

73382


You might also be interested in

BETA